Home

R&S RTM2 User Manual

1. gasnn Command Reference n Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt IdentifierType gt ANY B11 B29 ANY No length specified for example for triggering on data only Usage Query only BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt IDValue Returns the decimal address value of the specified frame Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt IdentifierValue gt Decimal value Usage Query only BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt BSEPosition Returns the position of the bit stuffing error in the specified frame if available Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt ErrorPosition gt RST 0 Default unit s Usage Query only BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt BCOunt Returns the number of data bytes in the specified frame Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n 3 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 416 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control es ee Command Reference Return values lt ByteCount gt Number of words bytes Usage Query only BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt o gt STATe Returns the state of the specified data byte Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus n E Selects the frame 1 n lt o gt
2. r T Automatic Measurements 6 3 1 3 Statistics For each active measurement you can enable a statistic evaluation of the measurement results It returns the current minimum and maximum measurement values the average and standard deviation and the number of measured waveforms For configuration settings see Statistic on page 96 Actual Minimum Maximum Average Deviation Statistic Remote command e MEASurement lt m gt RESult ACTual on page 340 ul e MEASurement lt m gt RESult AVG on page 343 ul e MEASurement lt m gt RESult STDDev on page 343 e MEASurement lt m gt RESult NPEak on page 344 e MEASurement lt m gt RESult PPEak on page 344 2 2 2 HD 20 UE e MEASurement lt m gt RESult WFMCount on page 344 e MEASurement m STATistics VALue ALL on page 344 e MEASurement lt m gt STATistics VALue lt n gt on page 345 6 3 2 Configuring and Performing Automatic Measurements To configure and activate automatic measurements 1 Press the MEAS key 2 Press Meas Place to select one of the four measurement positions 3 Press Meas Type to select the type of measurement to perform The type deter mines which results are displayed in the result table See also Meas Type on page 95 4 Press Source to select the waveform for which the measurement is to be performed The source
3. amp User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 237 R amp S RTM20xx General Instrument Setup LO e a Reference for Setup Interface Update Some interfaces are provided with their own instrument independant firmware This interface firmware can also be updated The currently installed firmware version is dis played as well as all available update versions if a USB flash drive containing an update is identified The instrument is only updated when you press Execute Note You should update the interface firmware in regular intervals to take advantage of new functions and solve possible problems Execute Interface Update The interface firmware is updated Upgrade Update Provides functions to activate options Read keys from license file Upgrade Update Select the storage and directory where your license file is stored and press Load to activate the options Input key manually Upgrade Update Opens the on screen keyboard to enter the license key of the option Printer Opens a menu to configure the output on the printer paper format orientation color and printer language The printer has to be connected to a Type A USB port For details see chapter 13 1 2 Printer Settings on page 216 Sound Defines the event types for which a sound is to be generated by the instrument Switch the sound for a particular event type on or of
4. P e l Command Reference Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative RST POS Example chapter 15 3 2 1 Searching for a Pulse of Specified Width on page 460 Firmware Software FW 03 400 SEARch TRIGger WIDTh LEVel Level Sets the voltage level on which the pulse width is measured Parameters Level RST 500 mV Firmware Software FW 03 400 SEARch TRIGger WIDTh LEVel DELTa lt DeltaLevel gt Sets a hysteresis range above and below the search level to avoid unwanted search results caused by noise oscillation around the level Parameters lt DeltaLevel gt Range Lower limit depends on vertical scale and other set tings no upper limit RST 200 mV Firmware Software FW 03 400 SEARch TRIGger WIDTh RANGe Range Sets how the measured pulse width is compared with the given limit s To set the width use SEARch TRIGger WIDTh WIDTh To set the range At use SEARch TRIGger WIDTh DELTa Parameters Range WITHin OUTSide SHORter LONGer WITHin Finds pulses inside the range width At OUTSide Finds pulses outside the range width x At SHORter Finds pulses shorter than the given width LONGer Finds pulses longer than the given width RST WITH Example chapter 15 3 2 1 Searching for a Pulse of Specified Width on page 460 E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 363 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control 15 2 12 4 Command Reference
5. H a O 4 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 132 R amp S RTM20xx Search Search Conditions and Results TB 1ms T 1 16 ms iu Auto CH1 835 2m DC Real Time Complete Search Event Table CH1 Edge Positive 4 000006 ns 520000 ys gt 3 Search results 6 10 17 5 Events 17 5 Mark events Track event aa Clear all event table TTUN event marks Fig 10 1 Results of an edge search with R amp S RTM 1 Search results 2 Marked search results 3 Selected search result 4 Search conditions 5 Number of results scope of results displayed in the results table 6 Result values result number time value optional value depending on the search type voltage width Remote commands on page 374 RES on page 373 RES on page 373 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 133 R amp S RTM20xx Search Configuring and Performing Searches 10 2 Configuring and Performing Searches To configure and start a search Prerequisite Signal acquisition reference or math waveform is configured 1 Press the SEARCH key The Search menu opens and the search is enabled 2 Press Source and select the waveform for analysis All active channel math and reference waveforms are available for selection 3 Press Search type and select the event you want to search for edge width peaks runts specified rise fall time setup hold time pattern or pr
6. Position Meaning Example 1 XStart in s 9 477E 008 94 77 ns 2 XStop in s 9 477E 008 94 77 ns 3 Record length of the waveform in Samples 200000 4 Number of values per sample interval usually 1 1 Suffix m 1 4 Selects the math waveform Return values Header Comma separated value list Example 9 477E 008 9 477E 008 200000 1 Usage Query only FFT To define an FFT for a channel waveform use CALC MATH EXPR FFTMAG CHx CALCulate MATH M gt FFT WINDOW TY PE iis cscecccccssssacceccedenteascceecdcrsaseaccentucestanasanecdennaee 349 CAL CulateMATHm AhRlThmetices essen nnne nnn nnn nine sarei 349 CALC late MATH msFFTAVERage COUNE a alioli detener NENNEN 350 CAL CulateMATHms PET MAGNtude GCAle enhn enne 350 CALCulate MATH m FFT BANDwidth RESolution ADJusted esses 351 CALCulate MATH m FFT BANDwidth RESolution AUTO esses 351 CALCulate MATH m FFT BANDwidth RESolution RATio sees 351 CALCulate MATH m FFT BANDwidth RESolution VALue eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 352 CALCulate MATH m FFT CFRequency sisse eene nennen nen nennen nares 352 CALCulate MAT HamecFF TEE keep eise 352 GALOGulate MATHSm FETISPANL esee tani soma nu ua ata i nao manua nnn pa did 352 CALCulate MATH m FF T STARE 1 ieeeee ec ieei eee nana no nianu dace nana su ane ERR a ceca naci
7. e FORMat DATA on page 278 e CHANnel lt m gt DATA XINCrement on page 280 e CHANnel lt m gt DATA XORigin on page 279 e CHANnel lt m gt DATA YINCrement on page 280 e CHANnel m DATA YORigin on page 280 e CHANnel lt m gt DATA YRESolution on page 281 e CHANnel lt m gt DATA ENVelope XINCrement on page 280 e CHANnel lt m gt DATA ENVelope XORigin on page 279 e CHANnel lt m gt DATA ENVelope YINCrement on page 280 e CHANnel lt m gt DATA ENVelope YORigin on page 280 e CHANnel lt m gt DATA ENVelope YRESolution on page 281 GHANTME lt MADATAZ E 293 GHANnhel m DATAIMERADOF uui crece ciz emeret ad aa 294 CHANnelems DATA ENVelope cc 2 x read lat aid 294 CH ANnekcmz DATAENVelope HE Aer 294 GHANnels ma DATA PON IS scsciccticsancacctsiadsaaccedecceassvaccacvecchissdseud add dada dida 295 CHANnel lt m gt DATA Returns the data of the channel waveform points for transmission from the instrument to the controlling computer The waveforms data can be used in MATLAB for example To set the export format use FORMat DATA on page 278 To set the range of samples to be returned use CHANne1 lt m gt DATA For envelope waveforms use the CHANne1 lt m gt DATA ENVelope command Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Return values lt Data gt List of values according to the format settings the voltages of recorded waveform sa
8. MU 80 PP E E E 80 GOU nieni a aaa aa a a a a e 80 STEEN 80 Eeer 80 BIEL TAU E EN PR e aa a aa ae Aaa NER 81 RISE TIME inan a a a aa aaa a A aAa 81 EE Eed EN Grost EE EN Voltage Sets two horizontal cursor lines and measures the voltages at the two cursor positions and the delta of the two values EN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 79 R amp S RTM20xx Measurements BEES Cursor Measurements Results V1 V2 AV Time Sets two vertical cursor lines and measures the time from the trigger point to each cursor point the time between the two cursors and the frequency calculated from that time Results t1 t2 At 1 t Voltage amp Time Combines the Voltage cursor and Time cursor measurements Two horizontal and two vertical cursor lines are set and the voltages and time from the trigger point are measured at the cursor positions as well as the delta of the voltage and time values Results t1 t2 At V1 V2 AV Ratio X Provides three cursors and measures the ratio of the x values e g a duty cycle between the first and second cursors and the first and third cursors x2 x1 x3 x1 The ratio is displayed as a floating value in percent in degrees and as a radian Results abs 96 Tr Ratio Y Provides three cursors and measures the ratio of the y values e g overshooting between the first and second cursors and the first and third cursors y2 y1 y3 y1 The ratio is displayed as a f
9. 232 Loading ez P 130 Menu C 128 results we 122 save and load we 122 Saving wee 125 Testing s 128 TEST TESUITS 122 Masks Test Off eene SA User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 MATH MENU eC O 101 Mathematics CONMMQUIMNG e Tc 98 edquatlon selts occorre ata 100 FFT D A O 101 Math waveforms displaying MAX E IMG IEEE Mean Cycle Mean Value Meas e 95 Meas Type e automatic measurement remote 336 cursor measurement ses essen 78 Measure wee 95 le 336 Measurement ACUVAINO E 95 activating remote 1 0 0 eects ceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeteeeees 336 Measurements Amplitude od ende recette ele t nut 87 Base level E 87 Delay Duty Cycle viii A O Frequency A Mean Cycle visitara Mean value RMS GyCl iiit net RMS value nitet notet rein Time is Topllevel EE Trigger frequency A and B trigger 87 Trigger period A and B trigger I ME cM P Moll e Measurement types ze Memory depth uu edere iere eld Memon AT EE Menu Off Cio E EE 235 Menus ACQUISIUION EE A tei ineo entr Setup instrument e ZOOM e Eii Messages instrument responses ssssssses 249 Micro button rre teet reris
10. M 119 Z Zoom Main Time Base oooccnnnncnicccocoooooonnnnncnonnnnnnononanonos 70 120 MEDU EE 69 Zoom Off coc e 71 Zoom Time cni c MR 70 Zoom Time Base coc m 70 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 484
11. Return value 1 byte 110XXXXX TRIGger A I2C PLENgth lt PatternLength gt Defines how many bytes are considered in the trigger condition To set the pattern for these bytes use TRIGger A I2C PATTern Parameters lt PatternLength gt Number of bytes Range 1 to 3 Increment 1 RST 1 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 391 Command Reference TRIGger A I2C POFFset lt PatternByteOffset gt Sets the number of bytes before the first byte of interest relating to the end of the address bytes Parameters lt PatternByteOffset gt Number of ignored bytes Range 0 to 4095 Increment 1 RST 0 FC Decode Results ER E PC UIE EE 392 BUSSBS I2C FRAMES RRE E 392 Se E ECH KREE 393 BUS lt bp gt 2C FRAMe lt n gt STARU ionis exuere aida 393 BUS ENN HEI 394 BUS sb I2C FRAMesri AACCOSS se seceee cate seqve dese akon e ci sn ya Resa e o aaa Nn d gn ade gma ed dA RO 394 BUS lt b gt 12C FRAMe lt n gt ACCeSS Po oocccoconccooonnnononononnnononnnonnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnannnnnnnannns 394 BUSspeDCTEFRAMesm ACONMUpletey 1 5 en acd ecae can ace a daniela 395 BUSspsd2c FRAMespnsJADBSIGN EE 395 BUS b I2C FRAMesn ADDRGSS eiie aiiens entia nna aeu n aqua qaaa n ana dede Aani iEn 395 BUlG bs GCFhRAMe nz ADEVice 396 BUSsbsI2Cc ERAMesnssAMGOIDSS 3 ioe deed a e RE lids 396 BUS sbs I2C FRAMesHmP ASTafE oiii erento eene titius nn audax e gas q ue SSES gege 396 EJUS bsHI2CTEI
12. RR E ee EE TRIGger EXTerm COUPlihng occiderent etri EE HERE Lee boe qn 303 TRIG GSP OUT MOD Beige T ria a aos 450 TRIGG OUT Ee E 451 TRlGoer OUT POL arttv ee eeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeessecaeeeaeeaeeeaecaeeseesaeseaecaeseeseesaeeseesieeeaeeaeesaeeaeseaesaeseneeaeeaees 451 TS TampiAC TEE 321 TSTamp CLEar TTM NE EE TS Tamp PREVIOUS ete 321 TStamp S ET RE 321 R amp S9RTM20xx Index Index Symbols SOPO ERR 260 WAL AEE S AT 260 A Acquisition Limited number lee set number of a Start and stop si He VE Acquisition ue Actions Mask VidlatiOn ocacion 130 Active probe differential icono little Micro Button e VE ProbeMeter Settings EE ADC Sample rate eadeni dese 12 ADC Samples 5 2 aic titio dele eee 12 Alignment lu TEE 239 Amplitude Asynchronuous commands sse 259 Attenuation probe Automatic measurements E D Remote Control aL ee anadan Siu EE Auxiliary cursors GISPIAYING EE 55 Gul ITE 60 le 24 B Backlight intensity esses 58 Bandwidth 30 instrument 12 probe 12 Base level 87 BIN eec ned ives eae hens ied io 228 Bits Bit lines display 150 Boolean parameters 256 Brightness DD B Irlgget 2 coro eite Dare ipea deed petu 42 Burst Width ionerne ee dae erret pd ege 78 87 Bus Display M es 150 Buses L
13. Hold Off T Trigger Level Source Tem B Setup Del N a e CS To set the trigger offset use the horizontal POSITION rotary knob see POSITION on page 23 beleet bi EE 41 c 41 So H 41 o9 m A 42 leie PETS 42 il EE 42 TAG GSI T 42 Trigger Type Selects the trigger type For details see chapter 3 3 2 3 Edge on page 43 chapter 3 3 2 4 Width on page 45 chapter 3 3 2 5 Video on page 46 chapter 3 3 2 6 Pattern on page 48 chapter 3 3 2 7 Rise Time Fall Time on page 50 chapter 3 3 2 8 Protocol on page 52 Remote command TRIGger A TYPE on page 303 Setup Opens the setup menu for the selected trigger type Source Opens the Trigger Source menu for the selected trigger type p e 3 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 41 R amp S RTM20xx Triggers EH Reference for Triggers See chapter 3 3 2 2 Trigger Source Settings on page 42 Remote command TRIGger A SOURce on page 303 Hold Off Enables the holdoff and defines the holdoff time The next trigger occurs only after the holdoff time has passed The trigger holdoff defines when the next trigger after the current will be recognized Thus it affects the next trigger to occur
14. PTR bit 0 the EVENt bit is not set This part can be written into and read as required Its contents are not affected by reading The Negative TRansition part also acts as a transition filter When a bit of the CONDi tion part is changed from 1 to 0 the associated NTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1 NTR bit 71 the EVENt bit is set NTR bit 0 the EVENt bit is not set N User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 262 R amp S9RTM20xx Remote Control 15 1 6 2 Basics This part can be written into and read as required Its contents are not affected by reading EVENt The EVENt part indicates whether an event has occurred since the last reading it is the memory of the condition part It only indicates events passed on by the transition filters It is permanently updated by the instrument This part can only be read by the user Reading the register clears it This part is often equated with the entire register ENABle The ENAB1e part determines whether the associated EVENt bit contributes to the sum bit see below Each bit of the EVENt part is ANDed with the associated ENAB Le bit symbol amp The results of all logical operations of this part are passed on to the sum bit via an OR function symbol ENAB1e bit 0 the associated EVENt bit does not contribute to the sum bit ENAB Le bit 1 if the associated EVENt bit is
15. TRIGger A RIS6tiMe RANGE cia earna REAU e aaae TARU a aE aiaa a aaa a Eada Sia keai TRiGger A R ISetime SLOP Cx e oret reete er rai de E dE Po Rx ewe F Da cda ege EE TRIGger ARISetime TEE TRIGJETA SOW e TIRIGger A SOURGEIUARM KEE TRIGJEr A SPEMODE aiian TRIGger A SPI PATTern TRIGger A SPI PLENgth RR IER ele GE EE TRIGIS EE FIERO E Ie BABERE TRIGger ACTV POLarily ci eee eon ed ee d E eee dada a eg o uia e voce ueste ddp Re pe RR a TRlGoer ATV STANdard nennen nente treni rennen rennen nrenn neret etre e nne Nee pic aa TRIGger A DART MODE Eegeregie TRIGger A UART PATTern UenrpeidpiB iumM M TRIGger AcUART POFFS6Lt e e A aa TRIGger AWIDTh DELTa p TRIGOer A WIDTh PObLarily ttt rt ia TRIGgJERA WIDTA RAN Gi ERA lt lt lt 2 55 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 474 TRIGISFAWIDTA WIDTR s a doter eege An rentre aleeden ege se 306 TRIGOer B DEltay riti A AAA e Eee da EE d E ERE 313 TRIGger B EDGE SLOP2e ne tege a 312 TRIGOer B ENABIOe x cere tae dau Pad da ee vt ed Pe pdt a E pc 312 TRIG ger B EVENUECOUNE mL 313 bers TRIGger B HYSTeresis gilenreiBlu WER IGG STE MOD s
16. Results ais Rise Fall TIME iare rrr rt tremens 139 iU E E EN Types Se WVU EE Self aligniment etre 239 274 Selftest Ic cM P 277 Sequential commands ess 259 Service request SRQ eene 265 270 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 R amp S9RTM20xx Index Service request enable zt Service request enable register SRE d ge Setting commands Settings Taurum 226 Instrument default sssssssssssssss 227 Set To Screen o Set to Wave ici cee rr dis Setup menu instrument setup sse 234 SETUP trigger oie cci creer 40 Setup LADO iii 226 SIGNAL OFF tree rn noh t rebote Rea 28 Slope Edge trigger ir rine repente 43 SLOPE Smoothed waveform sss 24 Softkeys inq M IMHZ m M Active SSP EE Attenuation factor Se e Bandwidth gegen eut zestecbedug ida Change directory Color MOJE siii traia eee rette 216 231 Command Set printer sess 217 Comment ep Constant Control BG6pi WEE 238 Coupling Create directory cooooooocccccnncccoconocconononnnccnnnnnanananrnccnn 222 Dala ERE Date amp Time i Dry Decimal Point iiia re dene Decimation Mode Ss NEU tri encre tH reet Deskew Destination
17. Suffix lt m gt 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Return values lt Delta gt Range 1 00E 026 to 1 00E 026 Increment 0 1 RST 0 Default unit s User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 332 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control ee Command Reference Usage Query only CURSor lt m gt YDELta SLOPe Returns the inverse value of the voltage difference the reciprocal of the vertical distance of two horizontal cursor lines 1 AV Suffix lt m gt 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Return values lt DeltyYslope gt Inverse value Usage Query only CURSor lt m gt YDELta VALue Queries the delta of the values in y direction at the two cursors Suffix lt m gt 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Return values lt DeltaY gt Delta value in V Usage Query only CURsor lt m gt XRATio UNIT Unit Sets the unit for X Ratio measurements with CURSor lt m gt XRATio VALue Suffix lt m gt 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Parameters lt Unit gt RATio PCT GRD PI RATio floating value PCT percent GRD degree PI radian RST RAT CURSor lt m gt XRATio VALue Returns the ratio of the x values e g a duty cycle between the first and second cursors and the first and third cursors x2 x1 x3 x1 Set the unit of the result with CURsor m XRATio UNIT ERA SSS User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 333 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control
18. e B YJ User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 7T R amp S RTM20xx Measurements Cursor Measurements 6 Measurements The following measurement methods are available e CURSOR Cursor measurements determine specific measurement results at the current cursor positions of an active waveform the results are displayed in a result table e QUICK MEAS performs basic automatic measurements for the selected channel immediately the results are displayed directly at the waveform and in a result table e MEAS With automatic measurements up to four amplitude and time measurements or pulse counts can be configured and performed simultaneously based on an active channel reference or math waveforms The results are displayed in a result table the color of the results corresponds with the source waveform color These meas urements can be performed together with the Quick Meas measurements Use the full height of the screen for waveform display to get best vertical resolution and measurement results 6 1 Cursor Measurements Using the CURSOR key you can determine specific measurement results at the current cursor positions for various waveforms The cursors can be set to the required position with the Navigation rotary knob or set to typical positions on a keypress You can measure on any active channel math or refe
19. 01 380 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BREET Command Reference TRIGger A SPI PLENgth lt PatternLength gt Returns the number of bits in the previously defined bit pattern TRIGger A SPI PATTern The command can also be used to shorten a previously defined bit pattern Parameters lt PatternLength gt Range 1 to 32 Increment 1 RST 4 Example TRIG A SPI PATT 0011XXXX0110 TRIG A SPI PLEN 12 TRIG A SPI PLEN 4 TRIG A SPI PATT gori TRIGger A SPI POFFset lt PatternBitOffset gt Sets the number of bits before the first bit of the pattern Parameters lt PatternBitOffset gt Number of ignored bits Range 0 to 4095 Increment 1 RST 0 SPI Decode Results BUSS E e 381 BUS lt B SPEFRAMESA 2S SUA EE 382 BUS lt b gt SPIFF RAMESH HS TAR EE 382 BUSSD SPEFRAMESmISSSTOPBT EE 382 BUS lt b gt SPI FRAME lt n gt DATA MOSI cccsccecscceeseteecstercuteecuteucueeecueeeegeeeegetengetensetenens 383 BUS lt sb gt SPIEFRAMESn DATAIMISO oa 383 BUSspsSPIFRAMESmneWOOUIS en Sege rr ee eee 383 BUS sb SPEFRAMEsn WORD Oo STARU arescce c exas aca an toan inu n numum ua nean unnm nu te aam nina 384 BUSsb SPEIFRAMESn s WORDOPISTOPBO3 2 nieto thc ra opua ek ai Rh edi aD ndr RR adea 384 BUS lt b gt SPEERAMESsneSWORDSOSSMOSI ceste iaa 385 BUSSDSSPIFRAMESmnsWORDSOSIMES Q EE 385 BUS lt b gt SPI FCOunt Returns the number of decoded frames Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects t
20. Suffix lt b gt lt n gt lt o gt Return values lt StartTime gt Usage 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Selects the frame Selects the word number Range depends on sample rate record length and time base Increment depends on the time base Default unit s Query only BUS lt b gt SPI FRAME lt n gt WORD lt o gt STOP Returns the end time of the specified data word Suffix lt b gt lt n gt lt o gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Selects the frame Selects the word number User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 384 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control aT a MMMM Command Reference Return values lt StopTime gt Range depends on sample rate record length and time base Increment depends on the time base Default unit s Usage Query only BUS lt b gt SPI FRAME lt n gt WORD lt o gt MOSI Returns the data value of the specified word on the MOSI line Use this command if only one line is defined Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines lt n gt il Selects the frame 1 n o Selects the word number 1 m Return values Data Decimal value of the data word Usage Query only BUS lt b gt SPI FRAME lt n gt WORD lt o gt MISO Returns the data value of the specified word on the opti
21. Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para evitar en lo posible lesiones o da os por peligros de toda clase Por eso es imprescindible leer detalladamente y comprender por completo las siguientes informaciones de seguridad antes de usar el producto y respetarlas durante el uso del producto Deber n tenerse en cuenta todas las dem s informaciones de seguridad como p ej las referentes a la protecci n de personas que encontrar n en el cap tulo correspondiente de la documentaci n del producto y que tambi n son de obligado cumplimiento En las presentes informaciones de seguridad se recogen todos los objetos que distribuye el grupo de empresas Rohde amp Schwarz bajo la denominaci n de producto entre ellos tambi n aparatos instalaciones as como toda clase de accesorios Los datos espec ficos del producto figuran en la hoja de datos y en la documentaci n del producto Se alizaci n de seguridad de los productos Las siguientes se ales de seguridad se utilizan en los productos para advertir sobre riesgos y peligros S mbolo Significado S mbolo Significado Aviso punto de peligro general Q Tensi n de alimentaci n de PUESTA EN 2L MARCHA PARADA Observar la documentaci n del producto Atenci n en el manejo de dispositivos de peso Ch Indicaci n de estado de espera standby elevado Peligro de choque el ctrico ao Corriente continua DC d Advertencia superficie caliente Pap Corrie
22. e VXI 11 protocol a protocol that has been specifically developed for test and mea surement instruments It is the recommended protocol for remote control via LAN e Raw socket mode a synchronous streaming oriented protocol Consequently raw Socket communication does not support asynchronous events like Service Request SRQ or Device Clear DCL See also chapter 15 1 2 Setting Up a LAN Connection on page 243 VXI 11 Protocol The VXI 11 standard is based on the ONC RPC Open Network Computing Remote Procedure Call protocol which in turn relies on TCP IP as the network transport layer The TCP IP network protocol and the associated network services are preconfigured TCP IP ensures connection oriented communication where the order of the exchanged messages is adhered to and interrupted links are identified With this protocol messages cannot be lost 15 1 1 2 USB Interface For remote control via the USB connection the PC and the instrument must be connected via the USB type B interface The USB connection requires the VISA library and the USB driver to be installed VISA detects the R amp S instrument at the assigned serial port when the USB connection is established You do not have to enter an address string Contact your Rohde amp Schwarz service center to get the USB driver 15 1 1 3 GPIB Interface IEC IEEE Bus Interface The GBIP interface is optional option RTM B 10 It replaces the LAN USB type B inter f
23. 01 431 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BEES Command Reference E HAH bel e E 434 SEARCH PRO TOCA LIN DCONOMON BEE 434 SEARGHIPROTOCOMUING DATA E 434 SEARch PROTocol LIN CONDition lt SearchCondition gt Sets the event or combination of events to be searched for Depending on the selected event further settings are required Parameters lt SearchCondition gt FRAMe ERRor IDENtifier IDData IDERror FRAMe Search for a frame type Set the frame type with SEARch PROTocol LIN FRAMe ERRor Search for errors of one or more error types Set the error types with SEARch PROTocol LIN CHKSerror SEARch PROTocol LIN IPERror and SEARch PROTocol LIN SYEREFTOEF IDENtifier Search for identifier Specifiy the identifier with SEARch PROTocol LIN ICONdition and SEARch PROTocOol LIN IDENtifier IDData Search for identifier and data Set the identifier see IDENtifier and the data with SEARch PROTocol LIN DLENgth SEARch PROTocOl LIN DCONdition and SEARch PROTocol1 LIN DATA IDERror Search for errors that occur with a specified identifier Set the identifier see IDENtifier and the errors to be found see ERRor RST FRAM SEARch PROTocol LIN FRAMe Frame Selects the frame type to be searched for The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol LIN CONDition is set to FRAMe Parameters Frame SOF WAKeup SOF start of f
24. 11 Set the Idle Time between two frames p lt lt V B User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 176 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis UART RS 232 Interface Option R amp S RTM K2 Idle Time 8 Bit Stop Bits 1 5 Start Bit Parity Bit Odd Source RX CH1 1 4V Active Low TX CH2 1 4 Y Active Low Bit rate 19 2kBit s Idle Time 52 08 us 12 Press Find level or set the threshold manually for each channel See To set the logic threshold for analog channels on page 148 Now you can disply the decoded signal and the frame table with results The display of the decoded data is described in To configure decoding and data dis play on page 149 11 4 2 2 UART Configuration Settings Access PROTOCOL gt Bus type UART Configuration Configuration Data Source Dan SOUR EE 177 POU EE 178 Pa e aaah Mane 178 SHOP EE 178 ele 178 EE 178 lde Ri EE 178 oe BI 179 Data Source Select the input channels of the data line If the MSO option R amp S RTM B1 is installed digital channels can also be used as source Remote command BUS lt b gt UART DATA SOURce on page O EE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 177 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis a a Hun UART RS 232 Interface Option R amp S RTM K2 Active Defines the logic levels of the bus The idle state corresponds to a logic 1 and the start bit to a logic 0 Active high high 1
25. 297 PROBe lt m gt SETup BANDWIGHH ovio 297 PROBe lt m gt SETup CAPacitance 298 PROBe sm SETUp DEOF ISO EE 298 PROBe m gt SETUPIMPedance iii tc 298 PROBesm gt SETUp MODE cuidada ever eve reg rd exe en p RS 299 PROBesm SETup NAME e rut dida 299 PROBe lt m gt SETUp OF e EE 299 PROBe lt m gt SETup TYPE 299 le TA N I H el E E 200 REFCurve lt m gt DATA HEADO 4 O nennen nennen R RR RR intentis nnn reise nnnti sinn rnss rst rnnr sen nent nsn 325 REFCurve lt m gt DATA XINCrementO A 280 REFCurvesmeDATA ele KEE 279 REFCurvesm gt DATA YINGKe Ment ie ccsccacseccacesecencesetneyaccassieaenasecnctesances dd 280 REFCurve lt m gt DATA YORigin 280 REFCurve m DATA YRESoOIlution sess nennen nennen nennen eren ten ne nn naar nnnnanencnnnnns 281 REF CURVE ERR EE chases ETE EORR Erb Era 325 REFGCurvesm HORizontalPOSition 3 e run rsen o add 324 REFGurve m HORIzontal SCALE until Reel 324 REE CURE SIM OAD re T TE REFCurve lt m gt LOAD STATe 2 Diss mz H lee Ee EE eine MME KEE 323 REFG lvesm STATG iia p TE OE EP ra ie DP ee rte US Pa 322 REFCurvesm gt UPDate ciiin eR ti tea nt nee ri eit ehe ede re heil ct dE EE boe dee Ere aie 323 REFCurve lt m gt VERTical POSition 325 REFGurvesm WERTicalSCALe tiir rr rere OR ld ENEE Ee Eege 325 REF Level RE ativeLOwWer nennen ihnen ran nnns intenti sein nnr s
26. Boo N Press the softkey of the required trigger condition Frame Start begin of the message Frame End message end Bit lt x gt a specified bit inside the message Ser Pattern a bit pattern in the message 5 If Bit lt x gt is selected enter the bit number 6 If Ser Pattern is selected press the softkey again and define the pattern a Setthe Bit Offset the number of bits before the pattern starts b Setthe Number of Bits contained in the pattern c Enter the pattern either as binary input or as hexadecimal input e For binary input press Select Bit and enter the bit number to be set The bits are counted from the message start the selected bit is highlighted in the pattern bit line Then enter the State of this bit 0 1 or X don t care Repeat these settings until all bit states are defined e For hexadecimal input press Select Nibble and select the four bits half byte to be set The selected nibble is highlighted in the lower pattern line Then press Value and turn the navigation knob to change the bits Repeat these settings until all nibbles are defined ERREUR REO EE T e e e L LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLALLAAAALLLLLUUOLZLSLM g User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 159 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis SPI SSPI Bus Option R amp S RTM K1 Trigger On Ser Pattern CS CH1 Clock CH2 MOSI CH3 MISO CH1 ENS an Bit Bit 2 Bit 13 1st Bit after CS First Last pattern
27. CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT STOP lt StopFreq gt Defines the stop frequency of the displayed frequency domain at the right display edge Center Span 2 You can set start and stop frequency instead of defining a center frequency and span Suffix lt m gt 1 4 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Parameters lt StopFreq gt Range Depends on various other settings mainly on time base span RBW ratio and center frequency Default unit Hz CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT TIME RANGe Defines the width of the time base extract from the Y t window for which the FFT is calculated Parameters lt WindowWidth gt Range depends on the time base Default unit s Firmware Software FW 03 800 ERA SSS aS User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 353 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control 15 2 11 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 Command Reference CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT TIME POSition Defines the position of the time base extract in the Y t window for which the FFT is calculated Parameters lt WindowPosition gt Range depends on the time base and the width of the FFT time base extract Default unit s Firmware Software FW 03 800 CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT SRATe Returns the sample rate of data used in an FFT analysis Return values lt SampleRate gt Default unit Sa s Usage Query only Masks MASK STATO EE 355 MASK TES EE 355 MASK FOAD DEE 355 MASK EE 355 O ee EEN 355 MASKEGH LE 355 MASK VPO SI N EE
28. Firmware Software FW 03 400 SEARch TRIGger WIDTh WIDTh Width Sets the reference pulse width the nominal value for comparisons Parameters Width Default unit s Example chapter 15 3 2 1 Searching for a Pulse of Specified Width on page 460 Firmware Software FW 03 400 SEARch TRIGger WIDTh DELTa lt DeltaWidth gt Sets a range At to the reference pulse width set with SEARch TRIGger WIDTh WIDTh if SEARch TRIGger WIDTh RANGe is set to WITHin or OUTSide Parameters lt DeltaWidth gt Range Lower limit depends on the resolution practically no upper limit Example chapter 15 3 2 1 Searching for a Pulse of Specified Width on page 460 Firmware Software FW 03 400 Peak Search Configuration SEARCNMEASUT PEAK er ET 364 SEARch MEASure LEVel PEAK MACGhNtude eene nennen nnn nnne nnns 364 SEARch MEASure PEAK POLarity lt Polarity gt Indicates the polarity of a the pulse to be searched for a peak Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative EITHer RST POS Firmware Software FW 03 400 SEARch MEASure LEVel PEAK MAGNitude lt Magnitude gt Sets the amplitude limit Parameters lt Magnitude gt Default unit V Firmware Software FW 03 400 EE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 364 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control EES Command Reference 15 2 12 5 Rise Fall Time Search Configuration SEARCH TRIGO ARIS CUM EE 365 GEAbRch TRilGoerl EVelRlSetmeLOMer cana nana nan nennen 365 SEAReh TRIGg
29. Index V Value rji 108 Vertical POSITION eT TELE 11 Resol 2 1 neri reet erem da 11 i UP 11 Vertical settings Vertical system VISA Address String ooooonocccnnncconociciconacncnnnnnonancnnnanacnnnos 247 Visible toj M 102 softkey remote sisirain 345 V Marker MONTADO e VAI PROlOCOl e 242 W Wait ne 277 Waveform Action on mask violation cccoooccccnncccnonnncconnos 130 Arithmetic its Waveform Intensity esss 58 Waveform Arithmetic sss esses 24 Waveform rate a TO 25 Waveforms FING elt ntn reine eerte Save and load Erie seis Saving to USB flash device 229 softkey Ste SWCD EE 28 Waveform samples sess 12 Wfm Arithmetic FEET gesait eege r 116 toj c M 116 III M 257 Width i re Width trigger S Width A MASKS cerro e dede poete 130 Width Y masks eret beet 129 Window toj M 117 Window type poc 349 X Peer Em 61 Activate 58 configuring 62 XYZ Setup onere o ea eee tines canis we emet anasto 58 Y Y t Setup SOMO ordena 120 Y Position EK eege Eege GE Y Position masks Y Scale E 119 Y Scaling toc 118 YT Window Co cM
30. R amp S RTM20xx Triggers EH Reference for Triggers X Don t care the channel does not affect the trigger If MSO option R amp S RTM B1 is installed the digital channels DO to D15 are available in addition to analog channels If X is set for all channels the oscilloscope triggers only in automatic trigger mode Remote command TRIGger A PATTern SOURce on page 308 Combination Sets the logical combination of the trigger states of the channels And The required states of all channels must appear in the input signal at the same time Or At least one of the channels must have the required state Remote command TRIGger A PATTern FUNCtion on page 309 Trigger On Sets the trigger point depending on the result of the logical combination of the channel states Remote command TRIGger A PATTern CONDition on page 309 Time Limitation In addition to the pattern and the trigger levels you can define a timing condition how e the result of the pattern condition must be true or false a Time t Variation Back KEE 299 8999891 104 __ 104 856us all Duration Enables or disables the time limitation to the pattern state Remote command TRIGger A PATTern MODE on page 309 Comparison Sets how the duration time of the resulting patten state is compared with the given time limit s ti lt t ti gt t Triggers if the pattern state changes before or after the Time t has expired ti t Triggers if t
31. Reference for Search Menu Hold Time Sets the minimum time after the clock edge while the data signal must stay steady above or below the data level The hold time can be negative In this case the hold time ends before the clock edge and the setup time must be positive and longer than the absolute value of the hold time Remote command SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock HTIMe on page 369 Pattern Search The settings for pattern search are provided in two menus in the Setup menu you define the channel states their logical combination and the time range for keeping up the true result of the state pattern condition and in the Source Setup menu you define the threshold levels and hysteresis for each channel Pattern Source Setup Access SEARCH MENU gt Search type Pattern gt Source Setup For pattern search up to four channels can be used as source For each channel the threshold level and the hysteresis can be set individually Pattern Source Hysteresis 200 mY Source Selects the channel for which the pattern search is defined Level Sets the threshold value for the selected source channel If the signal value is higher than the trigger level the signal state is high 1 or true for the boolean logic Otherwise the signal state is considered low 0 or false if the signal value is below the trigger level Remote command SEARch TRIGger PATTern LEVel lt n gt on page 371 Hysteresis Sets a
32. Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters lt ManualAttenuation gt Range 1 to 10000 RST 1 Firmware Software FW 03 700 PROBe lt m gt SETup BANDwidth Queries the bandwidth of the probe Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument N User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 297 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BEES Command Reference Return values lt Bandwidth gt Range 1 00E 006 to 2 00E 009 Increment 10 Default unit Hz Usage Query only PROBe lt m gt SETup CAPacitance Queries the input capacity of the probe Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Return values lt InputCapacitance gt Range 0 1e 12 to 1 0e 9 Increment 1 0e 12 Default unit F Usage Query only PROBe lt m gt SETup DCOFfset Retrieves the DC voltage that is measured by the integrated voltmeter of R amp S active probes Switch the voltmeter on before see PROBe lt m gt SETup OFFSwitch on page 299 Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Return values lt Offset gt Range 1 0e26 to 1 0e 26 Increment 1 00E 003 Default unit V Usage Query only PROBe lt m gt SETup IMPedance Queries the termination of the probe Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels de
33. Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Parameters lt BitsSignals gt ON OFF RST ON BUS lt b gt DSIZe lt DisplaySize gt Sets the height of the decoded bus signal on the sreen Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Parameters lt DisplaySize gt SMALI MEDium LARGe RST MEDium LEE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 375 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control RES Command Reference BUS lt b gt POSition lt Position gt Sets the vertical position of the decoded bus signal in divisions on the sreen Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Parameters lt Position gt Range 4 to 4 Increment 0 02 RST 3 5 Default unit div BUS lt b gt RESult Displays or hides the table of decode results Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Parameters lt ShowResultTable gt ON OFF BUS lt b gt LIST Returns the contents of the frame table in block data format Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Return values lt DataTable gt Block data Usage Query only BUS lt b gt LIST SAVE lt FilePath gt Saves the decoded data frame table to the specified CSV file comma separated list Suffix lt b gt 1 4
34. Track event If enables the selected result is moved to the reference point Thus you can always see the selected event in the diagram LEE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 147 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis Basics of Protocol Analysis 11 Protocol Analysis With the R amp S RTM and some additional options you can analyze the following parallel and serial protocols e SPI Serial Peripheral Interface with 3 lines and SSPI Serial Peripheral Interface with 2 lines requires option R amp S RTM K1 e PC Inter Integrated circuit bus requires option R amp S RTM K1 e UART RS232 EIA 232 serial interface requires option R amp S RTM K2 e CAN Controller Area Network requires option R amp S RTM K3 e LIN Local Interconnect Network requires option R amp S RTM K3 e Audio I2S LJ RJ TDM requires option R amp S RTM K5 11 1 Basics of Protocol Analysis The analysis of serial data consists of three main steps e Protocol configuration Select the protocol type and configure the input line as well as the protocol specific settings e Decoding Configure the display of the decoded data and enable decoding As a result the digitized signal data is displayed on the screen together with the decoded content of the messages You can scale the signal display and zoom into it to see it in more detail You can create and apply label lists for easier identification of the bus nodes on the display e Triggering You c
35. Upper level Sets the upper voltage threshold When the signal crosses this level the rise fall time measurement starts or stops depending on the selected slope Remote command SEARch TRIGger LEVel RISetime UPPer on page 365 Lower level Sets the lower voltage threshold When the signal crosses this level the rise time mea surement starts or stops depending on the selected slope Remote command SEARch TRIGger LEVel RISetime LOWer on page 365 Comparison Sets how the measured rise or fall time is compared with the given limit s Greater than Finds rise fall times longer than the given Rise Fall time Lower than Finds rise fall times shorter than the given Rise Fall time Equal Finds rise fall times equal to the reference Rise Fall time if Varia tion At 0 If Variation O the setting finds rise fall times within the range time At See also Variation Not equal Finds rise fall times unequal to the reference value if Variation At 0 If Variation O the setting finds rise fall times outside the range time At Remote command SEARch TRIGger RISetime RANGe on page 365 Rise Fall time Sets the reference rise or fall time the nominal value for comparisons Remote command SEARch TRIGger RISetime TIME on page 366 EET User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 140 R amp S RTM20xx Search Reference for Search Menu Variation Sets a range At to the reference Rise
36. Using a mask test you can detect limit violations of the measured signal compared to a pre defined mask To perform a mask test 1 2 3 Seet up the waveform as usual Press TOOLS gt Masks Tests to display the Mask Test menu Create a mask or load an existing mask See e chapter 9 2 1 Creating New Masks on page 125 e chapter 9 2 2 Loading Masks on page 127 Press Actions to define what happens when a violation occurs Select one or more of the available actions by pressing the corresponding softkey and define when the action will be executed See Actions on page 130 Press Test to start the mask test EE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 127 R amp S RTM20xx Masks EE Reference for MASKS key The mask test is performed i e the data from the active channel is compared to the mask If the mask limits are exceeded the specified action is taken The overall result is shown in the results table Total 2785 Masks Test ER A mn mmm Masks Test A 4 6 Press Pause to stop testing temporarily without closing the Masks menu Press Pause again to continue the test T Press Masks Test Off to turn off the mask test and exit the Mask menu 9 3 Reference for MASKS key Masks are used for error detection and compliance tests of digital signals You can e run mask tests e configure actions triggered by mask violation e configure new masks based on channel signals
37. 01 68 R amp S RTM20xx Display EE Zoom To configure the zoom area via the rotary knobs Pressing the horizontal SCALE rotary knob moves the focus between the Y t window Time Control the zoom area Zoom Control and the zoom window The currently selected screen area is highlighted and displayed in the information bar of the zoom window Depending on the selection the functions of the SCALE and POSITION rotary knobs may change 1 Press the horizontal SCALE rotary knob to select Zoom Control or Zoom Win dow The functions for the rotary knobs are the same for both elements for very high zoom factors however it may be faster to scroll through with the Zoom Window focus 2 Turn the horizontal SCALE rotary knob counter clockwise to enlarge the zoom area or clockwise to decrease it The zoom diagram and the Z parameter Zoom Time Base in the information bar above it are adapted 3 Turn the horizontal POSITION rotary knob counter clockwise to move the zoom area to the left or clockwise to move it to the right The zoom diagram and the Tz parameter Zoom Time in the information bar above it are adapted The zoom window displays the data in the defined zoom area from the main time base in greater detail To configure the original Y t diagram 1 Press the horizontal SCALE rotary knob to select Time Control the original Y t window 2 Press Main Time Base to define the scaling for the time base in the
38. 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Parameters lt Source gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CHA DO D15 RST CH1 BUS lt b gt SPI CS POLarity lt Polarity gt Selects whether the chip select signal is high active high 1 or low active low 1 Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines ES User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 377 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control A _ AA Q ees Command Reference Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative POSitive high active NEGative low active RST POSitive BUS lt b gt SPI CLOCk SOURce Source Selects the input channel of the clock line Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Parameters Source CH1 CH2 CH3 CHA DO D15 RST CH1 BUS lt b gt SPI CLOCk POLarity lt Polarity gt Selects if data is stored with the rising or falling slope of the clock The slope marks the begin of a new bit Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative POSitive rising slope NEGative falling slope RST NEGative BUS lt b gt SPI DATA SOURce Source Selects the input channel o
39. 15 2 8 2 Command Reference Suffix lt m gt 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Return values lt Ratio gt Numeric value corresponding to the specified unit Usage Query only CURSor lt m gt YRATio UNIT Unit Sets the unit for Y Ratio measurements with CURSor lt m gt YRATio VALue on page 334 Suffix m 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Parameters Unit RATio PCT RATio floating value PCT percent RST RAT CURSor lt m gt YRATio VALue Returns the ratio of the y values e g overshooting between the first and second cursors and the first and third cursors y2 y1 y3 y1 For this measurement set the cursor measurement type CURSor m FUNCtion to HRATio Set the unit of the result with CURSor m YRATio UNIT Suffix m 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Return values Ratio Numeric value corresponding to the specified unit Usage Query only Quick Measurements MEASurement m ALLE STAT cu Irene rne aia 335 MEASUrementM gt AON aaite dad ed din 335 n 335 MEASUrement ii ARES eror ier tete ac 335 LEE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 334 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BEES Command Reference MEASurement lt m gt ALL STATe Starts or stops the quick measurement and sets the status bit Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Firmware Software FW 03 800 MEASurement lt m gt AON Starts the quick measurement Suffix lt m
40. A dE 231 Color AOU EE 231 EE eeh ee ee 232 Format Defines the format of the screenshot file The following formats are available e BMP BitMaP is an uncompressed format files are large and saving might take some time e PNG Portable Network Graphics is a graphic format with lossless data compression Remote command HCOPy LANGuage on page 442 Color mode Defines the color mode for saved screenshots Grayscale Black and white output Color Color output Inverted Inverts the colors of the output i e a dark waveform is printed on a white background Remote command HCOPy COLor SCHeme on page 442 L User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 231 13 2 6 Saving and Loading Print Prints the screenshot on a printer connected to the USB connector on the front or rear panel The printer output is configured with SETUP gt Printer The function is only available if a printer is connected Remote command HCOPy IMMediate on page 442 References Masks and Equation Sets Import Export The File menu provides the functions to copy mask files equation sets and reference waveform files from one storage device to another For details refer to the relevant chapters e Reference waveforms chapter 5 Reference Waveforms on page 74 e Masks chapter 9 Masks on page 122 e Equation sets chapter 7 Mathematics on page 98 e Export Import procedure chapter 13 2 1 2 Importing and Exporting Data on page 218
41. Activates the integrated R amp S ProbeMeter of active R amp S probes and selects the probe type This voltmeter measures DC voltages between the probe tip and ground connection with very high precision and enables ground referenced measurements of voltages The DC measurement is performed continuously and in parallel to the measurements of the oscilloscope If activated the DC offset measured on the probe tip is shown in a colored label below the channel label TB 200us T 0s Auto CH3 738 mV 4 DC Ce SAI O cha soam Inactive ProbeMeter is disabled Single Ended ProbeMeter of a single ended active probe is enabled Remote command PROBe lt m gt SETup OFFSwitch on page 299 PROBe m SETup DCOFfset on page 298 Micro Button Active R amp S probes have a configurable Micro Button on the probe head Pressing this button you can perform an action on the instrument directly from the probe During inter nal automatic processes the button is disabled for example during self alignment auto set and find level Select the action that you want to start from the probe EE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 33 R amp S RTM20xx Acquisition and Waveform Setup EH Reference for Waveform Setup Continuous Pressing the Micro Button starts continuous acquisition like the RUN key The acquisition is running as long as you press the Micro Button again Single Starts one acquisition Autoset Starts the autoset procedure
42. FRENch SPANish RUSSian SCHinese TCHinese JAPanese KORean Supported languages are listed in the Specifications data sheet RST Reset does not change the language TRIGger OUT MODE lt OutputMode gt Defines wether and when a trigger out pulse is generated never on trigger event or on mask violation EMN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 450 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BEES Command Reference Parameters lt OutputMode gt OFF TRIGger MASK RST OFF TRIGger OUT PLENgth lt PulseLength gt Defines the pulse width of the trigger out pulse Parameters lt PulseLength gt RST 1E 6 Default unit s TRIGger OUT POLarity lt Polarity gt Sets the polarity of the trigger out pulse Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative RST POS SYSTem NAME Defines an instrument name Parameters lt Name gt String with max 20 characters SYSTem DATE lt Year gt lt Month gt lt Day gt Specifies the internal date for the instrument Parameters lt Year gt Increment 1 Default unit a lt Month gt Range 1 to 12 Increment 1 lt Day gt Range 1 to 31 Increment 1 Default unit d Usage SCPI confirmed SYSTem TIME lt Hour gt lt Minute gt lt Second gt Specifies the internal time for the instrument AAA AAA G User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 451 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BEES Command Reference Parameters lt Hour gt Range 0 to 23 Incr
43. LOW AMPLitude MEAN RMS RTIMe FTIMe PDCYcle NDCYcle PPWidth NPWidth CYCMean CYCRms STDDev CYCStddev TFRequency TPERiode DELay PHASe BWIDth POVershoot NOVershoot TBFRequency TBPeriod Specifies the measurement type See MEASurement lt m gt MAIN on page 336 Return values lt Value gt Measurement result If no measurement was executed no value NAN is returned Usage Query only MEASurement lt m gt CATegory Returns the measurement category Currently the instrument supports only yt meas urements Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the measurement Return values Category AMPTime AMPtime yt measurements RST AMPT Usage Query only LES User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 340 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control a eee e Command Reference 15 2 8 4 Reference Level REFLevelRELative MODE E 341 REFL uelRELatve LOWER conan dada 341 REFLevelRELaIVEUPP ccoo lia iaa 341 EE E Wa 342 REFLevel RELative MODE lt RelativeMode gt Sets the lower and upper reference levels for rise and fall time mesurements cursor and automatic mesurements as well as the middle reference level for phase and delay measurements The levels are defined as percentages of the high signal level The setting is valid for all measurement places Parameters lt RelativeMode gt TEN TWENty FIVE USER TEN 10 50 and 90 TWENty 20 50 and 80 FIVE 5 50 and 95 USER levels are defined
44. Long and short form The mnemonics feature a long form and a short form The short form is marked by upper case letters the long form corresponds to the complete word Either the short form or the long form can be entered other abbreviations are not permitted Example HardCOPy DEVice COLor ON is equivalent to HCOP DEV COL ON Case insensitivity Upper case and lower case notation only serves to distinguish the two forms in the man ual the instrument itself is case insensitive Numeric suffixes If a command can be applied to multiple instances of an object e g specific channels or sources the required instances can be specified by a suffix added to the command Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets lt 1 4 gt n lt i gt and are replaced by a single value in the command Entries without a suffix are interpreted as having the suffix 1 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 252 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control aN eee Basics Example Definition HardCOPy PAGE DIMensions QUADrant lt N gt Command HCOP PAGE DIM QUAD2 This command refers to the quadrant 2 For remote control the suffix may differ from the number of the corresponding selection used in manual operation SCPI prescribes that suffix counting starts with 1 Suffix 1 is the default state and used when no specific suffix is specified o Different numbering in remote control Optional mnemonics Some comma
45. Only the IP address of the instrument is required to set up the connection It identifies the instrument in the network and is part of the resource string used by the programs to identify and control the instrument Depending on the communication mode VXI 11 protocol or raw socket mode the resource string has different forms IP address and port number are listed in the Ethernet Settings of R amp S RTM see also chapter 15 1 2 2 Configuring LAN Parameters on page 243 If the LAN is supported by a DNS server the host name can be used instead of the IP address The DNS server Domain Name System server translates the host name to the IP address To assign a host name to the R amp S RTM select SETUP gt More gt Device Name VXI 11 protocol TCPIP IP address gt inst0 INSTR where e inst0 isthe LAN device name VISA supports several devices running on the instru ment On R amp S RTM only one device is configured so the LAN device name can be omitted e INSTR indicates that the VXI 11 protocol is used Example If the instrument has the IP address 192 1 2 3 the valid resource string is TCPIP 192 1 2 3 INSTR With host name instead of IP address TCPIP host name gt inst0 INSTR Example If the computer name is RSRT7 the valid resource string is TCPIP RSRT1 INSTR Ee User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 247 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control 15 1 3 15 1 4 15 1 4 1 Basics R
46. Op1 Op2 Subtracts the second operand from the first operand CNN ELECE PV Op1 Op2 Multiplies the two operands CONS pon BS mm 1 ASS Op1 Op2 Divides the first operand by the second operand For small amplitudes of the second operand the result increases quickly If the second operand crosses zero the result would be a range of c to o In this case instead of OV the calculation function uses the value that the Least Significant Bit LSB of the second operand repre sents For an 8 bit value for example 1 256 You can limit the zero crossings of the operand by using the Maxi mum operator This limitation results in a smaller result range and a finer resolution INN NU EIE Maximum Op1 Op2 Compares the amplitudes of both operands and displays the maximum amplitude The sign of the result is taken from Operand1 Use this operation in combination with the Reciprocal or Division operation to limit the minimal amplitudes of an operand Example Operand1 is a homopolar sine signal with V 3V Operand2 is a constant value of 1V The result is always larger than 1V or smaller than 1V User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 104 R amp S RTM20xx Mathematics Minimum Square Square Root Abs Value Pos Wave User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 Reference for Mathematics Minimum Op1 Op2 Compares the amplitudes of both operands and displays the minimum amplitude The si
47. R amp S RTM20xx General Instrument Setup Firmware and Options 14 General Instrument Setup This chapter describes the firmware update the activation of new options and all softkeys of the Setup menu The usage of the functions except of update is described in other chapters depending on the usage context e chapter Defining General Instrument Settings in the Getting Started manual con figuring date time interface and help language and sounds chapter 15 1 2 Setting Up a LAN Connection on page 243 14 4 Firmware and Options e Updating FIITTIWaEFe ecieeiceec erant ne rte netten ne Ran Udala cananea 233 e Activating OPON eee tete denk SEENEN a RR dian 234 14 1 1 Updating Firmware This chapter describes how to update the instrument s firmware and the interface firm ware You should update the instrument and interface firmware in regular intervals to take advantage of new functions and solve possible problems 1 Download the current firmware package from the instrument s Web page http www scope of the art com product rtm html under Downloads gt Firmware The zip package contains the instrument firmware and interface firmware for all R amp S RTM20xx types Extract the zip package and copy the required files to a USB flash drive Insert the USB flash drive in the instrument Press SETUP Press More o m B o N Press Update Firmware The currently installed firmware vers
48. Termination Adjusts the input impedance of the instrument to the impedance of the DUT By default the oscilloscope has an input impedance of 1 MO 13pF If an active probe is used the termination is read out from the probe usually it is 50 O 500 In measurement systems that are dimensioned for a characteristic impedance of 50 O reflections along the signal path are minimized by setting the input resistor of the oscilloscope also to 50 Q This increases the accuracy of measurement results 50 O termination is identified for each channel by the icon Q in the waveform label 1 MO The high input resistor minimizes the loading effect on the device under test This value is set automatically if a passive probe is connected and cannot be changed Remote command CHANnel lt m gt COUPling on page 289 Bandwidth Selects the bandwidth limit The specified full bandwidth indicates the range of frequen cies that the instrument can acquire and display accurately with less than 3dB attenua tion The probe has also a limited bandwidth and thus affects the resulting system band width See also chapter 2 1 1 3 Bandwidth on page 12 Full At full bandwidth all frequencies in the specified range are acquired and displayed Full bandwidth is used for most applications EN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 30 R amp S RTM20xx Acquisition and Waveform Setup EENEG Reference for Waveform Setup 400 MHz Frequency limit Frequencie
49. Usage Setting only MASK SOURce Source Defines the channel to be compared with the mask Parameters lt Source gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH3 and CH4 are only available on 4 channel R amp S RTM models RST CH1 MASK CHCopy Creates a mask from the envelope waveform of the test source set with MASK SOURce E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 355 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control ras Command Reference Usage Event MASK YPOSition lt Y position gt Moves the mask vertically within the display Parameters lt Y position gt Mask offset from the vertical center Range 200 to 200 Increment 0 02 RST 0 Default unit div MASK YSCale lt Yscale gt Changes the vertical scaling to stretch or compress the mask in y direction Parameters lt Yscale gt A value over 100 stretches the amplitudes a value less than 100 compresses the amplitudes Range 10 to 1000 Increment 1 RST 100 Default unit MASK YWIDth lt Yaddition gt Changes the width of the mask in vertical direction Parameters lt Yaddition gt The value is added to the y values of the upper mask limit and subtracted from the y values of the lower mask limit Range 0 to 5 12 Increment 0 04 RST 0 Default unit div MASK XWIDth lt Xaddition gt Changes the width of the mask in horizontal direction Parameters lt Xaddition gt The value is added to the positive x values and subtracted from the negative x values of the mas
50. WITHin OUTSide LONGer Finds rise fall times longer than the given time SHORter Finds rise fall times shorter than the given time WITHin Finds rise fall times inside the range time At OUTSide Finds rise fall times outside the range time At RST LONG Firmware Software FW 03 700 SEARch TRIGger RISetime TIME Time Sets the reference rise or fall time the nominal value for comparisons Parameters lt Time gt Range Depends on various settings mainly time base and sample rate RST 200e 6 Default unit s Firmware Software FW 03 700 SEARch TRIGger RISetime DELTa lt DeltaTime gt Sets a range At to the reference rise fall time set with SEARch TRIGger RISetime TIME if SEARch TRIGger RISetime RANGe on page 365 is set to Within or Outside The instrument finds rise fall times inside or outside the range time x At Parameters lt DeltaTime gt Range Depends on various settings mainly time base and sample rate RST 50e 6 Default unit s Firmware Software FW 03 700 Runt Search Configuration SEARCH TRIGO RUNT le Bn 367 SEARCch TRIGgerLEVel RUNTILO Wer 1 0 cccccnecsnceecueneedecneeceacnedcncadanesenetarceecteiataesneteay 367 SEARCH NRIGgerLE Vel RUNTUPPE cosita ic 367 e E Ee eg DE Le 367 SEARCH TRIGO RUNT MMO AE 368 SEARCH TRIG RUNT DEL CT 368 EN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 366 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BEES Command Reference SEARch TRIGger
51. 8 bits and a stop bit Start BitO Bit 1 Bit7 Stop bit LSB MSB bit Byte field Fig 11 14 Structure of a byte field Data bytes are transmitted LSB first User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 197 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis m UD H ee m LIN Option R amp S RTM K3 The identifier byte consists of 6 bits for the frame identifier and two parity bits This com bination is known as protected identifier Trigger The R amp S RTM can trigger on various parts of LIN frames The data line must be con nected to an input channel triggering on math and reference waveforms is not possible You can trigger on e Frame start synchronization field e Specific slave identifier or identifier range e Data pattern in the message e Wake up signal e Checksum error error in data parity error error in identifier 11 6 2 LIN Configuration Settings Access PROTOCOL gt Bus type LIN Configuration Configuration A E E a a 198 VE EE 198 Ee ee 199 undi EE 199 Data Sets the source of the data line All channel waveforms can be used If the MSO option R amp S RTM B1 is installed digital channels can also be used as source Remote command BUS lt b gt LIN DATA SOURce on page 422 Polarity Defines the idle state of the bus The idle state is the rezessive state and corresponds to a logic 1 Remote command BUS b LIN POLarity on page 422 Version
52. Acquisition and Waveform Setup 2 3 3 2 Reference for Waveform Setup Use the offset to measure small AC voltages that are overlaid by higher DC voltages Unlike AC coupling the DC part of the signal is not lost with offset setting The device under test is not affected The offset always has to be set manually it is not included in the autoset process Turn clockwise to move the waveform down At zero crossing the knob shortly snaps in and the setting is kept constant to simplify the zero setting If an active probe is connected the offset limit is defined by the probe Refer to the doc umentation of the probe for allowed values Remote command CHANnel lt m gt OFFSet on page 290 PROBe lt m gt SETup UOFFset on page 300 SCALE Y Scale Sets the vertical scale in Volts per division to change the amplitude of the selected chan nel math or reference waveform or of the decoded bus signal The current value is shown in the waveform label above the grid The knob lights up in the color of the selected waveform Turn SCALE clockwise to stretch the waveform Doing so the scale value V div decrea ses Press the knob to toggle between fine and rough adjustment To set the vertical sclae for a channel waveform numerically press the Y Scale softkey in the channel menu and then use the NAVIGATION knob Remote command CHANnel lt m gt SCALe on page 289 CALCulate MATH lt m gt SCALe on page 346 BUS b DSIZe on page 375
53. DACP me 243 interface setting onec trei iere 237 Differential Probe cid 18 Bleu EE 208 Label Vertical position oooonnnnnnninncicinnncccccccccnnnncnnnnncnnns 211 Vertical scale iir rre eer 211 Digital signals 2 Digitization threshold s sse 31 Directory name A ren en ne 218 Display configuring Data format m Mu ai Display Mode nonne tit reiner Dots Only Double dagger DOWN Duty CY CIO atico trii e Perte E Edge Cr EP da 137 A e a u 43 Edit Constant E 108 Edit Equations SONKEY EE 103 ENA BIG cc 262 Enable registers le EE 276 mig c 24 Eq Set Label Conc eres 109 Equation Tola Cm 99 label coc M 102 103 Equation Label Cc 109 Equation set A an d i ads 100 Equation Set A ee E TaN 109 Equation sets ul e 218 Irnport EXpOtt EE 232 A AE 100 saving Equivalent time sampling ssseeeeess 26 Error queues recommendations eere 273 ESE event status enable register 266 cj C M ESR event status register EVE INE cists eege dee e Events LCE 147 Event status enable register Ile m 275 Event status enable regist
54. Display Additionally you can display the binary signal with Bits See also chapter 11 1 2 Protocol Common Settings on page 149 Additionally you can display and save a Frame Table containing decoded data frame number start time of the frame identifier data length data checksum and state of the frame See also chapter 11 1 5 Frame Table Decode Results on page 154 Remote commands US b CPARallel FCOunt on page 439 e BUs lt b gt CPARallel FRAMe lt n gt DATA on page 439 e BUS lt b gt CPARallel FRAMe lt n gt STATe on page 440 e BUs lt b gt CPARallel FRAMe lt n gt STARt on page 440 bg ER St Es E e BUS lt b gt CPARallel FRAMe lt n gt STOP on page 440 12 3 3 Parallel Bus Unclocked 12 3 3 1 Parallel Bus Configuration The unclocked parallel bus can analyze up to 16 digital channels The configuration is simple the only setting is the Bus width Bus width Sets the number of lines to be analyzed The maximum number is 16 bits if all 16 digital channels are used Remote command BUS lt b gt PARallel WIDTh on page 437 T User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 213 Parallel Buses 12 3 3 2 Parallel Bus Decode Results You can enable the decoding in the Protocol main menu Decode shows the decoded values below the waveforms in the format selected with Display Additionally you can display the binary signal with Bits See also chapter 11 1
55. EN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 272 R amp S9RTM20xx Remote Control 15 2 15 2 1 Command Reference Therefore control programs should always define an initial instrument status e g using the RST command and then implement the required settings Command sequence As a general rule send commands and queries in different program messages Other wise the result of the query may vary depending on which operation is performed first see also Preventing Overlapping Execution Reacting to malfunctions The service request is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own Each controller program should instruct the instrument to initiate a service request in case of malfunction The program should react appropriately to the service request Error queues The error queue should be queried after every service request in the controller program as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status registers Especially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried regularly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there as well Command Reference This chapter provides the description of all remote commands available for R amp S RTM The commands are sorted according to the menu structure of the instrument A list of commands in alphabetical order ist given in the List of Commands at the end of this documentation C
56. File name and path of the file to be removed If the path is omitted the specified file will be deleted in the current directory Filters are not allowed User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 448 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BESSERES Command Reference Example chapter 15 3 3 2 Saving Copying and Loading Setup Data on page 461 Usage Setting only MMEMory DATA lt FileName gt lt Data gt Writes data to the specified file in the current directory MMEMory CDIRectory or reads the data Parameters lt Data gt 488 2 block data The block begins with character The next digit is the length of the length information followed by this given number of digits pro viding the number of bytes in the binary data attached Parameters for setting and query lt FileName gt String parameter containing the file name Example MMEM DATA abc txt 216This is the file 2 the length infomation has two digits 16 the binary data has 16 bytes MMEM DATA abc txt received This is the file Example chapter 15 3 3 2 Saving Copying and Loading Setup Data on page 461 MMEMory STORe STATe lt StateNumber gt lt FileName gt Saves the current device settings to the specified file in the current directory Setting parameters lt StateNumber gt Range 1 to 1 Increment 0 RST 1 lt FileName gt String parameter File name with or without file extension Example MMEM CDIR USB FRONT DATA M
57. MASK CHCopy on page 355 Y Position New Mask Moves the mask vertically within the display Turn the Navigation rotary knob to change the y position The current position is indicated as an offset from the center in divisions a positive value indicates the waveform was moved upwards a negative value indicates the waveform was moved down Remote command MASK YPOSition on page 356 Stretch Y New Mask Changes the vertical scaling to stretch the mask in y direction Turn the Navigation rotary knob clockwise to increase the factor or counterclockwise to decrease the factor A value over 100 stretches the amplitudes a value less than 100 compresses the amplitudes Remote command MASK YSCale on page 356 Width Y New Mask Changes the width of the mask in vertical direction e User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 129 R amp S RTM20xx Masks Reference for MASKS key The specified number of divisions is added to the y values of the upper mask limit and subtracted from the y values of the lower mask limit Thus the upper half of the mask is pulled upwards the lower half is pulled down and the overall height of the mask is twice the Width Y Remote command MASK YWIDth on page 356 Width X New Mask Changes the width of the mask in horizontal direction The specified factor in divisions is adde
58. On is highlighted Press Average No and enter the number of measured waveforms to be used for calculation of average and standard deviation 6 3 3 Auto Measure Menu MEAS key The MEAS key opens the Auto Measure menu to configure automatic measurements For details see chapter 6 3 Automatic Measurements on page 87 ERA lt lt lt 4 AA User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 94 R amp S RTM20xx Measurements Automatic Measurements Mean Value RMS Value Mean Cycle RMS Cycle Amplitude Top Level Base Level Auto Measure CS Pos Overshoot v Meas Place Measure 1 Source Reference Clear All Meas Paare cdanivaicasasecasqastasnaadcanvausadeaddeasduuanadedstaotasaadadsaansiautdadcciaa cs Reads deuda 95 Measte E E 95 EC Ke 95 SOUNGE EE 96 E EE 96 ENS EE 96 UG 96 Dier MoE PVG FIRS inn n a DM 96 5 PSE SA an 96 1 o EE 96 Reference Level Upper Middle Lower Levels sees 97 co A P 97 Delay DS TD ee 97 NET TE 97 Meas Place Selects one of the four available measurements to be configured or activated Measure 1 4 Activates or deactivates the selected measurement 1 4 Remote command MEASurement m ENABle on page 336 Meas Type Defines the measurement type to be performed on the selected source Depending on the type different results are displayed in the result table For a list of all automatic measurement types and their description see chapte
59. RTM20xx General Instrument Setup Reference for Setup Automatic Probe Adjust A square wave is generated at the Probe Adjust pin The frequency of the square wave depends on the defined time base If the time base becomes too small to display the 1 kHz wave it is automatically switched to a 1 MHz wave Secure Erase Deletes current instrument configuration data and user data for example reference files equation sets masks from the internal storage Calibration data remains in the storage Use this function before you send the instrument to the service If the instrument is used in a secured environment the function ensures that all sensitive data is removed before the instrument leaves the secured area To start secure erase select OK Do not turn off the instrument before the process has been completed See also document Resolving Security Issues When Working in Secure Areas that is delivered on the documentation CD ROM and on the R amp S RTM internet web page Device Name Enter the name of the instrument LED Intensity Defines the luminosity of illuminated front panel keys and rotary knobs Trigger Output Opens the Trigger Output menu Output Trigger Output Enables the trigger out signal and defines when a trigger out pulse is generated on trigger event or on mask violation Remote command TRIGger OUT MODE on page 450 Polarity Trigger Output Sets the polarity of the trigger out pulse Re
60. Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Setting parameters lt FilePath gt String containing the storage device path and file name ERA SSS SSS User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 376 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control 15 2 13 2 Command Reference Example BUS LIST SAVE USB FRONT MYTABLE CSV Saves the frame table data to the MYTABLE CSV file on a USB flash device connected to the front panel Usage Setting only SPI The Serial Peripheral Interface SPI is used for communication with slow peripheral devi ces in particular for transmission of data streams A 4 channel instrument is required for full support of the SPI protocol The SPI SSPI protocol require two bus lines bus 1 and 2 or bus 3 and 4 so the number of buses suffix lt b gt is reduced Bus 2 and or bus 4 is not available WSF CHUAN italia 377 E ERT EE 380 SFI Dode OS WS e 381 SPI Configuration BUS lt gt SPECS EE 377 BUS ROR SPOS POLINY E 377 cin endorse eMNa Wi Toce o MM Mm 378 BusspsoSPECLOCKPOLQgnt 1 e edd AER ENEE AANER 378 BUS lt b gt SPIEDATASQURCOS 000 oi 378 BUS lt D SPRODATA POLAM cosida a c dez ai t Eee deut Eden dat 379 BUS lt b gt SPIBORD GE M 379 BUS lt gt SPIES SIZ6 MEET 379 CHANnel m THReshold FINDlevel cesses eene nnne nnne nnn annes nin 379 BUS lt b gt SPI CS SOURce Source Selects the input channel of the chip select line Suffix b
61. Selects the language in which the key labels help and other screen information is dis played Currently the help is available only in English Remote command DISPlay LANGuage on page 450 Date amp Time Provides softkeys to set the current date and time in the instrument Year Month Day Hour Minute Date amp Time Change the date and time settings individually Changes are only adopted by the instru ment after you press Save and Back Remote command SYSTem DATE on page 451 SYSTem TIME on page 451 Interface Activates or deactivates additional instrument interfaces Using these interfaces you can communicate with the instrument for example to read out data or automate the meas uring station Various interfaces are available as options for the instrument and are installed in a specific slot at the rear Depending on the installed interface additional parameters may be definable via the Parameter softkey after the interface has been activated gt USB lt Interface Activates the Type B USB interface for remote control The USB interface provides a simple way to connect the instrument to a PC The USB 2 0 standard is supported Use a connection cable that is suitable for a Type B USB interface No settings are available for the USB interface Note You cannot connect a printer via the Type B USB interface Use one of the Type A USB interfaces on the rear or front panel to connect a printer LAN Inte
62. Storage Locations on page 217 Storage intemal Fron EE 222 e Ee Ee EN 222 Create DECIO ico ld 222 Remove DIGON c ad 222 Storage Internal Front Rear Defines the storage device Waveforms and screenshots can only be stored on a USB stick connected to the front or rear panel not to an internal directory In this case the softkey is only available if a USB stick is connected to the rear or front panel Internal Directly in the internal memory of the instrument Front On a USB stick connected to the front panel Rear On a USB stick connected to the rear panel Remote command MMEMory MSIS on page 444 Change Directory Switches to the selected directory See also To select the storage directory on page 218 Remote command MMEMory CDIRectory on page 445 Create Directory Creates a new subdirectory of the currently selected storage directory See also To define a new file or directory name on page 218 Remote command MMEMory MDIRectory on page 445 Remove Directory Removes the currently selected directory Remote command MMEMory RDIRectory on page 445 Import Export Menu The Import Export menu provides functions to copy data between the instrument and a USB flash device See also chapter 13 2 1 2 Importing and Exporting Data on page 218 EN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 222 R amp S RTM20xx Data and File Management Saving and Loading Import Export Source ro
63. The name of the target file can be changed so you can copy and rename in one operation For references and masks you can also change the target file format and convert the data during export import This chapter describes the general procedures and settings to save load and export import data LEE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 217 R amp S9RTM20xx Data and File Management 13 2 1 1 13 2 1 2 Saving and Loading Configuring Storage Locations You must configure the storage settings for the various data types initially select the storage location and the storage directory and define the file name For some data types further storage settings are available Then you can save data simply by pressing the Save softkey in the FILE menu or if configured accordingly by pressing the PRINT key on the front panel To select the storage directory Whenever you want to save copy or load data you have to set the directory where the data will be stored or loaded from 1 Press Storage to open the storage directory menu and display the file explorer for the currently selected storage location See also Storage Directory Menu on page 221 2 Press Storage Internal Front Rear until the required storage device is highlighted For waveforms and screenshots only a USB flash drive can be selected as a storage location If no USB flash drive is connected to the instrument this function is not available 3 Use the Naviga
64. User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 163 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis SPI SSPI Bus Option R amp S RTM K1 TB 200pus T 516 us Auto SSPI MOSI Frame Start SEET Real Time Complete Bus Frame Table SSPI 2 Wire 8 Bit Clk CH3 MOSI CH1 MISO CH2 art time Source Length Data 1 1 678 ms MIS 4 16D8 1lA3D 2 1 678 ms ST 4 4040 DE40 3 516 525 ys MISO 6 735D CIFA 6123 OK 4 OK 516 MO 6 4000 69c0 69C0 Frames 1 5 6 Data 0x735D C1FA 6123 UD A Wu Es See PA l Fig 11 3 Decoded SSPI signal with frame table Table 11 1 Content of the SPI SSPI frame table Column Description Start time Time of the frame start in relation to the trigger point Source MISO or MOSI line Length Number of words in the frame Data Hexadecimal values of the data words State Overall state of the frame Example In the figure above the first two frames have four words each the following two frames contain 6 words each The fifth frame is incomplete Remote commands e JS unt on page 381 on page 382 on page 382 gt on page 382 on page 383 on page 383 on page 383 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 164 R amp S9RTM20xx Protocol Analysis 11 3 11 3 1 PC Option R amp S RTM K1 BUS b SPI FRAME n WORD o STARt on page 384 BUS b SPI FRAME n WORD o STOP on page 384 BUS lt b gt SPI FRAME lt n gt WORD lt o gt MOSI on page 385 BUS lt b gt SPI FRAME lt
65. amplitude values or pairs of values time information time of the first sample and the sample interval and current instrument settings The data can be loaded as reference waveform for further use on the instrument It is not intended for analysis outside the R amp S RTM CSV Format In a Comma Separated Values text file the waveform is stored in a two columned table Columns are separated by a comma and the lines are separated by line breaks r n 0x0D 0x0A Values are listed in scientific notation EE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 227 R amp S RTM20xx Data and File Management Saving and Loading The first column contains the time values of the samples in relation to the trigger point and the second column contains the associated amplitude values The first line indicates the units of the values in each column and the name of the waveform Pairs of values are listed as two single values with the same time value minimum and maximum The data can be loaded back to the instrument for further use Example CSV1 Waveform of channel 1 single values s CH1 V 1 1996E 02 1 000E 02 1 1992E 02 1 000E 02 1 1988E 02 1 000E 02 1 1984E 02 1 000E 02 Example CSV2 Waveform of channel 1 pairs of values s CH1 V 2 9980E 00 2 000E 05 2 9980E 00 1 400E 04 2 9960E 00 1 800E 04 2 9960E 00 1 400E 04 2 9940E 00 1 800E 04 2 9940E 00 1 400E 04 Example CSV3 FFT Hz FFT dBm 0 000000E 00 1 03746E 01 1 5
66. and 1 for ON Example Setting command HCOPy DEV COL ON Query HCOPy DEV COL Response 1 e Text character data is returned in a short form Example Setting command HardCOPy PAGE ORIentation LANDscape Query HCOP PAGE ORI Response LAND IESSE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 258 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control EENEG Basics 15 1 5 Command Sequence and Synchronization IEEE 488 2 defines a distinction between overlapped and sequential commands e Asequential command is one which finishes executing before the next command starts executing Commands that are processed quickly are usually implemented as sequential commands e Anoverlapping command is one which does not automatically finish executing before the next command starts executing Usually overlapping commands take longer to process and allow the program to do other tasks while being executed If overlapping commands do have to be executed in a defined order e g in order to avoid wrong measurement results they must be serviced sequentially This is called synchroni zation between the controller and the instrument Setting commands within one command line even though they may be implemented as sequential commands are not necessarily serviced in the order in which they have been received In order to make sure that commands are actually carried out in a certain order each command must be sent in a separate command line Example Commands and
67. and or to a serial pat tern d Set the Byte Offset the number of bytes to be ignored before the first byte of interes t e Set the Number of Bytes contained in the pattern f Enter the pattern either as binary input or as hexadecimal input e For binary input press Bit and enter the bit number to be set The bits are counted inside the selected bytes the selected bit is highlighted in the pattern bit line Then enter the State of this bit 0 1 or X don t care Repeat these settings until all bit states are defined e For hexadecimal input press Byte and select the byte to be set The selected byte is highlighted in the lower pattern line Then press Value and turn the navigation knob to change the bits Repeat these settings until all bytes are defined If the data is not relevant for your trigger condition set all data bytes to OxXX I2C Setup Trigger On Read SCL CH Slave Address 0x0b 7Bit Byte Offset 2Byte Data 00110011 xolo1111 10101111 0x33 OxXX Oxaf 11 3 3 2 PC Trigger Settings I2C Trigger vc MM de 170 iio p HE m EE E TERT 170 PRES T a 25 p U deta 170 SEELEN 170 RENE E I EE 170 A AREE 171 CS M m 171 ETN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 169 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis PC Option R amp S RTM K1 O A a er Ee padet daa anaE 171 EE 171 ER TEE 171 Mole oc A 172 TEE 172 LEN EE 172 A EE 172 G
68. define its value Press Value and enter the numeric value Press Decimal Point to move the decimal point within the numeric value Press Prefix to define an Sl prefix to the unit See also Prefix on page 108 e Press Unit to define the unit of the value See also Unit on page 109 e Press Save to store the user defined constant 7 Press Unit to define the unit of the equation results See also Unit on page 102 8 Optionally press Equation Label to define a name for the equation This label is displayed on the Equation softkey and in the Equation Set Editor To edit an equation set 1 Press MATH gt Edit Equations to display the Equation Set Editor 2 Press Equation to select the first equation to be configured This equation is assigned to the first math waveform MA1 3 Configure the equation See To configure an equation on page 99 gt Repeat steps 3 and 4 to configure all 5 equations in the equation set 5 Press Back to exit the editor and return to the main Mathematics menu 6 For each equation MA1 to MA4 define whether it is to be displayed or not a Press Equation to select the equation b Press Visible to switch the display of the math waveform on or off 7 Optionally press Eq Set Label to define a name for the equation set This label is displayed in the Equation Set Editor 7 1 3 Saving and Loading Equation Sets If you want to keep math configurations
69. of the command differs depending on which parameter is used Example Definition HardCOPy PAGE ORIentation LANDscape PORTrait Command HCOP PAGE ORI LAND specifies landscape orientation Command HCOP PAGE ORI PORT specifies portrait orientation Mnemonics A selection of mnemonics with an identical effect exists for several commands These mnemonics are indicated in the same line they are separated by a vertical stroke Only one of these mnemonics needs to be included in the header of the command The effect of the command is independent of which of the mnemonics is used Example DefinitionSENSE BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution numeric value The two following commands with identical meaning can be created SENS BAND RES 1 SENS BWID RES 1 1 mnemonics in square brackets are optional and may be inserted into the header or omitted Example HardCOPy IMMediate HCOP IMM is equivalent to HCOP Parameters in curly brackets are optional and can be inserted once or several times or omitted Example SENSe LIST FREQuency numeric value numeric value The following are valid commands SENS LIST FREQ 10 SENS LIST FREQ 10 20 SENS LIST FREQ 10 20 30 40 SCPI Parameters Many commands are supplemented by a parameter or a list of parameters The param eters must be separated from the header by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank Allowed parameters are Numeric va
70. ter 13 1 1 3 Quick Printing with the PRINT Key on page 216 13 1 1 Printing a Screenshot Before you can print you have to e Connect and configure the printer e Configure the PRINT key if you need quick printout Then you can start the printout from the File menu or with the PRINT key 13 1 1 1 Configuring the Printer Output For the printout you configure the format and colors The individual settings are described in chapter 13 1 2 Printer Settings on page 216 1 Connect the printer to a Type A USB port on the front or rear panel of the instrument Press SETUP gt Printer to open the Printer menu Press Paper Format and select the required format using the Navigation knob 2 3 4 Inthe Printer menu press Color Mode 5 Select the required color format using the Navigation knob 6 Most printers support PCL Printer Command Language If your printer does not select the appropriate Command Set User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 215 R amp S9RTM20xx Data and File Management 13 1 1 2 13 1 1 3 13 1 2 Printing Starting the Printout Infrequent printouts can be started from the File menu 1 Make sure that the printer is configured correctly See chapter 13 1 1 1 Configuring the Printer Output on page 215 2 Press the FILE key 3 Press Screenshots gt Print Quick Printing with the PRINT Key You assign the print function to the PRINT key After this configuration a screensh
71. the frame table covers nearly the complete righthand half of the screen Save Opens the Save menu to save the decoded data in a CSV file comma separated list Remote command BUS lt b gt LIST on page 376 BUS b LIST SAVE on page 376 SPI SSPI Bus Option R amp S RTM K1 The SPI Protocol A 4 channel instrument is required for full support of the SPI protocol The Serial Peripheral Interface SPI is used for communication with slow peripheral devi ces in particular for transmission of data streams Main characteristics of SPI are e Master slave communication e No device addressing The slave is accessed by a chip select or slave select line e No acknowledgement mechanism to confirm receipt of data e Duplex capability Most SPI buses have four lines two data and two control lines e Clock line to all slaves SCLK e Slave Select or Chip Select line SS or CS e Master data output slave data input MOSI or SDI e Master data input slave data output MISO or SDO When the master generates a clock and selects a slave device data may be transferred in either or both directions simultaneously As SPI is very simple and efficient for single master single slave applications the R amp S RTM provides also an SSPI simple SPI configuration that does not have a chip select line SPI Master Fig 11 1 Simple configuration of SPI bus User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 155 R amp S RTM20xx Protoc
72. the instrument selects the optimum combination of waveform acquisition rate and sample rate using the full memory depth maximum record length MWAVeform Maximum waveform rate The instrument combines sample rate and memory depth to acquire at maximum waveform acquisition rate In connection with persistence the mode can display rare signal anomalies MSAMples Maximum sample rate The instrument acquires the signal at max imum sample rate and uses the full memory depth The result is a waveform with maximum number of waveform samples high degree of accuracy and low risk of aliasing MANual The instrument acquires the signals at a sample rate that fills up an user defined record length Set the record length using ACQuire POINts VALue RST AUTO CHANnel lt m gt TYPE lt DecimationMode gt Selects the method to reduce the data stream of the ADC to a stream of waveform points with lower sample rate Suffix lt m gt The command affects all channels regardless of the indicated channel number The suffix can be omitted Parameters DecimationMode SAMPle PDETect HRESolution SAMPle Input data is acquired with a sample rate which is aligned to the time base horizontal scale and the record length PDETect Peak Detect the minimum and the maximum of n samples in a sample interval are recorded as waveform points HRESolution High resolution The average of n sample points is recorded as waveform point R
73. 18 R amp S9RTM20xx Index Micro Button ripe EN 33 MIN a IMMEMONICS EE 251 optional TEE 253 MODE Vk eaters MSO Parallel bus configuration ssssssss 212 N NAN 255 New MaSK PP 129 NEXT catas castidad MAL Next peak NINE asco tion No of Averages SOMO arc n ainia 117 KN MEE 262 Numeric values TK ET 255 KEE 25 O pr 28 Operand 1 SOMMCY P 107 Operand 2 E 108 Operation complete luo s M 275 Operator UE 103 Option identification IT e A 275 Options 238 Output buffer 264 Overlapping TN Overlapping commands P Paper Tortmmal o elc ee erable 216 Parallel buses Configuration Parameters e AAA oce ace eatis 257 DON EE 256 INTERFACES EE 237 SCPI special numeric values SUING RE 256 text units Passive probe attenuation 2 eter de rie p etas 32 iau Em 17 SOMOS e 32 Pattern SCANCH te P HM 144 Pause MaSK1eSi ver cierethiksen se nente eve ste di ge 129 i ecc ati 78 87 ICI T a 139 Peak detection itcr rie ERR Rea 24 PENGA e 87 Persist TIMO eter re irr erre teer e e EI Fe Ear 59 Persistencia eege vices 55 59 EMOTE MU 318 Persistence time le 318 Phase measurement cece cceesseeee ceesesseeeeeeeeeeeeseete
74. 356 MASK VS CGS a R ica 356 MASK Y WID EE 356 MASK AM nl EE 356 MASK e EE 357 MASK V COU EE 357 MASK RESE COUN Lii er irre ege 357 MASKAGTIonSOUNGEVENEMIODIE EE 357 MASKACTONSTOP EVEM MODE sic ea iara Urea na ae Ea EO EE ibi laa 357 MASK ACTion SCRSave EVENEMODE 13 saededssaaneacede cen bh a Radu cep SEENEN 357 MASKAGTIGREPRINEEVENEMO DE ra ttrber idas 357 MASK ADCTIoDnAWFMSave EVENEMODBE 2 tete corse sa ENEE e cerea eae AEN epo cR eg 357 MASKACTIOIESOUNG EVENEGONUDBt EEN 358 MASKIAC TIONS EE ENE COUME sees ertet En no ar arm n a rn tr rr inen 358 MASK ACTion SCRSavelEVENEGCO NL tdt tede Io ade SSES 358 MASIGACTIOTn PRINEEVENEGCOUNE EE 358 MASK ACTion WFMSave EVENCUGOUNLE 2 reati eene aera nante ENEE Rad daba RO 358 354 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control T Command Reference MASK STATe lt State gt Turns the mask test mode on or off When turning off any temporarily stored new masks are deleted Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF MASK TEST lt Test gt Starts finishes or interrupts a mask test Parameters lt Test gt RUN STOP PAUSe RST STOP MASK LOAD lt FileName gt Loads a stored mask from the specified file Setting parameters lt FileName gt String parameter Path and file name Usage Setting only MASK SAVE lt FileName gt Saves the current mask in the specified file Setting parameters lt FileName gt String parameter Path and file name
75. BAMeSmIBODURE E 397 BUS lt b gt 712C FRAMESn BY T e 397 BUS 2C FRAMesn gt BY TESO ACK E NEE 397 BUS lt b gt I2C FRAMe lt p gt BYTE lt 0 gt GOMPlete uani ese sesen anseres nnns nan 398 BUS lt b gt I2C FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt 0 gt STARI ccccccccsccccuasececcavecscuavasecsaueseseauavaneceacaseneane 398 BUlG bhs GCEhRAMe nz BvfEszoscMAluei eene sine tssesrtssa ese sisse rss dan 398 BUS lt b gt I2C FCOunt Returns the number of received frames Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Return values lt FrameCount gt Total number of decoded frames Usage Query only BUS lt b gt I2C FRAMe lt n gt DATA Returns the data words of the specified frame R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control Suffix lt b gt lt n gt Return values Command Reference 1 4 Selects the bus Selects the frame lt DataWordsInFrame gt Comma separated list of decimal values of the data bytes Example Usage BUS I2C FRAM2 DATA returns four data bytes 69 158 174 161 Query only BUS lt b gt 12C FRAMe lt n gt STATus Returns the overall state of the frame Suffix lt b gt lt n gt Return values lt State gt Usage 1 4 Selects the bus Selects the frame INComplete OK UNEXpstop INSufficient ADDifferent INComplete The frame is not completely contained in the acquisition Query only BUS lt b gt I2C FRAMe lt n gt STARt Returns the start time of the specifi
76. CALCulate MATH m FFT MAGNitude SCALe on page 350 FFT Setup Defines the settings for the FFT window The display can be restricted to the results for a certain time base extract and to a specified frequency range User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 118 R amp S RTM20xx FFT Reference for FFT key Span FFT Setup The span is specified in Hertz and defines the width of the displayed frequency range which is Center Span 2 to Center Span 2 The position of the span is defined using the Center function Center amp Span 4 Note If the FFT frequency range is selected Span Center is highlighted the width of the span can be adjusted using the horizontal SCALE rotary knob Remote command CALCulate MATH m FFT SPAN on page 352 CALCulate MATH m FFT FULLspan on page 352 CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT STARt on page 353 CALCulate MATH m FFT STOP on page 353 Center FFT Setup Defines the position of the displayed frequency domain which is Center Span 2 to Center Span 2 The width of the domain is defined using the Span function Center Span Note If the FFT frequency range is selected Span Center is highlighted the width of the span can be adjusted using the horizontal POSITION rotary knob Remote command CALCulate MATH m FFT CFRequency on page 352 CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT STARt on page 353 CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT STOP on page 353
77. Command Reference Parameters lt Standard gt V1X V2X J2602 AUTO RST VIS BUS lt b gt LIN BITRate lt BitRate gt Sets the number of transmitted bits per second Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Parameters lt BitRate gt RST 9 60E 003 Default unit Bit s CHANnel lt m gt THReshold FINDlevel Executes the analysis of all analog channels that are configured for the selected bus and sets the threshold for digitization of analog signals for each channel Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Usage Event LIN Trigger pileo ALIN TYPE E 423 TRIGGER TEE 424 TRIG SHALL ING TEE 424 TRIG GE ACL INS MEE 424 TRIGE A LIN ICON MON Em 425 TRIGgerA EINEN Men icon cc 425 MERRIER DV EE 425 TRIGger Eelere TEE 425 TRIGJERA LINDEN EE 426 TRIGger A LIN TYPE lt TriggerType gt Specifies the trigger mode for LIN E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 423 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control m aa BZ sr Command Reference Parameters lt TriggerType gt SYNC WKFRame ID IDDT ERRCondition SYNC Start of frame triggers on the stop bit of the sync field WKFRame Triggers after a wakeup frame ID Sets the trigger to a specific identifier or an identifier range Set the identifier with TRIGger A LIN ICONdition and TRIGger A LIN IDENtifier IDDT Set the identifier see ID and the data with TRIGger A LIN DLENgth TRI
78. Control 15 2 12 Command Reference Parameters lt EventMode gt OFF EACH SINGle CYCLic OFF No action is executed EACH The selected action is executed on each violation of the mask SINGle The selected action is executed once after the n th violation CYCLic The selected action is executed repeatedly after each n th viola tion The number of violations lt n gt is set with the relevant RST OFF Firmware Software FW 03 800 MASK ACTion SOUNd EVENt COUNt lt EventCount gt MASK ACTion STOP EVENt COUNt lt EventCount gt MASK ACTion SCRSave EVENt COUNt lt EventCount gt MASK ACTion PRINt EVENt COUNt lt EventCount gt MASK ACTion WFMSave EVENt COUNt lt EventCount gt Sets the number of mask violations after which the action is executed The command is CYCLIC Parameters lt EventCount gt Integer value number of mask violations Firmware Software FW 03 800 Search e General Search CONIGUIQUON sesin rsen teilen AAEE 359 e Edge Search Configuration 2 ccccccecceeccceeecsceeeacneececeeenenenecceecadhceasceecadnaaneeees 362 e Width Search Configuration EE 362 e Peak Search Configura ici 364 e Rise Fall Time Search CGontfouraton me 365 e Runt Search Configuration edel Ede ci ares 366 e Data2Clock Search Configuration eric e 368 e Patten bar Ree UE EE 370 e cic e M 372 EMEN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 358 15 2 12 1 Command Reference Genera
79. DO D15 Active digital channels if MSO option R amp S RTM B1 is installed The following automatic measurements are possible frequency period edge and pulse counts phase delay duty cycle burst width D70 D158 Active digital pods DO D7 and D8 D15 available if MSO option R amp S RTM B1 is installed RST CH1 lt ReferenceSource gt NONE CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MA1 MA2 MA3 MA4 MAS RE1 RE2 RE3 RE4 NONE CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MA1 MA2 MA3 MA4 MA5 RE1 RE2 RE3 RE4 DO D15 D70 D158 Second waveform reference source that is required for delay and phase mesurements MEASurement lt m gt DELay SLOPe lt SignalSlope gt lt ReferenceSlope gt Sets the edges to be used for delay measurement The associated waveforms are defined with MEASurement lt m gt SOURce Parameters lt SignalSlope gt POSitive NEGative Slope of source 1 first waveform RST POS EE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 339 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BESSERES Command Reference ReferenceSlope POSitive NEGative Slope of source 2 second waveform RST POS Firmware Software 03 400 MEASurement lt m gt RESult AC Tual lt MeasType gt Returns the result of the specified measurement type Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the measurement place Query parameters lt MeasType gt FREQuency PERiod PEAK UPEakvalue LPEakvalue PPCount NPCount RECount FECount HIGH
80. Directory to be queried absolute or relative path E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 447 R amp S9RTM20xx Remote Control Return values Count Example Usage Command Reference Number of files see MMEMory CATalog Query only MMEMory COPY lt FileSource gt lt FileDestination gt Copies data to another directory on the same or different storage device The file name can be changed too Setting parameters lt FileSource gt lt FileDestination gt Example Example Usage String parameter Name and path of the file to be copied String parameter Name and path of the new file If the file already exists it is over written without notice MMEM COPY INT SETTINGS SET001 SET USB_FRONT SETTINGS TESTSET1 SET chapter 15 3 3 2 Saving Copying and Loading Setup Data on page 461 Setting only MMEMory MOVE lt FileSource gt lt FileDestination gt Moves an existing file to a new location Setting parameters lt FileSource gt lt FileDestination gt Example Usage String parameter Path and name of the file to be moved String parameter Path and name of the new file MMEM MOVE INT SETTINGS SETOO1 SET USB FRONT SETTINGS SETO01 SET Setting only MMEMory DELete lt FileSource gt Removes a file from the specified directory Setting parameters lt FileSource gt String parameter
81. E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 433 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BREET Command Reference The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol LIN CONDition is set to IDENtifier IDData or IDERror Parameters Identifier String containing binary pattern Characters 0 1 and X are allowed Enter the 6 bit identifier without parity bits not the pro tected identifier SEARch PROTocol LIN DLENgth lt DataLength gt Defines the length of the data pattern the number of bytes in the pattern The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol LIN CONDition is set to IDData Parameters lt DataLength gt Range 1 to 8 Increment 1 RST 1 Default unit Byte SEARch PROTocol LIN DCONdition lt DataCondition gt Sets the comparison condition for data If the pattern contains at least one X don t care you can trigger on values equal or not equal to the specified value If the pattern contains only 0 and 1 you can also trigger on a range greater than or lower than the specified value The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol LIN CONDition is set to IDData Parameters lt DataCondition gt EQUAal NEQual GTHan LTHan RST EQU SEARch PROTocol LIN DATA Data Defines the data pattern The pattern length is defined with SEARch PROTocol LIN DLENgth The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol LIN CONDition is set to IDData Parameters lt Data gt String containing binary pattern
82. E S 167 REN We Le Te 168 PC Label E 172 PC Decode Resulta a a UM uS a a uu A 173 UART RS 232 Interface Option R amp S RTM K2 esee 175 The UART RS232 Interface 175 UART RS 232 Configuration sse nennen nnns 176 ART RS 232 RR ee E 179 UART RS 232 Decode ReSUItS c cccccceeeeeecneceeeesseeteceneeseeeteceneeteeateceneeseeatecerensesaes 183 CAN Option R amp S RTM K3 eeeseeeeseeseeseeeeen nennen nnn nnn nnne ntn n nennt nn nennen 185 CAN Keelt e uration me EDT 185 CAN Trigger une EE 186 CAN Label List EE 191 CAN Decode Results ee Eee re eg SEA ha gau yo bue cp SEN 192 Search on Decoded CAN Data 194 LIN Option R amp S RTM K3 eeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeen nennen nennen nnn n nnn nennen inn nnn nennt 197 He EIN dl ienn N a 197 LIN Configuration Settings nennen nnns 198 RERUM RIO ER SSS User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 6 R amp S9RTM20xx Contents 11 6 3 11 6 4 11 6 5 11 6 6 12 12 1 12 2 12 2 1 12 3 12 3 1 12 3 2 12 3 3 13 13 1 13 1 1 13 1 2 13 2 13 2 1 13 2 2 13 2 3 13 2 4 13 2 5 13 2 6 14 14 1 14 1 1 14 1 2 14 2 15 15 1 15 1 1 15 1 2 LIN Trigger Gettngs eee etcne tees rete eaaeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeiaeeeeeeeeeaas 199 AAA O e ta 202 LIN Decode Results 203 Search on Decoded LIN Data 205 Mixed Signal Option MSO R amp S RTM B1 208 About MSO A sorna
83. EE 25 KRISE S ERECTO DOLLS DLE 25 Ke 25 Nas SOU MM 26 i TP DE 26 Sample MOTE onte ete eee deed ees Area add ae pare eneen 26 eat ete rp 27 Decimation Mode Decimation reduces the data stream of the ADC to a stream of waveform points with lower sample rate and a less precise resolution if the oscilloscope captures more samples than the waveform memory can save Sample The oscilloscope acquires the input data with a sample rate which is aligned to the time base horizontal scale and the memory depth Usu ally most signals are displayed optimally with this acquisition mode if all trigger conditions are met Peak Detect The minimum and the maximum of n samples are recorded as wave form points the other samples are discarded Thus the instrument can detect fast signal peaks at slow time scale settings that would be missed with other acquisition modes High Resolu The average of n captured sample points is recorded as one waveform tion sample Averaging reduces the noise the result is a more precise waveform with higher vertical resolution Remote command CHANnel lt m gt TYPE on page 286 Wavef Arithmetic Waveform arithmetic builds the resulting waveform from several consecutive acquisitions of the signal envelope and average or by other operations on the captured data The arithmetic works with all sample modes and decimated waveforms Off No arithmetic is appli
84. ESB bit in the STB is set The ESE register can be set using the command ESE and read using the command ESE Table 15 4 Meaning of the bits used in the event status register Bit No Meaning 0 Operation Complete This bit is set on receipt of the command OPC exactly when all previous commands have been executed 1 Not used 2 Query Error This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the instrument without having sent a query or if it does not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instrument instead The cause is often a query which is faulty and hence cannot be executed 3 Device dependent Error This bit is set if a device dependent error occurs An error message with a number between 300 and 399 or a positive error number which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue 4 Execution Error This bit is set if a received command is syntactically correct but cannot be performed for other reasons An error message with a number between 200 and 300 which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue 5 Command Error This bit is set if a command is received which is undefined or syntactically incorrect An error message with a number between 100 and 200 which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 266 R amp S9RTM20xx Remot
85. Loading With R amp S RTM you can save and recall your measurement data device settings mask definitions equation sets waveform data and screenshots Data can be stored in the instrument or on external device it can be copied and converted depending on the available formats Ee EH uoo En 217 Quick Access with PEINT Key octanos po ane i iis 223 DEVICES dE rada etg eae 225 BEE e TEE 227 E Le E 230 e References Masks and Equation Sets Importftvport AA 232 13 2 1 Storage Locations The R amp S RTM provides three basic storage locations to store any data In the following these locations are refered to as storage devices e The Internal storage device is a flash memory in the instrument with about 8 MB memory size e The Front USB storage device indicates a USB flash drive that is connected to the USB connector on the front panel of the instrument e The Rear USB storage device indicates a USB flash drive that is connected to the USB connector on the rear panel of the instrument On each storage device data can be organized in folders as usual Therefore the R amp S RTM allows you to create folders or remove them wherever you need Device settings reference waveforms masks and equations sets can be directly saved to and loaded from any storage device Waveforms and screenshots can be saved to USB storage devices only To copy data from one storage device to another the Import Export functions are used
86. MAGkACTonSTOpEVENTMODE nennen nnne nnnnnr ssh tenns si n rnts sene res nist nnns sinerent sinn 357 MAGkK ACTionWEM ave EVEN COUN ccoo nnnn cnn nr a Eirean nar k nn rra rn rra ranas 358 MAGkACTonWEM ave EVEN MODE nennen nennen enn tne tle n nnne sehn nnns intres sinn Ennen Enae 357 MASI amp GHFIGODY TE 355 sie rc 357 Boi 355 MASK RESE COUNT is aes scscicacencce cess 357 Decl P 355 MASK SOURCE I erem te ete ects wae iua EE 355 ONE NR 355 MASK TES E 355 Dui miele lege M 357 MASKEXW DUR T M MASK YPOSition MAS ge TE T eu BEE MEASurement m ALL S TATe 2 rtr tienen rnc antes i eintreten iba nane raus 335 MEAGurementcmz AOEE oonccccinnccccnoniccnnnnnccnin nc RR ranma MEASurerientsm AON eer ad iei A A E MEASurement lt m gt ARESult MEAS rement m CATO6OgoOEy une eerie cece deste A tia 340 MEASurements m DELay SLOPe retro Eeer 339 MEASurements mA MAIN DEE 336 MEASurementsm gt RESUIEA VO io a 343 MEASurement lt m gt RESUIENPEAKO oi dad 344 MEASurement lt m gt RESult PPEak 344 MEAGurement mz RE Gut GT Dev 343 MEAGurement mz RESOICWEMCount A 344 MEAGurement mz RESO ACTualt seen cnn nan nnn sein nnne nan nc nara thst ess tr
87. Make sure to enter complete bytes TRIGger A CAN ACKerror lt AcknowledgeError gt Triggers on acknowledgement errors An acknowledgement error occurs when the trans mitter does not receive an acknowledgment a dominant bit during the Ack Slot The command is relevant if TRIGger A CAN TYPE is set to ERRCondition Parameters lt AcknowledgeError gt ON OFF RST OFF TRIGger A CAN BITSterror lt BitStuffingError gt Triggers on bit stuffing errors See also Stuff bit on page 188 The command is relevant if TRIGger A CAN TYPE is set to ERRCondition Parameters lt BitStuffingError gt ON OFF RST ON TRIGger A CAN CRCerror lt CRCerror gt Triggers on errors in the Cyclic Redundancy Check The command is relevant if TRIGger A CAN TYPE is set to ERRCondition Parameters lt CRCerror gt ON OFF RST OFF TRIGger A CAN FORMerror lt FormError gt Triggers on form errors A form error occurs when a fixed form bit field contains one or more illegal bits The command is relevant if TRIGger A CAN TYPE is set to ERRCondition A _ lt lt User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 410 Command Reference Parameters lt FormError gt ON OFF RST OFF CAN Decode Results BUS Sb CAN e TEE 411 BUSP CAN FRAMo s gt TV EE 411 BUSsb CANTRAMe spD STATUS anionini aaa iaa aa a aaa aika 412 BUS lt b gt CAN FRAM K lt N gt STARI cccccccceccecsccecseceeceteccu
88. PATTern WIDTh DELTa on page 310 3 3 2 7 Rise Time Fall Time The rise time trigger also known as slew rate or transition trigger can detect fast or slow rising or falling edges selectively It triggers on edges if the rise or fall time from the lower to higher voltage level or vice versa is shorter or longer as defined or inside or outside a specified time range The trigger finds slew rates that are faster than expected or per missible to avoid overshooting and other interfering effects It also detects very slow edges violating the timing in pulse series Risetime Polarity Upper Level ren Level Comparison Rise Time Time Back TH E E ol oem 7 Polarity Sets the edge the transition time of which is to be analyzed Rising Rise time trigger User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 50 R amp S RTM20xx Triggers es Reference for Triggers Falling Fall time trigger Remote command TRIGger A RISetime SLOPe on page 311 Upper Level Sets the upper voltage threshold When the signal crosses this level the slew rate mea surement starts or stops depending on the selected polarity To set the value using the Level 50 rotary knob press the knob to toggle upper and lower level and then turn the knob Remote command TRIGger A LEVel n RISetime UPPer on page 311 Lower Level Sets the lower voltage threshold When the signal crosses this level the slew rate mea surement starts or stops depending on the se
89. Parameters lt TriggerMode gt AUTO NORMal AUTO The instrument triggers repeatedly after a time interval if the trigger conditions are not fulfilled If a real trigger occurs it takes prece dence NORMal The instrument acquires a waveform only if a trigger occurs RST AUTO TRIGger A LEVel lt n gt VALue lt Level gt Sets the trigger treshold voltage for all A trigger types that require a trigger level Suffix lt n gt 1 5 Selects the trigger input 1 4 select the corresponding channel 5 is the external trigger input The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters lt Level gt Range Depends on vertical scale Default unit V TRIGger A FINDlevel Sets the trigger level of the A trigger event to 50 of the signal amplitude IESSE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 302 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BREET Command Reference Usage Event TRIGger A SOURce Source Sets the trigger source for the selected A trigger type Parameters Source CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 EXTernanalog LINE SBUS1 SBUSA DO D15 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 One of the input channels is the trigger source Available channels depend on the instrument type EXTernanalog External Trigger Input on the rear panel LINE AC line for the edge trigger SBUS Serial buses 1 to 4 DO D15 If MSO option R amp S RTM B1 is installed the digital channels DO to D15 can be used as trigger sources for edge width and pat
90. Percent Degree T Pi Pa Pascal m Meter g Acceleration C Degrees Celsius K Kelvin F Degrees Fahrenheit N Newton J Joule C Coulomb SSES User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 102 R amp S RTM20xx Mathematics m HH Reference for Mathematics Wb Weber T Tesla dez dezimal bin binary hex hexadezimal oct octal DIV Division graticule px pixel Bit Bit s Byte Bd Baud Sa Samples Sa sec Samples per second cyc cycles Trc Traces Sa X I Rising edge L Falling edge Jl Positive impulse U Negative impulse Ev Events Symb symbols Sy s symbols per second Wfm waveforms Edit Equations Provides functions to configure the calculations for the mathematical channels d N f Y Y A Equation Operator Operand 1 Operand 2 Equation Label Edit Constant Remote command CALCulate MATH lt m gt EXPRession DEFine on page 346 Equation Edit Equations Selects one of five possible mathematical channels Operator Edit Equations Defines the operation to be performed on the specified operands in the mathematical channel Addition Op1 Op2 Adds the two operands Za aie al LLILI AN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 103 R amp S RTM20xx Mathematics Subtraction Multiplication Division Maximum Reference for Mathematics
91. R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control E Command Reference STATusOUEGuonable MAGk CONDmon senes nn nsns nnns nsn nhan s 456 STATUS QUESHonable ENABle E 456 STATus QUESHonable COVerl ad ENABI6 2 2 Iter eit letale rer eain rea eR AEN 456 STATus QUESIIonable LIMIEENABIG EE 456 STATusOUEzuonable MAGKENABle iiini a aaa aaa 456 STATus QUEStonable EMVEINEUI iicet aa aa Aas REENEN 457 STATus QUEStionable COVerload EVEN ccone aiina iania aiaia 457 STATus QUEStionable LIMit EVEN 457 STATUS QUEStionable MASKDEVENI 2 2 naana pn penu pure c ze d curan Dd ined 457 SIATUs QUESomnable NTRAsIlo 5 2 2 ZE eei re e roter eee aR 457 STATus QUEStionable COVerloadNTRansition 457 STATUS QUESHon able LIMIENTRARSIOR lisina cenare dd dto e Reano ddeze eene 457 STATUS QUEStonable MASKINTRONSIION cil iia 457 STATus QUESItionablePTRAtisill OD enne aiii add a ii ad cmn RE n nana 457 STATusOUEGuonable COVerload D Ransition 457 STATus QUESHonable LIMIEPTRanSIGOR EREN e nd eu rne Reden EES 457 STATus QUESHonable MASKJPTRanSITOn eicere toes nare genit e Dac nero bnc coe ie serv AA 457 STATus PRESet Resets all STATUS QUESTIONALBLE registers Usage Event STATus QUEStionable CONDition STATus QUEStionable COVerload CONDition STATus QUEStionable LIMit CONDition STATus QUEStionable MASK CONDition Returns the contents of the CONDition part of the status register to check for question
92. RESult ACTual Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the measurement R amp S9RTM20xx Remote Control Parameters lt MeasType gt Command Reference FREQuency PERiod PEAK UPEakvalue LPEakvalue PPCount NPCount RECount FECount HIGH LOW AMPLitude MEAN RMS RTIMe FTIMe PDCYcle NDCYcle PPWidth NPWidth CYCMean CYCRms STDDev CYCStddev TFRequency TPERiode DELay PHASe BWIDth POVershoot NOVershoot TBFRequency TBPeriod For a detailed description see Meas Type on page 95 FREQuency Frequency of the signal The result is based on the length of the left most signal period within the displayed section of the wave form of the selected channel PERiod Length of the left most signal period within the displayed section of the waveform of the selected channel PEAK Peak to peak value within the displayed section of the waveform of the selected channel UPEakvalue Maximum value within the displayed section of the waveform of the selected channel LPEakvalue Minimum value within the displayed section of the waveform of the selected channel PPCount Counts positive pulses NPCount Counts negative pulses RECount Counts the number of rising edges FECount Counts the number of falling edges HIGH Mean value of the high level of a square wave LOW Mean value of the low level of a square wave AMPLitude Amplitude of a square wave MEAN Mean value of t
93. RX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt o gt STARt on page 0 US lt b gt UART RX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt o gt STOP on page O e H d ug ud ug m np oup np nj US lt b gt UART RX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt o gt VALue on page 0 CAN Option R amp S RTM K3 CAN is the Controller Area Network a bus system used within automotive network archi tecture CAN Configuration Access PROTOCOL gt Bus type CAN gt Configuration Data Type Sample point Bit rate Predefined Find Level Y des Back CH1 can H can Defined Bit Rate 50kBit s ee Na K ec Data Sets the source of the data line All channel waveforms can be used If the MSO option R amp S RTM B1 is installed digital channels can also be used as source Remote command BUS lt b gt CAN DATA SOURce on page 406 Type Selects the CAN High or CAN Low line CAN uses both lines for differential signal trans mission If you measure with a differential probe connect the probe to both CAN H and CAN L lines and select the data Type CAN H If you use a single ended probe connect the probe to either CAN_L or CAN_H and select the data type accordingly Remote command BUS lt b gt CAN TYPE on page 406 EE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 185 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis CAN Option R amp S RTM K3 Sample point Sets the position of the sample point within the bit in percent of the nominal bit time The sample point d
94. S RTM20xx Remote Control BEES Command Reference SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock CLEVel lt ClockLevel gt Sets the voltage level for the clock signal Clock level and clock edge define the reference point for setup and hold time Parameters lt ClockLevel gt Range depends on vertical scale Firmware Software FW 03 800 SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock DLEVel lt DataLevel gt Sets the voltage level for the data signal The data lavel defines the point of data transition Parameters lt DataLevel gt Range depends on vertical scale Firmware Software FW 03 800 SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock CLEVel DELTa lt LevelDelta gt SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock DLEVel DELTa lt LevelDelta gt Set a hysteresis range to the clock and data levels in order to avoid unwanted search results caused by noise oscillation around the level For a rising edge the hysteresis is below the search level Otherwise for a falling edge the hysteresis is above the level Parameters lt LevelDelta gt Range Lower limit depends on vertical scale and other set tings no upper limit Firmware Software FW 03 800 SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock CEDGe lt ClockEdge gt Sets the edge of the clock signal to define the time reference point for the setup and hold time Parameters lt ClockEdge gt POSitive NEGative ElTHer RST POS Firmware Software FW 03 800 SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock HTIMe lt HoldTime gt Sets the minimum time after the clock edge whil
95. Selects the version of the LIN standard that is used in the DUT The setting mainly defines the checksum version used during decoding LEE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 198 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis LIN Option R amp S RTM K3 The most common version is LIN 2 x For mixed networks or if the standard is unknown set the LIN standard to Auto Remote command BUS lt b gt LIN STANdard on page 422 Bit rate Sets the number of transmitted bits per second The maximum bit rate is 20 kbit s To select a bit rate from the list of predefined values set Bit rate to Defined Bit Rate and then select the value with Predefined To set another value set Bit rate to User Bit Rate and then enter the value with User Remote command BUS lt b gt LIN BITRate on page 423 Find Level The instrument analyzes all lines that are configured for the selected bus and sets the threshold for digitization of analog signals for each channel If no level can be found the existing value remains unchanged and you can set the thresholds manually in the chan nel menu CH N gt More page 2 gt Threshold See Threshold on page 31 Find Level is not relevant for digital channels MSO option R amp S RTM B1 Thresholds for digital channels are set in the Logic Threshold menu Remote command CHANnel m HReshold FINDlevel on page 379 11 6 3 LIN Trigger Settings Access SETUP Trigger gt Trigger ty
96. The file format is always SET and the file size is about 2 76 kB You can exchange stored device settings between R amp S RTM instruments also between 2 channel and 4 channel instruments The default instrument settings can be restored with PRESET or FILE gt Device Settings gt Default sett Saving and Loading Device Settings To save device settings on page 225 e To load device settings on page 226 To save device settings 1 Press FILE gt Device Settings gt Save 2 Configure the storage location as described in To select the storage directory on page 218 3 Enter the file name as described in To define a new file or directory name on page 218 gt A Optionally press Comment and enter a description of the settings 5 Press Save I User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 225 R amp S RTM20xx Data and File Management Saving and Loading Note To save the device settings several times by pressing simply the PRINT key assign the Device Settings to the PRINT key as described in chapter 13 2 2 1 Configuring the PRINT Key Behavior on page 224 To load device settings 1 Press FILE gt Device Settings gt Load A file explorer is displayed 2 If necessary select the storage device and directory described in To select the stor age directory on page 218 3 Select the file that contains the device settings Use the Navigation knob to scroll through the files 4 Press Loa
97. The optimal persistence time is determined automatically by the instru ment Manual User defined persistence according to Persist Time setting Remote command DISPlay PERSistence STATe on page 318 DISPlay PERSistence TIME AUTO on page 318 Persist Time Intensities User defined persistence time if Manual persistence is selected Each new data point remains on the screen for the duration defined here Possible values are from 50 ms to 9 6 s or Infinite If Infinite is selected each new data point remains on the screen infinitely until this setting is changed or the persistence is cleared Remote command DISPlay PERSistence TIME on page 318 DISPlay PERSistence INFinite on page 318 Clear Persist Intensities Clears the displayed persistence on the screen Remote command DISPlay PERSistence CLEar on page 319 Dots Only If activated only the individual data points are displayed If deactivated the individual data points are connected by a line Define the strength of the line using the INTEN SITY knob on the left side of the screen Remote command DISPlay STYLe on page 319 Inverse Brightn Inverts the brightness level of the signals Normally values that occur frequently are brighter than rare values This setting inverts this behavior Rare values are brighter than frequent values Use this setting in combination with persistence to detect rare values within the waveform Remote comma
98. Usage Displays information on the instrument and information on used and available memory space on all available storage devices Default sett Restores the default device settings These settings among others are also restored with the PRESET key 13 2 4 Waveforms A waveform can be saved in two ways e As a reference waveform for later use with R amp S RTM REF key See chapter 5 Reference Waveforms on page 74 e As data in various formats directly to a USB flash drive for analysis by other means FILE gt Waveforms This way is described in the current chapter If you want to save many waveforms you can assign the function to the PRINT key Infrequent save operations can be started from the File menu See also chap ter 13 2 2 Quick Access with PRINT key on page 223 13 2 4 1 Waveform File Formats Data of all waveforms channel reference and math waveforms is saved as a suc cession of values or pairs of values Pairs of values are written as two consecutive single values Depending on the file format only amplitude values are stored or the amplitude values are stored together with their time value or frequency value in FFT mode With export import you can change the target file format and convert the data In order to reload waveform data as a reference waveform it must be stored in TRF or CSV format TRF Format TRF is the specific binary format for reference waveforms of the R amp S RTM It contains
99. V Smaller or much larger signals require specialized equipment e Signal frequency High frequencies require advanced equipment in order to get cor rect results e Source characteristic The source impedance is the decisive factor when choosing the suitable connection 2 1 4 1 Voltage Probes The following table provides an overview on common voltage probes and their usage EE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 16 R amp S RTM20xx Acquisition and Waveform Setup EENS Basics Table 2 1 Voltage probes overview Probe type Attenuation Typical bandwidth Oscilloscope Usage range input Passive high impe 1 1 10 MHz 1MO Low speed low level dance signals Passive high impe 10 1 500 MHz 1MO General purpose dance Passive low impe 10 1 up to 10 GHz 500 High frequency dance Active single ended 10 1 up to 10 GHz 500 High speed Active differential 10 1 500 Floating For a list of recommended probes refer to the R amp S RTM product brochure Besides the possible input voltage range two factors are very important when selecting a voltage probe Bandwidth and impedance over frequency e Bandwidth The combination of probe and oscilloscope builds up a system The resulting system bandwidth is approximately determined with 2 2 3 1 NE B W system B W probe B Deeg To measure the signal with low measurement error the system bandwidth should be higher than the highest frequency component of the sig
100. Y Scale FFT Setup Changes the vertical scaling of the FFT display in V dBm per division Note If the FFT frequency range is selected Span Center is highlighted the Y Scale can be defined using the vertical SCALE rotary knob See also SCALE Y Scale on page 29 Remote command CALCulate MATH m SCALe on page 346 YT Window FFT Setup Defines the width of the time base extract from the Y t window for which the FFT is calculated The extract is indicated by white lines in the Y t window The value is indi cated by W in the information bar above the FFT window Note If the FFT time base extract is selected W P is highlighted the width can be adjusted using the horizontal SCALE rotary knob N User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 119 R amp S RTM20xx FFT Reference for FFT key See also figure 8 1 Remote command CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT TIME RANGe on page 353 Position FFT Setup Defines the position of the time base extract in the Y t window for which the FFT is calculated The value is indicated by P in the information bar above the FFT window Note If the FFT time base extract is selected W P is highlighted the position can be adjusted using the horizontal POSITION rotary knob See also figure 8 1 Remote command CALCulate MATH m FFT TIME POSition on page 354 Points FFT Setup Defines how many samples are used for FFT calculation The value is changed in 2 s
101. adjusts to the data length defined in the data format 8 or 16 bit Data conversion Definition the sample numbers start with O and end with record length 1 Sample time t n xincrement xOrigin First sample t 4 998000058E 7 Xstart Last sample t4999 4999 2E 1 4 998E 7 5 0 E Xstop LEE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 459 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control 15 3 2 15 3 2 1 Programming Examples Sample value Y yOrigin yincrement byteValue The format UINT 8 has the data range 0 to 255 The voltage value for byte value 128 is Y 2 55E 2E 4 128 0 0001 The center of the display at position 0 div always has the byte value 127 5 The corre sponding voltage value is Y 2 55E 2E 4 127 5 0 8 bit and 16 bit data At the end of the above example the 8 bit waveform is read as 16 bit data for example OxFF is read OxFFOO or Ox1A is read 0x1A00 The yOrigin value is the same in both cases but the yincrement differs 8 bit data 16 bit data Result 2e 128 7 8125E 32768 0 0256 V ylncrement byteValue 2e4 125 7 8125E 32000 0 025 V In the reverse case if a 16 bit waveform is read with 8 bit data format data precision may be reduced Data values ar truncated and only the more significiant bits remain For example the 16 bit data Oxabcd is read Oxab in 8 bit format and cd is lost Search Searching for a Pulse o
102. aiaiai aaaea 331 CUbRGor cmz TRACkingtSTATel nennen nnn nntr rca nn anne nn arrancan nan nn rra nc siis tnn s nnn 330 CURSor lt m gt X1Position CURSor lt m gt X2Position CURSor lt m gt X3Position WEE de elle lu OT 330 CUbRG or zmz D I talNyVerse nennen nennen nn nn nan nr nn name re rnnn enn siet erts sen ene sinn rnts sena 332 CURSor m XDEbEta VALUE anida a Xe cec HERE es 332 Ee ue e Me RTE TE EE 333 CURSor lt m gt Y 1Position CURSor lt m gt Y2Position CURSor lt m gt Y3Position CURSOrSM gt COUPIING EE 330 CURSor lt m YDELta LOPE Pci lcd 333 CURSor m dE TIET 333 UUU User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 467 R amp S RTM20xx List of Commands CURSorsm gt YRATIO UN ME 334 CURSor m YHRATIio VALue err eir ore etr hr Ern tr Fir inei denn nh ee E EE HERE Heo ERE Rage 334 e IT dE le D IN RE 333 DlGital m DISPlay rtr rte re ter weaver rendere Pd ni E Hn eek en Rd ERE ad aa ie key ated 435 REI Ee 436 DIGitalem s LAB Cli C 436 DlGitalkm gt RE RE 437 RUE EN de TE 436 DIG tal ER c a 437 later Ee eenegen Eeer 435 DiGital amp m T HGouplitig 22 ere rre A ren erede ee ke o ia ei pee Rea ETE ead 436 RUE E He e DEE 435 DISPlay GRID SIY dE 319 DISPlay INTensity BACKlight lt BTE IVA BESTE ACID EEN TRUE gll CAE ee E DISPlay LANGuage E DISPlay MODE geegent end sl ewen westo
103. alcalinos p ej las celdas de litio pueden explotar Para garantizar la seguridad del producto las celdas o bater as solo deben ser sustituidas por el tipo Rohde 8 Schwarz correspondiente ver lista de recambios Las bater as y celdas deben reciclarse y no deben tirarse a la basura dom stica Las bater as o acumuladores que contienen plomo mercurio o cadmio deben tratarse como residuos especiales Respete en esta relaci n las normas nacionales de eliminaci n y reciclaje Transporte 1 El producto puede tener un peso elevado Por eso es necesario desplazarlo o transportarlo con precauci n y si es necesario usando un sistema de elevaci n adecuado p ej una carretilla elevadora a fin de evitar lesiones en la espalda u otros da os personales 1171 0000 42 07 Page 13 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Las asas instaladas en los productos sirven solamente de ayuda para el transporte del producto por personas Por eso no est permitido utilizar las asas para la sujeci n en o sobre medios de transporte como p ej gr as carretillas elevadoras de horquilla carros etc Es responsabilidad suya fijar los productos de manera segura a los medios de transporte o elevaci n Para evitar da os personales o dafios en el producto siga las instrucciones de seguridad del fabricante del medio de transporte o elevaci n utilizado Si se utiliza el producto dentro de un veh culo recae de manera exclusiva en el conductor la res
104. are created by copying the waveform and the limits are moved and stretched The result is a tolerance tube around the signal that is used as mask Once a mask has been defined the copied waveform envelope is kept in the instrument until the next mask is defined or loaded The settings for stretch and move are not kept If you want to keep the complete mask definition or you need more than one mask you can save the mask to and load from any storage device internal memory or external USB flash device It is also possible to copy the saved masks to another storage device with Export Import Masks In an export import operation the name of the target file can be changed so you can copy and rename the file in one operation You can also change the target file format and convert the data during export import To copy a mask use FILE gt Import Export Masks See also e chapter 9 1 3 File Formats for Masks on page 123 e chapter 13 2 1 2 Importing and Exporting Data on page 218 9 1 2 Mask Testing The mask test analyzes whether tested signal runs inside the mask The overall test result is shown in the results table Total 2785 2s left column number of tested acquisitions and test duration middle column number of passed acquisitions green and number of failed acquisitions red right column percentage share of passed and failed acquisitions During a mask test various actions can be executed when mask violation
105. are employed in the same way on different devices The headers of these commands consist of followed by three letters Many common commands are related to the Status Reporting System Available common commands uo EU 274 ur PP A TE 274 ES Bes 275 KEE 275 lei RTE 275 Loo m 275 POPI KEE 275 y EL 276 ul heed 276 gcc EET 276 yl mU 276 Uic e S 276 A eo A E 277 A 277 CAL Performs a self alignment of the instrument and then generates a status response Return values 0 indicate an error Usage Query only CLS CLear Status Sets the status byte STB the standard event register ESR and the EVENt part of the QUEStionable and the OPERation registers to zero The command does not alter the mask and transition parts of the registers It clears the output buffer Usage Setting only ERA lt lt 5555551 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 274 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control RES Command Reference ESE lt Value gt Event Status Enable Sets the event status enable register to the specified value The query returns the con tents of the event status enable register in decimal form Parameters lt Value gt Range 0 to 255 ESR Event Status Read Returns the contents of the event status register in decimal form and subsequently se
106. area TSTamp PREVious Moves the previous marker timestamp to the left to the reference point of the display or zoom area Usage Event TSTamp CLEar Deletes the marker timestamp at the reference point The reference point is set with TIMebase REFerence Usage Event TSTamp ACLear Deletes all markers timestamps ES User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 321 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BREET Command Reference Usage Event 15 2 7 Reference Waveforms For data queries and conversion consider also the following commands e FORMat DATA on page 278 e REFCurve lt m gt DATA XINCrement on page 280 e REFCurve lt m gt DATA XORigin on page 279 e REFCurve lt m gt DATA YINCrement on page 280 e REFCurve lt m gt DATA YORigin on page 280 e REFCurve lt m gt DATA YRESolution on page 281 REFGCUENVeSms STA EE 322 Ger EU 322 REFCurve lt m gt SOURCE CATAl0G 2 eecececeeeee cece eee ce eae eee ea eee teteeeeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeaeaeaaeeaaneneeeees 323 er rie EE 323 Ciz el BI poculum 323 REFC rmesm gt LOAD I E 324 REFGOurVesme LOADIS TA KEE 324 REFGC rvesm HORIzontalSCAL6 aos eenie a ra a aan ne n reatu acte aii 324 REFCuve im HORizontal ee el DEE 324 REFCUVE lt m VERTICAl SOCAL EN 325 REFCUNe me VER Teal e e DEET 325 PREF CURSED NEE 325 REFCUNG lt M gt DATAIHEADGR Poi EEN ieri ENNEN SESE rra aed i NNN ENER NEEN ENER EEN SEENEN deu
107. be damaged and that no one can be hurt by for example tripping over the cable or suffering an electric shock 1171 0000 42 07 Page 3 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Basic Safety Instructions The product may be operated only from TN TT supply networks fuse protected with max 16 A higher fuse only after consulting with the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies Do not insert the plug into sockets that are dusty or dirty Insert the plug firmly and all the way into the socket provided for this purpose Otherwise sparks that result in fire and or injuries may occur Do not overload any sockets extension cords or connector strips doing so can cause fire or electric shocks For measurements in circuits with voltages V ms gt 30 V suitable measures e g appropriate measuring equipment fuse protection current limiting electrical separation insulation should be taken to avoid any hazards Ensure that the connections with information technology equipment e g PCs or other industrial computers comply with the IEC60950 1 EN60950 1 or IEC61010 1 EN 61010 1 standards that apply in each case Unless expressly permitted never remove the cover or any part of the housing while the product is in operation Doing so will expose circuits and components and can lead to injuries fire or damage to the product If a product is to be permanently installed the connection between the protective conductor termina
108. can also change the target file format and convert the data during export import 1 2 In the FILE menu press the Import Export softkey for the required data type Define the source file for the copy operation a Press Source A file explorer is displayed b If necessary switch to the storage location that contains the source file by press ing Storage Internal Front Rear c Select the source file Use the Navigation knob to scroll through the directories To change the directory scroll to the name of the directory and press the knob or press Change dir d Press Load The source file is selected but not yet loaded to the R amp S RTM Define the destination directory for the copy operation The source file will be copied here a Press Destination A file explorer is displayed b If necessary switch to the storage location that contains the storage directory by pressing Storage Internal Front Rear c Select the storage directory Use the Navigation knob to scroll through the directories To change the directory scroll to the name of the directory and press the knob or press Change dir Press Create dir to create a new subdirectory under the selected directory Enter a name for the subdirectory as described in To define a new file or directory name on page 218 d Press Accept to confirm the selection Change the File Name of the destination file if necessary Note If a fi
109. change the scaling for the main time base the width of the FFT time base extract is also changed 5 Turn the horizontal POSITION rotary knob to define the offset of the trigger point to the reference point for Os Turn the knob counter clockwise to move the trigger point to the left or clockwise to move it to the right Note that when you change the trigger offset the position of the FFT time base extract is also changed 8 2 3 Measuring on FFT You can perform cursor measurements in FFT mode Automatic measurements are not available 1 Press FFT then set up and configure the FFT diagram 2 Press CURSOR 3 In the Cursor menu set the cursor lines to the required positions Use Prev Peak and Next Peak to set the selected cursor line to the level peaks See also chapter 6 1 3 Cursor Menu on page 82 The frequency and level results are shown in the results table Prev peak Next peak 8 3 Reference for FFT key The FFT key enables the FFT mode and opens the FFT menu FFT Ai Ee EE F Wim Arithmetic See also chapter 8 2 Configuring and Using FFT Calculations on page 111 e chapter 8 1 FFT Display on page 110 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 115 R amp S RTM20xx FFT FEE Reference for FFT key ry EEN 116 VA WIDE ATM TRIER ES 116 Be ETE 117 ior EE 117 e ET 118 FFS D EE 118 E NEN EEE TA E EET eeneg 119 EENEG 119 SA A 119 EA idas 119 A 120 PU iii ia ii did 120 PA O 120 L
110. check compliance with rated specifications instrument function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the instrument by replacing modules Documentation updates You can download the newest version of the Getting Started and User Manual from the Downloads Manuals section on the Rohde amp Schwarz Scope of the Art Web page http www scope of the art com product rtm html E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 9 R amp S9RTM20xx Preface Conventions Used in the Documentation The online help is included in the firmware update package The help has to be updated separately to get the information suitable for the firmware version The firmware and help update package is available in the Downloads Firmware section on the Rohde amp Schwarz Scope of the Art Web page and on the Documentation CD ROM 1 2 Conventions Used in the Documentation This chapter describes the conventions used throughout this documentation 1 2 1 Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as dia ments log boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quota tion marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands program code File names commands c
111. conversion if binary data format is defined FORM UINT 8 16 32 Return values lt Xorigin gt Time ins User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 279 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control NT SSS si Command Reference Example See chapter 15 3 1 2 Reading Waveform Data in Unsigned Inte ger Format on page 458 Usage Query only CHANnel lt m gt DATA XINCrement CHANnel lt m gt DATA ENVelope XINCrement CALCulate MATH lt m gt DATA XINCrement REFCurve lt m gt DATA XINCrement Return the time difference between two adjacent samples of the indicated waveform The commands are relevant for data conversion if binary data format is defined FORM UINT 8 16 32 Return values lt Xincrement gt Time ins Example See chapter 15 3 1 2 Reading Waveform Data in Unsigned Inte ger Format on page 458 Usage Query only CHANnel lt m gt DATA YORigin CHANnel lt m gt DATA ENVelope YORigin CALCulate MATH lt m gt DATA YORigin REFCurve lt m gt DATA YORigin Return the voltage value for binary value O of the indicated waveform The commands are relevant for data conversion if binary data format is defined FORM UINT 8 16 32 Return values lt Y origin gt Voltage in V Example See chapter 15 3 1 2 Reading Waveform Data in Unsigned Inte ger Format on page 458 Usage Query only CHANnel lt m gt DATA YINCrement CHANnel lt m gt DATA ENVelope YINCrement CALCulate MATH lt m gt DATA YINCrement REFCurve lt m gt DAT
112. data format and read the channel data eee User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 458 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control i SSS Programming Examples Command description in chapter 15 2 3 General Remote Settings and Queries on page 277 RST TIM SCAL 1E 7 CHAN DATA POIN DMAX Set data range SING OPC lt 1 CHAN DATA HEAD Read header 4 9980E 07 5 0000E 07 5000 1 Xstart Xstop record length in samples CHAN DATA YRES Read vertical resolution lt 8 CHAN DATA YOR Read voltage value for binary value 0 lt 2 549999943E 2 CHAN DATA XOR Read time of the first sample lt 4 998000058E 7 CHAN DATA XINC Read time between two adjacent samples 2 000000023E 10 FORM UINT 8 FORM Set data format to unsigned integer 8 bit lt UINT 8 CHAN DATA YINC Read voltage value per bit 1 999999949E 4 CHAN DATA Read channel data lt 128 125 120 5000 bytes total FORM UINT 16 FORM Change data format to unsigned integer 16 bit lt UINT 16 CHAN DATA YINC Read voltage value per bit 7 812499803E 7 CHAN DATA Read channel data 32768 32000 30720 10000 bytes total Note the following correlations e The number of received data values matches the number of samples indicated in the header e The time of the first sample XORigin matches the start time Xstart indicated in the header e The Y increment
113. display each label individually The labels are shown on the the right side of the display You can enter a label text in several ways e Select a predefined string from the Library e Enter a user defined text using Edit Label Remote command DIGital lt m gt LABel on page 436 Bit Label Selects the digital channel for which the label is to be defined E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 210 R amp S9RTM20xx Mixed Signal Option MSO R amp S RTM B1 12 3 12 3 1 Parallel Buses Label Label Displays or hides the label of the selected digital channel Remote command DIGital m LABel STATe on page 437 Library Label Selects a label text from a list of frequently used terms Edit Label Label Opens the on screen keyboard to enter any label text The maximum name length is 8 characters and only ASCII characters provided on the on screen keyboard can be used POSITION The vertical POSITION rotary knob moves the digital channels vertically on the screen It affects all visible dgital channels Remote command DIGital m POSition on page 436 SCALE The vertical SCALE rotary knob sets the size of the digital channels Three sizes are available small medium and large display The setting affects all visible dgital channels Remote command DIGital lt m gt SIZE on
114. does not alter the path The comma separates several parameters of a command The question mark forms a query The asterisk marks a common command E Quotation marks introduce a string and terminate it The hash symbol introduces binary octal hexadecimal and block data e Binary B10110 e Octal 07612 e Hexa HF3A7 e Block 21312 A white space ASCII Code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank separates the header from the parameters Structure of a command line A command line may consist of one or several commands It is terminated by one of the following e a lt New Line gt e a lt New Line with EOI e an EOI together with the last data byte Several commands in a command line must be separated by a semicolon If the next command belongs to a different command system the semicolon is followed by a colon Example MMEM COPY Testi MeasurementXY HCOP ITEM ALL This command line contains two commands The first command belongs to the MMEM system the second command belongs to the HCOP system N User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 257 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control A Basics If the successive commands belong to the same system having one or several levels in common the command line can be abbreviated To this end the second command after the semicolon starts with the level that lies below the common levels The colon following the semicolon must be om
115. dont di tot 10 110 XX XX RR RARA AR AR 0xB 0xB 0x6 11 2 3 2 SPI SSPI Trigger Settings The complete SPI SSPI trigger is configured in the Source and Setup menus Trigger Type Source Protocol SSPI y Triggers are only available if Decode is enabled SPUSSPI TMOGER SOURCE EA eeh 160 e SPUSSPIUTROISer SUP EE 160 SPI SSPI Trigger Source Access TRIGGER SETUP gt Trigger Type Protocol SPI or SSPI gt Source B1 B2 B3 B4 Select one of the configured and decoded buses as trigger source SPI SSPI Trigger Setup Access TRIGGER SETUP gt Trigger Type Protocol SPI or SSPI gt Setup User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 160 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis SPI SSPI Bus Option R amp S RTM K1 o EE 161 lt EE 161 LI EE 161 Sek EE e Ee 161 E Ce EE 161 L Number of Bits c cccccccsccceecceccsecesscececceccencecenceseceeeaesccanecneetseaceaeseaeeaes 162 Ec c1 ANREDE 162 De pa XXE 162 GETT AT 162 E EE 162 Frame Start Sets the trigger to the start of the message For SPI the frame starts when the chip select signal CS changes to the active state For SSPI the frame starts when the idle time has expired Remote command TRIGger A SPI MODE on page 380 BSTart Frame End Sets the trigger to the end of the message For SPI the frame ends when the chip select signal CS changes to the inactive state For SSPI the frame ends when the idle time has expired aft
116. e aa e ada 330 CURSO Me COUPIING E iii idad 330 CURSO mea XC OUPIING ui id 330 CURSO MASIA ME add dusted 331 CURSOS MA S SOS EE 331 CURSO M SRR GOK en ne eie ie deeg iii 331 CURSO MSP ci NSA id ala 331 CUbR or zmz TRACkingSGCALelgGratel retten canaria nn nnn rrr hne ns 331 CURSO ME RESU E 332 CURSO MTM XDEHAINVETS O io ee Ie e ERE 332 CURSOR mX DELI VALYS iaai aaa a a a aiaa denda 332 CURSO mM YPE ro Ee EE 333 CURSor lt mirt DELA VALUS ui asa 333 GURSor lt mo XRA TIONIINIT EE 333 CUR orzmzs SRATIOVAL uef a trennen nsns inna nnn nnns 333 CURSORS RATO TR WEEN 334 GURSoerem RT 334 Command Reference CURSor lt m gt AOFF Switches the cursor off Suffix lt m gt 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Usage Event CURSor lt m gt STATe State Activates or deactivates the cursor measurement Suffix lt m gt 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF CURSor lt m gt SOURce Source Defines the source of the cursor measurement Suffix m 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control 8m ee Command Reference Parameters lt Source gt NONE CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MA1 MA2 MA3 MA4 MAS RE1 RE2 RE3 RE4 XY1 DO D15 D70 D158 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Active channel waveform 1 to 4 MA1 MA2 MA3 MA4 MA5 Active math channels 1 to 5 RE1 RE2 RE3 RE4 Active reference channels 1 to 4 XY1
117. each bit is assigned a weighted value The decimal number is calculated as the sum of the weighted values of all bits in the register that are set to 1 Weigh 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 Example The decimal value 40 32 8 indicates that bits no 3 and 5 in the status register e g the QUEStionable status summary bit and the ESB bit in the STatus Byte are set Error Queue Each error state in the instrument leads to an entry in the error queue The entries of the error queue are detailed plain text error messages that can be looked up in the Error Log or queried via remote control using SYSTem ERRor NEXT or SYSTem ERRor ALL Each call of SYSTem ERRor NEXT provides one entry from the error queue If no error messages are stored there any more the instrument responds with 0 No error EM User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 271 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BREET Basics The error queue should be queried after every SRQ in the controller program as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status registers Especially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried regularly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there as well 15 1 6 5 Reset Values of the Status Reporting System The following table contains the different commands and events causing the status reporting system to be reset None of the
118. elements and waveform to your needs See chapter 4 1 General Display Settings on page 54 for details You can also display and configure XY diagrams to combine the voltage levels of two waveforms in one diagram This display mode is described in chapter 4 2 XY Dia gram on page 61 Furthermore you can zoom into waveforms to analyze the results in more detail The zoom display mode is described in chapter 4 3 Zoom on page 66 In a Y t diagram and in zoom mode you can set markers to mark positions of interest in the waveform See chapter 4 4 Markers on page 71 for details In addition to zoom and XY diagram modes the following functional modes are available e FFT analysis see chapter 8 2 Configuring and Using FFT Calculations on page 111 e Mask testing see chapter 9 2 Working with Masks on page 124 4 1 General Display Settings General display settings adjust the visibility of diagram elements and waveforms The individual diagram elements can be shown or hidden e Basic diagram elements grid and crosshairs e Point of the trigger event e Channel cursors to mark the ground level and the DC offset You can also adjust how the waveforms are displayed The intensity and brightness of the individual screen elements can influence the readability of the results Depending on which type of result you are interested in e g frequency of occurance time of occurance or amplitude of a specific value different sett
119. for specific measurement purposes for later use you can save equations sets in the instrument or on external storage device To copy a stored equation sets to another storage device use FILE gt Equation Sets For import export procedure see chapter 13 2 1 2 Importing and Exporting Data on page 218 To save the current equation set 1 Press MATH to display the Mathematics menu 2 Press Save 3 Define the storage location using the Storage softkey and the file name using the File name softkey EEUU MN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 100 R amp S9RTM20xx Mathematics 7 2 Reference for Mathematics See chapter 13 2 1 1 Configuring Storage Locations on page 218 4 Optionally define a comment to be added to the equation set using the Comment softkey 5 Press Save The equation set is saved as configured To load an equation set 1 Press MATH gt Load A file explorer is displayed 2 f necessary switch to the storage location that contains the file by pressing Stor age 3 Select the file that contains the equation set Use the Navigation knob to scroll through the directories To change the directory scroll to the name of the directory and press the knob or press Change dir 4 Press Load The equation set is loaded to the R amp S RTM Reference for Mathematics The MATH key provides functions to configure and display calculated data For details on wor
120. gt 1 4 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Usage Event MEASurement lt m gt AOFF Stops the quick measurement Suffix lt m gt 1 4 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Usage Event MEASurement lt m gt ARESult Returns the results of the quick measurement Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the measurement Return values lt QuickMeasData gt List of values Quick measurement results are listed in the following order PEAK UPE LPE CYCR CYCM PER FREQ RTIM FTIM Usage Query only 15 2 8 3 Automatic Measurements MEASurementemeENABle DEE 336 MEAZurementsermscMAiN A aenea nan on ratius nna nnn ahh dd ENKER REN eran ENN din aka nad dana n ENN EES 336 MEAS rementem SOUS sea ein epar a cd nna lation vds eta inn Ea seda veda aa Rea ea adde 338 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 335 Command Reference MEAGurement mz DEL av SLOPE eee ee ce eae eee eaeaeeeeteceeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeaeaeaaaaneteeeees 339 MEASurement msTESult AC CEET 340 MEASurement ms OATegoby c eene ai 340 MEASurement lt m gt ENABle State Activates or deactivates the selected measurement 1 4 Only the results of active measurements are displayed in the result table Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the measurement Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF MEASurement lt m gt MAIN lt MeasType gt Defines the measurement type to be performed on the selected source To query the results use MEASurement lt m gt
121. i Selects the byte number 1 n Return values lt ByteStatus gt OK UNDF UNDF Undefined Usage Query only BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt o gt VALue Returns the decimal value of the specified byte Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus n E Selects the frame 1 n lt o gt Selects the byte number 1 n Return values lt ByteValue gt Decimal value Usage Query only CAN Search SEARCH PRO TOCOCANICON DON treno ege EES 418 SEARCH PROTOCOL CAN FRAME 1 12 ete ra ase ctun EE bate hound ee ERR baden rna A ENEE Se 418 SEARCH PRO Tocal CANTAR Ol tac iti tice ea ee ESA 419 SEARChIPROTGSSSIICANEBITSIORGDE iniri i da 419 SEARCH PROTOCOL CAN CRQGAOFfFOL eegne ii anna e Reg ade en mane EN 419 SEARcCh PROTOCOI CAN FORMSTEFI F iie ceiecesecee ce khaa sane nasa E Rr asa maa e Ra cnn danna NEESS 420 SEARchPROTOGOIOBBUETYPe eii edite ie eegen ERAN See 420 SEARch PROTOSSIGANITYRBG EE 420 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 417 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BEES Command Reference e e MER er Elei tele 420 SEARGh PRO Tocal CANIDEN Mei NEESS 420 SEARch PROTGOGOECANIDEENGlth iei eoe dea 421 SEARchIPROTOSOCANIDGONGIBUG EE 421 SEARENPROTOCO CANIDATA 0 dci 421 SEARch PROTocol CAN CONDition lt SearchCondition gt Sets the event or combination of events to be searched for Depending on the selected event further settings are required Parameters lt SearchCondit
122. is used for example for control signals while active low low 1 is defined for data lines RS 232 Remote command BUS lt b gt UART DATA POLarity on page 400 BUS lt b gt UART POLarity on page 400 Parity Defines the optional parity bit that is used for error detection None No parity bit is used Even The parity bit is set to 1 if the number of 1 s in a given set of bits is odd not including the parity bit Odd The parity bit is set to 1 if the number of 1 s in a given set of bits is even not including the parity bit Remote command BUS b UART PARity on page 401 Stop Bits Sets the number of stop bits 1 1 5 or 2 stop bits are possible Remote command BUS b UART SBIT on page 401 Symbol Size Sets the number of data bits in a word symbol in a range from 5 to 9 bits Remote command BUS b UART SSIZe on page 400 Bit Rate Sets the number of transmitted bits per second Defined Bit Select a standard bit rate value from the list Rate User Bit Rate Enter a user defined value Remote command BUS b UART BAUDrate on page 401 Idle Time Sets the minimal time between two frames between the stop bit of the last word in a frame and the start bit of the first word in the next frame Remote command BUS b UART BITime on page 402 N User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 178 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis UART RS 232 Interface Option R amp S RTM K2 Find Level Th
123. la radiaci n electromagn tica El empresario operador tiene la obligaci n de evaluar y se alizar las reas de trabajo en las que exista un riesgo elevado de exposici n a radiaciones Tenga en cuenta que en caso de incendio pueden desprenderse del producto sustancias t xicas gases l quidos etc que pueden generar da os a la salud Por eso en caso de incendio deben usarse medidas adecuadas como p ej m scaras antig s e indumentaria de protecci n Los productos con l ser est n provistos de indicaciones de advertencia normalizadas en funci n de la clase de l ser del que se trate Los rayos l ser pueden provocar dafos de tipo biol gico a causa de las propiedades de su radiaci n y debido a su concentraci n extrema de potencia electromagn tica En caso de que un producto Rohde amp Schwarz contenga un producto l ser p ej un lector de CD DVD no debe usarse ninguna otra configuraci n o funci n aparte de las descritas en la documentaci n del producto a fin de evitar lesiones p ej debidas a irradiaci n l ser Clases de compatibilidad electromagn tica conforme a EN 55011 CISPR 11 y en analog a con EN 55022 CISPR 22 EN 55032 CISPR 32 Aparato de clase A Aparato adecuado para su uso en todos los entornos excepto en los residenciales y en aquellos conectados directamente a una red de distribuci n de baja tensi n que suministra corriente a edificios residenciales Nota Los aparatos de clase A est n des
124. lt PositiveTransition gt Bit mask in decimal representation Range 1 to 65535 Increment 1 Example STATus QUEStionable MASK PTRansition 24 Set bits no 3 and 4 of the STATus QUEStionable MASK PT Ran sition register part 24 8 16 2 24 15 3 Programming Examples 15 3 1 Data Export 15 3 1 1 Reading Waveform Data from Memory Set data format and sample range read channel header and data Command description in chapter 15 2 3 General Remote Settings and Queries on page 277 and chapter 15 2 4 5 Waveform Data on page 293 Connected to TCPIP0 192 168 1 1 inst0 INSTR SYST ERR 0 No error IDN Rohde amp Schwarz RTM1052 1305 0008K52 101489 04 502 RST CHAN TYPE HRES Set high resolution mode 16 bit data ACQ WRAT MSAM Set maximum waveform rate TIM SCAL 1E 7 Set time base FORM REAL Set REAL data format FORM BORD LSBF Set little endian byte order CHAN DATA POIN DMAX Set sample range to memory data in displayed time range SING OPC Start single acquisition lt I CHAN DATA HEAD Read header 4 9980E 07 5 0000E 07 5000 1 Xstart Xstop record length in samples CHAN DATA Read channel data 520000 gt gt gt gt gt gt Binary block data 4 byte floating point number sample 15 3 1 2 Reading Waveform Data in Unsigned Integer Format Read the channel header the waveform conversion data set the UINT binary
125. lt StopTime gt Range depends on sample rate record length and time base Increment depends on the time base Default unit s Usage Query only BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt DATA Returns the data words of the specified frame Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt FrameData gt Comma separated list of decimal values of the data bytes Usage Query only BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt ACKState Returns the state of the acknowledge field Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus n i Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt AcknowledgeState gt OK UNDF UNDF Undefined Usage Query only SSES User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 413 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control aT ees Command Reference BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt ACKValue Returns the value of the acknowledge field Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt AcknowledgeValue gt Decimal value Usage Query only BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt CSSTate Returns the state of the checksum Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt ChecksumState gt OK UNDF UNDF Undefined Usage Query only BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt CSValue Returns the checksum value Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus n Selects
126. menu The identifier conditions are the same as for the Identifier trigger type see Identifier on page 200 Data Setup lt Identifier and data Opens a menu to set the data pattern After setting the No of Bytes and the Com pare condition you can enter the value bit by bit by setting the state high low or don t care for each single bit Alternatively you can enter a hexadecimal value for each byte The method is the same as for identifier input See Compare on page 201 Bit on page 201 State on page 201 Byte on page 201 Value on page 201 Remote command TRIGger A LIN TYPE on page 423 IDDT TRIGger A LIN DCONdition on page 425 TRIGger A LIN DATA on page 425 No of Bytes Data Setup Identifier and data Defines the length of the data pattern the number of bytes in the pattern Remote command TRIGger A LIN DLENgth on page 426 11 6 4 LIN Label List Label lists are protocol specific A LIN PTT file contains two values for each identifier e ID Addr hexadecimal identifier value e Symbolic label symbolic name for the identifier Example LIN PTT file QFILE VERSION 1 0 PROTOCOL NAME lin Labels for LIN protocol Column order Identifier Label Labels for standard addresses E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 202 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis H Bn ON n LIN Optio
127. n gt WORD lt o gt MISO on page 385 PC Option R amp S RTM K1 The Inter Integrated Circuit is a simple lowbandwidth low speed protocol used for com munication between on board devices for example in LCD and LED drivers RAM EEPROM and others The PC Protocol This chapter provides an overview of protocol characteristics data format address types and trigger possibilities For detailed information read the I2C bus specification and user manual available on the NXP manuals web page at http www nxp com PC characteristics Main characteristics of PC are e Two wire design serial clock SCL and serial data SDA lines e Master slave communication the master generates the clock and addresses the slaves Slaves receive the address and the clock Both master and slaves can trans mit and receive data e Addressing scheme each slave device is addressable by a unique address Multiple slave devices can be linked together and can be addressed by the same master e Read write bit specifies if the master will read 71 or write 20 the data e Acknowledge takes place after every byte The receiver of the address or data sends the acknowledge bit to the transmitter The R amp S RTM supports all operating speed modes high speed fast mode plus fast mode and standard mode Data transfer The format of a simple IC message frame with 7 bit addressing consists of the following parts e Start condition a f
128. of a peak search 1 4 7750e 04 0 PEAK NEGATIVE 1 530e 02 2 4 4630e 04 0 PEAK NEGATIVE 1 530e 02 3 4 1660e 04 0 PEAK NEGATIVE 1 530e 02 4 3 8690e 04 0 PEAK NEGATIVE 1 530e 02 Example chapter 15 3 2 1 Searching for a Pulse of Specified Width on page 460 Usage Query only Firmware Software FW 03 400 SEARch RESult lt n gt Returns the result values of the specified search result See also SEARch RESult ALL Suffix lt n gt E Number of the search result Return values lt Result gt Comma separated value list Meaning of the values Result number time value y position not relevant search type slope or polarity optional value voltage for peak search pulse width for width search Example SEARCh RESult3 Returns the result values of the third search result 3 4 1660e 04 0 PEAK NEGATIVE 1 530e 02 Usage Query only Firmware Software FW 03 400 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 373 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control 15 2 13 15 2 13 1 Command Reference SEARch RCOunt Returns the number of search results Return values lt ResultCount gt RST 0 Example chapter 15 3 2 1 Searching for a Pulse of Specified Width on page 460 Usage Query only Firmware Software FW 03 400 Protocol Analysis e ET 374 Se EE 377 A TAN 386 e Mt ene 388 o WT bado 399 IE EE 405 BS CDEN 421 Gen
129. of the display or zoom area If a search is enabled the key navigates the search result markers Note If another marker is available at the right but currently not visible on the screen a small red arrow is displayed at the right edge of the display Remote command TSTamp NEXT on page 321 for timestamp markers only PREV Moves the previous left marker to the reference point of the display or zoom area If a search is enabled the key navigates the search result markers Note If another marker is available at the left but currently not visible on the screen a small red arrow is displayed at the left edge of the display Remote command TSTamp PREVious on page 321 for timestamp markers only SET CLEAR Sets a new marker at the reference point of the display or deletes an existing marker at this point Use the NEXT and PREV keys to move the markers to the reference point In the display of search results the marker is set to or removed from the search result that is selected in the Event Table EN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 73 R amp S RTM20xx Reference Waveforms Using References 5 Reference Waveforms Reference waveforms are waveform data stored in in the internal reference storages Four internal reference storages are available RE1 RE4 These four reference wave forms can be displayed Reference waveforms can be saved to and loaded from any storage device internal memory or external U
130. on screen keyboard to define a new file name to which the data is stored Note If a file with the same file name already exists in the destination directory it will be overwritten without notification Turn the NAVIGATION knob to mark a character and press the knob to select it Press Backspace to delete the character to the left of the cursor Press the Cursor and Cursor softkeys to scroll through the characters of the name Press Default name to restore the standard file name Press Accept to save the defined name Remote command MMEMory NAME on page 441 Comment Opens an on screen keyboard to insert a comment to the stored data Comments are available for all file formats that can be read by the R amp S RTM device settings reference waveforms trf format masks equation sets e User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 220 R amp S RTM20xx Data and File Management m p P nnn mex Saving and Loading Save Saves the data to the selected storage directory The used file name is displayed when storage is completed Remote command Device settings MMEMory STORe STATe on page 449 Other data MMEMory DATA on page 449 Load Menu The Load menu provides functions and a file explorer
131. original Y t window in seconds per division Alternatively turn the horizontal SCALE rotary knob 3 Press Trigger Offset to define the offset of the trigger point to the reference point for Os in the original Y t window Alternatively turn the horizontal POSITION rotary knob Note that changing the offset in the original window also changes the offset for the zoom window Zoom Time 4 3 3 Zoom Menu The ZOOM key provides functions for configuring the zoom display Main Time Base Zoom Time Base Trigger Offset Zoom Time Zoom Off User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 69 R amp S RTM20xx Display Zoom Maii Time EE 70 ZOOM me TT 70 WMG GCF ONIO usina EEEE AEAEE EEEE 70 ZOOm TIME ER 70 Zoon id LEM 71 Main Time Base Defines the scaling for the time base in the original Y t window in seconds per division The scaling is indicated by TB in the information bar above the window Note If Time Control is selected the main time base can be adjusted using the hori zontal SCALE rotary knob See also SCALE on page 23 To configure the original Y t diagram on page 69 and figure 8 2 Remote command TIMebase SCALe on page 283 Zoom Time Base Defines the scaling for the time base in the zoom window in seconds per division The scaling determines the width of the zoom area that is displayed in the zoom window 10 divisions scaling per division The zoom area is indicated by white lines in the original Y
132. page 330 URSor m X3Position on page 330 URSor m YlPosition on page 330 URSor m Y2Position on page 330 URSor m Y3Position on page 330 ET EA 39 Oy EA 3 Quick Measurements Quick measurement performs all currently available automatic measurements for the selected channel The measurements cannot be configured The results are displayed either directly at the waveform WF or in the right part of the result table T and are updated continuously gt Press the QUICK MEAS key to activate quick measurement ERA S e LLL LLAL LULLLLLLLM AgRB User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 85 R amp S RTM20xx Measurements BEES Quick Measurements TB 50ns T 0s Auto CH1 635 67 mV AC 5 GSals Realtime Complete Auto Measure The following measurement results are determined for the displayed section of the wave form Label Description Display Vp Positive peak value WF Vp Negative peak value WF tr Rising time of the first rising edge WF Mean Mean value WF tf Falling time of the first falling edge WF RMS RMS T Vpp Peak to peak value T T Period length T f Frequency T When you activate quick measurements cursor measurements are automatically deac tivated as well as the reference and math menus Deactivate quick measurements before selecting these functions Channels other than the selected one are switched off in quick measurement mode gt Press
133. page 437 Parallel Buses The R amp S RTM can display and decode up to 16 lines of a parallel bus To trigger on parallel buses use the pattern trigger See chapter 3 3 2 6 Pattern on page 48 Analyzing Parallel Buses Similar to serial protocols the parallel buses unclocked and clocked need configuration to decode and display the signal To configure parallel buses 1 Press the PROTOCOL LOGIC key on the front panel If the Logic menu is displayed press Protocol Press Bus and select the bus to be configured Press the Bus Type and select Parallel or Parallel Clocked Press Configuration oa F 9o bh To configure the Parallel unclocked bus select the Bus Width E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 211 R amp S RTM20xx Mixed Signal Option MSO R amp S RTM B1 m SS SSS SSS ee A A A e p Parallel Buses 7 To configure the Parallel Clocked bus a Select the Bus Width b Press Chip Select and select the digital channel connected to CS C Select the Active state of chip select d Press Clock and select the digital channel connected to the clock line e Select the clock Slope 8 Make sure that the thresholds are set correctly See 9 Press Back and configure the data display See To configure decoding and data display on page 149 12 3 2 Parallel Clocked Bus 12 3 2 1 Parallel Clocked Bus Configuration For the parallel clocked bus the bu
134. pulses unequal to the reference Width if Variation At 0 If Variation O the setting finds pulses outside the range width At Remote command SEARch TRIGger WIDTh RANGe on page 363 Width Sets the reference pulse width the nominal value for comparisons Remote command SEARch TRIGger WIDTh WIDTh on page 364 Variation Sets a range At to the reference Width if comparison is set to Equal or Not equal The instrument finds pulses inside or outside the range width x At Remote command SEARch TRIGger WIDTh DELTa on page 364 10 3 4 Peak Setup Access SEARCH MENU gt Search Peak gt Setup Peak aa 7 Kees Polarity Indicates the polarity of the pulse to be searched for Remote command SEARch MEASure PEAK POLarity on page 364 Magnitude Sets the amplitude limit Remote command SEARch MEASure LEVel PEAK MAGNitude on page 364 10 3 5 Rise Fall Time Setup Access SEARCH MENU gt Search type Rise Fall time gt Setup User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 139 R amp S RTM20xx Search Reference for Search Menu a ya 7 N n 0 Edge Upper Level Lower Level Comparison Rise Fall time Variation Ki Back NS Edge Sets the slope to be found e Rising to search for rise time e Falling to search for fall time e Both to search for rise and fall time Remote command SEARch TRIGger RISetime SLOPe on page 365
135. spectrum is higher than Hanning or Blackman but smaller than the rectangular window The width of the spectral lines is thinner than the other bell shaped functions Use this window to measure amplitudes of a period ical signal precisely Blackman The Blackman window is bell shaped and has the steepest fall in its wave shape of all other available functions Its value is zero at both borders of the measuring interval In the Blackman window the ampli tudes can be measured very precisely However determining the fre quency is more difficult Use this window to measure amplitudes of a periodical signal precisely Rectangle The rectangular window multiplies all points by one The result is a high frequency accuracy with thin spectral lines but also with increased noise Use this function preferably with pulse response tests where start and end values are zero Remote command CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT WINDow TYPE on page 349 Y Scaling Defines the scaling unit for the y axis The display values are valid for 50O termination impendance To achieve this the existing internal terminating resistor can be used or an external terminating resistor can be connected parallel to the high impedance input To set the scale value use FFT Setup gt Y Scale dBm logarithmic scaling related to 1 mW dBV logarithmic scaling related to 1 Veff Veff linear scaling displays the RMS value of the voltage Remote command
136. starts a new statistical evaluation if the acquisition is running Remote command MEASurement m STATistics RESet on page 343 Clear All Statistic Resets and deactivates all active statistic measurements E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 96 R amp S RTM20xx Measurements BREET Automatic Measurements Reference Level Upper Middle Lower Levels Set the lower and upper reference levels for rise and fall time mesurements cursor and automatic mesurements as well as the middle reference level used for phase and delay measurements The levels are defined as percentages of the high signal level The set tings are valid for all measurement places Remote command REFLevel RELative MODE on page 341 R RELative LOWer on page 341 REFLevel RELative MIDDle on page 342 R RELative UPPer on page 341 ID EFLevel EFLevel Clear All Resets and deactivates all four measurements Remote command MEASurement lt m gt AOFF on page 335 Delay Setup Configures the delay measurement that measures the time difference between two edges of the same or different waveforms Source 1 Slope Soure2 2 EE um mE mcum Source 1 Select one of the active channel math or reference waveforms for each Source 2 measurement source Slope Select the rising or falling slope for each measurement source Remote command MEASurement lt m gt SOURce on page 338 MEASurement lt m gt DELay SL
137. symbol 5 To see the selected event even if it is outside the display press Track event The waveform is moved on the display and the selected result is shown at the time reference point To use markers on search results 1 Ifthe search results table is not visible press View event table 2 To set markers to all results press Mark events If more then 20 results are found the first 20 results are marked 3 To set a marker to a selected result a Select the result in the Search Event Table by turning the NAVIGATION knob b Press the SET CLEAR key 4 To select a marker e Press the NEXT key to move to next marker to the right e Press the PREV key to move to previous marker to the left 5 To delete a single marker select it an press the SET CLEAR key 6 To delete all markers press Clear all event markers To finish a search 1 To close the results table press View event table 2 To stop the search press Search 10 3 Reference for Search Menu 10 3 1 Main Search Menu The SEARCH MENU key opens the same named menu where you can search various events for example e edges e peaks e pulses with defined pulse width e rise time or fall time e and more LE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 135 R amp S9RTM20xx Search Reference for Search Menu 2 7 MM B Search type Source Gate Events Edge 4 4 Search Enables and disables the search mode R
138. the First Bit and the Symbol Size Ce CH Clock CH2 ZWEE e MOSI CH3 mB X MISO CH1 AMBY X 13 Press Find level or set the threshold manually for each channel User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 156 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis SPI SSPI Bus Option R amp S RTM K1 See To set the logic threshold for analog channels on page 148 Now you can disply the decoded signal and the frame table with results The display of the decoded data is described in To configure decoding and data dis play on page 149 11 2 2 2 SPI SSPI Configuration Settings Access PROTOCOL gt Bus type SPI or SSPI Configuration Configuration Source Chip Select SYMDOl ZO iii lis 158 Elina Level dis 158 Source Toggles the lines of the SPI bus Each line has to be configured Select a line and adjust the settings CS Chip Select SPI only Select the input channel and the Active state Time SSPI only Set the Time Out instead if chip select Clk Clock Select the input channel and the Slope Data Select the input channel and the Active state Chip Select Clock Data Select the input channels of the corresponding line Make sure to select the Source before you assign the channel If the MSO option R amp S RTM B1 is installed digital channels can also be used as source Remote command BUS lt b gt SPI CS SOURce on page 377 BUS b SPI CLOCk SOURce on page 378 BUS b SPI DATA SOURce on page
139. the trigger offset to 0 Note If a zoom or FFT window is displayed the knob can adjust other values depending on the selection of the SCALE rotary knob See also Time Reference on page 235 Remote command TIMebase POSition on page 284 SCALE The rotary knob adjusts the time scale of the horizontal axis for all signals also known as time base The current scale value is shown in the top information bar denoted by TB Turn clockwise to stretch the waveforms the scale value time div decreases If a Zoom or FFT window is displayed press the knob to switch between the settings then turn to adjust the selected value Remote command TIMebase SCALe on page 283 2 3 2 Acquisition Menu TB 100us T 2us The ACQUISITION key in the HORIZONTAL functional block opens the Acquisition menu where you select the acquisition mode Acquisition modes control the data pro cessing how the waveform is built from the captured ADC samples The current acqui sition mode is shown in the top information bar the second value from right The settings are placed on two menu pages MUERTO Avg 16 Acquisition Decimation Mode Wfm Arithmetic No of Averages Waveform Rate Record Length t L User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 23 R amp S RTM20xx Acquisition and Waveform Setup Reference for Waveform Setup Acquisition Decimation Mole iade nera die nio RE tn eter anter dE NEESS e 24 WV AVE TE TE 24 Do SI m 25 EE D E n
140. the QUICK MEAS key again to deactivate the quick measurement and remove the results LEE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 86 R amp S RTM20xx Measurements 6 3 6 3 1 6 3 1 1 Automatic Measurements Remote command e MEASurement m ALL STATe on page 335 e MEASurement lt m gt AON on page 335 e MEASurement lt m gt AOFF on page 335 e MEASurement m ARESult on page 335 Automatic Measurements Using the MEAS key you can configure up to four amplitude and time measurements or pulse counts on one of the active channel reference or math waveforms If MSO option R amp S RTM B1 is installed active digital channels are available as mea surement sources for time and count measurements e Measurement Types and Results ariete re eren 87 e Configuring and Performing Automatic Measurements AAA 93 e Auto Measure Menu MEAS key 94 Measurement Types and Results e Measurement TYPE edidi eee ite ee EE Rea Le Duros ee 87 e Measurement Eesulls cian da dd di acia 92 ME cuna ERE 93 Measurement Types The R amp S RTM provides a varity of automatic measurements Mean le eieiei ER 88 TI 88 Mean Re 88 RMS Meed ELE 9 88 Peak E 88 E 88 STEE 88 ice UR 88 aj p R 89 D un EE 89 euro M n 89 A a a a a EA a EE a 89 e E A ET 89 Pulse Width positive pulse 2 ren tcro rte rat rasta 89 at 89 Neg
141. the channels The bit is set if the assigned channel is overloaded Table 15 7 Bits in the STATus QUEStionable COVerload register Bit No Meaning 0 CHANnell 1 CHANnel2 2 CHANnel 3 3 CHANnel 4 STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature register This register contains information about the instrument s temperature Table 15 8 Bits in the STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature register BitNo Meaning 0 TEMP WARN This bit is set if a temperature warning on channel 1 2 3 or 4 occured 1 TEMP ERRor This bit is set if a temperature error on channel 1 2 3 or 4 occured STATus QUEStionable LIMit register This register contains information about the observance of the limits of measurements This bit is set if the limits of the main or additional measurement of the assigned mea surement are violated User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 269 R amp S9RTM20xx Remote Control 15 1 6 4 Basics Table 15 9 Bits in the STATus QUEStionable LIMit register Bit No Meaning 0 MEAS1 1 MEAS2 2 MEAS3 3 MEAS4 STATus QUEStionable MASK register This register contains information about the violation of masks This bit is set if the assigned mask is violated Table 15 10 Bits in the STATus QUEStionable MASK register Bit No Meaning 0 MASK1 Application of the Status Reporting System The purpose of the status reporting system is to monitor the s
142. the result table Base Level Measures the mean value of the low level of a square wave To do so the mean value of the tilt is calculated without the overshoot The measurement requires at least one complete period of a triggered signal The measured value is displayed as Vbase in the result table Pulse Width positive pulse JL Measures the width of a positive pulse A positive pulse consists of a rising edge followed by a falling edge The measurement and requires at least one complete period of a triggered signal The measured value is displayed as tIL in the result table Pos Overshoot Positive overshoot of a square wave calculated from measurement values Top Level Peak and Amplitude The measured value is displayed as Ovr in the result table V V Ovr P 40096 Amp Neg Overshoot Negative overshoot of a square wave calculated from measurement values Min Low and Amplitude The measured value is displayed as Ovr in the result table D Ovr base P 100 Amp EN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 89 R amp S RTM20xx Measurements AA AA A AA Automatic Measurements Pulse Width negative pulse U Measures the width of a negative pulse A negative pulse consists of a falling edge followed by a rising edge The measurement requires at least one complete period of a triggered signal The measured value is displayed as t LI in the result table Duty Cycle Measures the
143. to select data files and to load it for usage It is displayed whenever some data has to be loaded SO EET 221 Remove INS eodein ee 221 scm 221 Storage Opens the storage directory submenu see Storage Directory Menu on page 221 Remove File Deletes the selected file Remote command MMEMory DELete on page 448 Load Loads the selected file to the instrument During an import export operation this command confirms the selection of a file and loads it temporarily In order to actually copy the file to the selected destination press Import Export Remote command Device settings VMEMory LOAD STATe on page 449 Storage Directory Menu The storage directory menu is opened with the Storage softkey that is available in all Save and Load menus Here you define the storage device and the directory where the file will be saved or loaded from If appropriate you can also create new directories or delete existing ones Storage Storage 3 Change Create Directory directory User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 221 R amp S RTM20xx Data and File Management Saving and Loading Waveforms and screenshots can only be stored on a USB stick connected to the front or rear panel not to an internal directory If you want to store a waveform or scrrenshot and no USB stick is currently connected the Storage softkey is not available See also chapter 13 2 1
144. traces oriasi a iia 229 Stretch Y MASKS E 129 EE 253 Symbolic D EE 151 Syntax elements SOP MG 257 T Temperature Colors neret 59 Termination Testnasks center t rer dede eer rers 128 Test results MASKS na raro aia 122 MMS AAN cui ia it taa Time reference E 2 Time Reference iare E Time Scales i eec atr di tet nis Timestamps i Dou EE Track Scaling CUISOF cio 84 RN 227 Trigger elen NEE Edge trigger slope vi i FOE Mode ee 39 STE o EE 40 Trigger event GISPIAYING TE 55 rue EE Showing get Trigger frequency A and B trigger 87 Trigger hysteresis Ee e NEE 61 Trigger Levels diia nd iia 42 Trigger mode A 302 Trigger offset EE 15 23 Trigger Offset rro cj 70 121 Trigger period A and B trigger ssssssss 87 Trogger n e 43 WIAR oisein M O 45 VA vaticina aaa 124 228 U UART DASICS ees daa Ee gege 175 jefe ile 176 Protocol settings meca ren rt rea 177 Trigger Ge MING Ge Le EE 180 UARTIRS 2232 rer ror rr eI EE tte 175 Under ampli iconos tai 12 Unit e 102 109 Units B mmm Update Cc rm 77 Updates Wl EE 237 ue 238 USB remote control interface sssessssss 242 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 483 R amp S RTM20xx
145. trigger with MSO option R amp S RTM B1 installed Trigger Source Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Logic Channels Extern Av Back N oe User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 42 R amp S RTM20xx Triggers BEEN Reference for Triggers Remote Command TRIGger A SOURce on page 303 Channel N Selects one of the analog input channels as trigger source Logic Channels Selects one of the digital channels as trigger source if MSO option R amp S RTM B1 is installed Logic channels are available for edge and width triggers but they are not selectable if the B trigger is enabled AC Line Selects the mains supply of the oscilloscope as trigger input for the edge trigger The instrument extracts the trigger signal from the power supply Extern Sets the External Trigger Input on the rear panel as trigger source Select the signal type that is connected AC or DC Remote command TRIGger EXTern COUPling on page 303 3 3 2 3 Edge The edge trigger is the simpliest and most common trigger type It is well known from analog oscilloscopes and you can use it for analog and digital signals The trigger event occurs when the signal from the trigger source passes the specified treshold voltage the trigger level in the specified direction slope The edge trigger is also selected with the AUTOSET function Edge Trigger SEEN PPP ERE o an T N PP o Slope Coupling LF Reject HF Reject Low pass Hysteresis A cs ea Jd L Di e
146. waveform A positive pulse consists of a rising edge followed by a falling edge The mean value of the signal is determined If the signal passes the mean value an edge is counted The pulse is counted if a rising edge and a falling edge are detected The number of positive pulses is displayed as Cnt JL in the result table Count negative pulses Count LI Counts negative pulses within the displayed section of the waveform A neg ative pulse consists of a falling edge followed by a rising edge The mean value of the signal is determined If the signal passes the mean value an edge is counted The pulse is counted if a falling edge and a rising edge are detected The number of negative pulses is displayed as Cnt LI in the result table Count rising edges Count J Counts transitions of the signal from low level to high level within the displayed section of the waveform To do so the mean value of the signal is determined If the signal passes the mean value a rising edge is counted The number of rising edges is displayed as Cnt J in the result table Count falling edges Count 1 Counts transitions of the signal from high level to low level within the displayed section of the waveform To do so the mean value of the signal is determined If the signal passes the mean value a falling edge is counted The number of falling edges is displayed as Cnt L in the result table Trigger Freq Measures the frequency of the A trigger signal
147. waveform no waveform points are added With fast time base settings the sample rate is higher than the ADC sample rate Waveform samples are added to the ADC samples with sin x x interpolation ETIMe Equivalent time The waveform points are taken from several acquisitions of a repetive signal at a different time in relation to the trigger point RST RTIME ACQuire INTerpolate lt Interpolation gt Defines the interpolation mode See also Interpolation on page 27 Parameters lt Interpolation gt SINX LiNear Linear interpolation between two adjacent sample points SINX Interpolation by means of a sin x x curve SMHD Sample amp Hold causes a histogram like interpolation RST SINX ACQuire AVERage COUNt lt AverageCount gt Defines the number of waveforms used to calculate the average waveform The higher the number the better the noise is reduced Parameters lt AverageCount gt Only numbers from the 2 progression are permitted 2 4 8 Range 2 to 1024 RST 2 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 285 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control m mne Command Reference ACQuire WRATe WaveformRate Defines the mode to set the sample rate samples per second saved in the memory and the waveform acquisition rate waveforms per second Parameters lt WaveformRate gt AUTO MWAVeform MSAMples MANual AUTO To display the best waveform
148. waveform types you can also adjust the horizontal position D For each selected reference waveform you can adjust the vertical position and scale as and scale individually The current scale values are shown in the waveform label of the reference waveform 5 1 1 Displaying a Reference Waveform A reference waveform is displayed as soon as data is written to its storage either from an active waveform or loaded from a reference file You can hide it and display it again by using the Visible key 1 Press the REF key to display the Reference menu A User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 74 R amp S9RTM20xx Reference Waveforms Using References Press Reference and select the reference storage position If a reference was already loaded to the selected reference position before the stored reference waveform is displayed Select the data that will be used as reference by doing one of the following e Press Source and select one of the active waveforms then press Update e Load a previously saved reference See also To load references and reference settings on page 75 The selected data is written to the selected reference storage and displayed Press Visible to hide and show the reference waveform 5 1 2 Saving and Loading References If you need more than four references or you want to k
149. when you change the scaling for the main time base the width of the FFT time base extract is also changed Press Trigger Offset to define the offset of the trigger point to the reference point for Os Note that when you change the trigger offset the position of the FFT time base extract is also changed The scaling factor for the time base TB and the trigger offset T are indicated in the information bar above the Y t window R CH1 0V f DC umm 7 NEM Span 2 GHz Center 1GHz Envelope CHt 104BV Fig 8 2 Time base per division and trigger offset in Y t window To configure the Y t window graphically 1 Press the horizontal SCALE rotary knob to select the Y t window TB T settings are highlighted Turn the vertical SCALE rotary knob to define the scaling of the signal amplitudes in the Y t window Turn the knob counter clockwise to decrease the amplitudes or clockwise to enlarge them EMN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 114 R amp S RTM20xx FFT Reference for FFT key 3 Turn the vertical POSITION rotary knob to define the vertical position of the time axis in the Y t window Turn the knob counter clockwise to move the time axis down or clockwise to move it up 4 Turn the horizontal SCALE rotary knob to define the scaling for the time base in the Y t window Turn the knob counter clockwise to increase the scaling or clockwise to decrease it and thus spread the waveform Note that when you
150. 01 229 R amp S9RTM20xx Data and File Management 13 2 5 13 2 5 1 Saving and Loading VV OO TOME EE 230 QS CREE EM 230 o mem 230 Waveform Selects the waveform to be stored Turn the Navigation knob to select one of the avail able waveforms channel reference and math waveforms Format Defines the format of the waveform storage file BIN CSV TXT or TRF For details see chapter 13 2 4 1 Waveform File Formats on page 227 Data Selects the amount of data points to be saved in the waveform file Display Data All waveform samples that are displayed on the screen will be saved Exception The Waveform Rate ist set to maximum sample rate and the acquisition is stopped In this case the memory can contain more data samples than the display shows decimation To save the wave form with maximum resolution the instrument stores the samples that are saved in the memory Acq Memory All data samples that are stored in the memory will be saved This setting takes effect only for stopped acquisitions and it is not avail able for math waveforms For running acquisitions always display data is stored Remote command CHANnel lt m gt DATA POINts on page 295 Screenshots You can create a screenshot of the current display of your waveforms and measurement results and save it to a file To optimize the output you can configure different color modes and file forma
151. 1 Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable NTRansition lt NegativeTransition gt STATus QUEStionable COVerload NTRansition lt NegativeTransition gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit NTRansition lt NegativeTransition gt STATus QUEStionable MASK NTRansition lt NegativeTransition gt Sets the negative transition filter If a bit is set a 1 to O transition in the corresponding bit of the condition register causes a 1 to be written in the corresponding bit of the event register Parameters lt NegativeTransition gt Bit mask in decimal representation Range 1 to 65535 Increment 1 Example STATus QUEStionable MASK NTRansition 24 Set bits no 3 and 4 of the STATus QUEStionable MASK NTRan sition register part 24 8 16 2 24 STATus QUEStionable PTRansition lt PositiveTransition gt STATus QUEStionable COVerload PTRansition lt PositiveTransition gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit PTRansition lt PositiveTransition gt STATus QUEStionable MASK PTRansition lt PositiveTransition gt Sets the positive transition filter If a bit is set a O to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the condition register causes a 1 to be written in the corresponding bit of the event register p V PV User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 457 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control EE Programming Examples Parameters
152. 1 the sum bit is set to 1 as well This part can be written into and read by the user as required Its contents are not affected by reading Sum bit The sum bit is obtained from the EVENt and ENAB1e part for each register The result is then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of the higher order register The instrument automatically generates the sum bit for each register Thus an event can lead to a service request throughout all levels of the hierarchy Hierarchy of status registers As shown in the following figure the status information is of hierarchical structure ERREUR A E SSS User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 263 Basics 0 1 Errorfevent Output 2 queue buffer 3 COVerload 4 TEMPerature 5 6 7 0 8 NOALigndata 1 9 Limit amp 2 amp 3 amp 4 MASK amp 5 6 see separate amp 7 figure for this register SRE STATus QUEStionable STATus OPERation ALIGnment SELFtest AUToset WTRigger p amp D amp B amp amp amp amp amp logical AND ESE ESR logical OR zl OS Ob GG O d OU 20N 0 Fig 15 2 Overview of the status registers hierarchy e STB SRE The STatus Byte STB register and its associated mask register Service Request Enable SRE form the highest level of the status reporting system The STB provides a rough overview of the instrument status colle
153. 1 Press the NEXT key to move the next right marker to the reference point of the display or zoom area 2 Press the PREV key to move the previous left marker to the reference point of the display or zoom area To remove a marker 1 Select the marker to be deleted using the NEXT or PREV key 2 Press the SET CLEAR key to remove the marker at the reference position To zoom into a marker position 1 Seta marker in the display as described above User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 72 R amp S RTM20xx Display m J a Markers 2 If not yet active activate the zoom function by pressing the ZOOM key The marker lines are displayed both in the original window and in the zoom window 3 Select the marker that indicates the area you want to zoom into using the NEXT or PREV key The center of the zoom area is moved to the marker see figure 4 3 4 If necessary fine tune the position of the zoom area around the marker as described in To configure the zoom area via the rotary knobs on page 69 4 4 2 Reference for Markers The marker keys are used for both marker types timestamp markers and search result markers For details on setting and moving markers see chapter 4 4 1 Using Timestamp Markers on page 71 e To use markers on search results on page 135 HI e o cx 73 PREV EP 73 SE Re NEE 73 NEXT Moves the next right marker to the reference point
154. 10 to 90 Increment 1 RST 50 Default unit 96 BUS lt b gt CAN BITRate lt BitRate gt Sets the number of transmitted bits per second Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Parameters lt BitRate gt Range 100 to 5 04E06 depends on instrument type ADC clock rate Increment depends on the bit rate value RST 5 00E 004 Default unit Bit s CHANnel lt m gt THReshold FINDlevel Executes the analysis of all analog channels that are configured for the selected bus and sets the threshold for digitization of analog signals for each channel Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Usage Event CAN Trigger TRIGger A CAN TYPE lt TriggerType gt Specifies the trigger mode for CAN M User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 407 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BREET Command Reference Parameters lt TriggerType gt STOFrame EOFrame ID IDDT FTYPe ERRCondition STOFrame Start of frame EOFrame End of frame ID Sets the trigger to a specific message identifier or an identifier range Specify the identifier with TRIGger A CAN ITYPe TRIGger A CAN ICONdition and TRIGger A CAN IDENtifier IDDT Sets the trigger to a combination of identifier and data condition The instrument triggers at the end of the last byte of the specified data pattern Specify the identifier see ID and the data with TRIGger A CAN DLC TRIGger A CAN DCONdition and TRIGger A C
155. 11 e Configuring the Diagrams ccccccceecceeeeeeeeeeecee cece eeeeeeaaeeaaneaecaeceaeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeess 112 e Measunng omn FEW RETTEN 115 8 2 1 Setting Up the FFT Analysis To display an FFT diagram gt Press the FFT key The key lights up and two windows are displayed the signal vs time at the top the result of the FFT analysis at the bottom EE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 111 R amp S9RTM20xx FFT Configuring and Using FFT Calculations To deactivate the FFT display gt Press the FFT key again or press the FFT off softkey in the FFT menu to deac tivate the FFT display The FFT key is no longer illuminated and the previous display is restored To configure the general FFT display 1 2 Press the FFT key to activate the FFT display and open the FFT menu If necessary press one of the CH1 CH4 keys to change the signal source of the FFT calculation Press Waveform Arithmetic to define the mode for FFT calculation and display The waveform arithmetic defines whether the values are updated regularly or whether values from previous spectra are included in the calculation and display For details see Wfm Arithmetic on page 116 If Average mode is selected press No of Averages to define how many spectra are considered for the calculation Press Window to define which type of function is laid over the input values If the input values are to be used unaltered use the R
156. 148 Now you can disply the decoded signal and the frame table with results The display of the decoded data is described in To configure decoding and data dis play on page 149 PC Configuration Settings EE Aci EEEE A EA IEA a a AA 167 REI EE 167 Find Level EE 168 Clock SCL Sets the input channel to which the clock line is connected If the MSO option R amp S RTM B1 is installed digital channels can also be used as source Remote command BUS b I2C CLOCk SOURce on page 389 Data SDA Sets the input channel to which the data line is connected If the MSO option R amp S RTM B1 is installed digital channels can also be used as source Remote command BUS b I2C DATA SOURce on page 389 p H User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 167 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis PC Option R amp S RTM K1 Find Level The instrument analyzes all lines that are configured for the selected bus and sets the threshold for digitization of analog signals for each channel If no level can be found the existing value remains unchanged and you can set the thresholds manually in the chan nel menu CH N gt More page 2 gt Threshold See Threshold on page 31 Find Level is not relevant for digital channels MSO option R amp S RTM B1 Thresholds for digital channels are set in the Logic Threshold me
157. 17 4726 02 01 425 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BREET Command Reference Parameters lt DataCondition gt EQUal NEQual GTHan LTHan RST EQ TRIGger A LIN DLENgth lt DataLength gt Defines the length of the data pattern the number of bytes in the pattern The command is relevant if TRIGger A LIN TYPE is set to IDDT Parameters lt DataLength gt Range 1 to 8 Increment 1 RST 1 Default unit Byte LIN Decode Results ER P UN CUE EE 426 BUSSDpSIBINIEERAMSSpn DATAS 1 ae caia 426 BUSsb bINYFERAMesre S KREE 427 BUS lt b gt LIN FRAMe lt n gt STAR coconcoconcncoconiononeninnononinnononinnononcononennonnnenaonnnenanananonoananons 427 BUSS BEIN FRAMES STOP acido dls dede dais 427 SEET EEN KEE 428 BUlS bhs LIN FERAMe cns C Value siste st sse set sais ase ii sides rss aad 428 BUSsb LENFRAMesmsdDPWVal e uii eral osns etaed esa ena pe deiade a adco SEAN 428 BUSSsbsENIERAMeshsIBIS Tale uite A EE eege 429 BUS lt b gt LINFRAMe lt sp gt ID EE 429 BUS lt b gt LINIFRAMG lt n gt SY ST ate 02 c0 cc sc0cccecsessendadecodssasdssaceesaescaduscdereniedhceaeaviscancee cd 429 BUSsb LINTFRAMesmesmSYWalue aa dosis npe teet eco Foe A der Ed depre e RR a Edd dde aval 430 BUSsBSTINIERAMesSpne VERSION EE 430 BUS lt b5 gt LINFRAMe lt A ee E 430 BUS lt b gt LINFRAMe n BYTE lt O gt STATE iaaa aaa aa aaa aaa Aaaa Aiah 431 BUS lt b gt LIN FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt O gt VALUe 7 aiena E AE a EEEREN 431 BU
158. 1Source on page 315 Source Y2 Defines an optional second source to be displayed in y direction in an XY diagram The source can be selected from any of the analog channels The function is available in R amp S RTM1054 Remote command DISPlay XY Y2Source on page 316 X CH1 Y CH2 Defines channel 1 to be displayed in x direction in an XY diagram replacing the usual time base and sets channel 2 to the y axis The function is available in R amp S RTM1052 X CH2 Y CH1 Defines channel 2 to be displayed in x direction in an XY diagram replacing the usual time base and sets channel 1 to the y axis The function is available in R amp S RTM1052 Z Setup The intensity of the waveform displayed in an XY diagram can be set to a defined level or be modulated dynamically using a further source signal Z In the latter case the ampli tudes of the source signal determine the intensity of the displayed waveform j Source Z Z Intensity Intensity Threshold Eum On onto off O RA Z Z Setup Activates or deactivates the intensity control of the waveform via an additional signal source If deactivated the intensity is defined by the general Intensity setting for the trace Remote command DISPlay XY ZMODe on page 316 Source Z Z Setup Defines the source to be used to determine the intensity of the waveform The source can be selected from any of the analog channels Pressing the softkey repeatedly scrolls throu
159. 2 Protocol Common Settings on page 149 Additionally you can display and save a Frame Table containing decoded data frame number start time of the frame identifier data length data checksum and state of the frame See also chapter 11 1 5 Frame Table Decode Results on page 154 Remote commands e BUS lt b gt PARallel FCOunt on page 439 e BUS lt b gt PARallel FRAMe lt n gt DATA on page 439 e BUS lt b gt PARallel FRAMe lt n gt STATe on page 440 e BUS lt b gt PARallel FRAMe lt n gt STARt on page 440 e tu US lt b gt PARallel FRAMe lt n gt STOP on page 440 R amp S RTM20xx Data and File Management Printing 13 Data and File Management This chapter describes how to print screenshots and how to manage measurement set tings and data 9 APM EE 215 e Saving and Ee TG DEE 217 13 1 Printing You can create a sceenshot of the current display of your waveforms and measurement results and print it on a printer To optimize the output you can configure different color modes The printer has to be connected to a Type A USB port Alternatively you can save screenshots to files see also chapter 13 2 5 Screenshots on page 230 If you want to print many screenshots you can assign the printout function to the PRINT key This key is a shortcut key that initiates the assigned action at a single key press Infrequent printouts can be started from the File menu see also chap
160. 2 NNECMN 9S 120 LS PR aac face tm A e e 120 EE EI EE 120 L Trigger Offset A an Eina 121 Ger ET EE 121 X BNET E CR NER 121 FFT The FFT key activates and deactivates a Fast Fourier Transformation FFT for the most recently selected channel and provides functions to configure and display FFTs If activated the FFT key lights up Two windows are displayed the signal vs time window at the top and the result window of the FFT analysis at the bottom When deactivated the previous display is restored To display the FFT for a different channel press the corresponding channel key Remote command CALC MATH EXPR FFTMAG CHx see also CALCulate MATH m EXPRession DEFine on page 346 Wfm Arithmetic Defines the arithmetic mode for FFT calculation and display None The FFT is performed without any additional weighting or postprocess ing of the acquired data The new input data is acquired and displayed and thus overwrites the previously saved and displayed data A E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 116 R amp S RTM20xx FFT aaa Reference for FFT key Envelope In addition to the normal spectrum the maximal oscillations are saved separately and updated for each new spectrum The maximum values are displayed together with the newly acquired values and form an envelope This envelope indicates the range of all FFT trace values that occurred If any sig
161. 2 2 2 Adjusting the Signal Input Manually eem 20 2 2 9 Setting the ACQUISIION EE 21 2 24 Starting and Stopping Acoulsiton eee eeeeeeeaeaaaeaaecaeecaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeees 21 2 3 Reference for Waveform Setup ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeesseenneaeeeseeeeeeeens 22 2 3 1 HORIZONTAL Controls cnn cnn rra 22 2 9 2 ACQUISITION E EE 23 2 33 Vertical EE 27 y THOR coo e 36 3 1 Basics of Triggering conector ide eee a 36 3 2 Setting Up the Trigger 1 eccccereeen rere reete etn recr KEEEESEEEEER ENEE Dni eed 37 3 2 1 Configuring the Trigger Event eee nennen 37 3 2 2 Positioning the Trigger ue nere rn Peace stave nde e FE Ree n 38 3 2 3 Setting Up a Trigger Geouence eee nennen 38 3 3 Reference for Triggers ecce cene eeeecenre cerent tn treni tnn reine ta nnn nnn nn nnmnnn 39 3 3 1 TRIGGER Controls icon entr ede e a a 39 KC MN Ke et EEN 40 4 Display acc secs ces M 54 4 1 General Display Settings seeseeeesseeeeennen eene n nennen 54 EET REO ER lt lt 2 22 AAA User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 3 R amp S9RTM20xx Contents 4 1 1 4 1 2 4 2 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 3 4 3 1 4 3 2 4 3 3 4 4 4 4 1 4 4 2 5 1 5 1 1 5 12 5 2 6 1 6 1 1 6 12 6 1 3 6 2 6 3 6 3 1 6 32 6 3 3 7 1 7 1 1 7 1 2 7 1 3 Configuring the Display 55 Display SITUE 57 gt PLE Ye Lie Ty
162. 2112 8633856 ZOOM A SET 2759 MMEM COPY ZOOM A SET ZOOM B SET Copy file MMEM CAT SET Check 332112 8633856 Z00M A SET 2759 ZOOM B SET 2759 MMEM COPY INT SETTINGS ZOOM B SET USB FRONT ZOOM B SET Save copied file to USB stick MMEM CDIR USB FRONT Check MMEM CAT SET 4890624 641765376 Z00M B SET 2759 MMEM COPY USB FRONT ZOOM B SET USB FRONT ZOOM USB SET Duplicate file on USB stick MMEM CAT SET Check 4890624 641765376 Z00M B SET 2759 ZOOM USB SET 2759 MMEM DEL ZOOM B SET Delete original file MMEM CAT SET Check 4886528 641765376 Z00M_USB SET 2759 MMEM COPY USB FRONT ZOOM USB SET INT SETTINGS Copy new file to the instrument MMEM CDIR INT SETTINGS Check MMEM CAT SET lt 332112 8633856 Z00M A SET 2759 ZOOM B SET 2759 ZOOM USB SET 2759 RST OPC 1 MMEM CDIR INT SETTINGS MMEM LOAD STAT 1 ZOOM USB SET Load settings R amp S RTM20xx List of Commands List of Commands RE 274 AGQuire AVERage COUN EE 285 AC Quire FIE Ter FREQUENCY EE 287 ACQuire INTerpolate f elonnajenue P ACQuire NSINgle COUNt RR 282 ACQuire ell AE 288 ACQUIE SRA RE 288 ACQuire WRATO itc ene Aedes seve A pa ieee ue MEE o E etae fy add ia Eo te ye dre E Ee e E epe a PATIOS CA M PLC H M e
163. 25879E 02 7 49460E 00 3 051758E 02 1 19854E 01 4 577637E 02 1 56854E 01 Import of CSV files If you import a CSV file as reference waveform from a USB flash drive to the instrument the import converts the data to TRF format The instrument reads the first and the last time value and calculates the total time of the waveform and it counts the number of values Then all amplitude values are read one by one and written with an equidistant time distribution to the TRF file If the first two time values are identical the waveform is considered to consist of pairs of values TXT Format TXT files are ASCII files that contain only amplitude values in scientific notation but no time values Amplitude values are separated by commas Pairs of values are listed as two subsequent single values without any identification There is no comma at the end of the file Example TXT file 1 000E 02 1 000E 02 1 000E 02 1 000E 02 3 000E 02 BIN Format BIN files contain binary amplitude values only but no time values Each value has a word size of 8 or 16 or 32 bit the word size is the same throughout the file User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 228 R amp S RTM20xx Data and File Management Saving and Loading Words are given in Big Endian order beginning with the MSB Most Significant Byte and ending with the LSB Least Significant Byte Pairs of values are listed as two sub sequent single values without any identification 13 2 4 2 Saving
164. 325 REFCurve lt m gt STATe Displays or hides the selected reference waveform Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the reference waveform the internal reference storage Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF REFCurve lt m gt SOURce Source Defines the source of the reference waveform Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the reference waveform the internal reference storage User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 322 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control a a ee m Mncpn eng Command Reference Parameters lt Source gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MA1 MA2 MA3 MA4 RE1 RE2 RE3 RE4 D70 D158 Any active channel math or reference waveform Available chan nels depend on the instrument type If MSO option R amp S RTM B1 is installed you can use also the pods as reference source D70 is the pod with digital channels DO to D7 and D158 is the pod with D8 to D15 RST CH1 REFCurve lt m gt SOURce CATalog Returns the source waveform channel math or reference waveform If MSO option R amp S RTM B1 is installed the source can also be a pod D70 is the pod with digital channels DO to D7 and D158 is the pod with D8 to D15 Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the reference waveform the internal reference storage Return values Catalog CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MA1 MA2 MA3 MA4 RE1 RE2 RE3 RE4 D70 D158 Usage Query only REFCurve lt m gt UPDate Updates the selected reference by the wav
165. 375 Configuration Opens the configuration menu for the selected bus type Decode Decodes the signal according to the protocol configuration and displays the decoded signal the content of every message The decoding format is set with Display Remote command BUS lt b gt STATe on page 374 Display Opens the Display menu where you can e Display the bit lines e Set the decoding format e Define labels for the bus and its lines See chapter 11 1 3 Display Settings on page 150 Frame Table Opens the Frame table menu to configure and display the frame table with detailed decoded data for each frame of the acquisition See chapter 11 1 5 Frame Table Decode Results on page 154 11 1 3 Display Settings Access PROTOCOL LOGIC gt if Logic menu is displayed Protocol gt Display Bits Displays the individual bit lines above the decoded bus line Remote command BUS lt b gt DSIGnals on page 375 Data format Sets the decoding format of the data Binary Hexadecimal Decimal or ASCII Remote command BUS lt b gt FORMat on page 375 EE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 150 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis Basics of Protocol Analysis Label Opens the Label menu to define an additional name label for the selected bus Library Edit Label 4 N Label Label Displays or hides the bus label The bus label is shown on the the right side of the display You can enter a label tex
166. 4 Configuring the Display 4 1 1 1 Configuring the Diagram Elements To display the grid or crosshairs 1 Press DISPLAY gt Grid gt Lines to display a grid 2 Press DISPLAY gt Grid gt Reticle to display crosshairs 3 Press DISPLAY gt Grid gt Off to remove both the grid and the crosshairs To display the trigger event or the channel cursors The marker of trigger event and the channel cursors are auxiliary cursors By default both auxiliary cursors are displayed They help to evaluate specific results more easily 1 Press DISPLAY gt Aux Cursor gt Trigger Event to display a trigger cursor A rhombus marks the point where the trigger event happened 2 Press DISPLAY gt Aux Cursor gt Channel Cursors to display a channel cursor A dashed line is displayed that marks the ground level of the displayed channel If a DC offset is defined a second auxiliary line is displayed The distance between those two lines is the DC offset 3 Press DISPLAY gt Aux Cursor gt Defaults to restore the default setting both cursors displayed 4 1 1 2 Configuring the Waveform Display The waveform display depends on the following criteria e Intensities adjust the optimal contrast of the display See To configure intensity on page 56 e Persistence defines how long a data point is displayed in the diagram See To con figure persistence on page 56 E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 55 R amp S9RTM20xx
167. 436 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control 15 2 14 2 Command Reference Suffix lt m gt 0 15 Number of the digital channel Parameters lt Position gt Vertical position in divisions Default unit div DIGital lt m gt LABel STATe Displays or hides the label of the indicated digital channel Suffix lt m gt 0 15 Number of the digital channel Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF DIGital lt m gt SIZE Size Sets the size of the indicated vertical channel Suffix lt m gt 0 15 Number of the digital channel Parameters lt Size gt SMALI MEDium LARGe RST SMAL Parallel Buses e Paralel Bus COMIGUPAON niidina AAEN 437 e Parallel Clocked Bus Configuration cercare cinere 438 e Parallel Buses Decode Results 2 eerte eerte 439 Parallel Bus Configuration BUS lt b gt PARallel WIDTh lt BusWidth gt Sets the number of lines to be analyzed Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 437 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control oe ss A A AAA A A Command Reference Parameters lt BusWidth gt Maximum number is the number of input channels Range 1 to 16 Increment 1 RST 4 Default unit Bit Parallel Clocked Bus Configuration BUS lt b gt OP Aral WVU ME 438 BUS lt b gt CPARalle CLOCK SLOPE EE 438 le TEE rell E 438 BUS lt b gt CPARallel WIDTh lt BusWidth gt S
168. 4726 02 01 291 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BEES Command Reference Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters lt Skew gt Deskew value Default unit s CHANnel lt m gt THReshold lt Threshold gt Threshold value for digitization of analog signals If the signal value is higher than the threshold the signal state is high 1 or true for the boolean logic Otherwise the signal state is considered low 0 or false if the signal value is below the threshold Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters lt Threshold gt Default values are TTL 1 4 V ECL 1 3 V CMOS 2 5 V RST 1 4 Default unit V CHANnel lt m gt LABel Label Specifies a name for the selected channel Suffix m 1 4 Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters lt Label gt String value String with max 8 characters only ASCII characters can be used CHANnel lt m gt LABel STATe Shows or hides the channel name Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF ES User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 292 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control DREES Command Reference 15 2 4 5 Waveform Data Consider also the following commands
169. 5 2 6 15 2 7 15 2 8 15 2 9 15 2 10 15 2 11 15 2 12 15 2 13 15 2 14 15 2 15 15 2 16 15 2 17 15 3 15 3 1 15 3 2 15 3 3 Switching to Remote Control 248 Messages and Command Gtruchure eene 248 Command Sequence and Synchronization 259 Status Reporting Gvstem nemen enne 261 General Programming Recommendations sse 272 Command Reference eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eene nnn nnne nnn ninh nennen nnn unn nn nena n nnne 273 Conventions used in Remote Command Description 273 Common Commandes 274 General Remote Settings and Ouertes nrnna 277 Acquisition ANd Setup sss 281 SIMU GM CC TIT 301 BIET ee 314 Reference Wavefomms nnne nennen ee nennen nennen nns 322 MISI GIUNINIS 326 MATNGIMALICS 345 A enum etate ix NR UMEN ERA UE 348 VER cxt PR 354 Siu E m 358 Protocol Anal I 374 Mixed Signal Option MSO R amp S RTM B1 sse 434 Data and File Management eciiiieeci cese etaed daa d daa d a 441 General Instrument Getup sete a aa e aiaa 450 Ee ul DEE 453 Programming Examples esee eene nnne 458 Data EXPO E X 458 Ee p M eed 460 Data and File Management ccoo iii ii ENEE NEEN 461 List of tel eege See 463 UU 7 sss acs n 476 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01
170. 5 5 nni erect ens 223 Device Information ooooccccnocococooooooccnccnnonononnnnnnnnnnnos 237 Device Name Device Settings A DIG n PUE Edit Constant sei D Edit Equations riri td erat Eq Set Label cocinan meret Pics Equation Equation Labels rite herede etie Bieles oe Execute ha File Name eT lu le Format Hysteresis A B AA 44 53 IEEE488 Import Export 5 entr 222 223 elle 236 238 Load User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 Meas Type cursor ccccccccccccccnnonanccnnccnnnnnnnananononcnnos 78 Memory Sag iine sees terere diete etiani 227 Menu Off BSH EE 107 Operarnd 2 hie tte een ete 108 Operator 2 Papen format uid Dedicated 216 Parameter fics inden airo Redes 237 Prefix Print Key 2 PROD uem E SE Probe Adjust oreet eene Remove directory e Remove EE EE Screen amp Setup Sereerishots aaa SOCUNe Eras p ERE Self Alignment e Setup E EE Slope Clock SSPI Sound leie Source SPI SSPI Source X m ge SQUICO Y EE SQUICO EE Source Z da Storage EE Termilaltlon viciosa Threshold e Time En Trigger Beep EE Trigger Offset e Tipigder EE Unit ere Unit probe Update inte ren rete trece erret A USB E eg TUE UEL E Waveform VUE eu EE MCHA Y CH2 E X CH2 Y CH1 i XY Zs Setup inc nct iei ree cette er Ec egeta A Eder Y Scale Z Setup zs SOU ES Sounds C
171. 56 and STATus QUEStionable EV ENt on page 457 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 267 Basics TEMP WARN TEMP ERRor 0 0 0 UN 4 YN O 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 STATus QUEStionable STAT QUES TEMP COVerload TEMPerature NOALigndata LIMit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 nh STAT QUES LIM STAT QUES MASK MASK1 een MEAS1 MEAS2 MEAS3 MEAS4 Fig 15 3 Overview of the STATus QUEStionable register Table 15 6 Bits in the STATus QUEStionable register Bit No Meaning 0 to 2 not used 3 COVerload This bit is set if a questionable channel overload occurs see STATus QUEStionable COVerload register on page 269 4 TEMPerature This bit is set if a questionable temperature occurs see STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature register on page 269 5 to 7 Not used R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control EE Basics Bit No Meaning 8 NOALigndata This bit is set if no alignment data is available the instrument is uncalibrated 9 LIMit This bit is set if a limit value is violated see STATus QUEStionable LIMit register on page 269 10 to 11 Not used 12 MASK This bit is set if a mask value is violated see STATus QUEStionable MASK register on page 270 13 to 14 Not used 15 This bit is always 0 STATus QUEStionable COVerload register This register contains all information about overload of
172. 8 R amp S RTM20xx Preface Documentation Overview 1 Preface 1 1 Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S RTM consists of the following parts e Online Help system on the instrument e Getting Started printed manual in English e Documentation CD ROM with Getting Started User Manual Service Manual Data sheet and product brochure Firmware package including the online help Links to useful sites on the Rohde A Schwarz internet Online Help The Online Help is embedded in the instrument s firmware It offers quick context sen sitive description of the softkeys and front panel controls at the push of the HELP key Getting Started The English edition of this manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form The manual is also available in other languages in PDF format on the Documentation CD ROM It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instrument and describes basic operations and typical measurement examples The manual includes also safety information User Manual The user manual is available in PDF format on the Documentation CD ROM This manual describes all instrument functions in detail It provides an introduction to remote control and a complete description of the remote control commands with programming examples Service Manual The Service Manual is available in PDF format on the Documentation CD ROM It describes how to
173. 82 AGQUTE SINE elt enei aa a E E E a EE A E 282 le MD En 282 RUN Starts the continuous acquisition Usage Event Asynchronous command User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 281 15 2 4 2 Command Reference RUNContinous Same as RUN Usage Event Asynchronous command SINGle Starts a defined number of acquisitions The number of acquisitions is set with ACQuire NSINgle COUNt Usage Event Asynchronous command RUNSingle Same as SINGle Usage Event Asynchronous command ACQuire NSINgle COUNt lt NSingleCount gt Sets the number of waveforms acquired with RUNS ingle Parameters lt NSingleCount gt Number of waveforms Range 1 to 10 Increment 1 RST 1 STOP Stops the running acquistion Usage Event Asynchronous command Time Base DISSnn ESGCUN E 283 Els secco gr T 283 Titlebase e oeste iia 283 TIMebaise RANGE U EEM 283 TIMED SSE DIVISIONS T EE 283 TIMED E TEE 284 TIMEDSSE EE 284 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BREET Command Reference TiMebase SCALe lt TimeScale gt Sets the horizontal scale for all channel and math waveforms Parameters lt TimeScale gt Range 1 00E 009 to 50 lower limits are possible if zoom or FFT is enabled Increment 1 2 5 progression for example 1 ms div 2 ms div 5 ms div 10 20 50 RST 1 00E 004 Default unit s div TiMebase RATime Queries the real acquis
174. A YINCrement Return the voltage value per bit of the indicated waveform The commands are relevant for data conversion if binary data format is defined FORM UINT 8 16 32 Return values lt Yincrement gt Voltage in V EE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 280 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control zzz gg eeuu Command Reference Example See chapter 15 3 1 2 Reading Waveform Data in Unsigned Inte ger Format on page 458 Usage Query only CHANnel lt m gt DATA YRESolution CHANnel lt m gt DATA ENVelope YRESolution CALCulate MATH lt m gt DATA YRESolution REFCurve lt m gt DATA YRESolution Return the vertical bit resolution of the indicated waveform The commands are relevant for data conversion if binary data format is defined FORM UINT 8 16 32 Return values lt Yresolution gt For default waveforms the resolution is 8 bit If high resolution average or filter are set for the waveform the resolution is 16 bit Example See chapter 15 3 1 2 Reading Waveform Data in Unsigned Inte ger Format on page 458 Usage Query only 15 2 4 Acquisition and Setup e Starting and Stopping ACQUISIBIOD seen ttr ne dee no ee aaa aN aaa 281 a FT gt bos ae oUsRIesuneeI rni e 282 LEE OU EEN 284 RA E TEE E 288 e Waveform e DEE 293 PROD CS A 296 15 2 4 1 Starting and Stopping Acquisition RUN DE 281 euer 282 SINGE cenina a a a a a a a a A aa aa E OAA at AEE 282 E EI i aranin nE Peete ied a EE EEEa 2
175. AGE ORI Response LAND Character strings Strings must always be entered in quotation marks or Example HCOP ITEM LABel Test1 Or HCOP ITEM LABel Testl Block data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data A command using a block data parameter has the following structure LEET User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 256 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control A NA ee Basics Example FORMat READings DATA 45168xxxxxxxx The ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 following digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the transmission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted 0 specifies a data block of indefinite length The use of the indefinite format requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length Overview of Syntax Elements The following table provides an overview of the syntax elements The colon separates the mnemonics of a command In a command line the separating semicolon marks the uppermost command level The semicolon separates two commands of a command line It
176. AL unexpected value INSufficient the frame is not completely contained in the acquisi tion The decoded part of the frame is valid Usage Query only BUS lt b gt LIN FRAMe lt n gt IDValue Returns the identifier value address Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n Return values dentifierValue Decimal value Usage Query only BUS lt b gt LIN FRAMe lt n gt SYSTate Returns the state of the sync field for the specified frame Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus n Selects the frame 1 n T User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 429 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control RES Command Reference Return values lt SyncFieldState gt OK ERR UNDF ERR error UNDF undefined Usage Query only BUS lt b gt LIN FRAMe lt n gt SYValue Returns the value of the synchronization field Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n Return values SyncField Value Decimal value Usage Query only BUS lt b gt LIN FRAMe lt n gt VERSion Returns the version of the LIN standard for the specified frame Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt FrameVersion gt V1X V2X UNK UNK Unknown Usage Query only BUS lt b gt LIN FRAMe lt n gt BCOunt Returns the number of data bytes in the specified frame Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Sel
177. AN DATA FTYPe Triggers on a specified frame type Specify the frame type with TRIGger A CAN FTYPe ERRCondition Identifies various errors in the frame Specify the errors with TRIGGQeriA CAN ACKerror IRIGger A CAN BITSterrotr TRIGger A CAN CRCerror and TRIGger A CAN FORMerror RST STOF TRIGger A CAN FTYPe lt FrameType gt Specifies the frame type to be triggered on if TRIGger A CAN TYPE is set to FTYPe Parameters lt FrameType gt DATA REMote ERRor OVERIoad ANY RST ERR TRIGger A CAN ITYPe IdentifierType Selects the length of the identifier 11 bit for CAN base frames or 29 bits for CAN exten ded frames The command is relevant if TRIGger A CAN TYPE is set to ID or IDDT Parameters lt IdentifierType gt B11 B29 ANY ANY only available for CAN trigger type IDDT RST B11 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 408 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BREET Command Reference TRIGger A CAN ICONdition lt IdentifierCondition gt Sets the comparison condition If the pattern contains at least one X don t care you can trigger on values equal or not equal to the specified value If the pattern contains only O and 1 you can also trigger on a range greater than or lower than the specified value The command is relevant if TRIGger A CAN TYPE is set to ID or IDDT Parameters lt IdentifierCondition gt EQUual NEQual GTHan LTHan RST EQ TRIGger A CAN IDENtifier Ident
178. AN DLENgth lt DataLength gt Defines the length of the data pattern the number of bytes in the pattern The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol CAN CONDition is set to IDData Parameters lt DataLength gt Range 0 to 8 Increment 1 RST 1 Default unit Byte SEARch PROTocol CAN DCONdition lt DataCondition gt Sets the comparison condition for data If the pattern contains at least one X don t care you can trigger on values equal or not equal to the specified value If the pattern contains only 0 and 1 you can also trigger on a range greater than or lower than the specified value The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol CAN CONDition is set to IDData Parameters lt DataCondition gt EQUaI NEQual GTHan LTHan RST EQU SEARch PROTocol CAN DATA Data Defines the data pattern The pattern length is defined with SEARch PROTocol CAN DLENgth The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol CAN CONDition is set to IDData Parameters lt Data gt String containing binary pattern with max 64 bit Characters 0 1 and X are allowed Make sure to enter complete bytes 15 2 13 7 UN The Local Interconnect Network LIN is a simple low cost bus system used within auto motive network architectures Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines bus 1 and 2 or bus 3 and 4 If one of these buses is configured the number of buses suffix lt b gt is reduced Bus 2 and or b
179. ARcGh PROTOGCOECAN FRAMSO titer dede cast red e an 418 SEARch PROTocol CAN FTYPe a EE ee Giele tee ck ei TC Heel TE 420 SGEARch PRO Tocol CAN TID Nfer AAA 420 SEARch PROTOGCGICANITY PO cocina o Dee Dee dandi 420 SEARch PROTocol LIN CHKSerrot ernaia ae ta a innata ea diae ane aaa ad 433 SEARGh PROTOGCOELEIN CONDItIOn 1 i ederet aa ete dete n eet zen een ere be egre an 432 SEARch PROTocol LIN DATA SEARch PROTOCGI LIN DCONGIION cmo tre tete rade ipae ied co eee candied 434 SEARch PROTocOELIN DDENGITI irit Eege decer eren tne piedra anidan 434 SEARGh PROTOCOEEIN ERAMS iio 432 SEARch PROToOcOLLIN ICONGition 2 eoe eor ener tnn nt tne nenne tna enn thereon reae inks 433 SEARCH PROTOCOELIN IDENtifiet ee rra nire tbe ure rete eter a a ned crx nk Re 433 SEARch PROTocol LIN IPERror il SEARcIEPROTOCOELEIN SYEREOL irruere rer tete AEEA NEA RE OEE AE aa 433 SEARCH EE 374 SEARG RESDi gram ele UE 372 SEARch RESUIEAL inr E s 373 SEARCH RE SUII 8 ee m 373 SEARch SOURce SEARCH STATE Te EE SGEAbRch TRilGoerDATatocdockCEDGe ener nennen tennts ten aaa sinn 369 SEARch TRlGoer DAT atocdhock CL EVel A 369 SGEARch TbRilGoer DATatocdockCLEVel D I Ta 369 SEARch TRIiGger DATatoclock CSOUICE ccccceeeesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseaeeeeseneaeeeseaeeeesecaeeseseeaeeeeseneeeeeee 368 SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock DLEVel s
180. Active XY waveform DO D15 Active igital channels DO to D15 available if MSO option R amp S RTM B1 is installed The following cursor measurements are possible time ratio X count duty ratio burst width Available Sources depend on the selected measurement type D70 D158 Active digital pods DO D7 and D8 D15 available if MSO option R amp S RTM B1 is installed The following cursor measurements are possible V marker RST CH1 CURSor lt m gt FUNCtion Type Defines the cursor measurement type Suffix m 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Parameters Type HORizontal VERTical PAlRed HRATio VRATio PPCount NPCount RECount FECount MEAN RMS RTIMe FTIMe PEAK UPEakvalue LPEakvalue BWIDth RST VERT Value Description Queries for results HORizontal Sets two horizontal cursor lines and measures the vol CURSor lt m gt Y1Position tages at the two cursor positions and the delta of the two CURSor lt m gt Y2Position values CURSor lt m gt YDELta VALue CURSor lt m gt YDELta SLOPe VERTical Sets two vertical cursor lines and measures the time CURSor lt m gt X1Position from the trigger point to each cursor the time between ze Sa the two cursors and the frequency calculated from that A RENNES NM time CURSor lt m gt XDELta VALue CURSor lt m gt XDELta INVerse EN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 328 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control OT M
181. C e A E 237 EE 237 EE ee 237 Device MOMO EE 237 ie TE 237 L Firmware eene tette tnter tet teta t ttt an 237 L TEEN 237 A EE 238 L EG 238 Aae e E E R E E EE EE EE 238 L Read keys from license Hie 238 L Input key manually eene tnnc 238 nce 238 io e 238 aane E E BENIN Ee 238 EE 238 L Trigger Bleepi ageet geed 238 eier 239 L Self Test amp Self AlQmim tit s csseisc cdccossansssvadsesoeansseecasadarecsnenssucerasaestenacarvanne 239 A 239 2o GE 239 AS E 239 A estates se Pr T TRTEORK 239 Proba AU 239 Ce TEE 239 TEE 239 L E 240 O 240 Device E ET 240 WES TSS TE 240 TAGGET KRIEGER RT 240 EA NEE 240 e EE 240 L 27 TM TE Tr 240 Time Reference Defines the time reference point in the diagram i e the point at which the trigger is Os The reference point is defined as an offset of divisions from the center in the diagram By default the reference point Os is displayed in the center of the window which corresponds to 0 divisions The scaling of the waveform depends on this reference point Remote command TIMebase REFerence on page 284 Menu Off Defines how long a selection menu for a softkey is displayed before it automatically closes again Ej User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 235 R amp S RTM20xx General Instrument Setup m Oon H a Reference for Setup Language
182. Channel Menu The softkeys of the Channel lt n gt menu are placed on two menu pages Each channel has its own menu Coupling Termination Bandwidth Offset Invert Y Scale Jun More 112 gt son S ll oa ch ovo Una A e DEE Probe P O The channel label shows the basic vertical settings vertical scale in the figure below channel 1 5 mV div coupling DC termination 50 and bandwidth limited The label of the active channel is highlighted with the channel color channel 1 TB 100us T 2us Norm CH1 6 51mV DC CH3 5m X o CH4 5m 0 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 29 R amp S RTM20xx Acquisition and Waveform Setup EENEG Reference for Waveform Setup COUR ance 30 NR elle e EE 20 EI e EE 20 el ista Sne eege 31 Ie SERA ee EE Ee 31 Kee EE EE 31 er EE 31 IESEL 31 WARES OV BEE 31 EE eebe ee 32 Coupling Selects the connection of the input signal The current coupling of each channel is shown in the waveform labels above the grid AC A 2 Hz high pass filter is placed into the signal path that removes the DC offset voltage from the input signal AC coupling is labeled with DC DC coupling passes the input signal unchanged It is labeled with GND Connects the input virtually to the ground All channel data is set toa constant ground value Ground connection is labeled with Remote command CHANnel lt m gt COUPling on page 289
183. Display General Display Settings Brightness and signal colors depend on the cumulative frequency of the value See To configure brightness on page 56 Waveform as line or points see To set the waveform style on page 57 To configure intensity For optimal contrast you can change the intensity of the waveform of the grid and of the backlight 1 2 Press DISPLAY gt Intensities To set the intensity of the waveform a Press Waveform b Enter a percentage between 0 not visible and 100 very strong The default value is 50 You can also use the INTENSITY knob on the left side of the screen to adjust the waveform intensity directly To set the intensity of the grid a Press Grid b Enter a percentage between 0 and 100 The default value is 34 To set the intensity of the backlight a Press Backlight b Enter a percentage between 10 and 100 The default value is 50 To configure persistence 1 4 To display only the current signal at any time press DISPLAY gt Intensities gt Per sistence until Off is highlighted To have the instrument define the optimal persistence automatically press DISPLAY gt Intensities gt Persistence until Automatic is highlighted To configure the persistence manually a Press DISPLAY gt Intensities gt Persistence until Manual is highlighted b Press DISPLAY gt Intensities gt Persist Time to define the persistence time
184. E Frame Table ER ee le G Gain vertical inini ianari 11 Gate isle O A 137 Search m he bes E EEN 250 GPIB ee characteristics interface cide eorr rene irte tn interface messages oooooccccccccnccccononnnnncnnnnnnnnncncinnnnns remote control interface E cn displaying x sin Utrera te beato intensity inns cup H Hold OT TEC 42 Horizontal POSITION iore rr ott repente 15 Host name Hysteresis of trigger level ssesessssss 44 53 l Identification Ano 275 IEEE488 interface e e Import Export Equation SEIS E 232 Masks 232 References 232 Remote 448 softkey dis 223 IMPORINd EE 222 device settings 218 equation sets m 218 reference i 218 AA 255 Information on instrument 237 Intensity ere aas 99 Settings 58 Interface messages eerte nen 249 Interfaces pionuuip 236 Deactivating 236 for remote control entes 241 GPIB oes 236 242 A Se 236 LAN mn 236 parameters Les 237 Setting in 236 USB i 242 Interrupt 270 Inverse Cu Lu EE 59 Invert signal amplitude 2 31 P address es 247 changing 243 KE 165 basics E is 165 Con
185. E 172 BS 0 EE 172 Start Sets the trigger to the start of the message The start condition is a falling slope on SDA while SCL is high Remote command TRIGger A I2C PATTern on page 391 STARt Stop Sets the trigger to the end of the message The stop condition is a rising slope on SDA while SCL is high Remote command TRIGger A I2C PATTern on page 391 STOP Restart Sets the trigger to a repeated start when the start condition occurs without previous stop condition This can happen when a master sends multiple messages without releasing the bus Remote command TRIGger A 12C PATTern on page 391 RESTart Acknowledge Missing acknowledge the instrument triggers if the slave does not send the acknowledge bit Acknowledging takes place after every byte If the transfer failed at the moment of the acknowledge bit the SDA line is on high level during the high period of the clock pulse Remote command TRIGger A 12C PATTern on page 391 MACKnowledge Read Write Sets the trigger to a read or write access of the master to an address or and to a bit pattern in the message The trigger condition is specified in the submenus All submenu settings together create the trigger condition If you want to trigger on a specific param eter make sure to set all other settings to any If a label list with node names was loaded and applied in the bus configuration you can select simply the Symbolic ID from the list instead of en
186. E Bus no secondary address ard IEC 625 1 IEEE 488 1 can be mounted on the Interface rear panel of the instrument See also chapter 15 1 1 3 GPIB Interface IEC IEEE Bus Interface on page 242 Within this interface description the term GPIB is used as a synonym for the IEC IEEE bus interface SCPI compatibility SCPI commands Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments are used for remote control The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488 2 and aims at the standardization of device specific commands error handling and the status registers The tutorial Automatic Measurement Control A tutorial on SCPI and IEEE 488 2 from John M Pieper R amp S order number 0002 3536 00 offers detailed information on con cepts and definitions of SCPI The instrument supports the SCPI version 1999 E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 241 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control Ed Basics SCPI confirmed commands are explicitly marked in the command reference chapters Commands without SCPI label are device specific however their syntax follows SCPI rules 15 1 1 1 LAN Interface The R amp S RTM is equipped with a network interface and can be connected to an Ethernet LAN local area network for remote control of the instrument The instrument accepts remote commands via the LAN interface using the VISA library VISA must be installed on the control computer The R amp S RTM supports two ways of LAN communication
187. E VERSION 1 00 PROTOCOL NAME i2c Labels for I2C protocol Column order Identifier type Identifier value Label 7 0x1E Voltage 7 0x38 Pressure 7 0x2A Temperature 7 0x16 Speed 7 0x76 Acceleration 7 0x07 HighSpeed Master 0x3 E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 172 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis PC Option R amp S RTM K1 7 0x51 E EPROM 10 0x3A2 DeviceSetup 10 0x1A3 GatewayStatus 10 0x06E LeftSensor Label list I2C Imported on 2012 04 05 eleration Fig 11 7 Label list for PC For general information see chapter 11 1 4 Label List on page 151 11 3 5 12C Decode Results You can enable the decoding in the Protocol main menu Decode shows the decoded values below the waveforms in the format selected with Display Additionally you can display the binary signal with Bits See also chapter 11 1 2 Protocol Common Settings on page 149 Additionally you can display and save a Frame Table containing decoded data frame number start time of the frame access type ID data and state of the frame See also chapter 11 1 5 Frame Table Decode Results on page 154 I User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 173 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis IC Option R amp S RTM K1 TB 50ys T 93 5p1s Auto CH1 1 59V DC 20MSais Real Time Complete DEE A a EE ESSEN Y T DW A BRR RRNA II Badge Py Ue E e LIII We n LEM M NE 8 e geg o j ga TTT m mper rir dmi m mie e
188. EE 297 PROBe m SETup ATTenuation B NIT iicet eter id 297 Db ObBe m GETup ATTenuatonMAhNual nennen nennen nnne nn ns 297 a ERT Ne TE ET 297 PROBe lt m gt SETup CAPacitante metric dai 298 PROBS Sie SETUP Ee el E 298 PROBe lt m gt SETup IMPedance eee enean teeeeeeeeeesesaeeaeaeaaaeneeeees 298 PROBe m SE Vp MODE ET 299 PROB GSS RTE 299 PROBe lt m gt SE er E D 299 PROBS m SE TUR TYPE ed EENEG 299 PROBe lt m gt SETUP UOFF SOl EE 300 el Te TT KEE 300 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 296 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BREET Command Reference PD ObBe mzJD PAhTnumber nsns neseshasi seen si ses ssss si ses sss ess ss aan 300 PROBesm9cIB PRDale rM EE EMT Ed iM M 301 PROBesSmIDISERNUmber ii 301 PROBe m ID SWVWVelsion EE 301 PROBe m SETup ATTenuation AUTO Returns the attenuation of an automatically detected probe Suffix m Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Return values lt ProbeAttenuation gt Range 1 to 1000 Usage Query only PROBe lt m gt SETup ATTenuation UNIT lt Unit gt Selects the unit that the probe can measure Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters lt Unit gt VIA Firmware Software FW 03 700 PROBe lt m gt SETup ATTenuation MANual lt ManualAttenuation gt Sets the attenuation or gain ofthe probe ifthe probe was not detected by the instrument
189. F 15 2 5 3 Width Trigger TRIGSgaEACWIDETBRIPOLS3fFI EE 305 TRIGger A lege 306 TislGger Te E E e iie ra a d nae ees Dl ere nera Dare a 306 lieve le ST e M m 306 TRIGger A WIDTh POLarity lt Polarity gt Sets the polarity of the pulse E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 305 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control Command Reference Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative POSitive Positive going pulse the width is defined from the rising to the falling slopes NEGative Negative going pulse the width is defined from the falling to the rising slopes RST POSitive TRIGger A WIDTh RANGe lt RangeMode gt Defines how the measured pulse width is compared with the given limit s Parameters lt RangeMode gt WITHin OUTSide SHORter LONGer WITHin OUTSide Triggers on pulses inside or outside a range defined by time delta The time is specified with TRIGger A WIDTh WIDTh the range around is defined with TRTGger A WIDTh DELTa SHORter LONGer Triggers on pulses shorter or longer than a time set with TRIGger A WIDTh WIDTh RST LONGer TRIGger A WIDTh DELTa Delta Defines a range around the width value specified using TRIGger A WIDTh WIDTh Parameters Delta Range At Variation softkey Range Depends on the defined pulse width TRIG A WIDTH WITDH TRIGger A WIDTh WIDTh lt Time1 gt For the ranges WITHin and OUTSide defined using TRIGger A WIDTh RANGe the lt Time1 gt defines the c
190. F is always used automatically If the acquisition has been stopped data can be read from the memory and all settings are available Suffix m The command affects all channels and the suffix is irrelevant E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 295 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control 15 2 4 6 Command Reference Setting parameters lt Points gt DEFault MAXimum DMAXimum Sets the range for data queries DEFault Waveform samples that are visible as waveform points on the screen MAXimum All waveform samples that are stored in the memory Only avail able if acquisition is stopped DMAXimum Display maximum Waveform samples stored in the current wave form record but only for the displayed time range At maximum waveform rate the instrument stores more samples than visible on the screen and DMAX returns more values than DEF Only available if acquisition is stopped RST DEFault Return values lt Points gt Number of data points in the selected range Default unit Samples Example CHAN DATA POIN DEF CHAN DATA POIN CHAN2 DATA POIN Returned values 10416 10416 CHAN DATA POIN DMAX CHAN DATA POIN CHAN2 DATA POIN Returned values 124992 124992 CHAN DATA POIN MAX CHAN DATA POIN CHAN2 DATA POIN Returned values 4194302 4194302 Example See chapter 15 3 1 1 Reading Waveform Data from Memory on page 458 Probes PROBe lt m SE TURAT Tengan AUTOR
191. Fall time if comparison is set to Equal or Not equal The instrument finds rise fall times inside or outside the range width At Remote command SEARch TRIGger RISetime DELTa on page 366 10 3 6 Runt Setup Access SEARCH MENU gt Search type Runt gt Setup Polarity Upper Level Lower Level Comparison Width Variation Ca ae e ae yA N Polarity Indicates the polarity of the pulse to be searched for Remote command SEARch TRIGger RUNT POLarity on page 367 Upper level Sets the upper voltage threshold for runt detection A negative runt crosses the upper level twice without crossing the lower level Remote command SEARch TRIGger LEVel RUNT UPPer on page 367 Lower level Sets the lower voltage threshold for runt detection A positive runt crosses the lower level twice without crossing the upper level Remote command SEARch TRIGger LEVel RUNT LOWer on page 367 Comparison Sets the condition how the measured runt width is compared with the given limit s The same conditions as with width search are used see Comparison on page 138 Remote command SEARch TRIGger RUNT RANGe on page 367 Width Sets the reference runt pulse width the nominal value for comparisons Remote command SEARch TRIGger RUNT WIDTh on page 368 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 141 R amp S RTM20xx Search EENS Reference for Search Menu Variation Sets a range At to the referen
192. Gger A LIN DCONdition and TRIGger A LIN DATA ERRCondition Identifies various errors in the frame You can select one or more error types as trigger condition Select the error types with TRIGger A LIN CHKSerror TRIGger A LIN IPERror and TRIGger A LIN SYERror RST SYNC TRIGger A LIN CHKSerror lt ChecksumError gt Triggers on a checksum error The checksum verifies the correct data transmission It is the last byte of the frame response The checksum includes not only the data but also the protected identifier PID The command is relevant if TRIGger A LIN TYPE is set to ERRCondition Parameters lt ChecksumError gt ON OFF RST ON TRIGger A LIN IPERror lt ldParityError gt Triggers on a parity error Parity bits are the bits 6 and 7 of the identifier They verify the correct transmission of the identifier The command is relevant if TRIGger A LIN TYPE is set to ERRCondition Parameters lt ldParityError gt ON OFF RST OFF TRIGger A LIN SYERror lt SyncError gt Triggers if synchronization caused an error EE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 424 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BREET Command Reference The command is relevant if TRIGger A LIN TYPE is set to ERRCondition Parameters lt SyncError gt ON OFF RST OFF TRIGger A LIN ICONdition lt IdentifierCondition gt Sets the comparison condition for the identifier If the pattern contains at lea
193. IGger A RISetime DELTa to set the time range RST LONG TRIGger A RISetime TIME lt RiseTime gt For the ranges LONGer and SHORter the command defines the minimum and maximum transition times respectively For the ranges WITHin and OUTSide the command defines the center of a time range which is defined using TRIGger A RISetime DELTa See also TRIGger A RISetime RANGe Parameters lt RiseTime gt Default unit s L User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 311 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BREET Command Reference TRIGger A RISetime DELTa lt Variation gt Sets a time range around the time value defined using TRIGger A RISetime TIME if TRIGger A RISetime RANGe is set to WITHin OUTSide Parameters lt Variation gt Default unit s 15 2 5 7 B Trigger TRIGGER E EE 312 RS eer e 312 PRiIGGer B EDGE SLOPE m 312 TRIGGER M HE 312 Biete RB C 313 bien e EE 313 WRRIG GEN e 313 TRIGgerB EVENPEOUNE EE 313 TRIGGER TE 314 TRIGger B ENABle lt State gt Activates or deactivates the second trigger The instrument triggers if both trigger event conditions A and B are fulfilled Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF TRIGger B SOURce Source Selects one of the input channels as B trigger source Available channels depend on the instrument type Parameters Source CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 RST CH1 TRIGger B EDGE SLOPe lt Slope gt Sets the edge for t
194. IGger A UART PLENgth on page 403 Select Bit Pattern Selects the bit number inside the selected symbol for binary pattern input State Pattern Toggles the logic state of the selected bit O low 1 high or X don t care E t User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 182 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis UART RS 232 Interface Option R amp S RTM K2 Select Symbol Pattern Selects the symbol for binary or hex input Value Pattern Sets the hexadecimal value for the selected symbol by turning the navigation knob Parity Error Triggers on a parity error indicating a transmission error Remote command TRIGger A UART MODE on page 402 PERRor Frame Error Triggers on a frame error Remote command TRIGger A UART MODE on page 402 FERRor Break Triggers if a start bit is not followed by a stop bit the data line remains at logic 0 for longer than a UART word Remote command TRIGger A UART MODE on page 402 BREak 11 44 UART RS 232 Decode Results You can enable the decoding results in the Protocol main menu Decode shows the decoded values below the waveforms in the format selected with Display Additionally you can display the binary signal with Bits See also chapter 11 1 2 Protocol Common Settings on page 149 Additionally you can dis
195. KE eeng EEUU 44 ulii E 44 OWA EE 44 Hysteresis EE 44 Slope Sets the edge for the trigger Rising Selects the rising edge that is a positive voltage change Falling Selects the falling edge that is a negative voltage change E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 43 R amp S RTM20xx Triggers e In Reference for Triggers Both Selets the rising as well as the falling edge Remote command TRIGger A EDGE SLOPe on page 304 Coupling Sets the coupling for the trigger source AC Alternating Current coupling A 5 Hz high pass filter is connected into the trigger path and removes the DC offset voltage from the trigger sig nal DC Direct Current coupling The trigger signal remains unchanged Remote command TRIGger A EDGE COUPling on page 305 LF Reject Sets the trigger coupling to high frequency A 15 kHz high pass filter is connected into the trigger path and removes lower frequencies from the trigger signal Use this mode only with very high frequency signals Remote command TRIGger A EDGE COUPling on page 305 HF Reject Turns an additional 5 kHz low pass filter in the trigger path on or off This filter removes higher frequencies and is available with AC and DC coupling Remote command TRIGger A EDGE FILTer LPASs on page 305 Low pass Turns an additional 100 MHz low pass filter in the trigger path on or off This filter removes higher frequencies and is av
196. LEE ee User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 379 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control ss U Ml Command Reference Suffix m Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Usage Event SPI Trigger TRAIGIS wl ES 380 TRIGger EN WE 380 TRIGO ASPE PLENON EE 381 TRIGE ASP PORESEL UELLE 381 TRIGger A SPI MODE Mode Specifies the trigger mode for SPI SSPI protocols Parameters lt Mode gt BSTart BEND NTHBit PATTern BSTart Burst start sets the trigger event to the start of the frame The frame starts when the chip select signal CS changes to the active state BEND Burst end sets the trigger event to the end of the message NTHBit Sets the trigger event to the specified bit number To define the bit number use TRIGger A SPI POFFset PATTern Sets the trigger eventto a serial pattern To define the pattern use UVRIGQger A SPIIPATTerf o For a complete configuration of the pattern mode you also have to set TRIGger A SPI PLENgth and TRIGger A SPI PORP SEL RST BSTart TRIGger A SPI PATTern lt DataPattern gt Defines the bit pattern as trigger condition The pattern length is adjusted to the number of bits defined in the pattern Parameters lt DataPattern gt String with max 32 characters 4 byte 8 bit Characters 0 1 and X are allowed Example TRIG A SPI PATT 0011XXXX0110 Sets a 12bit pattern EMN User Manual 1317 4726 02
197. LIE E Peas 292 CHANnel lt m gt STATe State Switches the channel signal on or off Suffix m Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 288 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control A _ AA Q ees Command Reference Parameters State ON OFF CHANnel lt m gt COUPling Coupling Selects the connection of the indicated channel signal Suffix m Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters Coupling DC DCLimit AC ACLimit DC Direct connection with 50 O termination DCLimit Direct connection with 1 MQ termination AC Connection through DC capacitor that removes the DC offset volt age from the input signal ACLimit Connection through DC capacitor with 1 MO termination The capacitor removes the DC offset voltage from the input signal RST DCLimit CHANnel lt m gt SCALe Scale Sets the vertical scale for the indicated channel Suffix m Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters Scale Scale value given in Volts per division Range 1 00E 003 to 10 without probe attenuation RST 5 00E 003 Default unit V div CHANnel lt m gt RANGe Range Sets the voltage range across the 10 ve
198. M Command Reference Value Description Queries for results PAIRed V Marker CURSor lt m gt Y1Position same as CURSor lt m gt TRACking STATe CURSor lt m gt Y2Position CURSor lt m gt XDELta VALue CURSor lt m gt YDELta VALue HRATio Sets three horizontal cursor lines Queries return the ratio of the y values e g overshooting between the first and second cursors and the first and third cursors URSor lt m gt YRATio UNIT URSor lt m gt YRATio VALue URSor m YlPosition URSor m Y2Position E 0 Ga EN URSor lt m gt Y3Position VRATio Sets three vertical cursor lines Queries return the ratio of the x values e g a duty cycle between the first and second cursors and the first and third cursors URsor lt m gt XRATio UNIT URSor lt m gt X1Position E CURSor lt m gt XDELta VALue E E URSor lt m gt X2Position CURSor lt m gt X3Position PPCount Count positive pulses CURSor lt m gt RESult NPCount Count negative pulses RECount Count rising edges FECount Count falling edges Sets two vertical and one horizontal cursor line The time base is defined by the vertical cursors the horizontal cursor defines the threshold value MEAN Mean value CURSor lt m gt RESult RMS Root mean square Values are measured between two vertical cursor lines RTIMe Rise time tr CURSor lt m gt RESult FTIMe Fall time tf Measures the rise or fall time of the first ed
199. M allow to find all edges pulse widths peaks or other events in an acquisition that match the search conditions For each search type specific settings are available Searches can be performed on any channel math or reference waveform Searches can be performed online that is repeatedly for each new data acquisition in a running acquisition series or only once after the acquisition has been stopped In an online search only the displayed data is searched while the search on a stopped acqui sition analyzes the contents of the memory The searched time base range can be restricted by defining a gate 10 1 1 Search Results Search results are marked in the diagram and listed in a results table with their specific measurement values In the table five results are shown To navigate the search results turn the NAVIGATION knob See also To analyze search results on page 134 Search result markers For further analysis for example for cursor measurements you can set up to 20 markers to selected search results Search result markers are different from usual timestamp markers but they are set navigated and deleted by means of the marker keys too As long as a search is enabled the search result markers are active If search is off usual markers can be used See also e To use markers on search results on page 135 e chapter 4 4 Markers on page 71 p
200. MEM STOR STAT 1 MORNING SET Example chapter 15 3 3 2 Saving Copying and Loading Setup Data on page 461 Usage Setting only MMEMory LOAD STATe lt StateNumber gt lt FileName gt Loads the device settings from the specified file in the current directory ERA e e LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLUL AULLUXM XA l User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 449 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control 15 2 16 Command Reference Setting parameters lt StateNumber gt Range 1 to 1 Increment 0 RST 1 lt FileName gt String parameter File name with or without file extension Example MMEM CDIR USB FRONT DATA MMEM LOAD STAT 1 MORNING Example chapter 15 3 3 2 Saving Copying and Loading Setup Data on page 461 Usage Setting only General Instrument Setup DISPIAV LANGUAGE Em 450 TRIG r OUT e 450 TRIGE OUT PLEN EE 451 RR Seele Ee EE 451 SY S Tem NAME eegene ee eege enee 451 SVS VEMIDA WE E 451 Solem Hl 451 SYSTem BEEPS CONTO STATE eeeeeeeeseeseee eene nnne nennen ernannt ensures rase 452 SVS Tem El en EN RE 452 SY STenBEEP Sr TRIG STATE EE 452 SY Srem BE EPOCH TE EE 452 SUSE WEEN 452 Sy Siloti ERRONEA KEE 453 SY SSM ERROMA EE 453 A eege Eege 453 DISPlay LANGuage Language Sets the language in which the softkey labels help and other screen information can be displayed Parameters Language ENGLish GERMan FRENch SPANishRUSSian SCHinese TCHinese JAPanese ENGLish GERMan
201. Meaning Notice general danger location Q ON OFF supply voltage Observe product documentation P Caution when handling heavy equipment Standby indication Danger of electric shock Direct current DC gt 1171 0000 42 07 Page 1 Basic Safety Instructions Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning Warning Hot surface Alternating current AC Protective conductor terminal Direct alternating current DC AC Ground Device fully protected by double reinforced insulation Ground terminal EU labeling for batteries and accumulators For additional information see section Waste disposal Environmental protection item 1 Be careful when handling electrostatic sensitive devices li Gl a EU labeling for separate collection of electrical and electronic devices For additonal information see section Waste disposal Environmental protection item 2 Warning Laser radiation For additional information see section Operation item 7 Signal words and their meaning The following signal words are used in the product documentation in order to warn the reader about risks and dangers serious injury serious injury moderate injury Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or Indicates a hazardous situation wh
202. Mode Real time or Equivalent time This defines the behavior of the oscilloscope if the sample rate is higher than the ADC sample rate Use Equivalent time to capture fast repetitive signals whose frequency components may be much higher than the sample rate of the ADC 3 Select the Decimation Mode for example Peak detect This defines the behavior of the instrument if the oscilloscope captures more samples than the waveform memory can save 4 Select the Wavef Arithmetic for example Average or Envelope This defines how the resulting waveform is built from several consecutive acquisitions of the signal 5 If Average is selected enter the Number of Averages that is the number of wave forms used for average calculation 6 Select the Waveform Rate 2 2 4 Starting and Stopping Acquisition You can control the acquisition in two ways e Running continuous acquisition until you stop it SSES User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 21 R amp S RTM20xx Acquisition and Waveform Setup EH Reference for Waveform Setup e Running one acquisition or a given number of acquisitions Prerequisites e Probes are connected e Vertical and horizontal settings are adjusted e Triggering is set e Channels to be acquired are turned on To start and stop continuous acquisition 1 Check if the trigger mode is set to Normal The trigger mode is shown in the top information bar If not press the MODE key on the front panel to
203. N FTYPe on page 408 Symbolic ID Identifier If a label list with node names was loaded and applied in the bus configuration you can select simply the node name from the list instead of entering the numeric identifier The instrument trriggers on the identifier of the selected node Identifier Setup Identifier Opens the menu to set the identifier pattern After setting the ID type and the Com pare condition you can enter the value bit by bit by setting the state high low or don t care for each single bit Alternatively you can enter a hexadecimal value for each byte Identifier Setup ID type Remote command TRIGger A CAN IDENtifier on page 409 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 189 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis El CAN Option R amp S RTM K3 ID type Identifier Setup Identifier Selects the length of the identifier 11 bit for CAN base frames or 29 bits for CAN exten ded frames Remote command TRIGger A CAN ITYPe on page 408 Compare lt Identifier Setup Identifier Sets the comparison condition If the pattern contains at least one X don t care you can trigger on values equal or not equal to the specified value If the pattern contains only O and 1 you can also trigger on a range greater than or lower than the specified value Remote command TRIGger A CAN ICONdition on page 409 Bit Identifier Setup Identifier Selects the number of the bit in the pattern for bit by
204. NABlel nne nnns 342 MEASurement me STATistics WEIG hiba dilatada EA 342 MEASurementem gt STATstles RES Ct rp entere tente dense veas ace ux Oeo AEE a Ent vedo vrai UE 343 IS E IEN 343 MEASurementemesTESulES NR RTE 343 MEASUurement mesmRESultNPES3K ois ieieestersasieesterdeas ennd aan 344 MEASurement m RESulbPPE amp K EE 344 MEAGurement mz RESuICWEMCGount esses sse senes aisi stein sans nr nass 344 MEASurement m S TA Tistics VALus ALL 2 detexit ettet NSA 344 MEASurement lt m gt STATistics VALUeE lt N gt 7 oscari erakar aTa NE EREEREER ir EEE 345 MEASurement lt m gt STATistics ENABle lt StatisticEnable gt Activates or deactivates the statistical evaluation for the selected measurement Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the measurement place Parameters lt StatisticEnable gt ON OFF RST OFF Firmware Software FW 03 700 MEASurement lt m gt STATistics WEIGht lt AverageCount gt Sets the number of measured waveforms used for calculation of average and standard deviation Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the measurement place Parameters lt AverageCount gt Range 2 to 1000 Increment 1 RST 1000 LEE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 342 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BESSERES Command Reference Firmware Software FW 03 700 MEASurement lt m gt STATistics RESet Deletes the statistical results for the selected measurement and starts a new statistical evaluation if the acqu
205. NDition part of an SCPI register and assumes the highest level within the SCPI hierarchy The STB is read using the command STB or a serial poll The STatus Byte STB is linked to the Service Request Enable SRE register Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit in the SRE Bit 6 of the SRE is ignored If a bit is set in the SRE and the associated bit in the STB changes from 0 to 1 a service request SRQ is generated The SRE can be set using the command SRE and read using the command SRE Table 15 3 Meaning of the bits used in the status byte Bit No Meaning 0 1 Not used 2 Error Queue not empty The bit is set when an entry is made in the error queue If this bit is enabled by the SRE each entry of the error queue generates a service request Thus an error can be recognized and speci fied in greater detail by polling the error queue The poll provides an informative error message This procedure is to be recommended since it considerably reduces the problems involved with remote control QUEStionable status register summary bit The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the QUEStionable status register and the associated ENAB Le bit is set to 1 A set bit indicates a questionable instrument status which can be specified in greater detail by querying the STATus QUEStionable status register MAV bit message available The bit is set if a message is available in the output queue which can be rea
206. None Select this option to prevent unwanted actions due to unintended usage of the Micro Button Remote command PROBe m SETup MODE on page 299 Info Shows general information on the connected probe for example type serial number and production date as well as electrical characteristics like bandwidth attenuation input capacitance and impedance voltage and DC offset range Active Probe on Channel 3 General Information Identification RT ZS30 Type single ended Mat No 1410 4308 Serial No 100708 Production Date 2009 09 23 Electrical Characteristics Bandwidth 3 GHz Attenuation 10 Input Impedance 1Mo2 Input Capacitance Propagation Delay Input voltage range Probe DC Offset range 12 V 2 3 3 5 Label Menu Access CH N gt More gt Label In the Label menu you can define an additional name label for the selected waveform Label Library Edit Label On JS Label Shows or hides the channel name The name label is shown at the vertical center of the channel on the right edge of the display Remote command CHANnel lt m gt LABel STATe on page 292 ERA SSRIS User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 34 Reference for Waveform Setup Library Selects a predefined label text and assigns it The text can be edited with Edit Label Edit Label Opens on screen keyboard to enter a label text If you previously have selected a text from the library it is already writ
207. O BUS b SSPI CLOCk SOURce on page 386 BUS b SSPI DATA SOURce on page 0 Active Selects whether transmitted data or the chip select signal is high active high 1 or low active low 1 For CS the default is low active e d User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 157 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis SPI SSPI Bus Option R amp S RTM K1 For data the default is high active Remote command BUS b SPI CS POLarity on page 377 BUS b SPI DATA POLarity on page 0 BUS lt b gt SSPI DATA POLarity on page 0 Slope Selects if data is sampled on the rising or falling slope of the clock The clock slope marks the begin of a new bit Remote command BUS b SPI CLOCk POLarity on page 378 BUS lt b gt SSPI CLOCk POLarity on page 386 Time Out Sets the minimum idle time between two data packets If the time interval between the data packets is shorter the packets are part of the same frame Within the time out the data and clock lines are low A new frame begins when the time out has expired Time out is only relevant for SSPI that has no chip select Remote command BUS b SSPI BITime on page 387 First Bit Defines if the data of the messages starts with MSB most significant bit or LSB least significant bit Remote command BUS b SPI BORDer on page 379 BUS b SSPI BORDer on page 387 Sym
208. ODE sipresse ansari as ripiani rrt Pn Fh reap sctsatscasaicnsctdonteyscseveaiensseseasenasssecbesasanss 304 TRIGger A HOLDofr TIME inde dede dr bd teen didn eT Pase CS PEN MER cud 304 TRIGJer A CE TOO etie encre tr he e ede e cho a ede t RE uH SERV de yeu et doe ed ye gud 304 TRIGJETA JZC AC e 390 UUU User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 473 R amp S RTM20xx List of Commands Jee LEE Eeer ee eelere Ee Eeer TRIGA Kee KEE RRE e Ke TEE TRIG Ger ues PAT Let eege M TRIGJETA Klee PEENG AAA E eo O Eae EEEE eE A E E E RR lee Ee EE POFF E TRIGger A LEVel lt n gt RISetime LOWer TRIGger A LEVel lt n gt RlSetime Uber TRIGger A EEVelsns EVAEue u in erret Ferre Rer enr ic EEN geet TRIGgerA LINCHAR error m TRIGO A IER KEE TRIGJer Bares m iD A a TRIGger AcUIN DLEN O E TRIG GSRALEING I CONGIION EE TRIGger A LIN IDENtifier TRIGger A LIN IPERror TRIGJer A LIN SYVYER O C A dt cid TRIG GORA LUNE d E TRIGIS A MODE cti ED TRiGger A PAT Term CONDIION 0 c0c cccceceesecsctcessecesseendsncesbecssssndsnensssansecdscdeaserdsssesecsecesensestonaasonsataasandenis TRIGger A PAT Tern FUN CUON D TRIGE NK Heb TRIGger A PATTem SOURCE airia ne A a RD vos TRIGger A PAT Tern WIDTA DEL Tai entere t et arci tai TRIGger A PATTern WIDTh RANGe TRIGger A PATTern WIDTRh WID TR 3er cniin D dti teet dea TRIGgerA RIS time DEL Main cies
209. OPe on page 339 Phase Setup Configures the phase measurement that measures the pahse difference between two waveforms Source 1 Select one of the active channel math or reference waveforms for each Source 2 measurement source Remote command MEASurement lt m gt SOURce on page 338 ERA lt A User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 97 R amp S RTM20xx Mathematics Configuring and Using Math Waveforms 7 Mathematics Mathematical math waveforms are calculated data Each math waveform is defined by an equation You can configure and save up to five equations MA1 MAS four of these equation can be displayed MAT MA4 Each equation consists of one or two operands and a operator An operand can be an input channel a constant value or a math waveform with lower number than the oper and s number For example the MA3 equation can use the results of MA2 and MA1 as operands Each equation and also the set of all defined equations can get a label An equation set can be saved to and loaded from any storage device internal memory or external USB flash device The file format is always FML and the file size is 526 Byte It is also possible to copy the stored equation sets to another storage device with FILE gt Import Export Equation Sets See also chapter 13 2 1 2 Importing and Exporting Data on page 218 7 1 Configuring and Using Math Waveforms Math waveforms are configured using the Equation Set Edi
210. Overshoot M 89 Pulse Width negative pulse oisinnean iani Ra lcd rada 90 Duty Cyl 90 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 87 R amp S RTM20xx Measurements eee MMM MM MMMM Automatic Measurements RIIT 90 aiU EM 90 IE EE 90 SECONDI TT ET 90 Ek eg eI 90 BL MM E 91 A 91 cci E 91 Count postive PUISES TTT 91 Count nogatve EE 91 TE Ee Re e a E 91 COUNTA SO S 91 TG OP Gr DEE 91 Ms a E O 92 Mirec Ao DE 92 Tagger Te 92 Mean Value Determines the mean value of the complete displayed waveform The measurement value is displayed as Mean in the result table RMS Value Measures the RMS Root Mean Square value of the voltage of the complete displayed waveform The measurement value is displayed as RMS in the result table Mean Cycle Measures the mean value of the left most signal period The measurement value is dis played as MnCy in the result table RMS Cycle Measures the RMS Root Mean Square value of the voltage of the left most signal period The measurement value is displayed as RMSCy in the result table Peak Peak Measures the peak to peak value within the displayed section of the waveform The measurement value is displayed as Vpp in the result table Peak Measures the maximum value within the displayed section of the waveform The mea sured value is displayed as Vp in the
211. P Port 80 USB Port Vendor ID DAAD hex Product ID 00A1 hex 3 Onthe Screen Data page a copy of the instrument screen is shown To get the current screen content from the instrument click Update To save the screen copy right click the picture and select Save picture as 4 Onthe SCPI Device Control page you can check if the transfer of remote com mands is working You can enter a single command for example IDN and trans mit it with Send Do not press the Enter key e User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 246 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control El Basics SCPI Device Control Instrument Home The device may be controlled with special commands SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments Please take the respectively valid instruction set from the documentation delivered with the device If you type a wrong command or use a wrong syntax the device creates an error message which is not send immediately complying with the standard but can be requested separately In this case you will not get a response An easy way to request the error messages is to use the two buttons Screen Data SCPI Device Control Command ban Send Last Error Message All Error Messages Rohde amp Schwarz RTM1054 1305 0008K54 101634 03 031 Response 15 1 2 3 Connecting with the Instrument VISA Address String
212. R amp SSRTM20xx Digital Oscilloscope User Manual Test amp Measurement User Manual This document describes the following R amp S9RTM models e R amp S9 RTM2032 5710 0999K32 e R amp S9RTM2034 5710 0999K34 e R amp S9 RTM2052 5710 0999K52 e R amp S9RTM2054 5710 0999K54 In addition to the base unit the following options are described e R amp S9RTM K1 1305 0295 02 e R amp S9RTM K2 1305 0308 02 e R amp S9RTM K3 1317 3065 02 e R amp S9RTM K5 5710 0882 02 The firmware of the instrument makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledgement on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing 2013 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S9RTM is abbreviated as R amp S RTM Basic Safety Instructions Always read through and comply with the following safety instructions All plants and locations of the Rohde a
213. ROTOCOL LOGIC key on the front panel 2 Ifthe Logic menu is displayed press Protocol 3 Press Decode to display the content of the messages in an easily readable and comprehensible form 4 Press Display 5 Press Bits to display the individual bit lines above the decoded data 6 Press Data format to select the decoding format Binary Hexadecimal Decimal or ASCII 7 Toattach a descriptive label to the decoded bus enable Label and select a prede fined text from the Library or enter a user defined text using Edit Label 8 To adjust the position and size of decoded information on the screen use the vertical POSITION and SCALE rotary knobs 11 1 2 Protocol Common Settings The common settings in the Protocol menu define the bus type and open further menus to adjust the display of the decoded bus signal Access PROTOCOL LOGIC if Logic menu is displayed Protocol Bus Selects the bus to be configured SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines bus 1 and 2 or bus 3 and 4 If one of these buses is configured the number of buses suffix lt b gt is reduced Bus 2 and or bus 4 is not available E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 149 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis a a A a a upper Basics of Protocol Analysis Bus Type Defines the bus or protocol type for analysis For most types a special option to the instrument is required Remote command BUS lt b gt TYPE on page
214. RUNT POLarity lt Polarity gt Indicates the polarity of a the runt to be searched for Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative EITHer RST POS Firmware Software FW 03 700 SEARch TRIGger LEVel RUNT LOWer lt LowerLevel gt Sets the lower voltage threshold for runt detection A positive runt crosses the lower level twice without crossing the upper level Parameters lt LowerLevel gt RST 400 mV Default unit V Firmware Software FW 03 700 SEARch TRIGger LEVel RUNT UPPer lt UpperLevel gt Sets the upper voltage threshold for runt detection A negative runt crosses the upper level twice without crossing the lower level Parameters lt UpperLevel gt RST 600 mV Default unit V Firmware Software FW 03 700 SEARch TRIGger RUNT RANGe Range Sets how the measured pulse width is compared with the given limit s To set the width use SEARch TRIGger RUNT WIDTh To set the range At use SEARch TRIGger RUNT DELTa Parameters Range LONGer SHORter WITHin OUTSide LONGer Finds pulses longer than the given width SHORter Finds pulses shorter than the given width WITHin Finds pulses inside the range width At OUTSide Finds pulses outside the range width At RST LONG EE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 367 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control 15 2 12 7 Command Reference Firmware Software FW 03 700 SEARch TRIGger RUNT WIDTh Width Sets the reference runt pul
215. S Command Reference Parameters lt BandwidthLimit gt FULL B400 B200 B20 FULL Use full bandwidth B400 B200 B20 Limit to 400MHz 200 MHz or 20 MHz respectively B400 is not available for 350 MHz instruments R amp S RTM203x RST FULL CHANnel lt m gt POLarity lt Polarity gt Turns the inversion of the signal amplitude on or off To invert means to reflect the voltage values of all signal components against the ground level Inversion affects only the display of the signal but not the trigger Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters lt Polarity gt NORMal INVerted RST NORM CHANnel lt m gt OVERIoad lt Overload gt Retrieves the overload status of the specified channel from the status bit When the overload problem is solved the command resets the status bit Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters lt Overload gt ON OFF Use OFF to reset the overload status bit RST OFF Example CHANnel2 0VERload Queries the overload status of channel 2 CHANnel2 0VERload OFF Resets the overload status bit CHANnel lt m gt SKEW lt Skew gt Skew or deskew compensates delay differences between channels caused by the dif ferent length of cables probes and other sources Correct deskew values are important for accurate triggering L User Manual 1317
216. S lt b gt LIN FCOunt Returns the number of received frames of the active LIN bus Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Return values FrameCount Total number of decoded frames Usage Query only BUS lt b gt LIN FRAMe lt n gt DATA Returns the data bytes of the specified frame User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 426 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BEES Command Reference Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt FrameData gt Comma separated list of decimal values of the data bytes Usage Query only BUS lt b gt LIN FRAMe lt n gt STATus Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus n Return values lt FrameStatus gt OK UART CHCKsum PRERror SYERror WAKeup INSufficient ERR LENer Usage Query only BUS lt b gt LIN FRAMe lt n gt STARt Returns the start time of the specified frame Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus n Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt StartTime gt Range depends on sample rate record length and time base Increment depends on the time base Default unit s Usage Query only BUS lt b gt LIN FRAMe lt n gt STOP Returns the end time of the specified frame Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus ERA SSS User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 427 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BEES Command Reference lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n Return value
217. S9RTM20xx Index Q Queres rei e pet tid 249 258 SUAS EE dea egen 271 Question mark siiperi seai i d irida raai 257 258 Quick measurement deactivating remote sees 335 Quick measurements remote control EE 334 Quotation mark 2 1 rires 257 R lup eis AS 78 lup de 78 Real time sampling sess 26 Recommendations remote control programming sssessesss 272 Record length vcd eter tele 12 25 REF cy PR dd Reference T ell Viele MEET 74 SOTIKOV iii EE e xe cots ead 76 77 Reference Level Remote Control cocoa 341 Reference levels eR rev da 97 References import export 0 nennt mrt nens 218 Import EXport 5 rrr 232 loading MERU NE SAVING eret teer ni tal Deer 75 Deli mE RES 264 Remote control Automatic measurements sss 335 basics ni Cursor measurements ooooooocooccacccccconnnonncoccncncnnnnnnns 326 GPIB add rrr tmo rete eene epus 243 interfaces m T Programming examples sss 458 dere Lee E 241 quick measurements ai Referente Level urne eri ttes tete 341 Cu ole ME 248 Statistical measurements uuueeeuueuessss 342 Remove directory zio 445 rl cl MP ainiti 222 Remove file lcg 448 Li E 221 Reset values zio ue TT 276 ResSOlLt
218. SB flash device The file format is TRF and the file size is about 12 4 Byte The file content depends on the storage device e Internal storage of the R amp S RTM TRF files contain also the instrument settings so you can restore also the settings when you load a reference waveform e External USB flash drive TRF files contain only the waveform data the instrument settings are not saved and cannot be restored See chapter 13 2 4 1 Waveform File Formats on page 227 for details on file formats You can copy the stored references to another storage device with usual export import functions With export import you can also change the target file format and convert the data If you export a TRF file to a USB flash drive the instrument settings get lost and cannot be loaded with the waveform data anymore To copy a stored reference use FILE gt Import Export References See also chapter 13 2 1 2 Importing and Exporting Data on page 218 Furthermore you can save waveforms directly to a USB flash drive with FILE gt Wave forms without creating a reference waveform before See chapter 13 2 4 Wave forms on page 227 5 1 Using References You can store any of the active waveforms as reference waveform channel math and other reference waveforms or load a previously saved reference If MSO option R amp S RTM B1 is installed you can store also the pods of digital channels as references usual and unlike for other
219. SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock DLEVel DELTa sss een nennen nen nnne nnns enn 369 SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock HT Me eese cnc rencor nn cnn coran carr nc rerit eren nne enn innen 369 SGEAbRch TRlGoer DATatoclockGTlMe A 370 SEARCH TRIGger EDGE LEV DE 362 SEARch TRIGg rEDGE LEVel DEL T atscavcs ccsccicecsedccecatetensacaecvscendenspseneechechesapcasesvapeaddecnecandasaganbestedbeduedendvaes 362 SEARch TRIGger EDGE SLOPe 5 SGEAbRch TRilGoerl EVelHlGenme LOWer eene nennen tnnt nnns eterne nn rnn s nnn 365 SGEAbRch TRlGoer l Eve Hletme UfPber nennen enne nn nenen rra nena 365 SEAbRch TRiGoerl EVelRUNT LOWer AAR 367 SEARCH IRIGger EEVeERUNT U PROM vieccsivssconiescaseetisncivcescovsisccncenisspcancstvediceveshepsushessvensenessderdtaiemeenespesnennaties 367 E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 471 R amp S RTM20xx List of Commands SEAR ch TRiGger PAT Tern FUNCTION cccccscescesescecsstenseeesensenscceessensesseneneeevsensenteneeeaensnensesnessennestenseeens 370 SEARch TRiGger PAT Tenn E EE 371 SGEAbRch TRlGoerbpATTemlEVelcnz DEL Ta 371 SEARch TRIGger PAT Tern SOURCa a tee egest o n echec tt y o dade 370 SGEAbRch TRlGoerPATTemMWIDTh DEL Ta 372 SEAbRch TRlGoer PATTermnWIDThRANGe essere rerit ener nnne nnne 371 SGEAbRch TRlGoerPATTem VWID THIWIDTDl nennen nennen rennen nns enne 372 SEARch TRIGger RISetime DEL KE 366 SEAR ch TRiGger RiSetime RANGE ccsscccessesestenssseessensentenssnens
220. ST SAMPle E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 286 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BREET Command Reference CHANnel lt m gt ARIThmetics lt TrArithmetic gt Selects the method to build the resulting waveform from several consecutive acquisitions of the signal Suffix lt m gt The command affects all channels regardless of the indicated channel number The suffix can be omitted Parameters lt TrArithmetic gt OFF ENVelope AVERage SMOoth FILTer OFF The data of the current acquisition is recorded according to the decimation settings ENVelope Detects the minimum and maximum values in an sample interval over a number of acquisitions AVERage Calculates the average from the data of the current acquisition and a number of acquisitions before The number of used acquisitions is set with ACQuire AVERage COUNt SMOoth Calculates a mean value of several adjacent sample points Thus smoothing is a moving average that uses the full data and can be used for non periodic signals It works like a low pass and increa ses the vertical resolution at the expense of bandwidth reduction FILTer Sets a low pass filter with 3 db attenuation at a configurable limit frequency set with ACQuire FILTer FREQuency The filter removes higher frequencies from the channel signals RST OFF TiMebase ROLL ENABle Roll Enables the roll mode Parameters Roll ON OFF RST OFF ACQuire FILTer FREQuency lt Fi
221. Setup Data on page 461 MMEMory MDIRectory lt DirectoryName gt Creates a new directory with the specified name Setting parameters lt DirectoryName gt String parameter Absolute path including the storage device or relative to the cur rent directory Example Create directory DATA on the front USB flash device with abso lute path MMEM MDIR USB FRONT DATA Example Create directory JANUARY in the DATA directory with relative path MMEM CDIR USB FRONT DATA MMEM MDIR JANUARY Usage Setting only MMEMory RDIRectory lt DirectoryName gt Deletes the specified directory Note All subdirectories and all files in the specified directory and in the subdirectories will be deleted You cannot delete the current directory or a superior directory In this case the instrument returns an execution error Setting parameters lt DirectoryName gt String parameter absolute path or relative to the current directory Example MMEM RDIR INT TEST Deletes the directory TEST in the internal storage device and all files and subdirectories in the directory LEE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 445 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control ee ss ee ee Command Reference Usage Setting only MMEMory DCATalog lt PathName gt Returns the subdirectories of the specified directory The result corresponds to the num ber of strings returned by the MMEMor y DCATalog LENgth command Query parameters
222. Simplified diagram i i i i i i CONDition part peed dey td w Wey o ML n j je gt Le owe o 15 14 13 12 PTRansition part 15 14 13 12 NTRansition part 3 2 1 EPA A Logic OR of all bits 15 14 13 12 EVENt part 3 2 1 Summary bit of SCPI register written into a bit ofthe STB or into the CONDition bit of a superordinate register Logical AND of EVENt and ENABle bits 15 14 13 12 ENABle part 32 110 Fig 15 1 The status register model Description of the five status register parts The five parts of a SCPI register have different properties and functions CONDition The coNDition partis written into directly by the hardware or the sum bit of the next lower register Its contents reflect the current instrument status This register part can only be read but not written into or cleared Its contents are not affected by reading PTRansition NTRansition The two transition register parts define which state transition of the CONDition part none 0 to 1 1 to 0 or both is stored in the EVENt part The Positive TRansition part acts as a transition filter When a bit of the CONDi tion part is changed from 0 to 1 the associated PTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1 PTR bit 21 the EVENt bit is set
223. TH lt m gt SCALe Scale Sets the vertical scale for the specified math waveform In FFT mode the command sets the vertical scale of the FFT window The scale unit for FFT is set with CALCulate MATH m FFT MAGNitude SCALe Suffix m 1 4 Selects the math waveform IN FFT mode the numeric suffix is irrelevant Parameters lt Scale gt Scale value Range 1 0E 24 to 5 0E 25 Increment 1 2 5 progression for example 1mV div 2mV div 5mV div 10 20 50 RST 1 CALCulate MATH m POSition Position Sets the vertical position of the specified math waveform in the window Suffix m 1 4 Selects the math waveform Parameters Position Position value given in divisions Range 1 88E 005 to 2 12E 005 Increment 0 01 in reset state RST 2 CALCulate MATH lt m gt EXPRession DEFine lt RemComplExpr gt Defines the equation to be calculated for the selected math waveform as a regular expression For details on available operators see Operator on page 103 Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the math waveform EN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 346 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control Command Reference Parameters lt RemComplExpr gt String parameter consisting of the mathematical operation and the source s written in parenthesis Example CALC MATH lt 2 gt EXPR DEF CH1 CH2 Operation Expression string Com
224. To start a mask configuration and test press the TOOLS key and Masks Test Total 0 Masks Test Os New Mask e Actions MARKE TASI 4 4 Off 4 BIO MISK ee deed 129 Mir oL cr NENNEN 129 roc RNC 129 D EE 129 Bi A O A AA 129 DE ee ee 130 L3 130 boad MASK odds 130 ee 130 L Sound Stop Screenshot Print VWavefom nana 131 Masks TOS EE 131 Test Performs a mask test for the selected signal i e the signal s amplitudes are compared with the specified mask If the amplitude exceeds the limits of the mask a violation is detected E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 128 R amp S RTM20xx Masks Reference for MASKS key Which action is to be taken when a violation is detected is defined using the Actions softkey See also chapter 9 2 3 Performing a Mask Test on page 127 Remote command MASK TEST on page 355 Pause Temporarily stops the mask test without closing the Masks menu Counts are not deleted and the actions cannot be changed during a pause Remote command MASK TEST on page 355 New Mask Opens a submenu to define a new mask for testing Total 0 Os Copy Channel Y Position Stretch Y Width Y Width X Save Nn Ie Nh Ka See also chapter 9 2 1 Creating New Masks on page 125 Copy Channel New Mask Creates a new mask from the envelope waveform of the selected channel and stores it in the instrument Remote command
225. WIDth Burst width the duration of one burst measured from the first edge to the last edge that cross the middle reference level POVershoot NOVershoot Positive and negative overshoot of a square wave TBFRequency TBPeriod Measures the frequency of the B trigger signal and the length of the B trigger signal periods RST NONE measurement is off MEASurement lt m gt SOURce lt SignalSource gt lt ReferenceSource gt Selects one of the active signal reference or math channels as the source s of the selected measurement Available sources depend on the selected measurement type E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 338 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control es ee ee Command Reference Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the measurement place Parameters lt SignalSource gt NONE CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MA1 MA2 MA3 MA4 MAS RE1 RE2 RE3 RE4 TRIGger CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MA1 MA2 MA3 MA4 MA5 RE1 RE2 RE3 RE4 TRIGger DO D15 D70 D158 Waveform to be measured required for all measurement types CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Active signal channels 1 to 4 MA1 MA2 MA3 MA4 MA5 Active math channels 1 to 5 RE1 RE2 RE3 REA Active reference channels 1 to 4 TRIGger Only return value TRIG is returned if the measurement type is a trigger measurement TFRequency TPERiode measure the A trigger source TBFRequency TBPeriod measure the B trigger Source
226. WordCount gt Usage Query only BUS lt b gt UART RX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt o gt STATe Suffix lt b gt 1 4 n o Return values Status OK FRSTart FRENd FRMError STERror SPERror PRERror INSufficient BREak LEE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 404 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control 15 2 13 6 Command Reference Usage Query only BUS lt b gt UART RX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt o gt STARt Suffix lt b gt 1 4 n E lt o gt Return values lt StartTime gt Usage Query only BUS lt b gt UART RX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt o gt STOP Suffix lt b gt 1 4 n X o i Return values lt StopTime gt Usage Query only BUS lt b gt UART RX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt o gt VALue Suffix lt b gt 1 4 n E lt o gt i Return values lt Value gt Range 0 to 511 Increment 1 Usage Query only CAN CAN is the Controller Area Network a bus system used within automotive network archi tecture Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines bus 1 and 2 or bus 3 and 4 If one of these buses is configured the number of buses suffix lt b gt is reduced Bus 2 and or bus 4 is not available E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 405 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control lt __ _ AA AA AA Command Reference E E et TE WEE 406 e CAN DBOOG si Ite ERO EIDEM EES 407 o CAN ENT EE 411 A aie a aaa aaa aa aaa a e aa 417 CAN Conf
227. Y diagram The command is only relevant for 4 channel R amp S RTM instruments Parameters Source NONE CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 RST NONE DISPlay XY ZMODe Mode Activates or deactivates the intensity control of the waveform via an additional signal source and sets the intensity mode Parameters Mode ANALog DIGital OFF ANALog Modulated intensity Intensity is modulated continuously accord ing to the selected Source Z DIGital Intensity is determined by a threshold value defined with DISPlay XY ZTHReshold If the Z signal value is below the selected threshold the corresponding x y point is not displayed If the Z signal value is above the threshold the x y point is displayed with the defined intensity level OFF Intensity control is deactivated RST OFF DISPlay XY ZTHReshold lt Zthreshold gt Defines the threshold for intensity with a two state modulation if DISPlay XY ZMODe is set to DIGital Parameters lt Zthreshold gt Threshold for visibility on the screen Range 10 to 10 Increment depends on the scaling of the channel that is assigned to Z RST 0 Default unit V DISPlay XY ZSOurce lt Source gt Defines the source to be used to determine the intensity of the xy waveform User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 316 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BREET Command Reference Parameters lt Source gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH3 and CH4 are only available with 4 channel R amp S RTM oscil los
228. a Waveform to USB flash drive If you want to save many waveforms you can assign the function to the PRINT key Infrequent savings can be started from the File menu Before you can save the wave form you have to configure the storage location and file format 1 Press FILE gt Waveforms 2 Configure the storage location as described in To select the storage directory on page 218 3 Press Waveform and select the waveform to be stored All active waveforms are listed 4 Enter the file name as described in To define a new file or directory name on page 218 5 Select the Format For details see chapter 13 2 4 1 Waveform File Formats on page 227 6 Press Data and select whether to save the displayed data or the data stored in the memory For details see Data on page 230 7 Press Save To save waveforms several times by pressing simply the PRINT key assign the Wave forms to the PRINT key as described in chapter 13 2 2 1 Configuring the PRINT Key Behavior on page 224 13 2 4 3 Waveform Storage Settings With FILE gt Waveforms you open a menu to store one of the active waveforms to a USB flash drive Waveform File Name Name Format Data save For a description of the common save functions Storage File Name and Save see chapter 13 2 1 3 General Storage Settings on page 220 Specific settings for saving waveforms are described below User Manual 1317 4726 02
229. aaa dada 353 GALGCUlate MAT Hm FF TSOP ET 353 ALC late MATH m gt FF TAME RANGE EE 353 CALGulate MATHsm FFT TIME POSIUOR cccsei0c2sipecesschataranaydetasadayesdvbarpaeetsctsaara gel aa 354 CAL CulateMATHomsEET SbRATei nennen nsn nnn aser insania enses usa sensing ain 354 AAA MM PP User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 348 R amp S9RTM20xx Remote Control Command Reference CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT WINDow TYPE lt WindowType gt Window functions are multiplied with the input values and thus can improve the FFT display Suffix lt m gt Parameters lt WindowType gt 1 4 The numeric suffix is irrelevant RECTangular HAMMing HANNing BLACkmanharris RECTangular The rectangular window multiplies all points by one The result is a high frequency accuracy with thin spectral lines but also with increased noise Use this function preferably with pulse response tests where start and end values are zero HAMMing The Hamming window is bell shaped Its value is not zero at the borders of the measuring interval Thus the noise level inside the spectrum is higher than Hanning or Blackman but smaller than the rectangular window The width of the spectral lines is thinner than the other bell shaped functions Use this window to measure amplitudes of a periodical signal precisely HANNing The Hanning window is bell shaped Unlike the Hamming window its value is zero at the borders of the me
230. abel ui Node labels Bus Type ni Bus Width utter niue ect eere pce gn CAN S er ete E Ur EE LEE Protocol settings E EE nl E Tirigger settings eer rere Hbro rre Case sensitivity E E 252 Center EI 119 Center frequency le EE 352 Change directory une 445 roce CERE 222 Channel Channel cursors el ale RT 55 Channel Cursors c ccccccccccsecssesenceeeeceesesneeeeseeeeeeeeenees 60 Clear Persist oooooooccooooccoconononnnnconononnnnononononononnnnnnnnnnns 59 Clear status ze MP 274 Clock SCL CH 167 COLON TED 257 Color mode PTA Gece oes eae uc 216 softkey Ss Colors temperature esee 59 Comma EO 257 Commands COLON e COMMA RR command line structure Se D ele double AAA aaae GBIP addressed d GBIP universal instrument Control overlapping d i SE ee lu El quotation mark o oo cee cece aE SCPI compliant ais Eie Structure cooooooocccnccnnoconccnnnoonnnnncoronnnnonononnonanccnnnnncononns syntax elements i WHILE SPACE MR Command sequence recommendation occonncocococcnnnncoconnnnnnnncnnanononanonnnnnoos 273 O EE 277 Comment EE 220 Common commands GLEN 251 CAD esee 262 Configuration Protocol settings menu sees 150 Constant cc EE 108 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 476 R amp S9RTM20xx Index Controls Position Offset vertical ssssessee 28 Position horizontal aia Scale horizon
231. able instrument or measurement states Reading the CONDition registers does not delete the contents Return values Condition Condition bits in decimal representation Range 1 to 65535 Increment 1 Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable ENABle Enable STATus QUEStionable COVerload ENABle Enable STATus QUEStionable LIMit ENABle Enable STATus QUEStionable MASK ENABle Enable Sets the enable mask that allows true conditions in the EVENt part to be reported in the summary bit If a bit is set to 1 in the enable part and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition occurs in the summary bit and is reported to the next higher level RERUM RU LER T A SSS SSS User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 456 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BEES Command Reference Parameters lt Enable gt Bit mask in decimal representation Range 1 to 65535 Increment 1 Example STATus QUEStionable MASK ENABle 24 Set bits no 3 and 4 of the STATus QUEStionable MASK ENABle register part 24 8 16 23 24 STATus QUEStionable EVENt STATus QUEStionable COVerload EVENt STATus QUEStionable LIMit EVENt STATus QUEStionable MASK EVENt Returns the contents of the EVENt part of the status register to check whether an event has occurred since the last reading Reading an EVENt register deletes its contents Return values Event Event bits in decimal representation Range 1 to 65535 Increment
232. ace module on the rear panel Thus remote control is possible either with LAN or USB connection or with GBIP To be able to control the instrument via the GPIB bus the instrument and the controller must be linked by a GPIB bus cable A GPIB bus card the card drivers and the program libraries for the programming language must be provided in the controller The controller must address the instrument with the GPIB instrument address User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 242 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control Basics Characteristics The GPIB interface is described by the following characteristics e Up to 15 instruments can be connected e The total cable length is restricted to a maximum of 15 m the cable lenth between two instruments should not exceed 2m e Awired OR connection is used if several instruments are connected in parallel GPIB Instrument Address In order to operate the instrument via remote control it must be addressed using the GPIB address The remote control address is factory set to 20 but it can be changed in the network environment settings or in the Setup menu under Interface Parameter For remote control addresses 0 through 30 are allowed The GPIB address is maintained after a reset of the instrument settings 15 1 2 Setting Up a LAN Connection 15 1 2 1 Connecting the Instrument to the Network The network card can be operated with a 10 Mbps Ethernet IEEE 802 3 or a 100 Mbps Ethernet IEEE 802 3u interfa
233. aeee 97 Position Digital channels c cccccseeeceeeeteeeeeeneeeeeteeettes 211 Horizontal 4 3 5 ois tai 15 23 softkey Vertical spe 130 Cj ese 232 Printer COImmuniCatiOn essa 217 Cijulp C hse 238 Printing Lie cie 232 Print Key SOTO Y e PRINT KEY cocidas ais Configuring ProbeMeter E Probes Cle HH 18 A 239 Wl EE 18 passive 2 Programming examples sssssssse 458 Protocol MX ceci ete tti a 242 Protocols CAN CAN configuration settings A CAN search settings oooococconiccccnnncoconcoccccnnnncanonnanon CAN trigger settings Display configuration e P casei eege dee tete nte ane i ee 12C configuration settings 12C trigger settings d s si Label liSt corio ita cian DIN Eer LIN configuration settings 2 LIN search settings A LIN trigger settings Parallel bus configuration e SPI SSPI isis SPI SSPI configuration settings 157 SPI SSPI trigger settings Symbolic ID re et che cet pter UARTIRS 232 iiinn tenter UART configuration settings 2 UART trigger settings eese 180 PT RANSIION m 262 Pulse Width EE 87 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 480 R amp
234. after the current one Holdoff helps to obtain stable triggering when the oscilloscope is triggering on undesired events Remote command TRIGger A HOLDoff MODE on page 304 TRIGger A HOLDoff TIME on page 304 B Trigger Activates or deactivates the second edge trigger event that follows a first edge trigger event in a trigger sequence The instrument triggers if both trigger event conditions A and B are fulfilled If the B trigger is activated the LEVEL rotary knob and the SLOPE key are automatically assigned to the B event You can toggle the assignment of these controls with the Trigger Level setting in the Trigger menu Remote command TRIGger B ENABle on page 312 B Setup Opens the menu for B trigger configuration The B trigger is a second edge trigger event that can be combined with a preceeding edge trigger event The trigger conditions of this second event are considered when the conditions of the main event A trigger are met For a description of the menu see chapter 3 3 2 9 B Setup on page 52 Trigger Level Assigns the SLOPE key and the LEVEL rotary knob on the front panel to the A or B event The function is only relevant if the B trigger is enabled The SOURCE key sets always the A trigger source 3 3 2 2 Trigger Source Settings Access Trigger SETUP Source The content of the Trigger Source menu depends on the trigger type The figure below shows the trigger source menu for the width
235. age 320 4 2 XY Diagram XY diagrams combine the voltage levels of two waveforms in one diagram They use the amplitude of a second waveform as the x axis rather then a time base This allows you to perform phase shift measurements for example With harmonically related signals the resulting XY diagrams are Lissajous patterns XY diagrams can also be used to display the IQ representation of a signal It is also possible to define two source signals in y direction for comparison The intensity of the XY waveform can be set to a defined level or be modulated dynam ically using a further source signal In the latter case the amplitudes of additional source signal determine the intensity of the displayed waveform For details see chapter 4 2 1 2 Configuring the Intensity of an XY Waveform on page 63 E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 61 R amp S RTM20xx Display XY Diagram Together with the XY diagram the time diagrams of the source signals are displayed in separate windows TB 20ns T 0s Auto CH1 45 mV 4 DC 2 5 GSals Real Time A T Ae re Al VAmp 3 37 V Z Setup zZ Source Z Z Intensity Threshold PRA Fig 4 1 XYZ display 4 2 1 Configuring XY Diagrams XY diagrams combine the voltage levels of two waveforms in one diagram A further signal source can be used to determine the intensity of the XY waveform To switch the display to XY diagram and vice versa gt Press DISPLAY gt Display Mode un
236. ailable with AC and DC coupling Remote command TRIGger A EDGE FILTer NREJect on page 305 Hysteresis A B Sets a hysteresis range around the trigger level If the signal jitters inside this range and crosses the trigger level thereby no trigger event occurs Thus hysteresis avoids unwan ted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level Hysteresis is available for the edge trigger A event and B event and for the width trigger To see the hysteresis on the display activate Trigger Hyst in the Display Auxillary Cursors menu The hysteresis value depends on the vertical scale Remote command TRIGger A HYSTeresis on page 304 TRIGger B HYSTeresis on page 314 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 44 R amp S RTM20xx Triggers EH Reference for Triggers 3 3 2 4 Width The width trigger compares the pulse width duration with a given time limit It detects pulses with an exact pulse width pulses shorter or longer than a given time as well as pulses inside or outside the allowable time range The instrument triggers if the pulse does not cross the specified voltage treshold twice The pulse width is measured at the trigger level Width Trigger Comparison Pm Deet 7 t Find Level C lez 2 Time t TIME EE 46 A DE 46 Comparison Sets how the measured pulse width is compared with the given limit s ti lt t ti gt t Triggers on pulse width shorter or longer than the refer
237. al O after a stop bit Remote command TRIGger A UART MODE on page 402 SBIT L User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 181 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis m a Hm UART RS 232 Interface Option R amp S RTM K2 Frame Start Triggers on the begin of a frame The frame start is the first start bit after the idle time Remote command TRIGger A UART MODE on page 402 BSTart Symbol n Sets the trigger to the specified symbol the n th word in a frame package Remote command TRIGger A UART MODE on page 402 NTHSymbol Any Symbol Opens a submenu to trigger if a pattern occurs in a symbol at any position in a frame You can enter the pattern in binary or hex the functions are the same as for Pattern setting e Select Bit on page 182 e State on page 182 e Value on page 183 Remote command TRIGger A UART MODE on page 402 SYMBo1 Pattern Opens a submenu to set the trigger on a serial pattern at a defined position in the frame The pattern can include several subsequent symbols Pattern Symbol Offset Remote command TRIGger A UART MODE on page 402 PATTern TRIGger A UART PATTern on page 403 Symbol Offset Pattern Sets the number of symbols to be ignored before the serial pattern Remote command TRIGger A UART POFFset on page 404 Number of Symb Pattern Defines the length of the pattern how many symbols build it up Remote command TR
238. al sensors and actuators with low bandwidth requirements Common applications in a motor vehicle are the control of doors windows wing mirrors and wipers 11 6 1 The LIN Protocol This chapter provides an overview of protocol characteristics frame format identifiers and trigger possibilities For detailed information order the LIN specification on http www lin subbus org free of charge LIN characteristics Main characteristics of LIN are e Single wire serial communications protocol based on the UART byte word interface e Single master multiple slaves usually up to 12 nodes e Master controlled communication master coordinates communication with the LIN schedule and sends identifier to the slaves e Synchronization mechanism for clock recovery by slave nodes without crystal or ceramics resonator The R amp S RTM supports several versions of the LIN standard v1 3 v2 0 v2 1 and the american SAE J2602 Data transfer Basic communication concept of LIN e Communication in an active LIN network is always initiated by the master e Master sends a message header including the synchronization break the synchro nization byte and the message identifier e The identified node sends the message response one to eight data bytes and one checksum byte e Header and response form the message frame The data is transmitted in bytes using the UART byte word interface without the parity bit Each byte consists of a start bit
239. allel FRAMe lt ns STATE uasin innnan iaiia aii aaa aa aa iiia 440 BUS lt b gt CPARale EEN EN KEE 440 SR PARale FRAMO S gt STAR EE 440 BUS sb GPARallel F RAMesn STAR iiis iu ida cnra adai ee aaia 440 BUS lt b gt PARallel FRAM lt n gt STOP ccccccecceceeeeteeceteeeuteecuseeceeeeeueseeeeaeeeegeneegenetseteneee 440 BUS lt b gt e STEE ER Kee EE 440 BUS lt b gt PARallel FCOunt BUS lt b gt CPARallel FCOunt Returns the number of decoded frames Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Return values lt FrameCount gt Total number of decoded frames Usage Query only BUS lt b gt PARallel FRAMe lt n gt DATA BUS lt b gt CPARallel FRAMe lt n gt DATA Returns the data words of the specified frame Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines lt n gt Selects the frame Return values lt FrameData gt List of decimal values of data words Usage Query only EN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 439 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control aT M Ma l MMMM Command Reference BUS lt b gt PARallel FRAMe lt n gt STATe BUS lt b gt CPARallel FRAMe lt n gt STATe Returns the overall state of the specified frame Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines lt n gt Selects the frame Return values lt FrameStatus g
240. alling slope on SDA while SCL is high e 7 bit address of the slave device that either will be written to or read from e R W bit specifies if the data will be written to or read from the slave e ACKnowledge bits is issued by the receiver of the previous byte if the transfer was successful Exception At read access the master terminates the data transmission with a NACK bit after the last byte e Data a number of data bytes with an ACK bit after every byte ERA e 1 LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLULUUUTLL ULIS User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 165 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis PC Option R amp S RTM K1 e Stop condition a rising slope on SDA while SCL is high START ADDRESS RW ACK DATA condition byte condition L Frame Fig 11 4 I2C write access with 7 bit address Address types 7 bit and 10 bit Slave addresses can be 7 or 10 bits long A 7 bit address requires one byte 7 bits for the address followed by the R W bit A 10 bit address for write access requires two bytes the first byte starts with the reserved sequence 11110 followed by the two MSB of the address and the write bit The second byte contains the remaining 8 LSB of the address The slave acknowledges each address byte SLAVE ADDRESS SLAVE ADDRESS mE g ist 7 BITS Mi 2nd BYTE DATA 11110XX reserved MSB Ge Fig 11 5 10 bit address write access A 10 bit address for read access requires three bytes The first two byte
241. also command synchronization and OPC Usage Event General Remote Settings and Queries This chapter describes commands that have effect on many other commands in different applications of the instrument Let E 278 FORME BORDO nc 279 CHANN MS DATA XORION KE 279 CHANNnel lt m gt DATA ENVYelope XORIQIN incoace aiaa aaa 279 CAL CulateMATHcms DATA NOR 279 REF Cume me DATA e DEE 279 CHAN el lt in gt DATA DINCIO MON ui dd a 280 CHANnel m DATA ENVelope XINCrement ssesssssssssssseseseee nennen nnns 280 CALCulate MATH m DATA XINCrement sees enne nnne nisse nina nin 280 REFGurvesms DATAOXINGCrPGImBBDE ai ieenco dde tesa danser dla aede sata ASA et 280 CHANING me DATA TORIO KEE 280 CH ANnekcmz DATAENVelope vOhloin eeeessesessssssseees eene rene enne 280 CALCulate MAT Hm gt DATA de UE 280 REPCurvesm DATAY e NET 280 CHANnel lt m gt DATA YINCrement oo icc cceesccasisesccesccsntarsaccoaseconsscaseesddesadaceceaadenssatandatdcnnase 280 CH ANnekcmz DATAENVelope vlNCrement nennen enne 280 CAL Culate MATH m DATACYINGCFemibll cuina aida 280 ee DENK Me 280 CHAhNnelm DATANVREGoluton esee eene nnne annees nin 281 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 277 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control Command Reference CH ANnekcmz DATAENVelope vbRE Solution 281 CALGCulate MATH lt m gt DATA d elle KE 281 REFCUNVE lt IiDATAY RESOIUTON KEE 281 FORMat DATA lt DataFormat gt lt Accuracy gt De
242. alues lt Data gt List of values according to the format settings Usage Query only REFCurve lt m gt DATA HEADer Returns information on the reference waveform Table 15 14 Header data Position Meaning Example 1 XStart in s 9 477E 008 94 77 ns 2 XStop in s 9 477E 008 94 77 ns 3 Record length of the waveform in Samples 200000 4 Number of values per sample interval usually 1 1 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 325 15 2 8 15 2 8 1 Command Reference Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the reference waveform the internal reference storage Parameters lt Header gt Comma separated value list Example 9 477E 008 9 477E 008 200000 1 Usage Query only Measurements This chapter describes functions that configure or perform cursor and automatic meas urements e Cursor Measurements 326 Quick Measuteimellls i i occisa tei red ccu rci duh ica dog acu aue eda edu a D dg cid 334 e Automatic Measurements se sesssoeeriooerrersrrrrrrurriresnrersonrriruerrersrnrrrsunrrerurnereens 335 e Reference Level 341 e Automatic Measurements StatiStiC oooonnncccccnononinenoncnoonronnnnnonananonnncnnnnarnnonnn 342 Cursor Measurements CUES On EE 327 CURSO MESTATO E 327 e enee EE 327 CURSO MA FUNCION E 328 SI age li E KN NEE 330 CURSO MA TEE 330 GURS OEM X2POSION cc cocaina di dad SEENEN 330 CURSO ems X3PoOSIo EE 330 CURSO MV TPOSIDEL EE 330 CURSO m e DEE 330 CURSO E e
243. ames Data Frame lt type gt Frame for data transmission The identifier format is also considered see ID type on page 190 Remote Frame type Data Frame for data transmission A remote frame initiates the transmission of data by another node The frame format is the same as of data frames but without the data field The identifier format is also considered see ID type on page 190 Data or remote Frame type Triggers on remote frames and on data frames The identifier format is also considered see ID type on page 190 Error type Identifies various errors in the frame You can select one or more error types as trigger condition The first key press enables the Error trigger type the second opens the Error menu Remote command TRIGger A CAN TYPE on page 407 ERRCondition Stuff bit Error type The frame segments Start Of Frame Arbitration Field Control Field Data Field and CRC Sequence are coded by the bit stuffing method The transmitter automatically inserts a complementary bit into the bit stream when it detects five consecutive bits of identical value in the bit stream to be transmitted A stuff error occurs when the 6th consecutive equal bit level in the mentioned fields is detected Remote command TRIGger A CAN BITSterror on page 410 Form Error type A form error occurs when a fixed form bit field contains one or more illegal bits Remote command TRIGg
244. amp S RTM20xx Remote Control Command Reference BUS lt b gt I2C FRAMe lt n gt ACOMplete Returns the state of the address Suffix lt b gt lt n gt Return values lt AddressComplete gt Usage 1 4 Selects the bus Selects the frame ON OFF ON Address was received completely Query only BUS lt b gt 12C FRAMe lt n gt ADBStart Returns the start time of the address acknowledge bit Suffix lt b gt lt n gt Return values lt AckStartTime gt Usage 1 4 Selects the bus Selects the frame Range depends on sample rate record length and time base Increment depends on the time base Default unit s Query only BUS lt b gt 12C FRAMe lt n gt ADDRess Returns the decimal address value of the indicated frame including the R W bit Suffix lt b gt lt n gt Return values lt AddressValue gt Usage 1 4 Selects the bus Selects the frame Decimal value Range 0 to 2047 Increment 1 Query only User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 395 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control Command Reference BUS lt b gt 12C FRAMe lt n gt ADEVice Returns the decimal address value of the indicated frame without R W bit Suffix lt b gt lt n gt Return values lt SlaveAddress gt Usage 1 4 Selects the bus Selects the frame Decimal value Range 0 to 1023 Increment 1 Query only BUS lt b gt 12C FRAMe
245. amp S RTM K3 After setting the Data length and the Comparison condition you can enter the value bit by bit by setting the state high low or don t care for each single bit Alternatively you can enter a hexadecimal value for each byte The settings are the same as for the setup of the data trigger see Data S on page 190 Remote command SEARch PROT on page 421 on page 421 on page 421 Search results events are marked on the waveform and listed in the event table as usual Instead of the event table you can display the frame table where the search results are also marked The event flags are not saved in the csv file of the frame table TB 1ms T 300 us Auto CAN Identifier 1MSais Real Time Complete A AAN T REVIENS REY EN Bus Frame Table CAN CH1 H 50000 Bit s Frame r Frame s Err Frame ata 314 Door_Right 3 2326 41 DEST Form ms Err Frame OK Frames 26 30 54 Label Door_Right Fig 11 13 Search for data frames with 11 bit identifier search results are marked in frame table and on the decoded data User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 196 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis LIN Option R amp S RTM K3 11 6 LIN Option R amp S RTM K3 The Local Interconnect Network LIN is a simple low cost bus system used within auto motive network architectures LIN is usually a sub network of a CAN bus The primary purpose of LIN is the integration of uncritic
246. an be any active channel signal a constant value or a mathematical waveform with lower number than the one to be defined CH1 CH2 An active channel waveform CH3 CH4 Const A constant value User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 107 R amp S RTM20xx Mathematics BEEN Reference for Mathematics MA1 MA2 A mathematical waveform Only math waveforms with lower number MA3 MA4 are available Operand 2 Edit Equations Defines the second operand for the mathematical operation if required The source can be any active channel signal a constant value or a mathematical waveform with lower number than the one to be defined CH1 CH2 An active channel waveform CH3 CH4 Const A constant value MA1 MA2 A mathematical waveform Only math waveforms with lower number MA3 MA4 are available Edit Constant Edit Equations Provides functions to define a constant value to be used in a mathematical operation In addition to the value a decimal point the unit and an Sl prefix can be defined This softkey is only available if Constant is selected as one of the operands Constant Edit Constant Edit Equations Specifies a pre defined constant or a user defined constant for a mathematical operation Either one of the following pre defined constants can be selected or one of 10 user defined constants e Pi e 2 Pi e 1 2 Pi e e Value Edit Constant Edit Equations Specifies the va
247. an trigger on various events that are typical for the configured bus type for example on start and stop of messages on specific addresses or on serial patterns Analysis can be performed on analog input channels and if MSO option R amp S RTM K1 is installed on digital channels 11 1 1 Configuring Common Protocol Settings Common settings for all bus types are the logic threshold and the decoding and display settings If the MSO option R amp S RTM B1 is installed and the digital channels are used for protocol analysis the thresholds are set in the Logic menu To set the logic threshold for analog channels Before you start configuration and analysis check and set the logic thresholds for all used channels the voltage values for digitization of analog signals If the signal value is higher than the threshold the signal state is 1 Otherwise the signal state is considered 0 if the signal value is below the threshold User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 148 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis Basics of Protocol Analysis If you want the instrument to set the thresholds based on the analysis of the signals press Find level in the protocol s Configuration menu 1 Press the CH N key of the required channel 2 Press the More softkey 3 Press Threshold and enter the voltage value 4 Repeat step 1 to 3 for all channels that are used for protocol analysis To configure decoding and data display 1 Press the P
248. ange 00 through OF hex They only affect instruments addressed as listeners Command Effect on the instrument GET Group Execute Trigger Triggers a previously active instrument function e g a sweep The effect of the command is the same as with that of a pulse at the external trigger signal input GTL Go to Local Transition to the local state manual control GTR Go to Remote Transition to the remote state remote control User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 250 R amp S9RTM20xx Remote Control Basics Command Effect on the instrument PPC Parallel Poll Configure Configures the instrument for parallel poll SDC Selected Device Clear Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state Does not change the instrument setting 15 1 4 2 SCPI Command Structure SCPI commands consist of a so called header and in most cases one or more param eters The header and the parameters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank The headers may consist of several mnemonics key words Queries are formed by appending a question mark directly to the header The commands can be either device specific or device independent common com mands Common and device specific commands differ in their syntax Syntax for Common Commands Common device independent commands consist of a header prec
249. annels Digital channels and parallel buses Each digital channel can be displayed on the screen and used as trigger source of some trigger types A pod of digital signals can be saved as reference waveform Digital channels may be grouped and displayed as a parallel bus Up to 4 parallel buses can be configured and two bus types are supported clocked bus and unclocked bus Trigger possibilities One of the digital channels can be used as trigger source for edge and width triggers However digital channels are not selectable if the B trigger is enabled Using the pattern trigger you can trigger on parallel buses and logical combinations of analog and digital channels For all digital trigger sources the trigger level is the logical threshold Addi tionally you can define a trigger holdoff time for the edge and width trigger Cursor measurements Cursor measurements can be performed on single digital channels and on pods As for all measurements the instrument provides only sources that are active and appropriate for the selected measurement type The sources DO to D15 are available for time ratio X count duty ratio and burst width measurements The pods DO D7 and D8 D15 are available for V marker measure ments which delivers the 8 bit value of the pod Automatic measurements and statistics Automatic time and count measurements can be performed on active digital channels As for all measurements the instrument provides on
250. arameters Pattern String parameter String containing 0 1 X x for each channel The order of channels is fixed CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Example SEAR TRIG PATT SOUR 1X10 CH1 CH3 are high CH4 is low These states are logically com bined with SEARch TRIGger PATTern FUNCtion CH2 does not matter don t care SEARch TRIGger PATTern FUNCtion Function Sets the logical combination of the channel states EMN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 370 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BEES Command Reference Parameters lt Function gt AND OR NAND NOR AND The required states of all channels must appear in the input signal at the same time OR At least one of the channels must have the required state NAND Not and operator at least one of the channels does not have the required state NOR Not or operator none of the channels has the required state RST AND SEARch TRIGger PATTern LEVel n lt ThresholdLevel gt Sets the threshold value for each specified source channel You can set different levels for the channels Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters lt ThresholdLevel gt Range Depends on vertical scale SEARch TRIGger PATTern LEVel lt n gt DELTa lt LevelDelta gt Sets a hysteresis range to the level of the specified source channel in order to avoid unwanted search results caused by noise oscillation around the lev
251. as ver texes Sample amp The ADC sample points are displayed like a histogram For each sam Hold ple interval the voltage is taken from the sample point and considered as constant and the intervals are connected with vertical lines Thus you see the discrete values of the ADC Remote command ACQuire INTerpolate on page 285 Vertical Settings To adjust the vertical settings you use the keys and rotary knobs in the VERTICAL func tional block of the front panel and the channel specific softkey menu VERTICAL Controls VERTICAL POSITION IK OFFSET REF functions are described in chapter 5 Reference Waveforms on page 74 MATH functions are described in chapter 7 Mathematics on page 98 ul M 28 SIGNAL OFF EMT 28 POSMION V OFFSET EE 28 E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 27 R amp S RTM20xx Acquisition and Waveform Setup EENEG Reference for Waveform Setup E BE 28 O A Rep uM iof tM EL eR NET 28 BOE OS Ls dap nemini nti i ti E 29 CHN Each channel key turns on an analog channel selects it and opens the Channel menu with the vertical settings of the selected channel The key is illuminated in the channel color if the channel is active The effect of the keypress depends on state of the channel e Ifchannel is off Pressing the key turns the channel on and selects it The rotary knobs alongside light up in the channel color e If the channel is on Pressing the key selects the channel waveform an
252. ase extract is indicated by a white frame in the Y t window The width W and position P are indicated in the information bar beneath the Y t window Auto CH1 0 V f DC 3MSa Refresh Run Span 2 GHz Center 1GHz Envelope CH1 t dBV Fig 8 1 Width and position of the time base extract for FFT calculation Press Y Scale to define the scaling of the FFT amplitudes Define the frequency range to be displayed in the FFT window The range is defined as Center Span 2 to Center Span 2 For details see Span on page 119 and Center on page 119 a Press Span to define the width of the frequency range b Press Center to define the center frequency of the range To configure the FFT diagram graphically 1 Define the time base extract for which the FFT is to be calculated and displayed The extract is defined by its width and position see figure 8 1 a Press the horizontal SCALE rotary knob to select the FFT time base extract W P settings are highlighted b Turn the horizontal SCALE rotary knob to define the width of the time base extract Turn the knob counter clockwise to enlarge the extract or clockwise to decrease it c Turn the horizontal POSITION rotary knob to define the position of the time base extract Turn the knob counter clockwise to move the extract to the left or clock wise to move it to the right Define the frequency range to be displayed in the FFT diagram The range is defined as C
253. ased on the current calculated value and a value with a distance of 0 1 DIV Due to this the time axis has a finitely small resolution Therefore scale the input signal to display the required area appropriately pra A Integral Calculates the definite integral of the operand The calculation is displayed in the illustration The integration starts at point a and adds the area beneath the waveform Point b indicates the currently calculated value At the end of the positive alternation the integral function reaches its maximum Due to the homopolar operand used in this example the waveform of the area reaches zero after the negative alternation Use a V Marker to measure the area for an extract of the waveform See also Meas Type on page 83 Wi IV IIR low pass IIRL Op1 fg Op2 Calculates a low pass filtered waveform of Operand 1 The cut off frequency is set with constant Operand 2 Signal components with frequencies higher than the cut off frequency are attenuated signifi cantly IIR high pass IIR J Op1 fg Op2 Calculates a high pass filtered waveform of Operand 1 The cut off frequency is set with constant Operand 2 Signal components with frequencies below the cut off frequency are attenuated significantly oc Remote command CALCulate MATH lt m gt EXPRession DEFine on page 346 Operand 1 Edit Equations Defines the first operand for the mathematical operation The source c
254. ask and Gateway in the same way as the IP address 9 Select the IP Port the port number for raw socket communication 10 Select the HTTP Port used by the instrument 11 Select the Transfer mode This mode can either be determined automatically Auto setting or you can select a combination of a transfer rate and half or full duplex manually User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 245 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control AA eee Basics 12 Press Save to save the LAN parameters on the instrument The Link status information at the bottom of the dialog box indicates whether a LAN connection was established successfully Checking LAN and SCPI connection 1 Check the LAN connection using ping ping xxx yyy zzz xxx 2 If the computer can access the instrument enter the IP address of the R amp S RTM in the address line of the internet browser on your computer http xxx yyy zzz xxx The Instrument Home page appears It provides information on the instrument and the LAN connection Instrument Home Print gt Instrument Home Device Class Oscilloscope Interface Type USB LAN Device Type RTM1054 Serial Number IF 058100096 SOE NIE Ata KMAT 1305 0008K54 HW Version 1 001 Serial Number 101634 SW Version 3 003 SCPI Device Control A E Firmware Version 03 031 Ethernet Port MAC Address 00 50 C2 45 11 FA DHCP off IP Address 169 254 238 10 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 10 1 IP Port 5025 HTT
255. asuring interval Thus the noise level within the spectrum is reduced and the width of the spectral lines enlarges Use this window to measure amplitudes of a periodical signal precisely BLACkmanharris The Blackman window is bell shaped and has the steepest fall in its wave shape of all other available functions Its value is zero at both borders of the measuring interval In the Blackman window the amplitudes can be measured very precisely However deter mining the frequency is more difficult Use this window to measure amplitudes of a periodical signal precisely RST HANNing CALCulate MATH lt m gt ARIThmetics lt Arithmetics gt Defines the mode for FFT calculation and display Suffix lt m gt 1 4 The numeric suffix is irrelevant User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 349 R amp S9RTM20xx Remote Control Parameters lt Arithmetics gt Command Reference OFF ENVelope AVERage OFF The FFT is performed without any additional weighting or post processing of the acquired data The new input data is acquired and displayed and thus overwrites the previously saved and dis played data ENVelope In addition to the normal spectrum the maximal oscillations are saved separately and updated for each new spectrum The max imum values are displayed together with the newly acquired val ues and form an envelope This envelope indicates the range of all FFT trace values that occurred AVERage The average of se
256. ata2Clock search also known as setup hold finds violation of setup and hold times It analyzes the relative timing between two sig nals a data signal and the synchronous clock signal Many systems require that the data signal must be steady for some time before and after the clock edge Setup time is the time that the data signal is steady before clock edge Hold time is the time that the data signal is steady after clock edge For settings see chapter 10 3 7 Data2Clock Search on page 142 The pattern search finds logical combinations of channel states inside or outside a specified time range For each channel its state and threshold level is defined The states are combined logically and the time of true pattern results is compared with a specified time range For settings see chapter 10 3 8 Pattern Search on page 144 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 136 R amp S RTM20xx Search eee A A aN Reference for Search Menu Protocol The protocol search finds various events in decoded data of CAN and LIN signals for example a specified frame type identifier data and errors The protocol search requires option R amp S RTM K3 For information on protocol search see e chapter 11 5 5 Search on Decoded CAN Data on page 194 e chapter 11 6 6 Search on Decoded LIN Data on page 205 Remote command SEARch CONDition on page 359 Setup Opens a menu to define the specific search parameters Source Selects the wav
257. aved screenshot Parameters Format GDI BMP PNG GDI For output on printer BMP PNG File formats for saved screenshots RST PNG Example chapter 15 3 3 1 Saving Screenshots to File on page 461 HCOPy PAGE SIZE Size Defines the page size to be used Parameters Size A4 A5 B5 B6 EXECutive HCOPy PAGE ORIentation Orientation Defines the page orientation Parameters Orientation LANDscape PORTrait HCOPy COLor SCHeme lt ColorScheme gt Defines the color mode for saved and printed screenshots p o User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 442 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control 15 2 15 2 Command Reference Parameters lt ColorScheme gt COLor GRAYscale INVerted INVerted inverts the colors of the output i e a dark waveform is printed on a white background RST COLor Example chapter 15 3 3 1 Saving Screenshots to File on page 461 SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter SELect lt PrinterName gt Selects a configured printer Parameters lt PrinterName gt String parameter Enter the string as it is returned with SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate FIRSt Or SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate NEXT SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate FIRSt Queries the name of the first printer in the list of printers The names of other installed printers can be q
258. aw socket mode TCPIP lt IP_address gt lt IP port gt SOCKET The default port number for SCPI socket communication is 5025 Example If the instrument has the IP address 192 7 2 3 the valid resource string is TCPIP 192 1 2 3 5025 SOCKET With host name instead of IP address TCPIP host name IP port SOCKET Example If the host name is RSRT7 the valid resource string is TCPIP RSRT1 5025 SOCKET The end character must be set to linefeed Switching to Remote Control When you switch on the instrument it is always in manual operation state local state and can be operated via the front panel When you send a command from the control computer it is received and executed by the R amp S RTM The display remains on manual operation via the front panel is always possible Messages and Command Structure Messages Instrument messages are employed in the same way for all interfaces if not indicated otherwise in the description See also e Structure and syntax of the instrument messages chapter 15 1 4 2 SCPI Command Structure on page 251 e Detailed description of all messages chapter 15 2 Command Reference on page 273 There are different types of instrument messages depending on the direction they are sent e Commands e Instrument responses T User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 248 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control ee ee ee Basics Commands Commands program messag
259. based on the length of its period The measurement value is displayed as f Tr in the result table E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 91 R amp S RTM20xx Measurements BREET Automatic Measurements Trigger Period Measures the length of the A trigger signal periods hardware counter The measure ment value is displayed as T Tr in the result table Trigger B Freq Measures the frequency of the B trigger signal based on the length of its period The measurement value is displayed as f TrB in the result table Trigger B Period Measures the length of the B trigger signal periods The measurement value is displayed as T TrB in the result table 6 3 1 2 Measurement Results The results of an automatic measurement are displayed in the result table below the diagram The color of the results in the left part of the result table corresponds with the source waveform color If the result for the selected measurement type cannot be deter mined e g because a complete period of a signal is required but not available a is displayed TB 50ns T 0s Auto CH1 639 16 mY f AC 5 GSals Realtime Complete Auto Measure Meas Place Measure 4 Meas Type Source Reference el all ear CD IS 5 O IS level 4 Remote command MEASurement m RESult ACTual on page 340 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 92 R amp S RTM20xx Measurements eee ee
260. bit input For each selected bit enter the State State Identifier Setup Identifier Toggles the logic state of the selected bit O low 1 high or X don t care Byte Identifier Setup Identifier Selects the byte for input of the pattern For each selected byte enter the hexadecimal value or set the State for each selected Bit Value Identifier Setup Identifier Sets the hexadecimal value for the selected byte by turning the navigation knob Identifier and data Sets the trigger to a combination of identifier and data condition The instrument triggers at the end of the last byte of the specified data pattern Frame type Symbolic ID Identifier KR setup a Ka The identifier conditions are the same as for the Identifier trigger type see Identifier on page 189 The first key press enables the trigger type the second one opens the Identifier and data menu Remote command TRIGger A CAN TYPE on page 407 IDDT Data Setup lt Identifier and data Opens a menu to set the data pattern to be triggered on After setting the Data length and the Compare condition you can enter the value bit by bit by setting the state high low or don t care for each single bit Alternatively you can enter a hexadecimal value for each byte EMN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 190 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis CAN Option R amp S RTM K3 Data Setup Data Length Most settings are th
261. bit is a logic 0 e The stop bits and the idle state are always logic 1 I User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 175 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis 11 4 2 11 4 2 1 UART RS 232 Interface Option R amp S RTM K2 The UART protocol has no clock for synchronization The receiver synchronizes by means of the start and stop bits and the bit rate that must be known to the receiver Trigger The R amp S RTM can trigger on specified parts of UART serial signals e Start bit e Frame start e Aspecified symbol e Parity errors and breaks e Frame errors e A serial pattern at any or a specified position UART RS 232 Configuration Configuring UART RS 232 Interfaces To configure the UART interface you assign the channels to the RX an optionally TX lines set the active state for each line and set some protocol specific parameters Press the PROTOCOL LOGIC key on the front panel If the Logic menu is displayed press Protocol Press the Bus Type softkey and select UART Press Configuration Press RX and select the channel connected to the receiver line Press TX and select the channel connected to the transmitter line Set the Active state Parity bit and the number of Stop Bits Press More o oN oo b o bh Enter the Symbol size 10 Enter the bit rate e Fora standard bit rate select the Defined Bit Rate e For a user defined bit rate press User Bit Rate and enter the value
262. bol Size Sets the word length the number of bits in a message Remote command BUS b SPI SSIZe on page 379 BUS b SSPI SSIZe on page 388 Find Level The instrument analyzes all lines that are configured for the selected bus and sets the threshold for digitization of analog signals for each channel If no level can be found the existing value remains unchanged and you can set the thresholds manually in the chan nel menu CH N gt More page 2 gt Threshold See Threshold on page 31 Find Level is not relevant for digital channels MSO option R amp S RTM B1 Thresholds for digital channels are set in the Logic Threshold menu Remote command CHANnel m THReshold FINDlevel on page 379 EEUU RU EE E E SSS SSS User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 158 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis SPI SSPI Bus Option R amp S RTM K1 11 2 3 SPI SSPI Trigger e Tiggenng on SPI BUSS iii een iex nein ete e need ea e Ra dex een 159 SPISSPI Trigger Settings cesse een eret recen petens 160 11 2 3 1 Triggering on SPI Buses Prerequisites The SPI or SSPI bus is configured After configuration the trigger type Protocol SPI or Protocol SSPI is available See chapter 11 2 2 1 Configuring SPI Buses on page 156 o Triggers are only available if Decode is enabled 1 Press the SETUP key in the trigger area of the front panel Select the Trigger Type Protocol SPI or Protocol SSPI Press Setup
263. c Enter a value between 50 ms and 9 6 s or Infinite Each new data point in the diagram area remains on the screen for the defined dura tion If Infinite is selected each new data point in the diagram area remains on the screen infinitely until this setting is changed or the persistence is cleared To update the waveform press DISPLAY gt Intensities gt Clear Persist To configure brightness For better distinction of rare and frequent values you can apply a color range to the value frequency With this color range rare values are displayed in blue while more frequent values are red and very frequent values are displayed in yellow or white with various colors inbetween Ee User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 56 R amp S RTM20xx Display El General Display Settings It is also possible to invert the brightness display so that rare values are brighter than frequent values 1 To convert the brightness level to a color range press DISPLAY gt Temperature Colors 2 To invert the brightness level of the signals press DISPLAY gt Inverse Brightn To set the waveform style By default the individual data points are connected by a line Alternatively only the indi vidual data points can be displayed You can change the strength of the line using the INTENSITY knob on the left side of the screen Press DISPLAY gt Dots Only to display the data points only 4 1 2 Display Menu The DISPLAY key provi
264. can be any active waveform depending on the selected measurement type 5 Forrise time fall time delay and phase measurements press Reference Level and set the reference levels as percentages of the high signal level See also Reference Level Upper Middle Lower Levels on page 97 E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 93 R amp S9RTM20xx Measurements Automatic Measurements Press Measure 1 4 until On is highlighted to activate the measurement The selected measurement is activated and the results are displayed in the result table To activate configured automatic measurements 1 2 3 Press the MEAS key Press Meas Place to select one of the four measurement positions Press Measure 1 4 until On is highlighted To deactivate automatic measurements 1 2 3 4 Press the MEAS key Press Meas Place to select the measurement you want to deactivate Press Measure 1 4 until Off is highlighted If you want to reset and deactivate all automatic measurements at once press Clear All in the Auto measure menu No more measurements are performed the results are removed from the result table To use statistics 1 o 05 o Press the MEAS key Configure at least one mesurement as described in To configure and activate auto matic measurements on page 93 Press Statistic Press Meas Place to select the measurement for which you need statistical results Press Statistic until
265. ce Risk of network failure Before connecting the instrument to the network or configuring the network consult your network administrator Errors may affect the entire network gt To establish a network connection connect a commercial RJ 45 cable to one of the LAN ports of the instrument and to a PC 15 1 2 2 Configuring LAN Parameters Depending on the network capacities the TCP IP address information for the instrument can be obtained in different ways e fthe network supports dynamic TCP IP configuration using the Dynamic Host Con figuration Protocol DHCP and a DHCP server is available all address information can be assigned automatically e Otherwise the address must be set manually Automatic Private IP Addressing APIPA is not supported See Configuring LAN parameters manually no DHCP on page 244 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 243 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control Basics By default the instrument is configured to use dynamic TCP IP configuration and obtain all address information automatically This means that it is safe to establish a physical connection to the LAN without any previous instrument configuration Risk of network errors Connection errors can affect the entire network If your network does not support DHCP or if you choose to disable dynamic TCP IP configuration you must assign valid address information before connecting the instrument to the LAN Contact your network admin ist
266. ce Width if comparison is set to Equal or Not equal The instrument finds pulses inside or outside the range width At Remote command SEARch TRIGger RUNT DELTa on page 368 10 3 7 Data2Clock Search The settings for Data2Clock search are provided in two menus in the Setup menu you define the clock polarity setup and hold times and in the Source Setup menu you define the waveforms to be used and the levels and hysteresis for each source 10 3 7 1 Data2Clock Source Setup Access SEARCH MENU gt Search type Data2Clock gt Source Setup For Data2Clock search two sources have to be defined a clock and a data waveform For each waveform the level and the hysteresis can be set individually Level Hysteresis Level Hysteresis 600 mY 200mY 500 mY 200mY Clock Selects the input channel of the clock signal Remote command SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock CSOurce on page 368 Data Selects the input channel of the data signal Remote command SEARch SOURce on page 361 Level Set the voltage levels for clock and data signals Clock level and clock edge define the reference point for setup and hold time The data lavel defines the point of data transition Remote command SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock CLEVel on page 369 SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock DLEVel on page 369 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 142 R amp S9RTM20xx Search 10 3 7 2 Reference for Search Menu Hysteresis S
267. commands except RST and SYSTem PRESet influence the functional instrument settings In particular DCL does not change the instrument settings Table 15 11 Resest of the status reporting system Event Switching on supply DCL SDC RST or STA CLS voltage Device SYS Tus PRE Power On Status Clear Tem PRE Set Clear Selected Set Device Effect 0 1 Clear Clear STB ESR yes yes Clear SRE ESE yes Clear EVENt parts of the regis yes yes ters Clear ENABle parts of all yes yes OPERation and QUEStionable registers Fill ENABle parts of all other reg isters with 1 Fill PTRansition parts with 1 yes yes Clear NTRansition parts Clear error queue yes yes yes Clear output buffer yes yes yes 1 1 1 Clear command processing and yes yes yes input buffer 1 The first command in a command line that immediately follows a PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR clears the output buffer 15 1 7 General Programming Recommendations Initial instrument status before changing settings Manual operation is designed for maximum possible operating convenience In contrast the priority of remote control is the predictability of the instrument status Thus when a command attempts to define incompatible settings the command is ignored and the instrument status remains unchanged i e other settings are not automatically adapted
268. copes RST CH1 Intensities BISPlay INTensily WA VEBTOFm 22 ceret eren idas ieee 317 DISPlay INTensity BACKIlight eeeee eiie c eerie eene enses nnn nenne thanh nnne kann anat EEN 317 DISPlay INTSnstyAGRID EEN 317 DISPlay PERSist nce STAT nere ee nee m ceo eee eve a d exp REL Da ao EMG 318 DISPIawPERSISIenee E 318 DISPlay PERSistencsIMFinite eiue cue cere tra eta rua adenda p napi qu Een 318 DiSPlay PERSistenceTIMEAUTO ooo dali aaa 318 DiSPlaxcPERSIStENCE CWE EE 319 DISPlay INTensity WAVeform Intensity Defines the strength of the waveform line in the diagram Parameters Intensity Value in percent Range 0 to 100 Increment 1 RST not available RST does not change the intensity Default unit 96 DISPlay INTensity BACKlight Intensity Defines the intensity of the background lighting of the display Parameters Intensity Value in percent Range 10 to 100 Increment 1 RST not available RST does not change the intensity Default unit 96 DISPlay INTensity GRID lt Intensity gt Defines the intensity of the grid on the screen Parameters Intensity Value in percent Range 0 to 100 Increment 1 RST not available RST does not change the intensity Default unit 96 E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 317 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BEES Command Reference DISPlay PERSistence STATe lt State gt Defines whether the waveform persists on the screen or whe
269. cting the information of the lower level registers e ESR SCPI registers The STB receives its information from the following registers The Event Status Register ESR with the associated mask register standard Event Status Enable ESE The STATus OPERation and STATus QUEStionable registers which are defined by SCPI and contain detailed information on the instrument e Output buffer R amp S9RTM20xx Remote Control Basics The output buffer contains the messages the instrument returns to the controller It is not part of the status reporting system but determines the value of the MAV bit in the STB and thus is represented in the overview All status registers have the same internal structure SRE ESE o The service request enable register SRE can be used as ENAB1e part of the STB if the STB is structured according to SCPI By analogy the ESE can be used as the ENABle part of the ESR 15 1 6 3 Contents of the Status Registers In the following sections the contents of the status registers are described in more detail Status Byte STB and Service Request Enable Register SRE The STatus Byte STB is already defined in IEEE 488 2 It provides a rough overview of the instrument status by collecting the pieces of information of the lower registers A special feature is that bit 6 acts as the sum bit of the remaining bits of the status byte The STB can thus be compared with the CO
270. cts such as RF radio equipment can produce an elevated level of electromagnetic radiation Considering that unborn babies require increased protection pregnant women must be protected by appropriate measures Persons with pacemakers may also be exposed to risks from electromagnetic radiation The employer operator must evaluate workplaces where there is a special risk of exposure to radiation and if necessary take measures to avert the potential danger 6 Should a fire occur the product may release hazardous substances gases fluids etc that can cause health problems Therefore suitable measures must be taken e g protective masks and protective clothing must be worn 7T Laser products are given warning labels that are standardized according to their laser class Lasers can cause biological harm due to the properties of their radiation and due to their extremely concentrated electromagnetic power If a laser product e g a CD DVD drive is integrated into a Rohde amp Schwarz product absolutely no other settings or functions may be used as described in the product documentation The objective is to prevent personal injury e g due to laser beams 8 EMC classes in line with EN 55011 CISPR 11 and analogously with EN 55022 CISPR 22 EN 55032 CISPR 32 Class A equipment Equipment suitable for use in all environments except residential environments and environments that are directly connected to a low voltage supply network that s
271. d The saved settings are loaded to the R amp S RTM 13 2 3 2 Device Settings Menu With FILE gt Device Settings you open a menu to manage instrument configuration files e Device Settings o IO E HA J Save Load Import Export Default sett Ki N Memory E B r a Back m 4 Sa 4 Usage Lan N qe Nor rs Impor Export Device Setligs EE 227 Memory USIDE E 227 Bc IPTE 227 Save Opens the Save menu see Save Menu on page 220 In addition to the common save functions specific functions are available Setup amp Label Save Saves the the device settings together with the label list to the selected storage directory in one file The used file name is displayed when storage is completed This function is available if option R amp S RTM K1 or K3 is installed protocols I C LIN CAN and a label list was loaded and applied to the protocol data When you load a setting file with label list to an instrument the label list is loaded together with the instrument settings A previously loaded label list will be overwritten Load Opens the Load menu see Load Menu on page 221 e M M n User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 226 R amp S RTM20xx Data and File Management Saving and Loading Import Export Device Settings Opens the Import Export menu see Import Export Menu on page 222 Memory
272. d This bit can be used to enable data to be automatically read from the instrument to the controller User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 265 R amp S9RTM20xx Remote Control Basics Bit No Meaning ESB bit Sum bit of the event status register It is set if one of the bits in the event status register is set and enabled in the event status enable register Setting of this bit indicates a serious error which can be specified in greater detail by polling the event status register MSS bit master status summary bit The bit is set if the instrument triggers a service request This is the case if one of the other bits of this registers is set together with its mask bit in the service request enable register SRE STATus OPERation status register summary bit The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the OPERation status register and the associated ENABIe bit is set to 1 A set bit indicates that the instrument is just performing an action The type of action can be determined by querying the STATus OPERation status register Event Status Register ESR and Event Status Enable Register ESE The ESR is defined in IEEE 488 2 It can be compared with the EvENt part of a SCPI register The event status register can be read out using command ESR The ESE the assoc corresponds to the ENAB1e part of a SCPI register If a bit is set in the ESE and iated bit in the ESR changes from 0 to 1 the
273. d open its channel setup menu Remote command CHANnel lt m gt STATe on page 288 SIGNAL OFF Turns the selected signal off and selects the next channel math or reference waveform The key lights up in the color of the selected signal and changes the light according to the new selection Remote command CHANnel lt m gt STATe on page 288 POSITION OFFSET The rotary knob adjusts the vertical position or the DC offset if enabled It lights up in the color of the selected waveform Pressing the key toggles the parameter the current parameter and its value are shown in a temporary label marked with the channel color Note By default offset is disabled Press Offset in the Channel menu to enable the offset POSITION POSITION OFFSET Position changes the vertical location of the selected channel math or reference wave form or of the decoded bus signal Turn clockwise to move the waveform up At zero crossing the knob shortly snaps in and the setting is kept constant to simplify the zero setting Remote command CHANnel lt m gt POSition on page 290 CALCulate MATH m POSition on page 346 BUS b POSition on page 376 OFFSET POSITION OFFSET The offset voltage is subtracted to correct an offset affected signal The vertical center of the selected channel is shifted by the offset value and the signal is re positioned within the diagram area EM User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 28 R amp S9RTM20xx
274. d or bus 4 is not available Ee e TE E 388 WE NK le 389 e E Decode Rei ege 392 PC Configuration BUS lt b gt I2C CLEOCKSOURGS EE 389 ET e Me e dida andina 389 CHANnel m THReshold FINDlevel eee nennen nn cnc n nnne naa nana 389 ERA lt lt lt SSS User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 388 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BEES Command Reference BUS lt b gt I2C CLOCk SOURce Source Sets the input channel to which the clock line is connected Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Parameters lt Source gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CHA DO D15 CH3 and CH4 are only available with 4 channel R amp S RTM oscil loscopes RST CH1 BUS b I2C DATA SOURce Source Sets the input channel to which the data line is connected Suffix b 1 4 Selects the bus Parameters Source CH1 CH2 CH3 CHA DO D15 CH3 and CH4 are only available with 4 channel R amp S RTM oscil loscopes RST CH1 CHANnel lt m gt THReshold FINDlevel Executes the analysis of all analog channels that are configured for the selected bus and sets the threshold for digitization of analog signals for each channel Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Usage Event FC Trigger WRIGG SANZ IMIG Bee C 390 See ee 390 RE e e EE 390 TRIGgerAT2C ADDRESS deu taeesedeeedanaeetaaededesexendedacerecande dees sabia dadescdensececeraneededeons 391 Ei eie
275. d storage location just by pressing a single key 1 Press FILE gt Print Key 2 Press the softkey of the action that you want to assign to the PRINT key 3 Configure the settings for the selected action Save device settings FILE Device Settings Save Save a waveform FILE Waveforms Save a screenshot FILE Screenshots Save a screenshot and the device settings FILE gt Screenshots and FILE gt Device Settings Save e Print screenshots SETUP gt More gt Printer After this configuration the selected action is started whenever you press the PRINT key PRINT Key Settings With FILE gt Print Key you define an action that will be executed by pressing the PRINT key LEER MM Screen amp Setup Screenshots B z nr Diren mmm E UT WH N B occ Tute C 224 MV 224 Ee e RT Ad 224 RE EE 225 PENE ee EE 225 Device Settings If selected the device settings are stored when you press the PRINT key Storage set tings are configured with FILE gt Device Settings See also chapter 13 2 3 2 Device Settings Menu on page 226 Waveforms If selected the current waveform is stored when you press the PRINT key Storage set tings are configured with FILE gt Waveforms See also chapter 13 2 4 3 Waveform Storage Settings on page 229 Save Screenshots If selected a screenshot of the current display is stored when you press the PRINT key Storage settings are config
276. d to be informed about new application notes related to your instrument please send an e mail to the Customer Support Center stating your instrument and your wish We will take care that you will get the right information Europe Africa Middle East Phone 49 89 4129 12345 customersupport rohde schwarz com North America Phone 1 888 TEST RSA 1 888 837 8772 customer support rsa rohde schwarz com Latin America Phone 1 410 910 7988 customersupport la rohde schwarz com Asia Pacific Phone 6565 13 04 88 customersupport asia rohde schwarz com China Phone 86 800 810 8228 86 400 650 5896 customersupport china rohde schwarz com ROHDE amp SCHWARZ 1171 0200 22 06 00 R amp S9RTM20xx Contents Contents A 9 1 1 Documentation OvervVieW oconmonnnncinnmnccnreccnnnnnrnrcrnnnnn cnn rencia cnn recrean 9 1 2 Conventions Used in the DocumentatiON onommmoccccnnnnnnnccnnnnnsnncncnnnnnasnnnnnnnnarnnnnnnnos 10 1 2 1 Typographical Conmventions nn nan ann conan anna cnn eene enemies 10 2 Acquisition and Waveform SetUp ccccccccccccccccnncncncncccncnnnncccnnnonononons 11 21 A DE En 11 2 1 1 Vertical Systemic dte Reden Ee 11 2 1 2 Sampling and Acouisttton eene nennen nnns 12 2 1 9 Horizontal SYM rentre Orr Ronan rou ege e 15 ARMEN II Em 16 2 2 Setting up the Waveform ssseseesseeeeeeeeee eene enne nnne nennen nnne nnns 20 2 2 1 Setting Up the Signal Input with Autoset e 20
277. d to the positive x values and subtracted from the negative x values of the mask limits in relation to the mask center Thus the left half of the mask is pulled to the left the right half is pulled to the right Remote command MASK XWIDth on page 356 Save New Mask Opens a menu to save the mask in an instrument specific format The complete mask definition envelope waveform with width stretch and position settings is stored See Save Menu on page 220 Remote command MASK SAVE on page 355 Load Mask Opens a file explorer to select a previously stored mask The selected mask is loaded and can be used for a subsequent test Remote command MASK LOAD on page 355 Actions Opens a submenu to select the actions to be taken when a violation against the mask limits occurs For each action you can define when and how often the action will be executed Total 0 Os Waveform EI Off ila N a e o Stop Print Off y Ga Off A N N Sound Generates a beep sound Stop Stops the waveform acquisition Screenshot Saves a screenshot according to the settings in FILE gt Screenshots Print Prints a screenshot to a printer connected to the USB connector on the front or rear panel EMN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 130 R amp S RTM20xx Masks ee es a ee A Reference for MASKS key Waveform Saves the waveform data according to the settings in FILE gt Wave form R
278. dded to the ADC samples according to the selected interpolation method See also Interpolation on page 27 Real time sampling is used to capture fast single shot transient sig nals Equivalent Random equivalent time sampling This mode requires repetitive sta Time ble signals It is used to capture fast signals whose frequency compo nents may be much higher than the sample rate of the ADC The wave form points are taken from several acquisitions at a different time in relation to the trigger point The time difference between the sample and the trigger is random Then all the sampled points are put together into one composite waveform Remote command ACQuire MODE on page 285 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 26 R amp S RTM20xx Acquisition and Waveform Setup 2 3 3 2 3 3 1 Reference for Waveform Setup Interpolation Selects the interpolation method if the real time sample mode needs interpolation Sin x x Two adjacent ADC sample points are connected by a sin x x curve and also the adjoining sample points are considered by this curve The interpolated points are located on the resulting curve This interpolation method is the default method It is very precise and shows the best signal curve Linear Two adjacent ADC sample points are connected by a straight line the interpolated points are located on the line You see a polygonal wave form similar to the real signal and also the ADC sample points
279. des functions for configuring the display Display REO ERE Display Mode Dots Only Inverse Brightn Temper Colors re JA XYZ Setup 3 ry DD JAVA More 1 2 Auxiliary Cursors 4 BTS MOT E 58 A A E ES A E E A A TAE 58 Jager 58 L wavetkoam ennt tmt ens tme thats ete tst snas assets snas 58 O MR DITIONES CONI RENE IA 58 i o mM 59 L ir icri di 59 L Persist TME sche sadi nb pbi Maso tia cae Rates edad tS 59 Ee idu ri NN RR XK 59 DOS ODY a 59 Inverse ele EE 59 Ree e 60 AUK CUS ONS EE 60 Eos amu LR TT 60 L Channel Ier ci mtt tna dk a ete cn d otn cla dc 60 Eo d EE 61 EE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 57 R amp S RTM20xx Display General Display Settings Rs EE 61 Pli RH ee Te EE EE a OM 61 ME A A Ea ET E A AE A A A 61 Display Mode Toggles the diagram mode Y t Default time diagram with a time axis in x direction and the signal ampli tudes displayed in y direction XY diagram XY diagrams combine the voltage levels of two waveforms in one dia gram They use the voltage level of a second waveform as the x axis rather then a time base This allows you to perform phase shift meas urements for example You can also define the intensity of the XY dia gram according to a further signal source Z Together with the XY diagram the Y t diagrams of the source signals are displayed in separate windows With R amp S RTM1054 it is also possible to define two source signals in
280. directly affect the resolution of the waveform ampli tude The vertical scale corresponds to the ADC input range To get the full resolution of the ADC waveforms should cover most of the height of the diagram __u o o ga User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 11 R amp S9RTM20xx 2 1 1 3 2 1 2 Acquisition and Waveform Setup Basics Signal amplitude 0 4 V Scale 50 mV div Scale 100 mV div Best signal resolution Reduced signal resolution 8 bit 2 mV steps 8 bit gt 4 mV steps Fig 2 1 Input range and resolution of the ADC Bandwidth For analog applications the highest signal frequency determines the required oscillo scope bandwidth As a rule of thumb the oscilloscope bandwidth should be 3 times higher than the maximum frequency included in the analog test signal to measure the amplitude with high accuracy Most test signals are more complex than a simple sine wave and include several spectral components A digital signal for example is built up of several odd harmonics As a rule of thumb for digital signals the oscilloscope bandwidth should be 5 times higher than the clock frequency to be measured The oscilloscope is not a stand alone system You need a probe to measure the signal of interest and the probe has a limited bandwidth too The combination of oscilloscope and probe creates a system bandwidth To maintain the oscilloscope bandwidth that is to reduce the effect of the probe on the system bandwidt
281. ds Table 11 5 Content of the LIN frame table Column Description Start time Time of frame start in relation to the trigger point ID Identifier value hexadecimal value Label Symbolic label available if a label list was loaded and applied Length Number of data bytes Data Hexadecimal values of the data bytes Chks Checksum value State Overall state of the frame Remote commands j gt on page 426 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 204 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis LIN Option R amp S RTM K3 e BUS lt b gt LIN FRAMe lt n gt DATA on page 426 BUS b LIN FRAMe n STATus on page 427 e BUS lt b gt LIN FRAMe lt n gt STARt on page 427 e BUS b LIN FRAMe n STOP on page 427 e BUS lt b gt LIN FRAMe lt n gt VERSion on page 430 e BUS lt b gt LIN FRAMe lt n gt CSSTate on page 428 e BUS lt b gt LIN FRAMe lt n gt CSValue on page 428 e BUS lt b gt LIN FRAMe lt n gt IDPValue on page 428 e BUS b LIN FRAMe n IDSTate on page 429 e BUS b LIN FRAMe n IDValue on page 429 e BUS lt b gt LIN FRAMe lt n gt SYSTate on page 429 e BUS lt b gt LIN FRAMe lt n gt SYValue on page 430 e BUS lt b gt LIN FRAMe lt n gt BCOunt on page 430 e BUS lt b gt LIN FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt o gt STATe on page 431 e BUS b LIN FRAMe n BYTE o VALue on page 431 11 6 6 Search on Decoded LIN Data Using t
282. ds out the contents of the power on status clear flag Parameters lt Action gt 011 0 The contents of the status registers are preserved 1 Resets the status registers RST ReSeT Sets the instrument to a defined default status The default settings are indicated in the description of commands Usage Setting only SRE Contents Service Request Enable Sets the service request enable register to the indicated value This command determines under which conditions a service request is triggered Parameters Contents Contents of the service request enable register in decimal form Bit 6 MSS mask bit is always 0 Range 0 to 255 STB STatus Byte query Reads the contents of the status byte in decimal form Usage Query only TRG TRiGger SSES User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 276 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control 15 2 3 Command Reference Triggers all actions waiting for a trigger event In particular TRG generates a manual trigger signal Manual Trigger This common command complements the commands of the TRIGger subsystem Usage Event TST self TeST query Triggers selftests of the instrument and returns an error code in decimal form see Service Manual supplied with the instrument 0 indicates no errors occured Usage Query only WAI WAIt to continue Prevents servicing of the subsequent commands until all preceding commands have been executed and all signals have settled see
283. dth and position When you deactivate the zoom display the previous display is restored 4 3 2 Zooming for Details The zoomed area and its position can be configured numerically or using the rotary knobs To display a zoom diagram gt Press the ZOOM key The key lights up and two windows are displayed the original signal vs time at the top the zoom at the bottom To deactivate the zoom display Press the ZOOM key again or press the Zoom Off softkey in the Zoom menu to close the zoom window The ZOOM key is no longer illuminated and the previous display is restored To configure the zoom area numerically 1 Press the Zoom Time Base softkey to define the scaling for the time base in the zoom diagram in seconds per division The scaling is indicated by Z in the infor mation bar above the zoom diagram and determines the width of the zoom area that is displayed in the zoom diagram 10 divisions scaling per division 2 Press the Zoom Time softkey to define the offset of the trigger point to the reference point Os in the zoom diagram The offset is indicated by Tz in the information bar above the zoom window and determines the position of the zoom area The zoom area is indicated by white lines in the original Y t window The zoom win dow displays the data in the defined zoom area from the main time base in greater detail ERA e e L LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL AULAS User Manual 1317 4726 02
284. ductos Rohde amp Schwarz valido lo que sigue como posici n de funcionamiento se define por principio la posici n con el suelo de la caja para abajo modo de protecci n IP 2X uso solamente en estancias interiores utilizaci n hasta 2000 m sobre el nivel del mar transporte hasta 4500 m sobre el nivel del mar Se aplicar una tolerancia de x10 sobre el voltaje nominal y de 5 sobre la frecuencia nominal Categor a de sobrecarga el ctrica 2 ndice de suciedad 2 No sit e el producto encima de superficies veh culos estantes o mesas que por sus caracter sticas de peso o de estabilidad no sean aptos para l Siga siempre las instrucciones de instalaci n del fabricante cuando instale y asegure el producto en objetos o estructuras p ej paredes y estantes Si se realiza la instalaci n de modo distinto al indicado en la documentaci n del producto se pueden causar lesiones o en determinadas circunstancias incluso la muerte No ponga el producto sobre aparatos que generen calor p ej radiadores o calefactores La temperatura ambiente no debe superar la temperatura m xima especificada en la documentaci n del producto o en la hoja de datos En caso de sobrecalentamiento del producto pueden producirse choques el ctricos incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte Seguridad el ctrica Si no se siguen o se siguen de modo insuficiente las indicaciones del fabricante en cuanto a seguridad el ctrica pued
285. e Suffix lt b gt lt n gt lt o gt 1 4 Selects the bus Selects the frame Selects the byte number User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 397 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control Return values lt AckStartTime gt Usage Command Reference Range depends on sample rate record length and time base Increment depends on the time base Default unit s Query only BUS lt b gt I2C FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt o gt COMPlete Returns the state of the byte Suffix lt b gt lt n gt lt o gt Return values lt ByteComplete gt Usage 1 4 Selects the bus Selects the frame Selects the byte number ON OFF ON Data byte was received completely Query only BUS lt b gt I2C FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt o gt STARt Returns the start time of the specified data byte Suffix lt b gt lt n gt lt o gt Return values lt StartTime gt Usage 1 4 Selects the bus Selects the frame Selects the byte number Range depends on sample rate record length and time base Increment depends on the time base Default unit s Query only BUS lt b gt I2C FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt o gt VALue Returns the decimal value of the specified byte User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 398 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control ee se ee Command Reference Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus n id Selects the frame o Selects
286. e Source Selects the input channel of the data line Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines EMN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 386 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control A _ AA Q ees Command Reference Parameters Source CH1 CH2 CH3 CHA DO D15 CH3 and CH4 are only available with 4 channel R amp S RTM oscil loscopes RST CH1 BUS lt b gt SSPI DATA POLarity lt Polarity gt Selects whether transmitted data is high active high 1 or low active low 1 on the data line Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative POSitive high active NEGative low active RST POSitive BUS lt b gt SSPI BlTime BurstldleTime Within the idle time the data and clock lines are low A new frame begins when the idle time has expired and the clock line has been inactive during that time If the time interval between the data words is shorter than the idle time the words are part of the same frame Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Parameters BurstldleTime Range 1 60E 008 to 8 39E 001 Increment 1 60E 008 RST 1 00E 004 Default unit s BUS lt b
287. e The rise or fall time search finds slopes with an exact rise or fall time or rise fall times shorter or longer than a given limit or rise fall times inside or outside the allowable time range DATatoclock The Data2Clock search also known as setup hold finds violation of setup and hold times It analyzes the relative timing between two signals a data signal and the synchronous clock signal Setup time is the time that the data signal is steady before clock edge Hold time is the time that the data signal is steady after clock edge PATTern The pattern search finds logical combinations of channel states inside or outside a specified time range For each channel its state and threshold level is defined The states are combined logically and the time of true pattern results is compared with a specified time range PROTocol The protocol search finds various events in decoded data of CAN or LIN signals for example a specified frame type identifier data and errors Available search settings depend on the configured bus type For bus types PARallel DC SPI SSPI and UART no search is available See also BUS lt b gt TYPE on page 375 RST EDGE chapter 15 3 2 1 Searching for a Pulse of Specified Width on page 460 Firmware Software FW 03 400 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 360 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BREET Command Reference SEARch SOURce lt SearchSource gt Selects the waveform to be anal
288. e 06 14 2 496456e 04 0 WIDTH POSITIVE 6 702000e 06 Data and File Management Saving Screenshots to File Save two display images in png format to the Prx folder on a USB flash drive that is connected to the front panel One screenshot is colored and the other is grayscaled Finally the data of the gray screenshot is read for further user on the control computer Command description in chapter 15 2 15 1 Screenshots on page 441 RST MMEM CDIR USB FRONT MMEM MDIR USB FRONT PIX MMEM CDIR USB FRONT PIX HCOP DEST MMEM HCOP LANG PNG HCOP COL SCH COL MMEM NAME COLORED HCOP IMM HCOP COL SCH GRAY MMEM NAME GRAY HCOP IMM MMEM CAT PNG MMEM DATA GRAY PNG Saving Copying and Loading Setup Data Save instrument settings to a file on internal storage device duplicate this file and save it to a USB stick attached to the front panel Finally there are three setup files on the internal storage INT SETTINGS and one file on the USB flash device Command description in chapter 15 2 15 2 Saving and Loading Data MMEMory Com mands on page 443 CHAN1 STAT ON Turn channel 1 on CHAN2 STAT ON Turn channel 2 on TIM ZOOM STAT ON Show zoom diagram MMEM CDIR INT SETTINGS Set storage device and directory MMEM STOR STAT 1 ZOOM A SET Save settings to internal storage MMEM CAT SET Check IECH User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 461 Programming Examples lt 33
289. e 403 TRIGger A UARTIPOFFSL tdeo te AEE gen gei 404 TRIGger A SOURce UART lt UartSource gt Selects one of the Rx and Tx lines as trigger source Parameters lt UartSource gt RX TX RST RX TRIGger A UART MODE lt Mode gt Specifies the trigger mode for UART RS 232 interfaces _ _ _ ___o Pa E_ KK RR M User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 402 R amp S9RTM20xx Remote Control Parameters Mode Command Reference BSTart SBIT NTHSymbol SYMBol PATTern PRERror FERRor BREak BSTart Burst start Sets the trigger to the begin of a data frame The frame start is the first start bit after the idle time SBIT Start bit The start bit is the first low bit after a stop bit NTHSymbol Sets the trigger to the n th symbol of a burst SYMBol Triggers if a pattern occurs in a symbol at any position in a burst PATTern Triggers on a serial pattern at a defined position in the burst To define the pattern use TRIGger A UART PLENgth and TRIGger A UART PATTern To define the position use TRIGger A UART POFFset on page 404 PRERror Parity Error Triggers if a bit error occured in transmission FERRor Triggers on frame error BREak Triggers if a start bit is not followed by a stop bit within a defined time During the break the stop bits are at low state RST SBIT TRIGger A UART PATTern lt DataPattern gt Defines the bit pattern as trigger condition Parameters lt DataPatte
290. e Control Basics Bit No Meaning 6 User Request This bit is set when the instrument is switched over to manual control 7 Power On supply voltage on This bit is set on switching on the instrument STATus OPERation Register In the CONDition part this register contains information on which actions the instrument is being executing In the EVENt part it contains information on which actions the instru ment has executed since the last reading It can be read using the commands STATus OPERation CONDition Or STATus OPERation EVENt See also figure 15 2 The remote commands for the STATus OPERation register are described in chap ter 15 2 17 1 STATus OPERation Register on page 453 Table 15 5 Bits in the STATus OPERation register Bit No Meaning 0 ALIGnment This bit is set as long as the instrument is performing a self alignment 1 SELFtest This bit is set while the selftest is running 2 AUToset This bit is set while the instrument is performing an auto setup 3 WTRIgger This bit is set while the instrument is waiting for the trigger 4 to 14 Not used 15 This bit is always 0 STATus QUEStionable Register This register contains information about indefinite states which may occur if the unit is operated without meeting the specifications It can be read using the commands STATus QUEStionable CONDition on page 4
291. e Press Time and adjust the delay time with the navigation knob e Press Events and enter the number of B trigger events that have to be fulfilled until the instrument triggers ERA lt A User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 38 Reference for Triggers 3 3 Reference for Triggers 3 3 1 The trigger settings are located in the TRIGGER functional block on the front panel and in the Trigger softkey menu TRIGGER Controls The keys and the rotary knob in the TRIGGER functional block adjust the trigger and start or stop acquisition TRIGGER RUN CONT Starts and stops the continuous acquisition A green light indicates a running acquisition A red light shows that acquisition is stopped The status is also shown at the right end of the information bar Run or Complete Remote command RUN on page 281 RUNContinous on page 282 STOP on page 282 RUN Nx SINGLE Starts a defined number of acquisitions Press the key again to stop running acquisitions To set the number of acquisitions press the ACQUISITION key and enter Nx Single Remote command SINGle on page 282 RUNSingle on page 282 FORCE If the acquisition is running in normal mode and no valid trigger occurs forcing the trigger provokes an immediate single acquisition Thus you can confirm that a signal is available and use the waveform display to determine how to trigger on it MODE Toggles the trigger mode between Auto and Normal The trigger mode determi
292. e available e Timestamp markers can be used if no search is enabled They can be set manually at any position of the waveform These markers are indicated by blue vertical lines You can set up to 8 timestamp markers Timestamp markers are descibed in this chapter e fasearch is active you can set search markers to selected search results These markers are indicated by magenta search result flags Search result markers are described in chapter 10 1 Search Conditions and Results on page 132 4 4 1 Using Timestamp Markers Timestamp markers are displayed as colored lines on the screen If more markers are available but currently not visible on the screen e g in a Zoomed display this is indicated by a small arrow at the right or left edge of the display See also To use markers on search results on page 135 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 71 R amp S RTM20xx Display Markers TB 200ns T 496ns Auto CH1 880 5 mV _ DC 5 GSals Realtime Complete Z 100ns Tz 496ns 5 GSals Main Time Base Zoom Time Base Trigger Offset Zoom Time Fig 4 3 Zoomed display using markers To set a marker 1 Turn the horizontal Position rotary knob and move the position to be marked to the reference point usually in the middle of the display 2 Press the SET CLEAR key to insert a new marker at the reference position To select a marker When you select a marker it is automatically moved to the reference point of the display
293. e el ctrico No debe introducirse en los orificios de la caja del aparato ning n objeto que no est destinado a ello Esto puede producir cortocircuitos en el producto y o puede causar choques el ctricos fuego o lesiones Salvo indicaci n contraria los productos no est n impermeabilizados ver tambi n el cap tulo Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento punto 1 Por eso es necesario tomar las medidas necesarias para evitar la entrada de l quidos En caso contrario existe peligro de choque el ctrico para el usuario o de da os en el producto que tambi n pueden redundar en peligro para las personas No utilice el producto en condiciones en las que pueda producirse o ya se hayan producido condensaciones sobre el producto o en el interior de ste como p ej al desplazarlo de un lugar fr o a otro caliente La entrada de agua aumenta el riesgo de choque el ctrico Antes de la limpieza desconecte por completo el producto de la alimentaci n de tensi n p ej red de alimentaci n o bater a Realice la limpieza de los aparatos con un pa o suave que no se deshilache No utilice bajo ning n concepto productos de limpieza qu micos como alcohol acetona o diluyentes para lacas nitrocelul sicas 1171 0000 42 07 Page 11 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Funcionamiento 1 El uso del producto requiere instrucciones especiales y una alta concentraci n durante el manejo Debe asegurarse que las personas qu
294. e frame with 11bit identifier REM29 remote frame with 29bit identifier RST SOF SEARch PROTocol CAN ACKerror lt AcknowledgeError gt Searches for acknowledgement errors An acknowledgement error occurs when the transmitter does not receive an acknowledgment a dominant bit during the Ack Slot The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol CAN CONDition is set to ERRor or IDERror Parameters lt AcknowledgeError gt ON OFF RST OFF SEARch PROTocol CAN BITSterror lt BitStuffingError gt Searches for bit stuffing errors See also Stuff bit on page 188 The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol CAN CONDition is set to ERRor or IDERror Parameters lt BitStuffingError gt ON OFF RST OFF SEARch PROTocol CAN CRCerror lt CRCerror gt Searches for errors in the Cyclic Redundancy Check The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol CAN CONDition is set to ERRor or IDERror Parameters lt CRCerror gt ON OFF RST OFF User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 419 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control Command Reference SEARch PROTocol CAN FORMerror lt FormError gt Searches for form errors A form error occurs when a fixed form bit field contains one or more illegal bits The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol CAN CONDition is set to ERRor or IDERror Parameters lt FormError gt ON OFF RST OFF SEARch PROTocol CAN FTYPe Specifies the frame
295. e instrument analyzes all lines that are configured for the selected bus and sets the threshold for digitization of analog signals for each channel If no level can be found the existing value remains unchanged and you can set the thresholds manually in the chan nel menu CH N gt More page 2 gt Threshold See Threshold on page 31 Find Level is not relevant for digital channels MSO option R amp S RTM B1 Thresholds for digital channels are set in the Logic gt Threshold menu Remote command CHANnel m THReshold FINDlevel on page 379 11 4 3 UART RS 232 Trigger e Triggering on UART RS 232 Intertaces AAA 179 e UART mogor e EE 180 11 4 3 1 Triggering on UART RS 232 Interfaces Prerequisites The UART interface is configured After configuration the trigger type Protocol UART is available See chapter 11 4 2 1 Configuring UART RS 232 Inter faces on page 176 o Triggers are only available if Decode is enabled 1 Press the SETUP key in the trigger area of the front panel Select the Trigger Type Protocol UART Press Source and select RX or TX as trigger source Press Back Press Setup o m B o N Press the softkey of the required trigger condition Start Bit or Frame Start next start bit or first start bit after idle time Symbol lt n gt frame number in a data stream Any Symbol pattern of the data bits anywhere in the data stream Pattern serial pattern of one t
296. e manejen el producto est n a la altura de los requerimientos necesarios en cuanto a aptitudes f sicas ps quicas y emocionales ya que de otra manera no se pueden excluir lesiones o da os de objetos El empresario u operador es responsable de seleccionar el personal usuario apto para el manejo del producto Antes de desplazar o transportar el producto lea y tenga en cuenta el cap tulo Transporte Como con todo producto de fabricaci n industrial no puede quedar excluida en general la posibilidad de que se produzcan alergias provocadas por algunos materiales empleados los llamados al rgenos p ej el n quel Si durante el manejo de productos Rohde amp Schwarz se producen reacciones al rgicas como p ej irritaciones cut neas estornudos continuos enrojecimiento de la conjuntiva o dificultades respiratorias debe avisarse inmediatamente a un m dico para investigar las causas y evitar cualquier molestia o dafio a la salud Antes de la manipulaci n mec nica y o t rmica o el desmontaje del producto debe tenerse en cuenta imprescindiblemente el cap tulo Eliminaci n protecci n del medio ambiente punto 1 Ciertos productos como p ej las instalaciones de radiocomunicaci n RF pueden a causa de su funci n natural emitir una radiaci n electromagn tica aumentada Deben tomarse todas las medidas necesarias para la protecci n de las mujeres embarazadas Tambi n las personas con marcapasos pueden correr peligro a causa de
297. e not valid for reading Suffix m 1 4 Selects the measurement place lt n gt Buffer place The buffer size is limited by MEASurement lt m gt STATistics WEIGht Return values lt StatisticValue gt Statistical value Usage Query only 15 2 9 Mathematics This chapter describes commands that configure or perform mathematical functions For data queries and conversion consider also the following commands e FORMat DATA on page 278 e CALCulate MATH m DATA XINCrement on page 280 e CALCulate MATH m DATA XORigin on page 279 CALCulate MATH m DATA YINCrement on page 280 e CALCulate MATH m DATA YORigin on page 280 e CALCulate MATH m DATA YRESolution on page 281 GALGulate ERR En H RN KEE 345 CAL CUBIS MATH mM SCALE EE 346 CAECUIBIE MAT ASMP e ET 346 CALC late MATH lt m gt EXPR ssion DEF NE csse nnnm 346 CAL CulateMATHcm DATA 347 GAECulateMATHem sDATABEADAt 12 d dee onda EENS NENNEN 348 CALCulate MATH lt m gt STATe State Defines whether the selected mathematical channel is active or not Only if a channel is active it is visible on the screen and can be selected as a source for analysis and display functions E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 345 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BREET Command Reference Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the math waveform Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF CALCulate MA
298. e same as for identifier input See e Compare on page 190 Bit on page 190 State on page 190 Byte on page 190 Value on page 190 Remote command TRIGger A CAN DCONdition on page 409 TRIGger A CAN DATA on page 410 Data Length Data Setup Identifier and data Defines the length of the data pattern the number of bytes in the pattern Remote command TRIGger A CAN DLC on page 409 11 5 3 CAN Label List Label lists are protocol specific A PTT file for CAN contains three values for each iden tifier e Type identifier type 11 bit or 29 bit long e ID Addr hexadecimal identifier value e Symbolic label symbolic name of the identifier specifiing its function in the bus network Example CAN PTT file GFILE VERSION 1 00 PROTOCOL NAME can Labels for CAN protocol Column order Identifier type Identifier value Label 0x064 Diag Response OxX1E5 EngineData Ox0A2 Ignition Info OxlBC TP Console 0x333 ABSdata 0x313 Door Left 0x314 Door Right 29 0x01A54321 Throttle 29 0x13A00FA2 LightState 29 0x0630ABCD Engine Status SS Q n User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 191 R amp S9RTM20xx Protocol Analysis 11 5 4 CAN Option R amp S RTM K3 29 0x03B1C002 Airbag Status 29 0x01234ABC NM Gateway Label list CAN Imported on 2012 03 12 16 18 Fig 11 11 Label list for CAN For general information see chapter 11 1 4 Label List on page 151 CAN Decode Re
299. e the data signal must stay steady above or below the data level The hold time can be negative In this case the hold time ends before the clock edge and the setup time must be positive and longer than the absolute value of the hold time Parameters lt HoldTime gt Range depends on time base and sample interval E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 369 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control 15 2 12 8 Command Reference Firmware Software FW 03 800 SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock STIMe lt SetupTime gt Sets the minimum time before the clock edge while the data signal must stay steady above or below the data level The setup time can be negative In this case the setup interval starts after the clock edge and the hold time must be positive and longer than the absolute value of the setup time Parameters lt SetupTime gt Range depends on time base and sample interval Firmware Software FW 03 800 Pattern Search Configuration SEARchTRIGGERPAT Tetris EEN adan 370 SEARG RE e Tem PUN CON DEE 370 SEARCH TRilGoerPATTemlEVelenz cece caee eee eeeeeeteceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesanaeaeaaaeaeeteneneees 371 SEARch TRIGger PAT TemiLEVelsn gt DEL Tak ut ante aaie ENEE 371 GEARch TRilGoerPATTermWIDThRANGe ee eee eeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeaaaaaeaaeneneees 371 SEARcH TRIGger PAT Tem WIDTHIWIDThl AE 372 SEARA TRIGG PAT Temmels dena ef dee Add 372 SEARch TRIGger PATTern SOURce Pattern Specifies the search pattern the state for each channel P
300. e the safety of the product Cells and batteries must be recycled and kept separate from residual waste Rechargeable batteries and normal batteries that contain lead mercury or cadmium are hazardous waste Observe the national regulations regarding waste disposal and recycling Transport 1 The product may be very heavy Therefore the product must be handled with care In some cases the user may require a suitable means of lifting or moving the product e g with a lift truck to avoid back or other physical injuries Handles on the products are designed exclusively to enable personnel to transport the product It is therefore not permissible to use handles to fasten the product to or on transport equipment such as cranes fork lifts wagons etc The user is responsible for securely fastening the products to or on the means of transport or lifting Observe the safety regulations of the manufacturer of the means of transport or lifting Noncompliance can result in personal injury or material damage If you use the product in a vehicle it is the sole responsibility of the driver to drive the vehicle safely and properly The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for accidents or collisions Never use the product in a moving vehicle if doing so could distract the driver of the vehicle Adequately secure the product in the vehicle to prevent injuries or other damage in the event of an accident 1171 0000 42 07 Page 6 Instrucciones de seg
301. e trigger occurs the instrument continues acquisition until the post trigger part of the waveform record is filled Then it stops acquiring and waits for the next trigger When a trigger is recognized the instrument will not accept another trigger until the acquisition is complete The trigger modes define how the instrument triggers e Normal The instrument acquires a waveform only if a real trigger occurs that is if all trigger conditions are fulfilled e Auto The instrument triggers repeatedly after a fixed time interval if the trigger con ditions are not fulfilled If a real trigger occurs it takes precedence If the real trigger is faster than the auto trigger both modes are virtually the same In practice both trigger modes are useful The auto mode lets you see the signal with very little adjustment while the normal mode selects the interesting part of the waveform If you want to acquire a specified number of waveforms with NxSingle make sure to select the normal trigger mode Thus you get only the required number of interesting acquisitions See also chapter 3 Triggers on page 36 Horizontal System As described before in chapter 2 1 2 3 Acquisition Control on page 15 the trigger is the determining point of the waveform record Two parameters set the position of the horizontal acquisition window in relation to the trigger point time reference and trigger offset Using these parameters you choose the part of
302. e with DIGital lt m gt THReshold RST MAN DIGital lt m gt THReshold Sets the logical threshold for the channel group to which the indicated digital channel belongs EN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 435 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BEES Command Reference Suffix lt m gt 0 15 Number of the digital channel Channel groups 0 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 Parameters lt ThresholdLevel gt RST 1 4 Default unit V DIGital lt m gt THCoupling Applies the last defined threshold and hysteresis values to all digital channels Suffix lt m gt 0 15 Number of the digital channel Parameters lt ThresholdCoupling gt ON OFF DIGital lt m gt Hysteresis Defines the size of the hysteresis to avoid the change of signal states due to noise The setting applied to the channel group to which the indicated digital channel belongs Suffix lt m gt 0 15 Number of the digital channel Channel groups 0 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 Parameters lt Hysteresis gt MAXimum ROBust NORMal DIGital lt m gt LABel Label Defines a label for the indicated digital channel Suffix lt m gt 0 15 Number of the digital channel Parameters lt Label gt String value String parameter Example DIGital4 LABel Data Defines the label Data dor digital channel D4 DIGital lt m gt POSition lt Position gt Sets the vertical position of the indicated vertical channel IESSE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01
303. eak gt Returns the maximum measurement value of the current measurement series Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the measurement place Query parameters lt PositivePeak gt Maximum measurement value Usage Query only Firmware Software FW 03 700 MEASurement lt m gt RESult WFMCount lt WaveformCount gt Returns the current number of measured waveforms Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the measurement place Query parameters lt WaveformCount gt Number of measured waveforms Usage Query only Firmware Software FW 03 700 MEASurement lt m gt STATistics VALue ALL Returns all values from the statistics buffer Note that valid buffered values can only be read if the acquisition is stopped As long as the acquisition is running the buffer contents is changing and the buffered values are not valid for reading Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the measurement place LEE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 344 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control m O M s Command Reference Return values lt ValueList gt Comma separated list of statistical values Usage Query only MEASurement m STATistics VALue n Returns one statistical value from the indicated buffer place Note that valid buffered values can only be read if the acquisition is stopped As long as the acquisition is running the buffer contents is changing and the buffered values ar
304. ectangle window To reduce noise use a bell shaped window For details see Window on page 117 Press Y Scaling to select logarithmic or linear scaling of the y axis in the FFT win dow see Y Scaling on page 118 Define the settings for the FFT window as described in To configure the FFT diagram numerically on page 112 Define the settings of the signal vs time window as described in To configure the Y t window numerically on page 114 These settings are identical to the general trigger and scaling settings defined for the channel see also chapter 2 2 2 Adjusting the Signal Input Manually on page 20 8 2 2 Configuring the Diagrams To configure the FFT diagram numerically Alternatively to configuring the FFT window numerically via the softkeys you can use the rotary knobs to change the settings graphically see To configure the FFT diagram graphically on page 113 1 2 Press FFT Setup in the FFT menu Define the time base extract for which the FFT is to be calculated and displayed The extract is defined by its width and position see figure 8 1 a Press YT Window to define the width of the time base extract EN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 112 R amp S9RTM20xx FFT Configuring and Using FFT Calculations b Press Position to define the position of the time base extract The position is defined as an offset of the center of the extract range to the Os reference point The time b
305. ects the bus n Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt ByteCount gt Number of words bytes EM User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 430 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control A _ AA Q ees Command Reference Usage Query only BUS lt b gt LIN FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt o gt STATe Returns the state of the specified data byte Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n o Selects the byte number 1 n Return values lt ByteStatus gt OK INS UART The byte is not completely contained in the acquisition UART At least one UART error occured LIN uses UART words without parity bit Usage Query only BUS lt b gt LIN FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt o gt VALue Returns the decimal value of the specified byte Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n lt o gt Selects the byte number 1 n Return values lt ByteValue gt Decimal value Usage Query only LIN Search SEARchIPROTOCOELINSCONDUIgOD EE 432 SEARGH PRO TOCOILIN FRAME EE 432 SEARGH PRO Toca LIN IPE TEE 433 SEARchIPROTOGCOELINIOHKSBITOE 2 22 002 a ada Enna 433 SEARGIUPROTOSOEEINISYERVEOE EE 433 SEARch PROTOCOL R I E Lee e 433 SEARCH PRO Toca LUIN IDE NEHER E 433 LEE User Manual 1317 4726 02
306. ed Envelope The minimum and maximum values are saved in addition to the normal waveform samples The resulting diagram shows two envelope wave forms below and above the normal waveform the minimums floor and maximums roof representing the borders in which the signal occurs The envelope is refreshed with each acquisition and it is reset each time the waveform parameters are changed e m n User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 24 R amp S RTM20xx Acquisition and Waveform Setup El Reference for Waveform Setup Average The average is calculated from the data of the current acquisition and a number of acquisitions before The method reduces random noise and other heterodyne signals It requires a stable triggered and repet itive signal The number of acquisitions for average calculation is defined with No of Averages Smooth Smoothing calculates a mean value of several adjacent sample points and displays it The result is a smoothed waveform Thus smoothing is a moving average that uses the full data and can be used for non periodic signals It works like a low pass and increases the vertical resolution at the expense of bandwidth reduction Filter Filter is a low pass with 3 db attenuation at a configurable limit fre quency set with Limit Freq The filter removes higher frequencies from the channel signals Remote c
307. ed accordingly 2 In the case of products of safety class with movable power cord and connector operation is permitted only on sockets with a protective conductor contact and protective conductor 3 Intentionally breaking the protective conductor either in the feed line or in the product itself is not permitted Doing so can result in the danger of an electric shock from the product If extension cords or connector strips are implemented they must be checked on a regular basis to ensure that they are safe to use 4 If there is no power switch for disconnecting the product from the AC supply network or if the power Switch is not suitable for this purpose use the plug of the connecting cable to disconnect the product from the AC supply network In such cases always ensure that the power plug is easily reachable and accessible at all times For example if the power plug is the disconnecting device the length of the connecting cable must not exceed 3 m Functional or electronic switches are not suitable for providing disconnection from the AC supply network If products without power switches are integrated into racks or systems the disconnecting device must be provided at the system level 5 Never use the product if the power cable is damaged Check the power cables on a regular basis to ensure that they are in proper operating condition By taking appropriate safety measures and carefully laying the power cable ensure that the cable cannot
308. ed frame Suffix lt b gt lt n gt Return values lt StartTime gt Usage 1 4 Selects the bus Selects the frame Range depends on sample rate record length and time base Increment depends on the time base Default unit s Query only User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 393 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control Command Reference BUS lt b gt I2C FRAMe lt n gt STOP Returns the end time of the specified frame Suffix lt b gt lt n gt Return values lt EndTime gt Usage 1 4 Selects the bus Selects the frame Range depends on sample rate record length and time base Increment depends on the time base Default unit s Query only BUS lt b gt I2C FRAMe lt n gt AACCess Returns the address acknowledge bit value for the indicated frame Suffix lt b gt lt n gt Return values lt Acknowledge gt Usage 1 4 Selects the bus Selects the frame INComplete ACK NACK ElTHer Query only BUS lt b gt 12C FRAMe lt n gt ACCess Returns the transfer direction read or write access from master to slave Suffix lt b gt lt n gt Return values lt Access gt Usage 1 4 Selects the bus Selects the frame INComplete READ WRITE ElTHer UNDF INComplete The frame is not completely contained in the acquisition UNDF Access is not defined Query only User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 394 R
309. eded by an asterisk and possibly one or more parameters Examples RST RESET Resets the instrument ESE EVENT STATUS ENABLE Sets the bits of the event status enable registers ESR EVENT STATUS QUERY Queries the contents of the event status register IDN IDENTIFICATION QUERY Queries the instrument identification string E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 251 R amp S9RTM20xx d Remote Control Basics Syntax for Device Specific Commands Not all commands used in the following examples are necessarily implemented in the instrument For demonstration purposes only assume the existence of the following commands for this section e DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt MAXimize Boolean e FORMat R E ADings DATA lt type gt lt length gt e HardCOPy DEVice COLor Boolean e HardCOPy DEVice CMAP COLor RGB lt red gt lt green gt lt blue gt e HardCOPy IMMediate e HardCOPy ITEM ALL e HardCOPy ITEM LABel lt string gt e HardCOPy PAG El DIMensions QUADrant lt N gt e HardCOPy PAG e HardCOPy PAG Gl ORIentation LANDscape PORTrait SCALe numeric value El e MMEMory COPY lt file source gt lt file destination gt ENSE BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution numeric value S e SENSe FREQuency STOP numeric value S E NSe LIST FREQuency lt numeric_value gt lt numeric value gt
310. eecaeaueasencead 320 Witiebase 2 OONESDALS EE 320 TIMEDSSEZOGIM RI 320 TiMebase Re EE 321 TiMebase ZOOM STATe lt ZoomState gt Switches the zoom window on or off Parameters lt ZoomState gt ON OFF RST OFF TiMebase ZOOM SCALe lt ZoomScale gt Defines the time base in the zoom diagram in seconds per division Parameters lt ZoomScale gt Range Depends on various other settings Default unit s div TIMebase ZOOM TIME Time Defines the offset of the trigger point to the reference point of the zoom diagram Parameters Time RST 0 Default unit s User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 320 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control 15 2 6 3 Command Reference TiMebase ZOOM POSition lt Position gt Defines the position of the zoom reference point the reference point of the zoom window in relation to the reference point of original time base Parameters lt Position gt Range Depends on the zoom time base nearly 0 to 100 for large zoom RST 50 Default unit Markers Timestamps TS Vamps WEE 321 WS Vaart pe EN EE 321 TTIE EIR TE 321 RE npiedl EE 321 TOT AMPA CLG EE 321 TSTamp SET Sets a new marker timestamp at the reference point of the display unless an existing marker is already set there The reference point is set with TIMebase REFerence Usage Event TSTamp NEXT Usage Event Moves the next marker timestamp to the right to the reference point of the display or zoom
311. eep a reference for other meas urements you can save it and load it back to the instrument when needed Import and export is also possible The instrument settings are saved together with the reference waveform only in the inter nal storage They are removed from the reference file when you save or export the file to an external storage USB flash device To save references 1 2 3 Press REF to display the Reference menu Press Save Press Source and select the waveform whose data you wantto save as a reference All active waveforms can be saved Press Storage and define the storage settings See To select the storage directory on page 218 Press File Name and enter the name of the target file See To define a new file or directory name on page 218 Press Save procedure see chapter 13 2 1 2 Importing and Exporting Data on page 218 e To copy a stored reference use FILE Import Export References For import export To load references and reference settings 1 2 3 Press REF Press Load Press Reference and select the reference number you want to load the reference to User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 75 R amp S9RTM20xx Reference Waveforms 5 2 References Reference RE3 Reference for REF key 4 Press Load A file explorer is displayed 5 Select the storage device and the file that contains the reference Use the Naviga tion knob to scro
312. eform defined with REFCurve lt m gt SOURce Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the reference waveform the internal reference storage Usage Event REFCurve lt m gt SAVE lt FileName gt Stores the reference waveform the specified file Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the reference waveform the internal reference storage Setting parameters lt FileName gt String with path and file name Usage Setting only IESSE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 323 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control RES Command Reference REFCurve lt m gt LOAD lt FileName gt Loads the waveform data from the indicated reference file to the reference storage To load the instrument settings use REFCurve lt m gt LOAD STATe Suffix m 1 4 Selects the reference waveform the internal reference storage Setting parameters lt FileName gt String with path and file name Usage Setting only REFCurve lt m gt LOAD STATe Loads the instrument settings in addition to the reference waveform data The waveform data must be loaded before the settings see REFCurve lt m gt LOAD on page 324 The settings are only available if the file was stored to the internal storage INT REFERENCE and never written to an external storage USB stick Suffix m 1 4 Selects the reference waveform Usage Event REFCurve lt m gt HORizontal SCALe Scale Changes the horizontal scale timebase of the reference waveform inde
313. eform to be analyzed with edge width peak rise fall time or runt search All active channel math and reference waveforms are available for selection Remote command SEARch SOURce on page 361 Source Setup Opens a menu to define the source parameters for Data2Clock and Pattern search waveform level and hysteresis Gate Opens a menu to restrict the time base range of the source waveform for search See chapter 10 3 9 Gate Menu on page 146 Events Opens a menu with functions for result display and marker usage See chapter 10 3 10 Events Menu on page 147 Remote command SEARch RESDiagram SHOW on page 372 10 3 2 Edge Setup Access SEARCH MENU gt Search type Edge gt Setup Edge Level Hysteresis Ce Kc Edge Sets the slope to be found Rising Rising edge a positive voltage change Falling Falling edge a negative voltage change User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 137 R amp S RTM20xx Search Reference for Search Menu Both Rising edge and falling edge Remote command SEARch TRIGger EDGE SLOPe on page 362 Level Sets the voltage level for the search Remote command SEARch TRIGger EDGE ke Vel on page 362 Hysteresis Sets a hysteresis range to the search level in order to avoid unwanted search results caused by noise oscillation around the level For a rising edge the hysteresis is below the search level Otherwise for a fal
314. el For a rising edge the hysteresis is below the search level Otherwise for a falling edge the hysteresis is above the level Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters lt LevelDelta gt Range Lower limit depends on vertical scale and other set tings no upper limit SEARch TRIGger PATTern WIDTh RANGe lt Range gt Sets the condition how the duration of a steady pattern is compared with the given ref erence time To set the reference value width use SEARch TRIGger PATTern WIDTh WIDTh on page 372 E Mi User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 371 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BREET Command Reference To set a range Af use SEARch TRIGger PATTern WIDTh DELTa on page 372 Parameters lt Range gt WITHin OUTSide LONGer SHORter WITHin Finds patterns steady for a time range width At OUTSide Finds patterns outside a time range width At LONGer Finds patterns steady for at least the given width SHORter Finds patterns shorter than the given width RST LONG SEARch TRIGger PATTern WIDTh WIDTh lt Width gt Sets the reference time of a steady pattern the nominal value for comparisons Parameters lt Width gt Default unit s SEARch TRIGger PATTern WIDTh DELTa lt DeltaTime gt Sets a range At to the reference pattern duration set with SEARch TRIG
315. ement 1 Default unit h lt Minute gt Range 0 to 59 Increment 1 Default unit min lt Second gt Range 0 to 59 Increment 1 Default unit s Usage SCPI confirmed SYSTem BEEPer CONTrol STATe Enables or diables a sound for general control events e g reaching the rotary encoder end or changing the measuring mode in the Automeasure menu Parameters lt ControlBeep gt ON OFF SYSTem BEEPer ERRor STATe Enables or disables the beep if an error occurs Parameters lt ErrorBeep gt ON OFF SYSTem BEEPer TRIG STATe Enables or disables the beep if a trigger occurs Parameters lt TriggerBeep gt ON OFF SYSTem BEEPer IMMediate Generates an immediate beep Usage Event SYSTem SET Setup Defines or queries the device settings that can be saved and load manually with FILE gt Device Settings Parameters Setup 488 2 block data Usage SCPI confirmed User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 452 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control 15 2 17 15 2 17 1 Command Reference SYSTem ERRor NEXT Queries the error event queue for the oldest item and removes it from the queue The response consists of an error number and a short description of the error Positive error numbers are instrument dependent Negative error numbers are reserved by the SCPI standard Return values lt Error gt Error event_number Error event_description gt Device depend ent info If the queue is empty the response i
316. emote command Search type SEARch STATe on page 359 Selects the event you want to search for Edge Width Peak Rise Fall time Runt Data2Clock Pattern Similar to the edge trigger an edge search result is found when the waveform passes the given level in the specified direction For settings see chapter 10 3 2 Edge Setup on page 137 Similar to the width trigger a width search finds pulses with an exact pulse width or pulses shorter or longer than a given time or pulses inside or outside the allowable time range For settings see chapter 10 3 3 Width Setup on page 138 The peak search finds pulses exceeding a given amplitude For settings see chapter 10 3 4 Peak Setup on page 139 The rise or fall time search finds slopes with an exact rise or fall time or rise fall times shorter or longer than a given limit or rise fall times inside or outside the allowable time range For settings see chapter 10 3 5 Rise Fall Time Setup on page 139 The runt search finds pulses lower than normal in amplitude The ampli tude crosses the first threshold twice without crossing the second one In addition to the threshold amplitudes you can define a time limit for the runt in the same way as for width search runts with exact width shorter or longer than a given time or runts inside or outside the allow able time range For settings see chapter 10 3 6 Runt Setup on page 141 The D
317. emote command MASK ACTion SOUNd EVENt MODE on page 357 MASK ACTion STOP EVENt MODE on page 357 MASK ACTion SCRSave EVENt MODE on page 357 MASK ACTion PRINt EVENt MODE on page 357 MASK ACTion WFMSave EVENt MODE on page 357 Sound Stop Screenshot Print Waveform Actions For each action you can define when and how often the action will be executed Sound Os Off aftern n IEEE hh 14 E 4 Off No action is executed Each The selected action is executed on each violation of the mask After n n Single The selected action is executed once after the n th violation Cyclic The selected action is executed repeatedly after each n th violation Set the execution interval with softkey n Remote command MASK ACTion SOUNd EVENt COUNt on page 358 MASK ACTion STOP EVENt COUNt on page 358 MASK ACTion SCRSave EVENt COUNt on page 358 MASK ACTion PRINt EVENt COUNt on page 358 MASK ACTion WFMSave EVENt COUNt on page 358 Z Masks Test Off Turns off the mask test and exits the Mask menu Remote command MASK STATe on page 355 A _ __ _ _ _ _ _ ___ M User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 131 R amp S RTM20xx Search Search Conditions and Results 10 Search 10 1 Search Conditions and Results The search functions of R amp S RT
318. en la forma debida Este producto est destinado exclusivamente al uso en la industria y el laboratorio o si ha sido expresamente autorizado para aplicaciones de campo y de ninguna manera deber ser utilizado de modo que alguna persona cosa pueda sufrir da o El uso del producto fuera de sus fines definidos o sin tener en cuenta las instrucciones del fabricante queda en la responsabilidad del usuario El fabricante no se hace en ninguna forma responsable de consecuencias a causa del mal uso del producto 1171 0000 42 07 Page 7 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Se parte del uso correcto del producto para los fines definidos si el producto es utilizado conforme a las indicaciones de la correspondiente documentaci n del producto y dentro del margen de rendimiento definido ver hoja de datos documentaci n informaciones de seguridad que siguen El uso del producto hace necesarios conocimientos t cnicos y ciertos conocimientos del idioma ingl s Por eso se debe tener en cuenta que el producto solo pueda ser operado por personal especializado o personas instruidas en profundidad con las capacidades correspondientes Si fuera necesaria indumentaria de seguridad para el uso de productos de Rohde amp Schwarz encontrar a la informaci n debida en la documentaci n del producto en el cap tulo correspondiente Guarde bien las informaciones de seguridad elementales as como la documentaci n del producto y entr guelas a usuarios posteriores
319. en producirse choques el ctricos incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte 1 Antes de la puesta en marcha del producto se deber comprobar siempre que la tensi n preseleccionada en el producto coincida con la de la red de alimentaci n el ctrica Si es necesario modificar el ajuste de tensi n tambi n se deber n cambiar en caso dado los fusibles correspondientes del producto Los productos de la clase de protecci n con alimentaci n m vil y enchufe individual solamente podr n enchufarse a tomas de corriente con contacto de seguridad y con conductor de protecci n conectado Queda prohibida la interrupci n intencionada del conductor de protecci n tanto en la toma de corriente como en el mismo producto La interrupci n puede tener como consecuencia el riesgo de que el producto sea fuente de choques el ctricos Si se utilizan cables alargadores o regletas de enchufe deber garantizarse la realizaci n de un examen regular de los mismos en cuanto a su estado t cnico de seguridad Si el producto no est equipado con un interruptor para desconectarlo de la red o bien si el interruptor existente no resulta apropiado para la desconexi n de la red el enchufe del cable de conexi n se deber considerar como un dispositivo de desconexi n El dispositivo de desconexi n se debe poder alcanzar f cilmente y debe estar siempre bien accesible Si p ej el enchufe de conexi n a la red es el dispositivo de d
320. ena niaaa aiaiai aa aana aiaa daaa 280 en E RR a dal Un RE 280 CHANnel lt m gt DATA YRESolutiONP nennen nennen nen nnnr sen rnr nen rnnr nennt nien rnt nnn 281 Sia ED Yd 293 CHANnelsm gt WABel a e 292 CHANnel m LABeE STATO tirer ener eremi deser e De ED de e rc Ede eere CA e ERE 292 els bae ec E 290 ey DI obse m 291 ear EE el TE 291 CHANnelsim gt P OSIION EE 290 CHANnelsm RANGO rore eee ee Gee potete docte eie Duden e ade ta Ld Avda aval 289 CHANnel lt m gt SCALe CHANE MA SKEW EE CHANnel lt m gt STATe CHANnelsm THR SHOId WE CHANnel lt m gt THReshold FINDlevel CHANnel lt m gt THReshold FINDlevel CHANnel lt m gt THReshold FINDlevel CHANnel lt m gt THReshold FINDlevel CHANnel lt m gt THReshold FINDlevel CHANnel lt m gt THReshold FINDlevel GHANmel Mm ICV PE ios C M CURS Or Ee el EE CURSor lt m gt FUNCtion ET e LE 332 CURSorsm gt SNPeak Ava i dari her at n dE EES 331 CURSOrsm gt SOURCC EE 327 CURS Or MSP Gak eebe seet tee de teet eege geed caue edet pe ecd Te Yet diode Tae ka de NEE 331 ASADO ssori iaia aaaea dadaan EEE aA Nan EENE daana aai aani aaien aaa aa 331 CURSor lt m gt STATe CURS Ors SWAV EE 331 CUbRG or cmz TRACking SCALelGTatel eiieeii eiieadh diddi a a aa a
321. ence Time t ti t Triggers on pulse width equal to the reference Time t if Variation At 0 If Variation O this setting triggers on pulses within the range t At tit Triggers on pulses unequal to the reference Time t if Variation At If Variation O this setting triggers on pulses outside a range t At Inside Out Triggers on pulses inside or outside a range specified with Time t1 side and Time t2 This method is an alternative setting to the range definition with Time t and Variation The values are interdependent Variation and Time t are adjusted If you change t1 and t2 and vice versa Remote command TRIGger A WIDTh RANGe on page 306 Polarity Sets the polarity of the pulse Pos Positive going pulse the width is defined from the rising to the falling slopes Neg Negative going pulse the width is defined from the falling to the rising slopes Remote command TRIGger A WIDTh POLarity on page 305 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 45 R amp S RTM20xx Triggers RRR ES SS ees Reference for Triggers Time t Sets the reference time the nominal value for comparisons ti t ti gt t ti t tit Remote command TRIGger A WIDTh WIDTh on page 306 Variation Sets a range Atto the reference Time t if comparison is set to ti t or ti t The instru ment triggers on pulses inside or outside the range ti At Remote command TRIGger A WIDTh DELTa on page 306 Time t1 Time
322. ensenseneseeenssesseaneseesnsssesseseasensensensenens 365 SEARCH TRIGger RISetime SL OP6 rere tnt rrt tan eee dente staacen subeusbeadshesednnbeuveponeceesoanaaneniecees 365 SEARch TRIGger RISetime TIME rr Ep entere n eredi e e KE URR Acre eis asia SEARch TRIGger RUNT POLafily te reet p re dee ag edo yaa Ve tenda RES SEARch TRIGger RUNT RANGe SEARcGh TRIGger R NT WIDTEi iiri oai nnana e tente eser EE Vo Ro venas a MEE FRA ERE EE SEARch TRIGger WIB Th DEL T8 iieri otra eere a Pe nea ee tre veas uela SEARch TRIGgerWIDTHh BEVel 2 2 Laetare nt erp gendi de pe ipa taeda ntc pta SEARch TRIGger WIDTh LEVel DEL aiiis ennnen enii aneu iien nnenh natn tenant annt tan nas 363 SEARch TIRIGger WIDTRh POLarity irre e iet ete Rer Fe ie Ee RC HERR dees 362 SEARch TRIGger WIDTh RANGe SEARch TRIGgerWIDTh WID Th didici cec pep irt uo peer tala ihe O M STAT s OPERation CONDIIOn oec oiii e cot ao 454 STA Tus OPERation BNABI e STATus OPERation NT RarsitiOn oue orte tenete rna sd merae Le nep ehe Meer cae STATus OPERation PTRansition STATUS OPERAtHON EVEN sinsear ot rnt Ree etna epee zx esten e SENS EECH 454 STATUS PRES Odia cto ote Roe I e cete bip cete dae EE Dre geet ada ae 456 SGTATusOUEG onable COND ton A 456 STATus QUEStionable COVerload CONDition eesesssssessssseeeeeenneeneee nennen nennen nnne 456 STATus QUEStionable COV
323. ension of the CSV format comma separated values You can edit it with standard editors for example with MS Excel or a text editor e sn R User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 151 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis Basics of Protocol Analysis The PTT file has three types of lines e Comment lines begin with a hash character A hash character at any other position in the line is treated like a standard character e Command lines begin with a commercial at character An character at any other position in the line is treated like a standard character e Standard lines are the lines that not qualify as comment or command lines They build the core of the label list Command lines Command lines define the version of the PTT file and the protocol name e FILE VERSION must appear exactly once in the file e PROTOCOL_NAME must appear at least once in the file Thus one file can con tain several label lists for different protocols Start of PTT file GFILE VERSION 1 0 PROTOCOL NAME i2c Label list for I2C PROTOCOL NAME can Label list for CAN End of PTT file Standard lines Standard lines define the contents of the label list The rules for standard lines follow the csv convention they are e Values are separated by commas e Space characters following a delimiter are ig
324. enter Span 2 to Center Span 2 For details see Span on page 119 and Center on page 119 a Press the horizontal SCALE rotary knob to select the FFT frequency range Span Center settings are highlighted b Turn the horizontal SCALE rotary knob to define the span of the frequency range Turn the knob counter clockwise to enlarge the span or clockwise to decrease it c Turn the horizontal POSITION rotary knob to define the center of the frequency range Turn the knob counter clockwise to move the center to the left or clock wise to move it to the right I User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 113 R amp S9RTM20xx FFT Configuring and Using FFT Calculations d Turn the vertical SCALE rotary knob to define the scaling of the FFT amplitudes Turn the knob counter clockwise to decrease the amplitudes or clockwise to enlarge them To configure the Y t window numerically Alternatively to configuring the Y t window numerically via the softkeys you can use the rotary knobs to change the settings graphically see To configure the Y t window graph ically on page 114 1 2 3 Press Y t Setup in the FFT menu Press Y Scale to define the scaling of the signal amplitudes in the Y t window Press Y Position to define the vertical position of the time axis in the Y t window in divisions Press Main Time Base to define the scaling for the time base in the Y t window in seconds per division Note that
325. enter of a range which is defined by the limits lt Delta gt set with TRIGger A WIDTh DELTa For the ranges SHORter and LONGer the width defines the maximum and minimum pulse width respectively User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 306 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BREET Command Reference Parameters lt Time1 gt Center value maximum value or minimum value depending on the defined range type Range 2 00E 008 to 6 87194685440 Increment Depends on the lt Time1 gt value RST 2 00E 008 15 2 5 4 Video TV Trigger TRIGOENA TUS EE 307 TRIGGER TE 307 TRIGIERA TV FELG TEE 307 Jie i EEN coo ii A 308 TRIGger A TV STANdard lt Standard gt Selects the color television standard Parameters lt Standard gt PAL NTSC SECam PALM 1576 P720 P1080 11080 PALM PAL M 1576 SDTV 576i PAL and SECAM P720 P1080 HDTV 720 1080p progressive scanning 11080 HDTV 1080i interlaced scanning RST PAL TRIGger A TV POLarity lt Polarity gt Selects the polarity of the signal Note that the sync pulse has the opposite polarity The edges of the sync pulses are used for triggering See also Signal on page 47 Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative POSitive If the video modulation is positive the sync pulses are negative NEGative If the modulation is negative sync pulses are positive RST NEGative TRIGger A TV FIELd lt Field gt Sets the trigger on the beginning of the vide
326. er ESE 266 Event status register Ile Event status register ESR EEX POMING ERR device Settings s s inrer eet feet Ee TE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 R amp S9RTM20xx Index Misa 218 o EEN 218 F el ut 87 FFT cen DE CCIM Te restate thee E configuring ae cursor measurements sese 78 115 deactivating oooonnnnnnccnnccccccinnnncnnnnnannannn nono 111 121 displaying EOS an o er eerte A E EE T Main Time Base is ul mode remote trier toro eie arena No of Averages sis A eeh cr E starting 2 waveform arithmetic esses 116 ll le E Y Position SE breede ee Y Scaling adul EE 119 FFT off SOM p 121 FFT Setup SOMMCY M 118 File formats she EE 228 CSV MASKS P 123 CSV waveforms sess esee 227 masks i jl ipaam E TXT masks is TXT waveforms i t tete rer rient 228 Waveforms coooococccccncnnncncccnnnnnnnoncnnnnnnnoncnnnannnnnn nono nonnos 227 File name O ees HR 218 GE 220 Filter on channel signal eene 24 Find level Channel threshold ccccccccccccccononcccnonononononononinnnnna 31 ieniec tp 39 Format SOKOV atente M ALL EIE LL 230 231 Waveforms coooooococccncnnncncccnnnnnnononnnnononcncnanannnnnnnononnnnns 227 Formats MASKS eege O E
327. er A EVelen RISetime EOWEer 2 2 2 tienen aa a a ENNEN 311 TRiGger A iEVel nsRISelime DPPer 5 t 311 TRIGA RI Seime E EE 311 TRIGger A RlSetime RANGE 20 eceeece cece cee eeee cece eee ee eae a eee tee eeee eee eaeaaaaateeeeeeeeeeesaaaaaeeeeeeeeees 311 PREGGO A RI Setime TEE 311 TRiGgerARSetime TE 312 EN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 310 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control Command Reference TRIGger A LEVel lt n gt RISetime LOWer Level TRIGger A LEVel lt n gt RISetime UPPer Level Set the loer and upper voltage threshold respectively When the signal crosses these levels the slew rate measurement starts or stops depending on the selected polarity Suffix lt n gt 1 5 The suffix is not relevant the level applies to all sources Parameters lt Level gt Default unit V TRIGger A RISetime SLOPe lt Polarity gt Sets the edge of whic the transition time is to be analyzed Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative POSitive rise time trigger NEGative Fall time trigger RST POS TRIGger A RISetime RANGe Range Selects how the time limit of the rise or fall time is defined Parameters lt Range gt LONGer SHORter WITHin OUTSide LONGer SHORter Triggers on transition times longer or shorter than the time TRIGger A RISetime TIME WITHin OUTSide Triggers on transition times inside or outside the time range TIMe DELTa Use TRIGger A RISetime TIME and TR
328. er A CAN FORMerror on page 410 Acknowledge Error lt type gt An acknowledgement error occurs when the transmitter does not receive an acknowl edgment a dominant bit during the Ack Slot Remote command TRIGger A CAN ACKerror on page 410 EN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 188 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis CAN Option R amp S RTM K3 CRC lt Error type CAN uses the Cyclic Redundancy Check which is a complex checksum calculation method The transmitter calculates the CRC and sends the result in the CRC sequence The receiver calculates the CRC in the same way A CRC error occurs when the calcu lated result differs from the received value in the CRC sequence Remote command TRIGger A CAN CRCerror on page 410 Identifier Sets the trigger to a specific message identifier or an identifier range The first key press enables the Identifier trigger type the second one opens the Iden tifier menu If a label list with node names was loaded and applied in the bus configuration you can select simply the Symbolic ID from the list instead of entering the numeric identifier Frame type Symbolic ID Identifier User defined Setup 4 Remote command TRIGger A CAN TYPE on page 407 ID IDDT Frame type lt Identifier Data frames and remote frames contain an identifier Select the frame type to be triggered on or select Data and remote if the frame type is not relevant Remote command TRIGger A CA
329. er ENUMerate NEXT eese 443 HCOPy DESTination Medium Defines whether the screenshot is saved or printed Parameters Medium MMEM SYST COMM PRIN String parameter MMEM Saves the screenshot to a file Specify the file name and location with MMEMory NAME SYST COMM PRIN Prints on the printer specified with SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter SELect The printer must be specified before the HCOPy DESTination is sent RST MMEM Example HCOP DEST MMEM chapter 15 3 3 1 Saving Screenshots to File on page 461 MMEMory NAME lt FileName gt Defines the file name to store an image of the display with HCOPy IMMediate Parameters lt FileName gt String parameter Example chapter 15 3 3 1 Saving Screenshots to File on page 461 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 4M R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control a aa m Command Reference HCOPy IMMediate Prints an image of the display to the printer or saves an image to a file or the clipboard depending on the HCOPy DESTination setting Before starting the printout make sure that e The printer is defined by SySTem COMMunicate PRINter SELect The path for storage is defined correctly by MMEMory CDIRectory e The file name for storage is defined by MMEMory NAME Example chapter 15 3 3 1 Saving Screenshots to File on page 461 Usage Event HCOPy LANGuage Format Defines the format of the printed or s
330. er gt Sets the stop bits Suffix lt b gt Parameters lt StopBitNumber gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines B1 B1_5 B2 1 1 5 or 2 stop bits are possible RST B1 BUS lt b gt UART BAUDrate lt Baudrate gt Sets the number of transmitted bits per second Suffix lt b gt Parameters lt Baudrate gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Range 100 to 78 1E6 Increment 100 RST 115200 Default unit Bit User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 401 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BREET Command Reference BUS lt b gt UART BITime BurstldleTime Sets the minimal time between two data frames packets that is between the last stop bit and the start bit of the next frame Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Parameters BurstldleTime Range Range depends on the bus configuration mainly on bit rate and symbol size Default unit s CHANnel lt m gt THReshold FINDlevel Executes the analysis of all analog channels that are configured for the selected bus and sets the threshold for digitization of analog signals for each channel Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Usage Event UART Trigger TRICIA SOURCE VAR EE 402 TRIGger A UVART MODE EE 402 TRIGGER ELSE NE DEET 403 TRIGG rA E
331. er the last clock and no new clock appeared during that time Remote command TRIGger A SPI MODE on page 380 BEND Bit lt x gt Sets the trigger to the specified bit number Remote command TRIGger A SPI MODE on page 380 NTHBi t Ser Pattern Sets the trigger to a specified bit pattern that is configured in the submenu PI Setup Ser Pattern Bit Offset Remote command TRIGger A SPI MODE on page 380 PATTern TRIGger A SPI PATTern on page 380 Bit Offset Ser Pattern Sets the number of bits before the first bit of the pattern These bits are ignored The first bit after CS is Bit 0 For example with bit offset 2 Bit O and Bit 1 after CS are ignored and the pattern starts with Bit 2 Remote command TRIGger A SPI POFFset on page 381 p M User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 161 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis 11 2 4 SPI SSPI Bus Option R amp S RTM K1 Number of Bits Ser Pattern Defines the length of the serial pattern in bit Remote command TRIGger A SPI PLENgth on page 381 Select Bit Ser Pattern Selects the bit number for binary pattern setting For the selected bit State is to be set The bits are counted from the message start the selected bit is highlighted in the pattern bit line State Ser Pattern Toggles the logic state of the se
332. erLEVelRISctimeUPPe 20 NSA ENEE 365 SEARch TRIGger RISetime FSANGe 2 2 ainni adi 365 e RE eg E leen E 366 GEAbRch TRilGoerHl etime DEI Ta 366 SEARch TRIGger RISetime SLOPe lt Polarity gt Sets the slope to be found Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative EITHer POSitive to search for rise time NEGative to search for fall time EITHer to search for rise and fall time RST POS Firmware Software FW 03 700 SEARch TRIGger LEVel RISetime LOWer lt LowerLevel gt Sets the lower voltage threshold When the signal crosses this level the rise time mea surement starts or stops depending on the selected slope Parameters lt LowerLevel gt RST 400 mV Default unit V Firmware Software FW 03 700 SEARch TRIGger LEVel RISetime UPPer lt UpperLevel gt Sets the upper voltage threshold When the signal crosses this level the rise fall time measurement starts or stops depending on the selected slope Parameters lt UpperLevel gt RST 600 mV Default unit V Firmware Software FW 03 700 SEARch TRIGger RISetime RANGe Range Sets how the measured rise or fall time is compared with the given limit s To set the rise fall time use SEARch TRIGger RISetime TIME To set the range At use SEARch TRIGger RISetime DELTa E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 365 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control 15 2 12 6 Command Reference Parameters lt Range gt LONGer SHORter
333. eral Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines bus 1 and 2 or bus 3 and 4 If one of these buses is configured the number of buses suffix lt b gt is reduced Bus 2 and or bus 4 is not available BUSH SAU adada 374 ER d EE 375 BUS SF e E EE 375 SR en EE 375 BUS DSIZO ii ees geegent 375 BUS POSI EE 376 BUSA RE SU dc idas 376 A ae 376 BUS EIS ESA EE 376 BUS lt b gt STATe lt State gt Switches the protocol display on or off Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF EMIN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 374 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control RES Command Reference BUS lt b gt TYPE lt Type gt Defines the bus or interface type for analysis For most types a special option to the instrument is required Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Parameters Type PARallel CPARallel I2C SPI SSPI UART CAN LIN RST PARallel BUS lt b gt FORMat Format Sets the decoding format for the display on the screen Suffix b 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Parameters lt Format gt ASCii HEXadecimal BINary DECimal RST HEX BUS lt b gt DSIGnals lt BitsSignals gt Displays the individual bit lines above the decoded bus line
334. erload ENABle esee nennen nnnm nnne nnne e nr en rne nned STATus QUEStionable COVerload NTRansition STATus QUEStionable COVerload PTRansition SGTATusOUEG onable COVerloadf EVEN 457 STATus QUEStionable ENABIe ccccccesceeeeceececeeeeeeeeecaeeceaeecaeesaecceaeecaeesaaeseeeeseaeseaeessaeeseeseaeeeeeeeseeeeeees 456 STATusOUEG onable L IM CONDiton nnne nnns enne 456 STATusOUEG onable L IMENADie nennen eene nnne nnne nnne tenens eene nnns nnd STATus QUEStionable LIMit NTRansition SGTATusOUEGtonable LU lMt P Ransition canon cnn nano nennen nnns rennen nennen eene STATusOUEG onable L IM EVEN 457 STATusOUEGtonable MAGk CONDiton enne tnnt tnnt een enne tne nnne nns 456 STATus QUEStionable MASK ENABle sess enne enne nnns tenete nnns eterne nnne nnd SGTATusOUEGtonableMAGkNTRansitton enne ener naar nc naar cnn nennen STATus QUEStionable MASK PTRansition STATus QUEStionable MASK EVENI irte eet rete eerta tr eroe eiie Eddie 457 STATus QUEStionable NTERansitlOn ico eiii tette ceste dc oie dte ane ecoute esu ir 2 VERRE Sg 457 STATus QUESttonable PTRansitiOn 2rd ta teta Die rp tk EY dove DER da E EY te I Aude 457 STATusOUEG onablel EVEN 457 Ee User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 472 R amp S RTM20xx List of Commands SYSTem BEEPer CONTrolSTA Tecnorati bid GE HERE E e SYSTem BEEPer TRIG STA TO ee nnnne et hnes rt nrnns eii rned ete ness nan nera
335. es are messages the controller sends to the instrument They operate the instrument functions and request information The commands are sub divided according to two criteria e According to the effect they have on the instrument Setting commands cause instrument settings such as a reset of the instrument or setting the frequency Queries cause data to be provided for remote control e g for identification of the instrument or polling a parameter value Queries are formed by directly appending a question mark to the command header e According to their definition in standards Common commands their function and syntax are precisely defined in standard IEEE 488 2 They are employed identically on all instruments if implemented They refer to functions such as management of the standardized status registers reset and self test Instrument control commands refer to functions depending on the features of the instrument such as frequency settings Many of these commands have also been standardized by the SCPI committee These commands are marked as SCPI compliant in the command reference chapters Commands without this SCPI label are device specific however their syntax follows SCPI rules as per mitted by the standard Instrument responses Instrument responses response messages and service requests are messages the instrument sends to the controller after a query They can contain measurement results instrument sett
336. es contained in the specified directory The result corresponds to the number of files returned by the MMEMory CATalog LENgth command Query parameters lt PathName gt String parameter Specifies the directory A filter can be used to list for example only files of a given file type lt Format gt ALL WTIMe ALL Extended result including file date time and attributes WTIMe Result including file date time Return values lt UsedMemory gt Total amount of storage currently used in the directory in bytes lt FreeMemory gt Total amount of storage available in the directory in bytes lt FileEntry gt String parameter All files of the directory are listed with their file name format and size in bytes Example Query for files in the DATA directory with absolute path MMEM CAT USB FRONT DATA WA received 511104 8633856 MONDAY TXT 8 TUESDAY CSV 8 Example Query for TXT files in the DATA directory with relative path MMEM CDIR USB FRONT DATA MMEM CAT TXT received 511104 8633856 MONDAY TXT 8 MMEM CAT LENGTH TXT received 1 Example chapter 15 3 3 2 Saving Copying and Loading Setup Data on page 461 Usage Query only MMEMory CATalog LENGth lt PathName gt Returns the number of files in the specified directory The result corresponds to the num ber of files returned by the MMEMory CATalog command Query parameters lt PathName gt String parameter
337. esconexi n la longitud del cable de conexi n no debe superar 3 m Los interruptores selectores o electr nicos no son aptos para el corte de la red el ctrica Si se integran productos sin interruptor en bastidores o instalaciones se deber colocar el interruptor en el nivel de la instalaci n No utilice nunca el producto si est da ado el cable de conexi n a red Compruebe regularmente el correcto estado de los cables de conexi n a red Aseg rese mediante las medidas de protecci n y de instalaci n adecuadas de que el cable de conexi n a red no pueda ser da ado o de que nadie pueda ser da ado por l p ej al tropezar o por un choque el ctrico 1171 0000 42 07 Page 10 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Solamente est permitido el funcionamiento en redes de alimentaci n TN TT aseguradas con fusibles de 16 A como m ximo utilizaci n de fusibles de mayor amperaje solo previa consulta con el grupo de empresas Rohde amp Schwarz Nunca conecte el enchufe en tomas de corriente sucias o llenas de polvo Introduzca el enchufe por completo y fuertemente en la toma de corriente La no observaci n de estas medidas puede provocar chispas fuego y o lesiones No sobrecargue las tomas de corriente los cables alargadores o las regletas de enchufe ya que esto podr a causar fuego o choques el ctricos En las mediciones en circuitos de corriente con una tensi
338. eseaeeneees 353 CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT WINDow TYPE 349 CAL Culate MATH lt m gt POSItON ociomoomsoroscrsicnnirscnciccnririnicnnanicn a inna taken eua ke tao Eta arar Saa ianiai 346 Ee OM Kuer TE 346 MAA ieas eienn E Eee Eara E Onana Sawa Aaea SENEE EAE ee ka DEE Aa Eei ENEN a 345 CAL CulateMATHcmztExbbessionlt DEFinel esses nennen nnn nnn nnne 346 CHANnelsm ARLThmeties ioter rote terii RR n Fe tere eerie ehe ra E ERE daaa ERR o ae ERR ER RE ERR 287 CHANnel lt m gt BANDwidth 290 Eu ee TT EE 289 CHANnel lt m gt DATA ENVelope HEADe AAA 294 CHANnel lt m gt DATA ENVelope XINCrementO esses ener nennt nennen rn nre n inna 280 CHANnel m DATA ENVelope XORIgin eese ener nnne nenen rsen nnt nrse nnne nnns 279 CHANnel m DATA ENVelope YINCrement sss ense nennen nnnn nen nrnnr en nnne 280 CHANnel lt m gt DATA ENVelope YORigin 280 CHANnel mz DATAENVelope vbRE Goluton eene nnne nennen nnne 281 CHANnel m DATA ENVelope cecinere erinnern tnnt ink deae ER e PER a LEE o tape ana easi nada seta ke daa Run 294 CHANnelsms DATA HEADAr ic tende ei deed aves Dc ede deg atl vd d d e 294 AS dec 295 LEE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 466 R amp S RTM20xx List of Commands CHANnel lt m gt DATA XINCrementO nennen een nenrn inne ns ted t entr sene resr idt rrnn sre n rents nnn 280 el EE DATA XORIQIN RE 279 CHANnel mz DATA vlNCrement senes nano cnn nan n
339. esult of the pattern condition The range is defined using TRIGger A PATTern WIDTh RANGe User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 309 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control 15 2 5 6 Command Reference TRIGger A PATTern WIDTh RANGe lt PatternRange gt Selects how the time limit of the pattern state is defined The time is specified using TRIGger A PATTern WIDTh WIDTh on page 310 the range around is specified using TRIGger A PATTern WIDTh DELTa on page 310 Parameters lt PatternRange gt WITHin OUTSide SHORter LONGer WITHin Triggers if the pattern state remains unchanged longer than Time Delta and shorter than Time Delta OUTSide Triggers if the pattern state remains unchanged either shorter than Time Delta or longer than Time Delta SHORter LONGer Triggers if the pattern state changes before or after the specified time TRIGger A PATTern WIDTh WIDTh lt PatternWidth gt For the ranges WITHin and OUTSide the lt PatternWidth gt defines the center of a range which is defined by the limits lt Delta gt For the ranges SHORter and LONGer the pattern width defines the maximum and min imum values respectively Parameters lt PatternWidth gt Default unit s TRIGger A PATTern WIDTh DELTa lt PatternDelta gt Defines a range around the pattern width value specified using TRIGger A PATTern WIDTh WIDTh Parameters lt PatternDelta gt Default unit s Rise Time Fall Time Trigger TRIGg
340. ets a hysteresis range to the search level of the selected signal in order to avoid unwan ted search results caused by noise oscillation around the level For a rising edge the hysteresis is below the search level Otherwise for a falling edge the hysteresis is above the level Remote command SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock CLEVel DELTa on page 369 SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock DLEVel DELTa on page 369 Data2Clock Setup Access SEARCH MENU gt Search type Data2Clock gt Setup Search setup Data2Clock Clock Data Data2Clock Polarity Setup Time Hold Time Polarity Sets the edge of the clock signal to define the time reference point for the setup and hold time Rising Only positive clock edges are considered Falling Only negative clock edges are considered Either The clock edges next to the data edge are considered regardless of the clock slope Remote command SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock CEDGe on page 369 Setup Time Sets the minimum time before the clock edge while the data signal must stay steady above or below the data level The setup time can be negative In this case the setup interval starts after the clock edge and the hold time must be positive and longer than the absolute value of the setup time Remote command SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock STIMe on page 370 I User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 143 R amp S9RTM20xx Search 10 3 8 10 3 8 1
341. ets the number of lines to be analyzed DO and D1 are reserved for chip select and clock all other digital channels can be used for data Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Parameters lt BusWidth gt Range 1 to 14 Increment 1 RST 4 Default unit Bit BUS lt b gt CPARallel CLOCK SLOPe lt ClockSlope gt Selects if the data is sampled on the rising or falling slope of the clock or on both edges ElTHer The clock slope marks the begin of a new bit Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Parameters lt ClockSlope gt POSitive NEGative EITHer BUS lt b gt CPARallel CS POLarity lt Polarity gt Selects wether the chip select signal is high active high 1 or low active low 1 Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines LEE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 438 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control ee ee A sg Command Reference Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative POSitive high active NEGative low active Parallel Buses Decode Results The commands to query results of decoded parallel clocked and unclocked buses are similar and described together in this chapter BUS lt b gt PARAlGFOOUN EE 439 Se EIER et 439 BUS lt b gt PARAlEFRAMESHFR DATA Z EE 439 BUS lt b CPARallelFRAMeESNSDATAS coi ata 439 BUS lt b gt PAR
342. f Specified Width Search for positive pulses with pulse width 12 10 us 2 us to 22 us Command description in chapter 15 2 12 Search on page 358 SEAR STAT ON Turn on search SEAR COND WIDTH Select search condition SEAR SOUR CH2 Configure search source SEAR TRIG WIDT POL POS Configure search parameters Polarity SEAR TRIG WIDT RANG WITH Configure search parameters Condition within SEAR TRIG WIDT WIDT 12e 6 Configure search parameters Pulse width SEAR TRIG WIDT DELT 10e 6 Configure search parameters delta SEAR RESD SHOW ON Show result table SEAR RCO Get number of search events found 400E 0 SEAR RES ALL Get all search results lt 9 201200e 06 0 WIDTH POSITIVE 1 220160e 05 2 4 120040e 05 0 WIDTH POSITIVE 3 076800e 06 3 4 732480e 05 0 WIDTH POSITIVE 9 127200e 06 4 6 499960e 05 0 WIDTH POSITIVE 1 835160e 05 5 8 634920e 05 0 WIDTH POSITIVE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 460 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control 15 3 3 15 3 3 1 15 3 3 2 Programming Examples 3 052000e 06 6 1 293984e 04 0 WIDTH POSITIVE 9 176800e 06 7 1 477228e 04 0 WIDTH POSITIVE 3 052000e 06 8 1 623224e 04 0 WIDTH POSITIVE 3 102000e 06 9 1 684724e 04 0 WIDTH POSITIVE 1 215160e 05 10 1 953216e 04 0 WIDTH POSITIVE 3 027200e 06 11 2 044716e 04 0 WIDTH POSITIVE 6 052000e 06 12 2 252212e 04 0 WIDTH POSITIVE 3 052000e 06 13 2 435456e 04 0 WIDTH POSITIVE 3 027200
343. f by selecting the corresponding softkey Active sounds are highlighted Control Beep lt Sound Generates a sound for general control events e g reaching the rotary encoder end or changing the measuring mode in the Automeasure menu Remote command SYSTem BEEPer CONTrol STATe on page 452 Error Beep Sound Generates a a sound if an error occurs in the instrument e g when the input exceeds 50 Q or a false value is entered in a dialog Remote command SYSTem BEEPer ERRor STATe on page 452 Trigger Beep Sound Generates a sound when the trigger condition is fulfilled Remote command SYSTem BEEPer TRIG STATe on page 452 E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 238 R amp S RTM20xx General Instrument Setup ee Reference for Setup Self Alignment Opens a submenu to perform selftest and self alignment of the instrument and to check the results Self Test amp Self Alignment Self Alignment Checks if a self alignment has been executed successfully If not the self alignment is executed To start the process press the Start softkey Self Alignment Self Alignment Allows you to execute an internal self alignment of the instrument Alignment is only exe cuted when you press the Start softkey When data from several input channels is displayed at the same time it may be necessary to align the data in order to synchronize the time bases amplitudes and pos
344. f the data line Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Parameters Source CH1 CH2 CH3 CHA DO D15 RST CH1 EMN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 378 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control RES Command Reference BUS lt b gt SPI DATA POLarity lt Polarity gt Selects whether transmitted data is high active high 1 or low active low 1 on the data line Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative POSitive high active NEGative low active RST POSitive BUS lt b gt SPI BORDer lt BitOrder gt Defines if the data of the messages starts with MSB most significant bit or LSB least significant bit Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Parameters lt BitOrder gt MSBFirst LSBFirst RST MSBFirst BUS lt b gt SPI SSIZe lt SymbolSize gt Sets the word length the number of bits in a message Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Parameters lt SymbolSize gt Range 4 to 32 Increment 1 RST 8 Default unit Bit CHANnel lt m gt THReshold FINDlevel Executes the analysis of all analog channels that are configured for the selected bus and sets the threshold for digitization of analog signals for each channel
345. f the waveform If the signal is undersampled aliasing occurs a false waveform is displayed To avoid aliasing and accurately reconstruct a signal Nyquist theorem postulates that the sample rate must be at least twice as fast as the highest frequency component of the signal However the theorem assumes ideal conditions so the Nyquist sample rate is usually not sufficient User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 13 R amp S9RTM20xx Acquisition and Waveform Setup 2 1 2 2 Basics Input signal sine wave 10 kHz Sample rate 200 kHz 50 kHz 25 kHz 12 5 kHz Fig 2 2 Waveforms acquired with different sample rates This means that the sample rate must be set to a value 3 to 5 times the fastest frequency component of the signal A higher sample rate increases signal fidelity increases the chance to capture glitches and other signal anomalies and improves the zoom in capa bilities Acquisition Settings The resulting sample rate can be the same as the constant ADC sample rate or higher or lower By default the real time sample mode is used With fast time base settings the sample rate becomes higher than the ADC sample rate The missising waveform samples are added to the ADC samples with sin x x interpolation automatically When measuring high frequency repetitive signals whose frequency components are even higher than the ADC sample rate equivalent time sampling is used to capture the waveform This sample mode captu
346. face Messages Interface messages are transmitted to the instrument on the data lines with the attention line ATN being active LOW They are used for communication between the controller and the instrument and can only be sent by a computer which has the function of a GPIB bus controller GPIB interface messages can be further subdivided into e Universal commands act on all instruments connected to the GPIB bus without previous addressing e Addressed commands only act on instruments previously addressed as listeners Universal Commands Universal commands are encoded in the range 10 through 1F hex They affect all instru ments connected to the bus and do not require addressing Command Effect on the instrument DCL Device Clear Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state Does not change the instrument settings IFC Interface Clear Resets the interfaces to the default setting LLO Local Lockout The LOC IEC ADDR key is disabled SPE Serial Poll Enable Ready for serial poll SPD Serial Poll Disable End of serial poll PPU Parallel Poll Unconfig End of the parallel poll state ure IFC is not a real universal command it is sent via a separate line however it also affects all instruments connected to the bus and does not require addressing Addressed Commands Addressed commands are encoded in the r
347. fferential probes provide multiple input voltages e Differential mode input voltage Vin Voltage between the positive and negative signal sockets e Positive single ended input voltage V Voltage between the positive signal socket and the ground socket e Negative single ended input voltage Vn Voltage between the negative signal socket and the ground socket e Common mode input voltage Vom Mean voltage of positive and negative signal sockets referred to the ground socket respectively Two of these voltages are independent values the other two can be calculated Vin V Vs Vp V on R amp S RT ZD probes detect only differential input voltages and provide it to the oscillo scope Common mode signals are suppressed by the probe This characteristic is descri bed by the Common Mode Rejection Ratio CMRR DifferentialGain CommonMode Gain CMRR In addition the R amp S ProbeMeter of R amp S RT ZD differential probes can measure differ ential and common mode DC voltages The measurement result is displayed on the oscilloscope s screen The common mode mesurement of the R amp S ProbeMeter allows to check the input voltage relative to ground and is a convenient way to detect breaches of the operating voltage window and the reason of unwanted clippings LEE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 19 R amp S RTM20xx Acquisition and Waveform Setup Setting up the Waveform 2 2 Setting up the Waveform This chapter contains t
348. figuration 167 Protocol settings 167 Triggering Soe ais 168 MING GE EE 169 K Keys ee ET 23 CH Ase tee Display db diee User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 478 R amp S9RTM20xx Index ule M ual p O Setup instrument sie SIGNAL OFE EE LOOM Eegen L Label EI 151 Digital channels ccccccceeeceeeeteeeeeeneneeeeeeeetes 211 PAD SU EIST MEI 151 LabelliSts nore nubla 151 LAN Configuration er 243 interface IP address e E 247 parameter setup reiten 243 remote control interface ies FESOUPCE SUING euer ten tent ARP nn erp eria 247 A ON 242 Language SS ENEE eege eege A0 E WEEN 197 Protocol settings e e E ul EE Hlleke 185 E Lines Bro EE Load SOM CY ee eege deele 77 Loading Device settings erret prete rens equation sets e Ii m LOA MASK RN Load Settings SOEN p 77 Low pass filler ior ertet e rient eene teen 24 M Main Time Base CE P egene ge 70 120 Malfunctions Ile e E 273 UE Cra P 73 Go to next 73 Item m A aana eaaa 73 Masks lee 130 Copy de 122 Creating E 129 creating CSV file 123 definition wee 122 export import 122 import export 218 Import Export
349. fines the format for data export with CHANnel lt m gt DATA on page 293 HANnel lt m gt DATA ENVelope on page 294 C e CALCulate MATH lt m gt DATA on page 347 R e REFCurve lt m gt DATA on page 325 Parameters lt DataFormat gt ASCii REAL UINTeger ASCii List of values for example 1 23 1 22 1 24 lt Accuracy gt is 0 which means that the instrument selects the num ber of digits to be returned The query returns ASC 0 REAL Binary format lt Accuracy gt is 32 The query returns REAL 32 The data is stored as binary data Definite Length Block Data according to IEEE 488 2 Each waveform value is formatted in 32 Bit IEEE 754 Floating Point Format The schema of the result string is as follows 41024 valuel value2 value n gt with 4 number of digits 4 in the example of the following number 1024 number of following data bytes 1024 in the example lt value gt 4 byte floating point values UINTeger Unsigned integer format binary values with length 8 bit 1 byte per sample 16 bit 2 bytes per sample or 32 bit 4 bytes per sample UINT 8 Or UINT 16 Or UINT 32 The data range for UINT 8 is 0 to 255 the data range for UINT 16 is 0 to 65 535 and for UINT 16 is 2 7 For data conversion you need the results of following commands DATA XORigin DATA XINCrement DATA Yorigin DATA YINCrement DATA YRESolution They are described below in this chap
350. formation regarding batteries and rechargeable batteries cells is not observed either at all or to the extent necessary product users may be exposed to the risk of explosions fire and or serious personal injury and in some cases death Batteries and rechargeable batteries with alkaline electrolytes e g lithium cells must be handled in accordance with the EN 62133 standard 1 2 Cells must not be taken apart or crushed Cells or batteries must not be exposed to heat or fire Storage in direct sunlight must be avoided Keep cells and batteries clean and dry Clean soiled connectors using a dry clean cloth Cells or batteries must not be short circuited Cells or batteries must not be stored in a box or in a drawer where they can short circuit each other or where they can be short circuited by other conductive materials Cells and batteries must not be removed from their original packaging until they are ready to be used Cells and batteries must not be exposed to any mechanical shocks that are stronger than permitted If a cell develops a leak the fluid must not be allowed to come into contact with the skin or eyes If contact occurs wash the affected area with plenty of water and seek medical aid Improperly replacing or charging cells or batteries that contain alkaline electrolytes e g lithium cells can cause explosions Replace cells or batteries only with the matching Rohde amp Schwarz type see parts list in order to ensur
351. ge 419 SEARch PROTocol CAN BITSterror on page 419 SEARch PROTocol CAN CRCerror on page 419 SEARch PROToco1 CAN FORMerror on page 420 Symbolic ID If a label list with node names was loaded and applied in the bus configuration you can select simply the node name from the list instead of entering the numeric identifier The instrument trriggers on the identifier of the selected node Frame type Selects the frame type to be searched for if Event Identifier is selected You can search for data and or remote frames Remote command SEARch PROTocol CAN FTYPe on page 420 Identifier Setup Opens the menu to set the identifier pattern if Event Identifier or ID amp Data or ID amp Error is selected After setting the ID type and the Comparison condition you can enter the value bit by bit by setting the state high low or don t care for each single bit Alternatively you can enter a hexadecimal value for each byte The settings are the same as for the setup of the identifier trigger see Identifier Setup on page 189 Remote command SEARch PROTocol CAN ITYPe on page 420 SEARch PROTocol CAN ICONdition on page 420 SEARch PROTocol CAN IDENtifier on page 420 Data Setup Opens the menu to set the data pattern to be searched if Event ID amp Data is selected E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 195 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis mm E E CAN Option R
352. ge after the first vertical cursor between the upper and lower refer ence levels The reference level for rise and fall time measurement is set with REFLevel RELative MODE PEAK Vpp absolute difference between the two peak values CURSor lt m gt RESult UPEakvalue Vp upper peak value LPEakvalue Vp lower peak value Values are measured between two vertical cursor lines BWIDth Burst width the duration of a burst Two vertical cursors CURSor m RESult mark the beginning and the end of the burst The hori zontal cursor sets the threshold value and the time between the first and the last edge of the burst is returned EN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 329 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control Command Reference CURSor lt m gt TRACking STATe lt State gt If set to ON the V Marker cursor measurement is enabled Suffix lt m gt 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF CURSor lt m gt X1Position lt Xposition1 gt CURSor lt m gt X2Position lt Xposition2 gt CURSor lt m gt X3Position lt Xposition3 gt The commands specify the x positions of vertical cursor lines on the time axis The third cursor is only used for Ratio X measurement Suffix lt m gt 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Parameters lt Position gt Range Depends on horizontal settings CURSor lt m gt Y1Position lt Yposition1 gt CURSor lt m gt Y 2Position lt Ypos
353. ger PATTern WIDTh WIDTh if SEARch TRIGger PATTern WIDTh RANGe is set to WITHin or OUTSide Parameters lt DeltaTime gt Default unit s 15 2 12 9 Search Results SEARch RESDiagram SHOW EE 372 SEARSIERESUIEAEES iiiiii incedo a hasRR ea deste facets shaaatseddvbasnaeadcanaeanatessacadswadendes 373 SUSY Boag EE 373 SEET EE 374 SEARch RESDiagram SHOW lt ResultShow gt Shows or hides the table of search results Parameters lt ResultShow gt ON OFF RST OFF Example chapter 15 3 2 1 Searching for a Pulse of Specified Width on page 460 Firmware Software FW 03 400 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 372 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control m uer Command Reference SEARCh RESUICALL Returns all result values of the search Return values lt AllResults gt List of results items seperated by comma For each result six values are returned 1 Result number as indicated in the search results table 2 X position time of the search result 3 Y position of the search result currently not relevant 4 Type of the search result Edge Peak 5 Slope or polarity of the search result 6 For peak searches the value contains the peak voltage For width searches it contains the pulse width For edge searches the value is not relevant Example SEARch RESult ALL Returns all four results
354. gger gt Trigger type Protocol CAN gt Setup User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 186 R amp S9RTM20xx Protocol Analysis CAN Option R amp S RTM K3 EEGEN ENEE ud etus CEU Ee 187 Ere of TING EE 187 Frame EE 187 Ge EE 187 GE EE 188 ro EE 188 i o EE 188 GR of PN la 188 is c 188 EE d NND TRES 188 CR MC MEE 188 A AA 188 Eeer 189 eur EE 189 MM ON EE 189 Ee aaa A A 189 L Identifier Setup 189 Li c EEN 190 SA AR TT 190 A dena 190 A A A 190 2 A 190 L2 1 f vnum 190 eg and alg usi eter rer eter ere etie rrr retener das rre eee er exec v E RET 190 L Data Setup 190 Es i ur NORTE 191 Start of frame Triggers on the first edge of the dominant SOF bit synchronization bit Remote command TRIGger A CAN TYPE on page 407 STOFrame End of frame Triggers on the end of the frame 7 recessive bits Remote command TRIGger A CAN TYPE on page 407 EOFrame Frame type Selects the frame type to be triggered on The selected frame type is indicated in the softkey name Remote command TRIGger A CAN TYPE on page 407 FTYPe TRIGger A CAN FTYPe on page 408 Error Frame type An error frame is sent by a node that has detected an error User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 187 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis CAN Option R amp S RTM K3 Overload Frame type An overload frame is sent by a node that needs a delay between data and or remote fr
355. gh the list of available source channels Remote command DISPlay XY ZSOurce on page 316 Z Intensity Z Setup Toggles between intensity modes E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 65 R amp S RTM20xx Display 4 3 O Zoom Modulation Modulated intensity Intensity is modulated continuously according to the selected Source Z On Off Intensity is determined by a Threshold value If the Z signal value is below the selected threshold the corresponding x y point is displayed with lowest intensity If the Z signal value is above the threshold the x y point is displayed with the defined intensity level Remote command DISPlay XY ZMODe on page 316 Threshold Z Setup Defines the threshold for intensity with a two state modulation if Z Intensity is set to ON OFF Remote command DISPlay XY ZTHReshold on page 316 Zoom You can zoom into waveforms to analyze the results in more detail The zoomed area and its position can be configured numerically or using the rotary knobs Using Markers You can use markers to quickly zoom into a place of interest in the display see To zoom into a marker position on page 72 4 3 1 Zoom Display When you activate zoom display two windows are displayed the original waveform dia gram at the top Y t window and the zoom window at the bottom The zoom area defines the part of the original waveform to be zoomed It is indicated by white lines in the origi
356. gn of the result is taken from Operand1 Use this operation in combination with the Reciprocal or Division operation to limit the maximal amplitudes of an operand Example Operand1 is a MATH waveform within the range of 10V Operand2 is a constant value of 1V The result is always smaller than 1V or larger than 1V Op1 Op1 Squares the operand If the operand contains negative values that have been clipped then the result contains positive clipping Square Root Op1 Calculates the square root of the operand Note that the square root of a negative number is undefined and the result is clipped RU e Calculates the absolute value of the operand All negative values are inverted to positive values The positive values remain unmodified If the operand has negative values that have been clipped the result contains positive clipping Max Op1 0 Extracts the positive data points from the operand For all negative val ues the result is zero The positive values remain unmodified gt 105 R amp S RTM20xx Neg Wave Reciprocal Inverse Common Log Natural Log Mathematics Reference for Mathematics Min Op1 0 Extracts the negative data points from the operand For all positive val ues the result is zero The negative values remain unmodified 1V Op1 Divides 1V by the operand values For small operand amplitudes the result increases quickly If the oper and cr
357. gt SSPI BORDer lt BitOrder gt Defines if the data of the messages starts with MSB most significant bit or LSB least significant bit Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines ERA e e 1 L LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLAAL7U LULA User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 387 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control 15 2 13 4 Command Reference Parameters lt BitOrder gt MSBFirst LSBFirst RST MSBFirst BUS lt b gt SSPI SSIZe lt SymbolSize gt Sets the word length the number of bits in a message Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Parameters lt SymbolSize gt Range 4 to 32 Increment 1 RST 8 Default unit Bit CHANnel lt m gt THReshold FINDlevel Executes the analysis of all analog channels that are configured for the selected bus and sets the threshold for digitization of analog signals for each channel Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Usage Event PC The Inter Integrated Circuit is a simple lowbandwidth low speed protocol used for com munication between on board devices for example in LCD and LED drivers RAM EEPROM and others Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines bus 1 and 2 or bus 3 and 4 If one of these buses is configured the number of buses suffix b is reduced Bus 2 an
358. h the probe bandwidth should exceed the bandwidth of the oscilloscope the recommended factor is 1 5 x oscilloscope bandwidth See also chapter 2 1 4 1 Voltage Probes on page 16 Sampling and Acquisition The vertical system of a digital oscilloscope conditions the test signal in a way that the following A D Converter ADC can transform the measured voltage into digital data User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 12 R amp S RTM20xx Acquisition and Waveform Setup Se Basics 2 1 2 1 Sampling and Processing The A D converter samples the continuous signal under test at specific points in time and delivers digital values called ADC samples The rate at which the converter is working is the ADC sample rate a constant value usually specified in GHz fapc 1 T Waveform A y y L 1 1 1 1 ee jJ a Sample Interval T The digital ADC samples are processed according to the acquisition settings The result is a waveform record that contains waveform samples and is stored in the waveform memory The waveform samples are displayed on the screen and build up the waveform The number of waveform samples in one waveform record is called record length and the rate of recording waveform samples the number of waveform samples per second is the sample rate The higher the sample rate the better is the resolution and the more details of the waveform are visible A sufficient resolution is essential for correct reconstruction o
359. he B trigger Parameters lt Slope gt POSitive NEGative EITHer RST POSitive TRIGger B LEVel Level Sets the trigger level for the B trigger event p S e a User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 312 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BREET Command Reference Parameters lt Level gt RST 0 Default unit V TRIGger B FINDlevel Sets the trigger level of the B trigger event to 50 of the signal amplitude Usage Event TRIGger B MODE lt Mode gt Defines the delay type of the B trigger Parameters lt Mode gt DELay EVENts DELay Time delay set with TRIGger B DELay EVENts Event count delay set with TRIGger B EVENt COUNt RST DELay TRIGger B DELay lt DelayTime gt Sets the time the instrument waits after an A event until it recognizes B events Before setting the dalay time TRIGger B MODE must be set to DELAy Parameters lt DelayTime gt Range 2 00E 008 to 6 87 Increment Depends on the lt DelayTime gt value The longer the lt DelayTime gt the longer is the increment value RST 2 00E 008 Default unit s TRIGger B EVENt COUNt lt EventCnt gt Sets a number of B trigger events that fulfill all B trigger conditions but do not cause the trigger The oscilloscope triggers on the n th event the last of the specified number of events Before
360. he bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Return values lt FrameCount gt Total number of decoded frames User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 381 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control ee ss ee ee Command Reference Usage Query only BUS lt b gt SPI FRAME lt n gt STATus Returns the overall state of the specified frame Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines lt n gt T Selects the frame Return values Status OK INCFirst INCLast INSufficient INCFirst First frame is incomplete INCLast Last frame is incomplete Usage Query only BUS lt b gt SPI FRAME lt n gt STARt Returns the start time of the specified frame Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines lt n gt Selects the frame Return values lt StartTime gt Range depends on sample rate record length and time base Increment depends on the time base Default unit s Usage Query only BUS lt b gt SPI FRAME lt n gt STOP Returns the end time of the specified frame Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines ERREUR RU EE E m SSSR User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 382 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control lt n gt Return values lt StopTime gt Usage Command Reference Selects the frame Range depends on sample rate
361. he complete displayed waveform of the selected channel RMS RMS Root Mean Square value of the voltage of the complete displayed waveform of the selected channel RTIMe FTIMe User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 337 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BESSERES Command Reference Rise or falling time of the left most rising edge within the displayed section of the waveform of the selected channel The reference level for this mesurement is set with REFLevel RELative MODE PDCycle NDCycle Measure the positive or negative duty cycle PPWidth NPWidth Measure the width of positive or negative pulses CYCMean Mean value of the left most signal period of the waveform of the selected channel CYCRms RMS Root Mean Square value of the voltage of the left most signal period of the waveform of the selected channel STDDev Measures the standard deviation of the waveform CYCStddev Measures the standard deviation of one cycle usually of the first left most signal period TFRequency TPERiode Measure the frequency of the trigger signal and the length of the its periods hardware counter DELay Time difference between two edges of the same or different wave forms The waveforms are selected with MEASurement lt m gt SOURce and the edges with MEASurement lt m gt DELay SLOPe PHASe Phase difference between two waveforms time difference period 860 The waveforms are selected with MEASurement lt m gt SOURce B
362. he fundamental procedures for setting up the acquisition and adjusting the channel waveforms Passive probes Passive probes require compensation for exact signal display and measurement The compensation procedure is described in the Getting Started manual 2 2 1 Setting Up the Signal Input with Autoset Autoset is the solution for the major part of routine test setup It is also a good start if you need to use more complex trigger settings Autoset finds appropriate horizontal and ver tical scales and trigger conditions to present a stable waveform 1 Connect the probe to the input connector CH N The instrument recognizes the probe and turns the channel on 2 Press the AUTOSET button on the left of the display 2 2 2 Adjusting the Signal Input Manually The settings mentioned here are described in detail in e chapter 2 3 1 HORIZONTAL Controls on page 22 chapter 2 3 3 2 Channel Menu on page 29 chapter 2 3 3 1 VERTICAL Controls on page 27 1 Connect the probe to the input connector CH N The instrument recognizes the probe and turns the channel on 2 Usethe SCALE rotary knob in the HORIZONTAL area of the front panel to set up the time base 3 Use the POSITION rotary knob to set up the trigger position Press the knob to reset the trigger offset to O s 4 Press the channel key corresponding to the input channel It is lighted with the color of the channel waveform 5 In the softkey menu press the C
363. he pattern state changes exactly at Time t if Variation At 0 If Variation 0 this setting triggers within the range t At User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 49 R amp S RTM20xx Triggers EH Reference for Triggers tet Triggers on pattern state durations unequal to the Time t if Varia tion At 0 If Variation 0 this setting triggers outside a range t At Inside Out Triggers on pattern state durations inside or outside a range specified side with Time t1 and Time t2 This method is an alternative setting to the range definition with Time t and Variation The values are interdependent Variation and Time t are adjusted If you change t1 and t2 and vice versa Timeout Defines how long the result of the pattern condition must be true The instrument triggers at Time t Remote command TRIGger A PATTern WIDTh RANGe on page 310 TRIGger A PATTern MODE on page 309 Time t Sets the reference time the nominal value for comparisons ti t ti gt t ti t ti t and timeout Remote command TRIGger A PATTern WIDTh WIDTh on page 310 Time t1 Time t2 Set the lower and upper time limits defining the time range if Inside or Outside is set for comparison Time t and Variation are adjusted accordingly Variation Sets a range At to the reference Time t if comparison is set to ti t or ti t The instrument triggers on pulses inside or outside the range ti At Remote command TRIGger A
364. he search functionality you can find various events in the decoded data the same events which you also can trigger on Before you can start the search you have to con figure the bus correctly and acquire decoded data To search on decoded data use the search type Protocol The source is automatically set to the configured protocol See also chapter 10 Search on page 132 11 6 6 1 LIN Search Setup Protocol Vivo 0 EVER Error Setup eS ID Identifier Y Back User defined defined Setup A N ce Event Sets the event or combination of events to be searched for Depending on the selected event the appropriate settings in the softkey menu are activated Remote command SEARch PROTocol LIN CONDition on page 432 Frame Setup Selects the frame type to be searched for Start of frame or wakeup frame LEE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 205 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis LIN Option R amp S RTM K3 The setting is only available if Event Frame is selected Remote command SEARch PROTocol LIN FRAMe on page 432 Error Setup Selects the error type to be searched for You can select one or more error types as search condition The error types are the same as in the LIN trigger setup see Error lt type gt on page 200 The setting is only available if Event Error or ID amp Error is selected Remote command SEARch PROTocol LIN CHKSerror on page 433 SEARch PROTocol LIN IPERro
365. hysteresis range to the level of the selected source channel in order to avoid unwanted search results caused by noise oscillation around the level For a rising edge the hysteresis is below the search level Otherwise for a falling edge the hysteresis is above the level Remote command SEARch TRIGger PATTern LEVel lt n gt DELTa on page 371 N User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 144 R amp S RTM20xx Search REESEN Reference for Search Menu 10 3 8 2 Pattern Setup Access SEARCH MENU gt Search type Pattern gt Setup For pattern search up to four channels can be used as source For each channel you define the state The states are combined logically and the time of true pattern results is compared with a specified time range Thus you can find state transitions inside or outside this time range Search setup Pattern CH1 Source Selects the channel for which the pattern search is defined Remote command SEARch TRIGger PATTern SOURce on page 370 E state of the selected source channel The states are H High the signal voltage is higher than the threshold level L Low the signal voltage is lower than the threshold level X Don t care the channel does not affect the search Remote command SEARch TRIGger PATTern SOURce on page 370 Combination Sets the logical combination of the channel states AND The required states of all channels must appear in the input signal at
366. iOri iino ecce eoa iiio Pede 11 12 Resource string LAN 4i tci ii 247 Results EE BE 122 Ke WEE 147 ISelicle EE 61 Rise Fall Time o EE Rise time E Di MC P RMS Cycle RMS Vall ioci ict cetus exer ee o ed eser eiu vetet tione FROM MODS E 26 RS232 DASS ereechen a 175 SA Che el WEE 39 RUN NX SINGLE 2 rrt reete eene reor 39 Runt Ee WEE 141 S Sample Mode oet reete eren rentre einn Sample modes Sample rate EI cm Save MO REESE 220 REMOTE RR RM C 449 cc 221 Save Recall references coccccccnncoconcnnnccononono nono eese 76 Save tege R 130 Saving data tO a file 5 oie eire 223 Device settings iret ENEE EEN 225 equation sets ss TUNG MANNS coincidir Te Screenshots is Waveforms coooooocccncnnncncccccnonnnonnncnnncncncncnanannnnn nono nnnnos Scale Digital channels avoir dins hee hen e de 211 horizontal ee 23 Verla m 29 ucl 11 SCPI Eu 254 syntax Se MONSION E 241 SCPI compliant commands eese 249 Screen amp Setup softkey o len e EE Screenshots printing ge A d ae a ea iE SAVING WE softkey es 224 225 231 A A 250 Search CAN sd 194 Data2Clock occconocccocococccncncccnonononononccccnonanonononnnnnnnnos 142 op I perce nas Events
367. ich if not avoided could result in minor or Indicates information considered important but not hazard related e g messages relating to property damage In the product documentation the word ATTENTION is used synonymously These signal words are in accordance with the standard definition for civil applications in the European Economic Area Definitions that deviate from the standard definition may also exist in other economic areas or military applications It is therefore essential to make sure that the signal words described here are always used only in connection with the related product documentation and the related product The use of signal words in connection with unrelated products or documentation can result in misinterpretation and in personal injury or material damage 1171 0000 42 07 Page 2 Basic Safety Instructions Operating states and operating positions The product may be operated only under the operating conditions and in the positions specified by the manufacturer without the product s ventilation being obstructed If the manufacturer s specifications are not observed this can result in electric shock fire and or serious personal injury or death Applicable local or national safety regulations and rules for the prevention of accidents must be observed in all work performed 1 Unless otherwise specified the following requirements apply to Rohde amp Schwarz products predefined operating position is always
368. ifier Defines the identifier pattern The pattern length is defined with TRIGger A CAN ITYPe on page 408 The command is relevant if TRIGger A CAN TYPE is set to ID or IDDT Parameters Identifier String containing binary pattern with max 29 bit Characters 0 1 and X are allowed TRIGger A CAN DLC lt DataLength gt Defines the length of the data pattern the number of bytes in the pattern The command is relevant if TRIGger A CAN TYPE is set to IDDT Parameters lt DataLength gt Range 0 to 8 Increment 1 RST 1 Default unit Byte TRIGger A CAN DCONdition lt DataCondition gt Sets the comparison condition for data If the pattern contains at least one X don t care you can trigger on values equal or not equal to the specified value If the pattern contains only 0 and 1 you can also trigger on a range greater than or lower than the specified value The command is relevant if TRIGger A CAN TYPE is set to IDDT Parameters lt DataCondition gt EQUaI NEQual GTHan LTHan RST EQ User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 409 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control EE Command Reference TRIGger A CAN DATA lt Data gt Defines the data pattern The number of bytes in the data pattern is defined with TRiGger A CAN DLC The command is relevant if TRIGger A CAN TYPE is set to IDDT Parameters lt Data gt String containing binary pattern with max 64 bit Characters 0 1 and X are allowed
369. iguration BUSCAN DATA SOURCE EE 406 BUSS CAN TYP EE 406 DUlS cbs CAN SAMblepont eee ee eee ee kannun nakadar heh nnn esent nnns nsns aaan anaana 406 BUS Sb gt NEE 407 GHANnelsm THReshokbFINDlevel 2 DESEN Z NEEN eene ro eiae oe e aeaa REE aE Eai 407 BUS lt b gt CAN DATA SOURce Source Sets the source of the data line All channel waveforms can be used Suffix b 1 4 Selects the bus Parameters lt Source gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CHA DO D15 RST CH1 BUS lt b gt CAN TYPE lt SignalType gt Selects the CAN High or CAN Low line CAN uses both lines for differential signal trans mission If you measure with a differential probe connect the probe to both CAN H and CAN L lines and set the type CANH If you use a single ended probe connect the probe to either CAN_L or CAN H and select the data type accordingly Suffix b 1 4 Selects the bus Parameters lt SignalType gt CANH CANL RST CANH BUS lt b gt CAN SAMPlepoint lt SamplePoint gt Sets the position of the sample point within the bit in percent of the nominal bit time See also Sample point on page 186 Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 406 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control EELENMENLUGCCORMMCRSUNA A n P Command Reference Parameters lt SamplePoint gt Range
370. ii A A id 429 BUS lt b gt LIN FRAMe Si gt STAR ainia a 427 BUS lt bZ lr RE UE 427 SE lt Be Een 427 UUU User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 464 R amp S RTM20xx List of Commands BUSsb LIN FRAMesn SYSTate eerte htt tmt det 429 SR BR WEE 430 EE lr Ree RE 430 BUS lt b gt LINPOL assumed a 422 SISSE SB ESSI EE 422 BUSSO E 376 EE BLR 376 BUSsb gt PARallel ELE 439 BUS lt b gt PARallel FRAMe lt N gt DATAR coccion era 439 BUSsb PARallel FRAMesn S EE 440 BUS lt b gt PARallel FRAMe lt n gt STAT c cece ce seeeccnceecenseeeseeseesseaseessedseaeseesseaseenseeseedseeaseaseesseusneseeuaaas 440 BU Ssb PARallel FRAMesn 9 TOP2 tait crt gue 440 BUSsb PARallel WIE Th tritt rtr ten e dne n mee cane n en beca fa 437 BUS lt D gt Te m a a a a td ade Se LEE BUS lt b gt SPI BORDer BUSSb SPECLOCKPO Lal cnc dt di 378 BUS lt b gt SPCLOCK e 378 BUS lt b gt SPLES POLANY er 377 BUS lt b gt SP LOS SOURCE sc iii iaa 377 BUS lt b gt SPEDATA POL MV recte en il Ee ecu cre destaca 379 BUS lt b gt SPI DATA SOURCE sucia EEN 378 SS 381 BUS lt b gt SPLFRAMESA gt SDATAMISOS oi s 383 BUS lt b gt SPI FRAME lt n gt DATA MOSI BUSSb SPEERAMESn S TARE caida dt id Oecd deed Seet n ees dre de ee idt 382 BUSsb SPEFRAMEri S LATUS cutn ut tr tite ide errar islas 382 BUS lt bD gt SPLFRAMEST gt TOP Didi IA N E EENS 382 B S b SPEFRAMEs
371. ing and Using FFT Calculations Section and the FFT frequency range FFT Control by pressing the horizontal SCALE rotary knob The currently selected screen element is highlighted and displayed in the information bar Depending on the selection the functions of the SCALE and POSITION rotary knobs may change o Move the focus between the Y t window Time Control the FFT time base extract Time The usual channel parameters are displayed in the information bar above the Y t window see the general display information described in the Getting Started manual In addition FFT specific parameters are indicated in the information bar above the FFT window The following information is given there W 450 us P 118 us Span 10 MHz Center 2 5 MHz 12 5MSais Envelope CH1 20 mV 1 2 3 4 Description Setting 1 Width of the time base extract for which FFT is calculated YT Window 2 Position of time base extract Position 3 Width of the displayed frequency range Span 4 Center of the displayed frequency range Center 5 Sample rate for FFT calculation 6 FFT result mode Waveform Arithmetic 7 Signal source and vertical scaling factor per division CH1 CH4 Y Scale Y Scaling 8 Focus of the horizontal SCALE knob Press SCALE When you deactivate the FFT display the previous display is restored 8 2 Configuring and Using FFT Calculations e Seng Up De FFT Analysis uei aseo a ado aoro eer etate hes 1
372. ings and information on the instrument status LAN Interface Messages In the LAN connection the interface messages are called low level control messages These messages can be used to emulate interface messages of the GPIB bus Command Long term Effect on the instrument amp ABO Abort Aborts processing of the commands just received amp DCL Device Clear Aborts processing of the commands just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state Does not change the instrument setting amp GTL Go to Local Transition to the local state manual control amp GTR Go to Remote Transition to the remote state remote control amp GET Group Execute Trigger Triggers a previously active instrument function e g a sweep The effect of the command is the same as with that of a pulse at the external trigger signal input amp LLO Local Lockout Disables switchover from remote control to manual control by means of the front panel keys p s s 8 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 249 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control Basics Command Long term Effect on the instrument amp NREN Not Remote Enable Enables switchover from remote control to manual opera tion by means of the front panel keys amp POL Serial Poll Starts a serial poll GPIB Inter
373. ings may be necessary to highlight that aspect in the display The waveform display depends on the following criteria e Waveform style dots or line e Intensity adjusts the optimal contrast of the display Three settings can be changed to improve the contrast for the relevant display ele ments The intensity of the waveform determines the strength of the signal in the diagram The intensity of the background lighting determines the contrast of the signal The intensity of the grid has an influence on the readability of the signal LEE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 54 R amp S RTM20xx Display RO EHEEE E d General Display Settings e Persistence defines how long a data point is displayed in the diagram Each new data point remains on the screen for the defined persistence time or infinitely until the persistence time is changed or the persistence is cleared e Signal colors or brightness depend on on the cumulative frequency of the values By default values that occur frequently are displayed brighter than rare values Alter natively the brightness level can be converted to a color range i e the color changes gradually with increasing cumulative occurance It is also possible to invert the brightness display so that rare values are brighter than frequent values This setting is useful in combination with persistence to detect rare values within the waveform 4 1
374. ion as well as all available update versions are displayed 7 Press Execute to start the firmware update To update the interface firmware 1 Insert a USB flash drive containing an interface update file in the instrument E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 233 R amp S RTM20xx General Instrument Setup EH Reference for Setup 2 Press SETUP gt Update gt Interface The currently installed firmware version as well as all available update versions are displayed 3 Press Execute to install the available updates 14 1 2 Activating Options You need the material number and serial number of your instrument to get a license key New R amp S RTM options must be activated using the license key supplied by Rohde amp Schwarz The license key can be read from a license file or entered manually A detailed description of the key activation procedure is delivered together with the license key information 14 2 Reference for Setup The SETUP key provides functions for basic instrument settings and allows you to update the instrument s firmware and help files TMe RONCE EE 235 MENW ON EU dE aaa 235 AAG WAG EE 236 DASS NEE 236 L Year Month Day Hour Minute e cese tenentes 236 TRISTIS een eeler le e E 236 LOS EE 236 e EE 236 ie 236 S TT EES 237 A EE 237 4 TEE 237 E VEER 237 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 234 R amp S RTM20xx General Instrument Setup L a a Reference for Setup
375. ion gt FRAMe ERRor IDENtifier IDData IDERror FRAMe Search for a frame type Set the frame type with SEARch PROTocol CAN FRAMe ERRor Search for errors of one or more error types Set the error types with SEARch PROTocol CAN ACKerror SEARch PROTocol CAN BITSterror SEARch PROTocol CAN CRCerror and SEARch PROTocol CAN FORMerror IDENtifier Search for identifier Specifiy the identifier with SEARch PROTocol CAN FTYPe SEARch PROTocol CAN ITYPe SEARch PROTocol CAN ICONdition and SEARch PROTocol CAN IDENtifier IDData Search for identifier and data Set the identifier see IDENtifier and the data with SEARch PROTocol CAN DLENgth SEARch PROTocol CAN DCONdition and SEARch PROTocol CAN DATA IDERror Search for errors that occur with a specified identifier Set the identifier see IDENtifier and the errors to be found see ERRor RST FRAM SEARch PROTocol CAN FRAMe lt Frame gt Selects the frame type to be searched for The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol CAN CONDition is set to FRAMe User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 418 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BREET Command Reference Parameters lt Frame gt SOF EOF OVERIoad ERRor DTA11 DTA29 REM11 REM29 SOF start of frame EOF end of frame OVERIoad overload frame ERRor error frame DTA11 data frame with 11bit identifier DTA29 data frame with 29bit identifier REM11 remot
376. isition is running The waveform count is set to 0 and all measure ment values are set to NAN Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the measurement place Usage Event Firmware Software FW 03 700 MEASurement lt m gt RESult AVG lt AverageValue gt Returns the average value of the current mesurement series The number of waveforms used for calculation is defined with MEASurement lt m gt STATistics WEIGht Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the measurement place Query parameters lt AverageValue gt Statistic value Usage Query only Firmware Software FW 03 700 MEASurement lt m gt RESult STDDev lt StandardDeviation gt Returns the statistical standard deviation of the current mesurement series The number of waveforms used for calculation is defined with MEASurement lt m gt STATistics WEIGht Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the measurement place Query parameters lt StandardDeviation gt Statistic value Usage Query only Firmware Software FW 03 700 E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 343 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control 5 Command Reference MEASurement lt m gt RESult NPEak lt NegativePeak gt Returns the minimum measurement value of the current measurement series Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the measurement place Query parameters lt NegativePeak gt Minimum measurement value Usage Query only Firmware Software FW 03 700 MEASurement lt m gt RESult PPEak lt PositiveP
377. ition If the pattern contains at least one X don t care you can trigger on values equal or not equal to the specified value If the pattern contains only O and 1 you can also trigger on a range greater than or lower than the specified value Bit Identifier Selects the number of the bit in the pattern for bit by bit input For each selected bit enter the State State Identifier Toggles the logic state of the selected bit O low 1 high or X don t care Byte Identifier Selects the byte for input of the data pattern For each selected byte enter the hexadec imal value or set the State for each selected Bit For the identifier pattern byte selection is not relevant as only the 6 bit identifier without parity bits is considered Value Identifier Sets the hexadecimal value for the selected byte by turning the navigation knob Identifier and data Sets the trigger to a combination of identifier and data condition The instrument triggers at the end of the last byte of the specified data pattern The first key press enables the trigger type the second one opens the Identifier and data menu e M A User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 201 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis LIN Option R amp S RTM K3 Identifier Setup Identifier and data Opens the Identifier
378. ition time used in the hardware If FFT analysis is performed the value can differ from the adjusted acquisition time TIMebase ACOTime Return values lt HWAcqTime gt Range Depends on various settings Default unit s Usage Query only TIMebase ACQTime lt AcquisitionTime gt Defines the time of one acquisition that is the time across the 10 divisions of the diagram Timebase Scale 10 Parameters lt AcquisitionTime gt RST 1 ms Default unit s TIMebase RANGe lt AcquisitionTime gt Defines the time of one acquisition that is the time across the 10 divisions of the diagram Timebase Scale 10 Parameters lt AcquisitionTime gt Range and increment depend on time base and other settings RST 1 ms Default unit s TiMebase DIVisions Queries the number of horizontal divisions on the screen Return values lt HorizDivCount gt Range 10 to 10 Increment 0 RST 10 Default unit div ___ _L_L___ S lt lt 5553 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 283 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control 15 2 4 3 Command Reference Usage Query only TiMebase POSition lt Offset gt Defines the trigger position trigger offset the time interval between trigger point and reference point to analize the signal some time before or after the trigger event See also TIMebase REFerence on page 284 Parameters lt Offset gt Range Depends on time base setting RST 0 Default unit s TiMebase REFerence l
379. ition2 gt CURSor lt m gt Y3Position lt Yposition3 gt The commands specify the positions of horizontal cursor lines on the y axis The third cursor is only used for Ratio Y measurements Suffix lt m gt 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Parameters lt Position gt Range Depends on various other settings CURSor lt m gt YCOupling Coupling CURSor lt m gt XCOupling Coupling If enabled the cursors of a set are coupled so that the distance between the two remains the same if one cursor is moved Suffix lt m gt 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Parameters lt Coupling gt ON OFF RST OFF IESSE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 330 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BEES Command Reference CURSor lt m gt SWAVe Autoset for cursor lines sets the cursor lines to typical points of the waveform depending on the selected measurement type For example for voltage measurement the cursor lines are set to the upper and lower peaks of the waveform For time measurement the cursor lines are set to the edges of two consecutive positive or two consecutive negative pulses Usage Event Firmware Software FW 03 700 CURSor lt m gt SSCReen Resets the cursors to their initial positions This is helpful if the cursors have disappeared from the display or need to be moved for a larger distance Usage Event Firmware Software FW 03 700 CURSor lt m gt SPPeak For FFT analysis only sets the selected curs
380. itions This is the case for example when strong temperature changes occur Start Self Alignment Starts the internal self calibration of the instrument Status information is displayed on the screen Abort Self Alignment Aborts the internal self calibration of the instrument Log File Self Alignment The log file records the results of the self alignment You can set et the extend of the log file and export it No Log File No log file is written Standard Log Default logging File Extended Log Complete log results are written File Export Opens the submenu to store the log file on USB stick See also Storage Directory Menu on page 221 Probe Adjust A R amp S RTM allows you to adjust a probe without further devices Two connector pins are located on the front panel The left pin is on ground level The right pin supplies a square wave signal for the adjustment In this menu you can choose between two frequencies 1 kHz 1 MHz or allow the detection of an automatic setting by the instrument The rise time does not differ between the settings 1kHz Probe Adjust A square wave with a frequency of f 1 kHz is generated at the Probe Adjust pin Use this setting to adjust the LF band of the probe 1MHz Probe Adjust A square wave with a frequency of f 1 MHz is generated at the Probe Adjust pin Use this setting to adjust the HF band of the probe EN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 239 R amp S
381. its in decimal representation ALIGnment bit 0 SELFtest bit 1 AUToset bit 2 WTRigger bit 3 Range 1 to 65535 Increment 1 Usage Query only STATus OPERation ENABle lt Enable gt Parameters lt Enable gt Range 1 to 65535 Increment 1 STATus OPERation NTRansition lt NegativeTransition gt Parameters lt NegativeTransition gt Range 1 to 65535 Increment 1 STATus OPERation PTRansition lt PositiveTransition gt Parameters lt PositiveTransition gt Range 1 to 65535 Increment 1 STATus OPERation EVENt Return values lt Event gt Range 1 to 65535 Increment 1 Usage Query only User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 454 Command Reference 15 2 17 2 STATus QUEStionable Registers The commands of the STATus QUEStionable subsystem control the status reporting structures of the STATus QUEStionable registers 0 0 TEMP WARN 1 1 TEMP ERRor 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 STATus QUEStionable Cp STAT QUES TEMP COVerload TEMPerature NOALigndata LIMit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 Fig 15 4 Structure of the STATus QUEStionable register See also e chapter 15 1 6 1 Structure of a SCPI Status Register on page 262 e STATus QUEStionable Register on page 267 The following commands are available STATUS PRE SO TM 456 STATUS QUESHOMADIESCON DINO KEE 456 STATus OUEGuonable COVerload CONDiton esee 456 STATus OUEGnonable LIMt CONDtton senses nnne enean is 456
382. itted in this case Example HCOP ITEM ALL HCOP IMM This command line is represented in its full length and contains two commands separated from each other by the semicolon Both commands are part of the HCOP command sys tem i e they have one level in common When abbreviating the command line the second command begins with the level below HCOP The colon after the semicolon is omitted The abbreviated form of the command line reads as follows HCOP ITEM ALL IMM However a new command line always begins with the complete path Example EHCOP ITEM ALL HCOP IMM Responses to Queries A query is defined for each setting command unless explicitly specified otherwise It is formed by adding a question mark to the associated setting command According to SCPI the responses to queries are partly subject to stricter rules than in standard IEEE 488 2 e The requested parameter is transmitted without a header Example HCOP PAGE ORI Response LAND e Maximum values minimum values and all other quantities that are requested via a special text parameter are returned as numeric values Example SENSe FREQuency STOP MAX Response 3 5E9 e Numeric values are output without a unit Physical quantities are referred to the basic units or to the units set using the Unit command The response 3 5E9 in the pre vious example stands for 3 5 GHz e Truth values Boolean values are returned as 0 for OFF
383. ivides the nominal bit period into two distinct time segments which are used for resynchronization of the clock Nominal bit time Sample point 70 96 The CAN bus interface uses an asynchronous transmission scheme The standard specifies a set of rules to resynchronize the local clock of a CAN node to the message Remote command BUS b CAN SAMPlepoint on page 406 Bit rate Sets the number of transmitted bits per second The maximum bit rate for High Speed CAN is 1 Mbit s The bit rate is uniform and fixed for a given CAN bus To select a bit rate from the list of predefined values set Bit rate to Defined Bit Rate and then select the value with Predefined To set another value set Bit rate to User Bit Rate and then enter the value with User Remote command BUS b CAN BITRate on page 407 Find Level The instrument analyzes all lines that are configured for the selected bus and sets the threshold for digitization of analog signals for each channel If no level can be found the existing value remains unchanged and you can set the thresholds manually in the chan nel menu CH N gt More page 2 gt Threshold See Threshold on page 31 Find Level is not relevant for digital channels MSO option R amp S RTM B1 Thresholds for digital channels are set in the Logic Threshold menu Remote command CHANnel m THReshold FINDlevel on page 379 11 5 2 CAN Trigger Settings Access SETUP Tri
384. k limits in relation to the mask center Range 0 to 10 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit div User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 356 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control m mne Command Reference MASK COUNt Returns the number of tested acquisitions Return values lt TotalCount gt Total number of tested acquisitions Usage Query only MASK VCOunt Returns the number of acquistions that hit the mask Return values lt ViolationCount gt Acquisition count Usage Query only MASK RESet COUNter Sets the counters of passed and failed acquisitions to Zero Usage Event Firmware Software FW 03 800 MASK ACTion SOUNd EVENt MODE lt EventMode gt MASK ACTion STOP EVENt MODE lt EventMode gt MASK ACTion SCRSave EVENt MODE lt EventMode gt MASK ACTion PRINt EVENt MODE lt EventMode gt MASK ACTion WFMSave EVENt MODE lt EventMode gt Defines when and how often the action will be executed e SOUNd Generates a beep sound e STOP Stops the waveform acquisition e PRINt Prints a screenshot to a printer connected to the USB connector on the front or rear panel e SCRSave Saves a screenshot according to printer output settings e WFMSave Saves the waveform data according to the screenshot output settings For output settings see chapter 15 2 15 1 Screenshots on page 441 EES User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 357 R amp S RTM20xx Remote
385. king with these functions see chapter 7 1 Configuring and Using Math Waveforms on page 98 7 Ss ya N Equation Visible Unit Edit Eq Set Label Save Load E xli EE 102 leiere 102 ULT EE 102 Edit Ee 103 A A AAE 103 Ge A 103 OO Li cai 107 O 108 L Ger 108 ee EE 108 A 108 L Decimal Pot is 108 Pri vlastlvanlucdadiisnaibetubcaduudent Cute Dae uud 108 A OOC Y 109 Eco V 109 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 101 R amp S RTM20xx Mathematics SE a Reference for Mathematics e EG 109 BG eet EADS TEE 109 EE 109 LO AG BEE 109 Equation Selects one of five possible mathematical channels Visible Defines whether the selected mathematical waveform is displayed on the display or not Note MA5 cannot be displayed it is always invisible Remote command CALCulate MATH m STATe on page 345 Unit Defines the unit of the equation results The selected unit only has an effect on the dis played unit not on the size of the values The following units are available V Volts A Amperes Q Ohms S Siemens V A Volts per Ampere W Watts active power VA Voltamps apparent power VAr Voltamps reactive power Vs Volt seconds Weber unit of magnetic flux V s Volts per second dB decibels dBm dB referred to 1 mW dBV dB referred to 1 V dByV dB referred to 1 uV s Second 1 s Hz Hertz S DIV F Farad H Henry
386. l Modulation is highlighted to select intensity control via modulation To configure the intensity of an XY waveform using a threshold value Prerequisite The Display Mode is set to XY and the XY diagram is configured 1 Press DISPLAY gt XYZ Setup gt Z Setup 2 Press the left Source Z softkey until ON is highlighted to activate intensity control by the Z source 3 Press the second Source Z softkey repeatedly until the required channel for inten sity control is selected 4 Press Z Intensity until ON OFF is highlighted to select intensity control via a threshold value 5 Press Threshold and enter the required value to define the threshold value 4 2 2 XYZ Setup Menu The setup of XY diagrams is a submenu of the Display menu Access DISPLAY XYZ Setup Source X CH1 Source Y1 Source Y2 Z Setup lt a e Source X Defines the source to be displayed in x direction in an XY diagram replacing the usual time base The source can be selected from any of the analog channels The function is available in R amp S RTM1054 Remote command DISPlay XY XSOurce on page 315 XYZ Setup Source Y1 Defines the first source to be displayed in y direction in an XY diagram The source can be selected from any of the analog channels User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 64 R amp S RTM20xx Display EENEG XY Diagram The function is available in R amp S RTM1054 Remote command DISPlay XY Y
387. l on site and the product s protective conductor must be made first before any other connection is made The product may be installed and connected only by a licensed electrician For permanently installed equipment without built in fuses circuit breakers or similar protective devices the supply circuit must be fuse protected in such a way that anyone who has access to the product as well as the product itself is adequately protected from injury or damage Use suitable overvoltage protection to ensure that no overvoltage such as that caused by a bolt of lightning can reach the product Otherwise the person operating the product will be exposed to the danger of an electric shock Any object that is not designed to be placed in the openings of the housing must not be used for this purpose Doing so can cause short circuits inside the product and or electric shocks fire or injuries Unless specified otherwise products are not liquid proof see also section Operating states and operating positions item 1 Therefore the equipment must be protected against penetration by liquids If the necessary precautions are not taken the user may suffer electric shock or the product itself may be damaged which can also lead to personal injury Never use the product under conditions in which condensation has formed or can form in or on the product e g if the product has been moved from a cold to a warm environment Penetration by water increases the
388. l 1317 4726 02 01 171 R amp S9RTM20xx Protocol Analysis 11 3 4 PC Option R amp S RTM K1 Byte Offset Data Setup Read Write Sets the number of bytes before the first byte of interest relating to the end of the address bytes These offset bytes are ignored Remote command TRIGger A I2C POFFset on page 392 Number of Bytes Data Setup Read Write Sets the number of bytes you want to trigger on Maximum 3 bytes are possible Remote command TRIGger A I2C PLENgth on page 391 Bit Data Setup Read Write Selects the bit number inside the selected bytes for binary pattern input For the selected bit State is to be set the selected bit is highlighted in the Data bit line State Data Setup Read Write Toggles the logic state of the selected bit O low 1 high or X don t care Byte Data Setup Read Write Selects a byte for hex input with Value The selected byte is highlighted in the Data hex line Value Data Setup Read Write Sets the hexadecimal value for the selected byte If the data is not relevant for your trigger condition set all data bytes to OxXX C Label List Label lists are protocol specific An 12C PTT file contains three values for each address e Type address type 7 bit or 10 bit long e ID Addr hexadecimal address value e Symbolic label name of the address specifiing its function in the bus network Example PC PTT file FIL
389. l EE 305 TRIGA EDGE FILT EE 305 TRIGSger A EDGE FILT NREJEGE 2 21 oritur diia dara 305 TRIGger A EDGE SLOPe Slope Sets the slope for the edge trigger A trigger Parameters Slope POSitive NEGative EITHer POSitive Rising edge a positive voltage change NEGative Falling edge a negative voltage change EITHer Rising as well as the falling edge RST POSitive User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 304 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BEES Command Reference TRIGger A EDGE COUPling Coupling Sets the coupling for the trigger source Parameters lt Coupling gt DC AC HF DC Direct Current coupling The trigger signal remains unchanged AC Alternating Current coupling A 5 Hz high pass filter removes the DC offset voltage from the trigger signal HF High frequency coupling A 15 kHz high pass filter removes lower frequencies from the trigger signal Use this mode only with very high frequency signals RST DC TRIGger A EDGE FILTer LPASs lt State gt Turns an additional 5 kHz low pass filter in the trigger path on or off This filter removes higher frequencies and is available with AC and DC coupling Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF TRIGger A EDGE FILTer NREJect State Turns an additional 100 MHz low pass filter in the trigger path on or off This filter removes higher frequencies and is available with AC and DC coupling Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OF
390. l Search Configuration EARS IS TA KEE 359 SEAREMCONDIT ON M 359 SE ebe OUREE irina dana 361 SEARGBIGATEIMODIE EE 361 SEARGITGATE ABSolute S KL CARE 361 SGEARchGATEABGoluteGTOp iis ase tiia siesta sisse sri sse sanis as 361 SEARch STATe lt SearchState gt Enables and disables the search mode Parameters lt SearchState gt ON OFF RST OFF Example chapter 15 3 2 1 Searching for a Pulse of Specified Width on page 460 Firmware Software FW 03 400 SEARch CONDition lt SearchCondition gt Selects the event you want to search for R amp S9RTM20xx Remote Control Parameters lt SearchCondition gt Example Command Reference EDGE WIDTh PEAK RUNT RTIMe DATatoclock PATTern PROTocol EDGE An edge search result is found when the waveform passes the given level in the specified direction WIDTH A width search finds pulses with an exact pulse width or pulses shorter or longer than a given time or pulses inside or outside the allowable time range PEAK The peak search finds pulses exceeding a given amplitude RUNT The runt search finds pulses lower than normal in amplitude The amplitude crosses the first threshold twice without crossing the second one In addition to the threshold amplitudes you can define a time limit for the runt in the same way as for width search runts with exact width shorter or longer than a given time or runts inside or outside the allowable time range RTIM
391. l on page 302 TRIGger B FINDlevel on page 313 SETUP Opens the Trigger menu SOURCE Opens the Trigger Source menu for the A trigger Press the key repeatedly until the required source is selected The key lights up in the color of the selected trigger channel The selected source is shown in the information bar SLOPE If you have selected Edge trigger as trigger type with an analog trigger source the SLOPE key toggles the trigger slope The current setting is shown by an icon in the information bar If a B trigger is enabled the key can set the slope for both the A and B trigger To assign the slope to the A or B trigger use Trigger Level in the Trigger menu Trigger Settings Trigger settings consist of general settings in the Trigger menu and the trigger type specific setup For B trigger setup a separate menu is provided LE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 40 R amp S9RTM20xx Triggers 3 3 2 1 Reference for Triggers e Common Trigger DOTINgS ccoiniociniocconnnccatonennndn doce cert eunte tne nehm he tara ense tiae ra cd 41 Tyigger SOUNCS e E 42 e o5 P t 43 WAU iiie een e reet pi dr d e br ie e et Rr e Ee vea d 45 MEO ELE 46 ME oM 48 e use Ting Tall DIG eege geess egene Ee 50 MEL OL co EM LEE 52 E SOU EET 52 Common Trigger Settings The Trigger menu is general menu for all trigger types and leads to the type specific menus
392. l producto solo debe ser desmontado por personal especializado con formaci n adecuada Un desmontaje inadecuado puede ocasionar dafios para la salud Se deben tener en cuenta las directivas nacionales referentes a la eliminaci n de residuos En caso de que durante el trato del producto se formen sustancias peligrosas o combustibles que deban tratarse como residuos especiales p ej refrigerantes o aceites de motor con intervalos de cambio definidos deben tenerse en cuenta las indicaciones de seguridad del fabricante de dichas sustancias y las normas regionales de eliminaci n de residuos Tenga en cuenta tambi n en caso necesario las indicaciones de seguridad especiales contenidas en la documentaci n del producto La eliminaci n incorrecta de sustancias peligrosas o combustibles puede causar da os a la salud o da os al medio ambiente Se puede encontrar m s informaci n sobre la protecci n del medio ambiente en la p gina web de Rohde amp Schwarz 1171 0000 42 07 Page 14 Customer Support Technical support where and when you need it For quick expert help with any Rohde amp Schwarz equipment contact one of our Customer Support Centers A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone support and will work with you to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the operation programming or applications of Rohde amp Schwarz equipment Up to date information and upgrades To keep your instrument up to date an
393. l value is below the selected threshold the corresponding x y point is not displayed If the Z signal value is above the threshold the x y point is displayed with the defined intensity level To configure the intensity of an XY waveform using a threshold value To configure the intensity of an XY waveform at a defined level Prerequisite The Display Mode is set to XY and the XY diagram is configured 1 2 Press DISPLAY gt XYZ Setup gt Z Setup Press the left Source Z softkey until OFF is highlighted to deactivate intensity control by the Z source Press DISPLAY gt Intensities gt Trace to define the intensity level of the waveform Enter a percentage between 0 not visible and 100 very strong The default value is 50 Regardless of which menu is currently displayed you can use the INTENSITY knob on the left side of the screen to adjust the waveform intensity directly User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 63 R amp S RTM20xx Display XY Diagram To configure the intensity of an XY waveform modulated by a signal amplitude Prerequisite The Display Mode is set to XY and the XY diagram is configured 1 Press DISPLAY gt XYZ Setup gt Z Setup 2 Press the left Source Z softkey until ON is highlighted to activate intensity control by the Z source 3 Press the second Source Z softkey repeatedly until the required channel for inten sity control is selected 4 Press Z Intensity unti
394. le with the same file name already exists in the destination directory it will be overwritten without notification If you want to change the file format for references or masks press Format and select the target format Press Import Export The source file is copied to the destination directory Imported data is not loaded to the instrument automatically You must explicitly load it after import with the Load function in the relevant menu Masks Reference Math menu or File menu for instrument settings SS ST User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 219 R amp S RTM20xx Data and File Management Ech Saving and Loading 13 2 1 3 General Storage Settings This chapter describes the general settings to save load and export import data Save IURE 220 QE EI OT 221 e Storage Directory Meri eine ania ani 221 e Import EXport Men ina ENEE nnd EE 222 Save Menu The Save menu provides functions to configure how the data is saved and to start the save process Its main functions are displayed whenever some data has to be stored Depending on the data type additional specific functions may be provided These func tions are described in the relevant chapters File Name Comment Save LJ NA EEE EE 220 SERE ANTERIOR TEM 220 COR OD ee o ette eee eee Lee eee eee oeste eere eee eee semet Ee Td 220 LIU MICE 221 Storage Opens the storage directory submenu see Storage Directory Menu on page 221 File name Opens
395. lected bit O low 1 high or X don t care Select Nibble Ser Pattern Selects four bits half byte for hexadecimal entry with Value The selected nibble is highlighted in the lower pattern line Value Ser Pattern Sets the hexadecimal value for the selected nibble SPI SSPI Decode Results You can enable the decoding in the Protocol main menu Decode shows the decoded values below the waveforms in the format selected with Display Additionally you can display the binary signal with Bits See also chapter 11 1 2 Protocol Common Settings on page 149 SS we User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 162 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis SPI SSPI Bus Option R amp S RTM K1 TB 50us T 0s Auto SPI Frame Start 208 33MSais Real Time Complete SB 2 ge e e M M EM ID RA ep ve we en es em e ep ee 2 em Protocol Display i Position Fig 11 2 Decoded SPI signal C1 Clock Clk C2 Data C3 Chip Select Cs blue results completely decoded words grey brackets start and end of complete frame red results Incomplete word that is not completely contained in the acquisition Change the horizontal Scale or move the Time Reference to get a longer acquisition Additionally you can display and save a Frame Table containing decoded data frame number start time of the frame source line data and state of the frame See also chapter 11 1 5 Frame Table Decode Results on page 154
396. lected slope Remote command TRIGger A LEVel n RISetime LOWer on page 311 Comparison Selects how the time limit for the slew rate is defined The time measurement starts when the signal crosses the first trigger level the upper or lower level depending on the selected slope and stops when the signal crosses the second level Greater than Triggers on transition times longer than the given Rise Time Lower than Triggers on transition times shorter than the given Rise Time Equal Triggers on transition times inside the time range Rise Time Varia tion Not equal Triggers on transition times outside the time range Rise Time Varia tion Remote command TRIGger A RISetime RANGe on page 311 Rise Time For the comparisons Greater than and Lower than the setting defines the minimum and maximum transition time limits respectively For the comparisons Equal and Not equal the setting defines the center of a range which is defined by Variation Remote command TRIGger A RISetime TIME on page 311 Variation Defines a time range around the given Rise Time value Remote command TRIGger A RISetime DELTa on page 312 EEUU RA EE SSS User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 51 R amp S RTM20xx Triggers ee UiM SS eee Reference for Triggers 3 3 2 8 Protocol The Protocol trigger menu contains the trigger settings for the serial bus or interface that is configured with PROTOCOL Protocol analy
397. ling edge the hysteresis is above the level Remote command SEARch TRIGger EDGE LEVel DELTa on page 362 10 3 3 Width Setup Access SEARCH MENU gt Search type Width gt Setup a Level C gt Width Variation kl Back Positive _ oo sam C Ewa O RECH 99ms Esosoms Eos Polarity Indicates the polarity of the pulse to be searched for Remote command SEARch TRIGger WIDTh POLarity on page 362 Level Sets the voltage level on which the pulse width is measured Remote command SEARch TRIGger WIDTh LEVel on page 363 Hysteresis Sets a hysteresis range to the search level in order to avoid unwanted search results caused by noise oscillation around the level For a rising edge the hysteresis is below the search level Otherwise for a falling edge the hysteresis is above the level Remote command SEARch TRIGger WIDTh LEVel DELTa on page 363 Comparison Sets the condition how the measured pulse width is compared with the given limit s Greater than Finds pulses longer than the given Width See also Width User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 138 R amp S RTM20xx Search EENS Reference for Search Menu Lower than Finds pulses shorter than the given Width Equal Finds pulses equal to the reference Width if Variation At 0 If Variation O the setting finds pulses within the range width At See also Variation Not equal Finds
398. ll through the directories To change the directory scroll to the name of the directory and press the knob or press Change Directory 6 Press Load The saved reference is loaded to the R amp S RTM 7 Ifyou also want to load the settings that were used to create the reference waveform a Inthe Reference or Load menu press Reference and select the reference number you want to load the settings to b Press Load Settings Load Settings is only available if the waveform was loaded to the reference storage before you cannot laod the setting first Reference for REF key The REF key provides functions for working with reference waveforms on the instrument For details on working with these functions see chapter 5 1 Using References on page 74 Source Update Jun PA EENG 76 ROSS Eed A een Ee Add Ee ELE 76 AE seco ve 77 VT TT co I H TT A c T TT LPR PEPER s NONEM 77 E EE 77 Load e EE 77 Reference Selects one of the four possible internal reference storages See also chapter 5 1 Using References on page 74 Source Defines the source of the reference waveform Any active channel math or reference waveform can be selected EN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 76 R amp S RTM20xx Reference Waveforms Reference for REF key If MSO option R amp S RTM B1 is installed you can store als
399. loating value and in percent Results abs Count Provides three cursors to count signal transitions The time base is defined by the first two cursors the third cursor defines the threshold value As a result the number of rising and falling edges as well as the number of positive and negative impulses is counted Results IL U T L Peak Values Measures the positive and negative peak values between the two cursors as well as the absolute difference between the two peak values peak to peak value Vpp Vp Vp Results Vp Vp Vpp RMS Mean o Measures the root mean square RMS the mean value and the standard deviation of measurement results between the two cursors Results Mean RMS o User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 80 R amp S9RTM20xx Measurements Cursor Measurements Duty Ratio Measures the positive and negative duty cycles The duty cycle is the ratio between the duration of a positve pulse high active or a negative pulse low active and the period of a rectangular waveform The measurement requires at least one complete period of the signal between cursor 1 and cursor 2 Pulse duration and period are measured at cursor 3 Results Dty Dty in Burst Width Measures the duration of a burst Two vertical cursors mark the beginning and the end of the burst The horizontal cursor sets the threshold value and the time between the first and the last edge of the burst is returned Resu
400. lt BstW Rise Time Measures the rise and fall times of the left most edge in the display between the upper and lower reference levels The reference levels are set in the Auto Measure menu MEAS gt Reference Level See also Reference Level Upper Middle Lower Levels Results tr tf V Marker Two vertical markers are provided and the values of the waveform at the marker positions are measured Additionally the differences of the two values in x and y direction are displayed Results V1 V2 At AV Crest factor The crest factor is also known as peak to average ratio It is calculated from the maximum value divided by the RMS value of the waveform The measurement value is displayed as Crest in the result table V Crest P RMS Performing Cursor Measurements The cursors are activated according to the latest setting as soon as you press the CURSOR key To configure cursor measurements 1 Press the CURSOR key The cursors are activated according to the latest setting 2 Press Meas Type to select the type of measurement to perform The type deter mines which results are displayed in the result table See also Meas Type on page 83 EE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 81 R amp S9RTM20xx Measurements 3 Cursor Measurements Press Source to select the waveform for which the measurement is to be performed The source can be any active waveform depending on the selected measurement type Move
401. lt PathName gt String parameter Specifies the directory Return values lt FileEntry gt String parameter List of subdirectory strings separated by commas If the specified directory does not have any subdirectory the current and the parent directories are returned 0 0 Example Query for directories with absolute path MMEM DCAT USB FRONT received 0 0 DATA 0 DATA NEW 0 SCREENSHOTS 0 MMEM DCAT LENG USB FRONT received 5 Example Query for directories in the current directory MMEM CDIR USB FRONT DATA MMEM DCAT received 0 0 JANUARY 0 FEBRUARY 0 MMEM DCAT LENG received 4 Example Query with filter MMEM DCAT USB FRONT DA received DATA 0 DATA NEW 0 MMEM DCAT LENG USB FRONT DA received 2 Usage Query only MMEMory DCATalog LENGth lt PathName gt Returns the number of directories in specified directory The result corresponds to the number of strings returned by the MMEMory DCATalog command Query parameters lt PathName gt String parameter Specifies the directory Return values lt FileEntryCount gt Number of directories LEE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 446 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BESSERES Command Reference Example see MMEMory DCATalog Usage Query only MMEMory CATalog lt PathName gt lt Format gt Returns the a list of fil
402. lt n gt AMODe Returns the address length Suffix lt b gt lt n gt Return values lt AddressMode gt Usage 1 4 Selects the bus Selects the frame BIT7 BIT10 Query only BUS lt b gt 12C FRAMe lt n gt ASTart Returns the start time of the address for the indicated frame Suffix lt b gt lt n gt Return values lt StartTime gt Usage 1 4 Selects the bus Selects the frame Range depends on sample rate record length and time base Increment depends on the time base Default unit s Query only User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 396 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control Command Reference BUS lt b gt 12C FRAMe lt n gt BCOunt Returns the number of data bytes in the specified frame Suffix lt b gt lt n gt Return values lt ByteCount im Frame gt Example Usage 1 4 Selects the bus Selects the frame Number of words bytes BUS I2C FRAM2 BCO gt 4 Query only BUS lt b gt 12C FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt o gt ACCess Returns the acknowledge bit value of the specified data byte Suffix lt b gt lt n gt lt o gt Return values lt Acknowledge gt Usage 1 4 Selects the bus Selects the frame Selects the byte number INComplete ACK NACK EITHer Query only BUS lt b gt 12C FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt o gt ACKStart Returns the start time of the acknowledge bit of the specified byt
403. lterFrequency gt Sets the limit frequency for CHANnel lt m gt ARIThmetics is set to FILTer Parameters lt FilterFrequency gt Limit frequency with 3 dB attenuation Default unit Hz User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 287 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control 15 2 4 4 Command Reference ACQuire POINts ARATe Retrieves the sample rate of the ADC that is the number of points that are sampled by the ADC in one second Return values lt AcquisitionRate gt ADC sample rate Range 2 5E3 to 5 00E 009 Increment 1 00E 003 RST 5 00E 009 Default unit Hz Usage Query only ACQuire SRATe Returns the sample rate that is the number of recorded waveform samples per second Return values lt SampleRate gt Range 2 to 1 00E 011 Increment depends on time base waveform rate number of active channels RST 1 00E 007 Default unit Sa s Usage Query only Vertical gie ER EE 288 CHANING Ee Te A aaia aaa aa aaa 289 ee ne EE 289 GHANnel m 3RANG riesci cies nne nk nan tea sacs omnee anrea RERO aRRRR ma Ra RARE M RR D TRAE Nea am darn 289 ee et EE GL EE 290 CHANING SiS ORF EG 290 CHANDE ime E Te De EE 290 TEE AAA ka danaa dai ain ina kaia iaap tintada nuk idaniran iaa kaiean 291 CRANE mM OVERIOA DEE 291 CHANDE MA SKEW ada 291 GHANRBelsmeEBESSOld 22 red iunndrain nadunan iiini eee Roda tec ra ea paren ce ne iaia aiana 292 CHANING me LABEL ET 292 GHANnslem s EABeIS Eege See o aeneo oe ege El Ee e EH ERO eM
404. lue for a user defined constant This function is only available if one of the user defined constants is selected by the Constant softkey Decimal Point Edit Constant Edit Equations Moves the decimal point within the user defined constant value Prefix Edit Constant Edit Equations Defines an Sl prefix for the unit of a user defined constant value The following prefixes are available None m Milli 10 3 u Mikro 10 n Nano 10 p Piko 10 12 f Femto 10 15 EM User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 108 R amp S RTM20xx Mathematics Reference for Mathematics a Atto 10 78 z Zepto 10 y Yokto 107 K Kilo 103 M Mega 109 G Giga 10 T Tera 101 P Peta 1015 E Exa 1015 Z Zetta 10 Y Yotta 10 Unit Edit Constant Edit Equations Defines the unit of the user defined constant value The selected unit only has an effect on the displayed unit not on the size of the values For a list of available units see Unit on page 102 Save Edit Constant Edit Equations Saves the defined constant to the equation of the math waveform Equation Label Edit Equations Defines a label for the current equation Eq Set Label Defines a label for the equation set Save Opens the Save menu with basic functions to save the equation set See Save Menu on page 220 Load Displays the Load menu and a file explorer to select an equation set file See L
405. lue for the selected nibble or for all digital channels if Couple Lev els is enabled The threshold setting is available if Technology is User Level E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 209 R amp S9RTM20xx Mixed Signal Option MSO R amp S RTM B1 Digital Channels For each acquired sample the instrument compares the input voltage with the threshold value If the input voltage is above the threshold the signal state 1 is stored Otherwise the signal state O is stored if the input voltage is below the threshold Remote command DIGital lt m gt THReshold on page 435 Technology Threshold Selects the threshold voltage for various types of integrated circuits from a list The value is applied to the selected nibble or to all digital channels if Couple Levels is enabled Remote command DIGital m TECHnology on page 435 Hysteresis Threshold Hysteresis avoids the change of signal states due to noise oscillation around the thresh old level Set a small hysteresis for clean signals and large hysteresis for noisy signals Threshold Hysteresis Logic 0 Logic 1 Logic 0 Remote command DIGital lt m gt Hysteresis on page 436 Couple Levels Threshold Applies the threshold and hysteresis values of the first nibble DO to D3 to all digital channels Remote command DIGital lt m gt THCoupling on page 436 Label Opens the Label menu You can define a label for each digital channel and
406. lues Special numeric values Boolean parameters Text Character strings Block data The parameters required for each command and the allowed range of values are speci fied in the command description L User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 254 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BEES Basics Numeric values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point and exponent Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down The mantissa may comprise up to 255 characters the exponent must lie inside the value range 32000 to 32000 The exponent is introduced by an E or e Entry of the exponent alone is not allowed In the case of physical quantities the unit can be entered Allowed unit prefixes are G giga MA mega MOHM and MHZ are also allowed K kilo M milli U micro and N nano If the unit is missing the basic unit is used Example SENSe FREQ STOP 1 5GHz SENSe FREQ STOP 1 5E9 Units For physical quantities the unit can be entered Allowed unit prefixes are e G giga e MA mega MOHM MHZ e K kilo e M milli e U micro e N nano If the unit is missing the basic unit is used Example SENSe FREQ STOP 1 5GHz SENSe FREQ STOP 1 5E9 Some settings allow relative values to be stated in percent According to SCPI this unit is represented by the PCT string Example HCOP PAGE SCAL 90PCT Special n
407. ly sources that are active and appro priate for the selected measurement type User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 208 R amp S RTM20xx Mixed Signal Option MSO R amp S RTM B1 Digital Channels The following measurement types are available for single digital channels bits fre quency period edge and pulse counts phase delay duty cycle burst width Statistical evaluation of these measurements is also possible 12 2 Digital Channels 12 2 1 Digital Channels Configuration Settings Access PROTOCOL LOGIC gt if Protocol menu is displayed Logic Visible Threshold Label Protocol det Ka d SCH D7 DO D15 D8 Enables or disables all digital channels of the pod at once Visible Enables or disables individual digital channels Turn the navigation knob to select the digital channel then press the knob to enable or disable the channel Remote command DIGital m DISPlay on page 435 Threshold Opens the Threshold menu You can set the digital threshold in several ways e The same threshold and hysteresis is used for all digital channels Enable Couple Levels and set the values e Different thresholds and hysteresis are used for individual channel groups nibbles Disable Couple Levels and set the threshold and hysteresis for each nibble Nibble Threshold Selects a group of 4 digital channels for which the threshold and the hysteresis can be set Threshold Threshold Sets the threshold va
408. m Back difference Top Right a 4 NS N Frame Table Displays or hides the table of decode results Remote command BUS lt b gt RESult on page 376 Track frame Defines the automatic synchronization of the selected frame in the frame table and the waveform display The function is only available if the acquisition has been stopped Off Frame table and waveform display are not synchronized Frame Index The waveform display is connected to the frame that is selected in the frame table The selected frame is shown in the center of the display If you select another frame the waveform display is adjusted automat ically Hori Position The frame selection in the frame table is connected to the waveform display The frame in the center of the display is selected in the frame table When you change the horizontal position of the waveform the selection in the frame table is adjusted automatically Frame time difference If selected the time shown in the frame table is the time difference to the previous frame The column is indicated with Time diff If the setting is disabled the absolute time in releation to the trigger point is shown in the Start time column T User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 154 R amp S9RTM20xx Protocol Analysis 11 2 11 2 1 SPI SSPI Bus Option R amp S RTM K1 Position Defines the position of the frame table on the screen top right bottom right or full screen With full screen setting
409. mM 61 Configuring Zy Diaorams mener nennen enne nnne 62 XY Z Setup E E 64 ZOOM e 66 LOOM DISH ay An 66 Zooming for Details 68 ZOOM ET E 69 MarkereZeeeg werg geesde id ia dia 71 Using Timestamp Markerg nn eee nn narran rra 71 Reference for Markerg cnn nana nnnn nn nennen rre en nenne nnns 73 Reference Waveforims cccccccscsssssesssesssseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 74 Using References iii is 74 Displaying a Reference Wavetomm ocn enne eene 74 Saving and Loading HReterences cnn nr ccnnnnn nennen nnns 75 Reference for REP ke iii ia 76 Mess UT MEN S eee tte cate a a eee 78 Cursor M aSUne MOIS i iicc2icicccceceetscincendacecicceseenceccticiesenecectsciedeancceeiecedenecaecssiaenateccess 78 Cursor Measurements Types and Results 78 Performing Cursor Measuremente eene eene 81 Cursor MON mH 82 Quick Measurements 5 niina aana ainsa uo SE HAE aii riae AEE N aap IR a a in 85 Automatic Measurements cesses nennen nennen ntn nnn nn nnn nennen nnns 87 Measurement Types and Results 87 Configuring and Performing Automatic Measurements nn 93 Auto Measure Menu MEAS key eene nennen nnns 94 L Lira 98 Configuring and Using Math Waveforms eene nnn 98 Displaying Mathematical Wavetomms emen 98 Editing Equatio
410. ment Addition ADD CH1 CH2 CH1 CH2 is also possible Subtraction SUB CH1 CH2 CH1 CH2 is also possible Multiplication MUL CH1 CH2 CH1 CH2 is also possible Division DIV CH1 CH2 CH1 CH2 is also possible Maximum amplitude MAX CH1 CH2 Minimum amplitude MIN CH1 CH2 Square SQR CH1 Square Root SQRT CH1 Absolute value ABS CH1 Positive wave POS CH1 Negative wave NEG CH1 Reciprocal REC CH1 Inverse INV CH1 Common logarithm basis 10 LOG CH1 Natural logarithm basis e LN CH1 Derivative DERI CH1 Integral INT CH1 IIR low pass IIRL CH1 1E6 CH1 Source waveform IIR high pass IIRH CH1 1E6 Ee one frequency FFT FFTMAG CH1 FFT function of the source waveform See also chapter 15 2 10 FFT on page 348 CALCulate MATH lt m gt DATA Returns the data of the math waveform points for transmission from the instrument to the controlling computer The waveforms data can be used in MATHLAB for example To set the export format use FORMat DATA on page 278 Suffix m 1 4 Selects the math waveform User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 347 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control 15 2 10 Command Reference Return values lt Data gt List of values according to the format settings voltages or mag nitudes of a spectrum Usage Query only CALCulate MATH lt m gt DATA HEADer Returns information on the math waveform Table 15 15 Header data
411. menu to select and load a PTT file from an USB flash drive The PTT file contains one or more label lists The function is only available if an USB flash drive is connected to the instrument Alternatively you can load a label list together with the device settings if both were saved with FILE gt Device Settings gt Save gt Setup amp Label See also Setup amp Label on page 226 Show Diplays the label list for the selected protocol type Before the label list must be loaded from a PTT file Sort Displays the label list in alphanumerical order or sorted by ID or address Remove Deletes the label list from the instrument E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 153 R amp S9RTM20xx Protocol Analysis Basics of Protocol Analysis 11 1 5 Frame Table Decode Results Frame Table Access PROTOCOL gt Frame Table The frame table shows the detailed decoded data for each frame of the acquisition The table content is protocol specific and the display of the table can be enabled for each individual bus type Decode results shown in the frame table can be saved in a CSV file To navigate in the frame table 1 Stop the acquisition 2 Turn the NAVIGATION knob to select a frame 3 Press the NAVIGATION knob to display the selected frame in the center of the wave form display If a search on decoded data was performed the search results are marked in the frame table Track frame SO Position Save e
412. meters lt Palette gt NORMal INVerse FCOLor IFColor NORMal Values that occur frequently are brighter than rare values INVerse Rare values are brighter than frequent values inverse to the NOR Mal brightness FColor Rare values are displayed in blue while more frequent values are red and very frequent values are displayed in yellow or white with various colors inbetween IFColor Inverses the FColor setting rare values are yellow or white while frequent values are blue RST NORMal XYZ Setup BIS PAVIA ee 315 DISPIAV AY Y ISQUICS UE 315 DISPlay EE 316 DISPIGNEX YY MODE C 316 DISPlay XY ZTHRe shold eeeeecui eee cetr eene nene hu Re enr Ran nhe nh aba Ra enean Ra dni 316 DISPlayOO e M P 316 DISPlay XY XSOurce lt Source gt Defines the source to be displayed in x direction in an XY diagram replacing the usual time base Parameters lt Source gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH3 and CH4 are only available with 4 channel R amp S RTM oscil loscopes RST CH1 DISPlay XY Y1Source lt Source gt Defines the first source to be displayed in y direction in an XY diagram Parameters lt Source gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH3 and CH4 are only available with 4 channel R amp S RTM oscil loscopes RST CH2 LEE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 315 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control Command Reference DISPlay XY Y2Source Source Defines an optional second source to be displayed in y direction in an X
413. ming overlapped commands it is usually desirable to allow the controller or the instrument to do other useful work while waiting for command execution Use one of the following methods OPC with a service request 1 Set the OPC mask bit bit no 0 in the ESE ESE 1 2 Set bit no 5 in the SRE SRE 32 to enable ESB service request 3 Send the overlapped command with OPC User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 260 R amp S9RTM20xx Remote Control 15 1 6 Basics 4 Wait for a service request The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished OPC with a service request 1 Set bit no 4 in the SRE SRE 16 to enable MAV service request 2 Sendthe overlapped command with OPC 3 Wait for a service request The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished Event Status Register ESE 1 Set the OPC mask bit bit no 0 in the ESE ESE 1 2 Sendthe overlapped command without OPC OPC or WAI 3 Poll the operation complete state periodically by means of a timer using the sequence OPC ESR A return value LSB of 1 indicates that the overlapped command has finished OPC with short timeout 1 Send the overlapped command without OPC OPC or WAI 2 Poll the operation complete state periodically by means of a timer using the sequence short timeout OPC 3 Areturn value LSB of 1 indicates that the overlapped command has finished In case of a timeout
414. mned table Columns are separated by a comma and the lines are separated by line breaks r n 0x0D 0x0A The first column contains the sample indexes and the second column contains the asso ciated amplitude values in divisions The first line indicates the units of the values in each column and the name of the waveform For each sample index two values minimum and maximum are written The range of amplitude values is 5 12 to 5 12 divisions The data can be loaded back to the instrument for further use Example CSV file Sa MSK1 DIV 0 000E 00 3 273E 00 0 000E 00 7 831E 0 1 000E 00 3 313E 00 1 000E 00 8 232E 0 2 000E 00 3 273E 00 2 000E 00 8 232E 0 3 000E 00 3 273E 00 3 000E 00 7 831E 0 4 000E 00 3 273E 00 N User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 123 R amp S9RTM20xx Masks 9 2 O Working with Masks 000E 00 7 831E 0 000E 00 3 313E 00 000E 00 8 232E 0 000E 00 3 273E 00 000E 00 8 232E 0 000E 00 3 273E 00 000E 00 7 831E 0 000E 00 3 313E 00 000E 00 7 831E 0 000E 00 3 273E 00 000E 00 7 831E 0 000E 01 3 273E 00 000E 01 8 232E 0 Rh HA wu wee sl En Oy Ur Qn o At export the sample indexes are written in scientific notification If you create a mask manually in a CSV file you can write the indexes simply as intergers The file should contain 1000 pairs of min max values TXT Format TXT files are ASCII files that contain only amplitude values in divisions bu
415. mote Control BEES Command Reference Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Return values lt Type gt NONE ACTive PASSive NONE not detected ACTive active probe PASSive passive probe Usage Query only PROBe lt m gt SETup UOFFset lt UserOffset gt Sets an additional probe offset Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters lt UserOffset gt Range Depends on the probe characteristics RST 0 Default unit V PROBe lt m gt ID BUILd Queries the build number of the probe software Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Return values lt BuildNumber gt 32 bit number Range O to 4294967295 Increment 1 Usage Query only PROBe lt m gt ID PARTnumber Queries the R amp S part number of the probe Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument ERA lt A User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 300 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BEES Command Reference Return values lt PartNumber gt string Returns the part number in a string Usage Query only PROBe lt m gt ID PRDate Queries the production date of the probe Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Return values lt ProductionDate gt string Re
416. mote command TRIGger OUT POLarity on page 451 Pulse width Trigger Output Defines the pulse width of the trigger out pulse Remote command TRIGger OUT PLENgth on page 451 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 240 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control Basics 15 Remote Control 15 1 Basics This chapter provides basic information on operating an instrument via remote control 15 1 1 Remote Control Interfaces For remote control the LAN USB or the GPIB interface can be used The GPIB interface Option RTM B10 replaces the LAN USB type B interface module on the rear panel Table 15 1 Remote control interfaces and protocols Interface Protocols address string Remarks Local Area VXI 11 protocol The LAN connector is located on the rear panel of Network TCPIP lt IP_address gt inst0 INSTR the instrument LAN See also Raw socket mode TCPIP lt IP_address gt lt IP_port gt SO chapter 15 1 1 1 LAN Interface CKET on page 242 e chapter 15 1 2 Setting Up a LAN Connec tion on page 243 USB The instrument is addressed by the A USB type B connector is located on the rear panel COM port number of the instrument Connection requires installation of an USB driver Contact your Rohde amp Schwarz ser vice center to get the driver See also e chapter 15 1 1 2 USB Interface on page 242 GPIB IEC GPIB primary address INSTR An optional GPIB bus interface according to stand IEE
417. moved upwards a negative value indicates the waveform was moved down To change the scaling of the mask in y direction press Stretch Y and turn the Navigation rotary knob Turn the knob clockwise to increase the factor or counterclockwise to decrease the factor A value over 100 stretches the amplitudes a value less than 100 com presses the amplitudes Save the new mask a Press Save User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 126 R amp S9RTM20xx Masks Working with Masks b Define the storage settings as described for waveforms in chapter 13 2 1 1 Configuring Storage Locations on page 218 c Press Save 9 2 2 Loading Masks You can load mask data from MSK or CSV files from any storage device To copy a mask use FILE gt Import Export Masks For import export procedure see chapter 13 2 1 2 Importing and Exporting Data on page 218 Press TOOLS gt Masks Tests to display the Mask Test menu Press Load Mask The Load menu and a file explorer is displayed Press Storage and select the storage device internal directory or USB flash drive connected to front or rear panel Select the directory and then the file that contains the mask Use the Navigation knob to scroll through the directories To change the directory scroll to the name of the directory and press the knob or press Change dir Press Load The selected mask is displayed on the screen 9 2 3 Performing a Mask Test
418. mp Schwarz group of companies make every effort to keep the safety standards of our products up to date and to offer our customers the highest possible degree of safety Our products and the auxiliary equipment they require are designed built and tested in accordance with the safety standards that apply in each case Compliance with these standards is continuously monitored by our quality assurance system The product described here has been designed built and tested in accordance with the EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturer s plant in a condition fully complying with safety standards To maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation you must observe all instructions and warnings provided in this manual If you have any questions regarding these safety instructions the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies will be happy to answer them Furthermore it is your responsibility to use the product in an appropriate manner This product is designed for use solely in industrial and laboratory environments or if expressly permitted also in the field and must not be used in any way that may cause personal injury or property damage You are responsible if the product is used for any purpose other than its designated purpose or in disregard of the manufacturer s instructions The manufacturer shall assume no responsibility for such use of the product The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with i
419. mples Example FORM ASC CHAN1 DATA 0 125000 0 123016 0 123016 0 123016 0 123016 0 123016 Example See chapter 15 3 1 Data Export on page 458 Usage Query only User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 293 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BREET Command Reference CHANnel lt m gt DATA HEADer Returns information on the channel waveform For envelope waveforms use the CHANnel m DATA ENVelope HEADer command Table 15 12 Header data Position Meaning Example 1 XStart in s 9 477E 008 94 77 ns 2 XStop in s 9 477E 008 94 77 ns 3 Record length of the waveform in Samples 200000 4 Number of values per sample interval usually 1 1 Suffix m Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Return values lt DataHeader gt Comma separated value list Example 9 477E 008 9 477E 008 200000 1 Usage Query only CHANnel lt m gt DATA ENVelope Returns the data of the envelope The envelope consists of two waveforms The wave forms data can be used in MATLAB for example Use this command only for envelope waveforms For other channel waveforms use CHANnel m DATA To set the export format use FORMat DATA on page 278 To set the range of samples to be returned use CHANne1 lt m gt DATA Suffix m Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Return values Data List of
420. mpletely Remote command TRIGger B MODE on page 313 Time Sets the time the instrument waits after an A event until it recognizes B events Remote command TRIGger B DELay on page 313 Events Sets a number of B trigger events that fulfill all B trigger conditions but do not cause the trigger The oscilloscope triggers on the n th event the last of the specified number of events Remote command TRIGger B EVENt COUNt on page 313 Hysteresis A B Sets a hysteresis range around the trigger level If the signal jitters inside this range and crosses the trigger level thereby no trigger event occurs Thus hysteresis avoids unwan ted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level Hysteresis is available for the edge trigger A event and B event and for the width trigger To see the hysteresis on the display activate Trigger Hyst in the Display Auxillary Cursors menu The hysteresis value depends on the vertical scale Remote command TRIGger A HYSTeresis on page 304 TRIGger B HYSTeresis on page 314 EMN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 53 R amp S RTM20xx Display General Display Settings 4 Display This chapter provides information on display configuration and display modes The default display is a waveform diagram with a time axis in x direction and the signal amplitudes displayed in y direction the Y t or time diagram You can adjust the visibility of diagram
421. n DISPlay PALCtte isc 2 e Gia e De det A ead deeded cen ieee DISPlay PERSistence CLEar E DISPlay PERSistence INFirilte doeet cd ead cte lads Eed deed DISPlay tee LEI ORI DISPlay PERSIstenGe TIME e aso DISPlay PERSistence TIME AU T OQ racer teer perde n 318 DISPlay STYLO v DISPlay VSCReen ENABle i BIS JE VA ASIGEUTAIHESNIID EU DISPlay XYixS OUE cuca D es Ald ee Ase avin ote seas ae DISPlay XY ee le RIESEN DISPlay A le RE DISPlay XY ZSOurce SC DISPlay XY ZTHREShOld DEE FORMatiBORDEG 2 s ecstissseoteve se ad ated dar FORMat DATA E HCOPy COLor SCbletmn utate itin ner ree er de ib tpe t e Eh c eret ciere Rove HCOPy DESTifiatlon roin rea ih E ete iet id Gini ain HCOPy LANGuage HCOPy PAGE Ohlehtation ssia rae li uet pd DER RE FAC ORY EK HCOPY IMMediate H MAGK ACTion PRINCEMEN COUN essere enne nnreeneren nnne sennr seres tnrsetr etre etre senes e rnnt MASK ACTion PRINEEVENEMODBDE ctetu NOESEN ee dae RR degen H MASK ACTion SCRSave EVENt COUNt MAGk ACTionGCh ave EVEN MODERN MASK ACTion SOUNGd EVENt COUNCEt essent nennt re ennree neret rnnt rsen nr set nien sse rrt tns enneis MAGK ACTion SGOUNO EVENT MODE A MAGK ACTion STOP EVEN COUN eee cece cece e cee eeneeceaeeceeseaeesaeesaeesaeescaeeseeseaeeseaeeeaeeseaeeseeseaeeegees User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 468 R amp S RTM20xx List of Commands
422. n 7 WOONRt iecit aia etc dai cada 383 BUS lt b gt SPI FRAME lt n gt WORD lt 0 gt MIO 385 BUS lt b gt SPIFRAME nz MWORD os MOT 385 BUG b GPIERAME nz MWORDcos GTA 384 BUS lt b gt SPI FRAME lt n gt WORD lt oO gt DT OD 384 BUS lt b gt SPI SSIZe SE IN EE 387 SR NEE 387 BUER 386 BUS lt b gt SSPIICLOCK SOURCE EE 386 BUS lt b gt SSPIDATA POM To EE 387 BUS lt b gt SSPIEDATA SOURCG EE 386 Bet E eege EES Eeer 388 BUSTA EAR 374 BUS lt b gt TYPE BUS lt b gt UAR WT BAU RE 401 BUSSDS UART BITIme eere A AA 402 B Ssb UARTEDATA PObarity cetera e deed 400 BUS lt b gt UART DATA SOURCO EE 399 BUS lt b gt UART PARIY EE 401 LEE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 465 R amp S RTM20xx List of Commands E E ME el TEE 400 E ECH E lee 404 BUS bhsUARTRXERAMe cnz Wun 404 BUS b UART RX FRAMe n WORD xo STARt sss 405 BUS lt b gt UART RX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt o gt STA Te eene nre nereenrren rca nana 404 BUS lt b gt UART RX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt 0 gt STOP ceccsscseceseeeeeseeeereeeseeeseeeaesereeaeseeesareneeeateeeeenreneeeateeas 405 BUS cbsUARTRXERAMe nz WORD zoz MAL ue 405 E KEN EE 401 BUS lt D UART SS ZO E 400 CALCulate MATH lt m gt ARITHM6tHiCS c ccccescenseescemeeneceseerersonencenesn contenseusnaseesesneasensueatecenenssn sen destensanseaneeseenee 349 CAL CulateMATHcms DATA HEADer rennen nennen rennen trennen nnne enn ens 348 CAL CulateMATH cm DATA XlNCreme
423. n PP m TTT irit nm bua Nr m o art t Ty ID I Length Data 235 305 ys Writ 3A2 DeviceSetup 4 A4A2 55F1 Display Fig 11 8 Decoded and binary I2C signal and frame table with decode results gray brackets start and end of the frame violet address blue correct data words green acknowledge bit ok red 7 missing acknowledge bit or other error Table 11 2 Content of the PC frame table Column Description Start time Time of the frame start in relation to the trigger point Type Value of the R W bit read or write access ID Hexadecimal value of the address Label Symbolic label available if a label list was loaded and applied Length Number of words in the frame Data Hexadecimal values of the data words State Overall state of the frame User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 174 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis Remote commands e BU w U U U U U U UJ P S id Ri tH dus HJ tH ee CH ud DU CH dM 5S U S b S b IDAS S b S b as Ds S b S b Seb S b S b sebo S b S b Se boss S p S bs Seb S b E2C r26 3 TAC Ir20 12 TACs I2C ZE TAC Ir20 I2 TACs I20 12 TAC r2C ACS TAC E2C UART RS 232 Interface Option R amp S RTM K2 FCOunt on page 392 n Hj mi Hj ml tj Hj mi ee mi nj Hj ml nj o nj mi mi RAMe lt n gt RAMe lt n g
424. n R amp S RTM K3 0x06 Dashboard 0x13 Gateway 0x1C Temperature 0x21 Mirror 0x37 Indoor lights Labels for reserved addresses Ox3C Master Request Frame 0x3D Slave Response Frame Label list LIN Imported on 2012 04 05 12 36 Dashboard _Frame Fig 11 15 Label list for CAN For general information see chapter 11 1 4 Label List on page 151 11 6 5 LIN Decode Results You can enable the decoding in the Protocol main menu Decode shows the decoded values below the waveforms in the format selected with Display Additionally you can display the binary signal with Bits See also chapter 11 1 2 Protocol Common Settings on page 149 Additionally you can display and save a Frame Table containing decoded data frame number start time of the frame identifier data length data checksum and state of the frame See also chapter 11 1 5 Frame Table Decode Results on page 154 E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 203 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis LIN Option R amp S RTM K3 TB 1ms T 50 39 ms Auto CH1 4 44 V DC 1MSais Real Time Complete 22 515 ms 814 ms T 46 701 ms 2 8 57 597 ms 37 Indoor ligh Frames 5 9 15 Label Door controller Protocol Display Fig 11 16 Decoded LIN signal with frame table and applied label list gray synchronization break synchronization byte correct checksum yellow identifier green parity bits blue data words UART wor
425. n Uer gt 30 V se deber n tomar las medidas apropiadas para impedir cualquier peligro p ej medios de medici n adecuados seguros limitaci n de tensi n corte protector aislamiento etc Para la conexi n con dispositivos inform ticos como un PC o un ordenador industrial debe comprobarse que stos cumplan los est ndares IEC60950 1 EN60950 1 o IEC61010 1 EN 61010 1 v lidos en cada caso A menos que est permitido expresamente no retire nunca la tapa ni componentes de la carcasa mientras el producto est en servicio Esto pone a descubierto los cables y componentes el ctricos y puede causar lesiones fuego o da os en el producto Si un producto se instala en un lugar fijo se deber primero conectar el conductor de protecci n fijo con el conductor de protecci n del producto antes de hacer cualquier otra conexi n La instalaci n y la conexi n deber n ser efectuadas por un electricista especializado En el caso de dispositivos fijos que no est n provistos de fusibles interruptor autom tico ni otros mecanismos de seguridad similares el circuito de alimentaci n debe estar protegido de modo que todas las personas que puedan acceder al producto as como el producto mismo est n a salvo de posibles dafios Todo producto debe estar protegido contra sobretensi n debida p ej a una ca da del rayo mediante los correspondientes sistemas de protecci n Si no el personal que lo utilice quedar expuesto al peligro de choqu
426. n synchronous waveform display For example a coax cable with a length of one meter has a propaga tion delay of typically 5 3 ns Remote command CHANnel lt m gt SKEW on page 291 Threshold Access CH N gt More page 2 gt Threshold Threshold value for digitization of analog signals If the signal value is higher than the threshold the signal state is high 1 or true for the boolean logic Otherwise the signal state is considered low 0 or false if the signal value is below the threshold ERA e S e LALLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLALLLALALLLALLAAAAAALUUL LU User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 31 R amp S RTM20xx Acquisition and Waveform Setup Reference for Waveform Setup You can e Select one of the default values for TTL ECL or CMOS TTL 1 4 V ECL 1 3 V CMOS 2 5 V e Set the User value individually e Let the instrument analayze the signal and find an appropriate level The threshold is applied to the selected channel Remote command CHANnel lt m gt THReshold on page 292 Label Opens the Label menu to define an additional name label for the selected waveform See chapter 2 3 3 5 Label Menu on page 34 2 3 8 8 Probe Menu Passive Probe In the probe menu for passive probes the probe attenuation for the selected channel is set If the probe is known to the instrument the attenuation factor is set automatically For unknown probes you can select a default factor or enter a use
427. nal The probe bandwidth must be even higher than the system bandwidth e Impedance A minimum impedance is required to keep the circuit loading low Over frequency the impedance decreases in particular with passive probes The probe impedance should be approximately 10 times the impedance of the circuit test point at the highest signal frequency Passive voltage probes Passive probes have the following qualities e No active components inside e BNC connector for universal use e Compensation needs to be executed when the probe is connected to a scope input LF compensation matches the probe mainly cable capacitance to the oscilloscope input capacitance High frequency adjustment is an option for higher measurement frequencies in the MHz range e With high impedance probes the impedance varies significantly over frequency e With low impedance probes the impedance variation over frequency is low but the load on the source is high M User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 17 R amp S RTM20xx Acquisition and Waveform Setup EENS Basics If you use passive probes remember some recommendations e Use a probe recommended for your oscilloscope model e Use a ground lead as short as possible to minimize the effect of ground lead induc tance The resonance frequency can be much lower than the system bandwidth and thus can affect the measurement results in particular if you measure steep edge rise times e Select a probe tha
428. nal Y t window IECH User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 66 R amp S RTM20xx Display Zoom TB 100ns T 44ns Auto CH1 626 75 mV A AC 5 GSals Realtime Complete Z 20ns Tz 40ns 5 GSals The usual channel parameters are displayed in the information bar above the original Y t window see the general display information described in the Getting Started man ual In addition the zoom area parameters are indicated in the information bar above the zoom window The following information is given there Z Zoom Time Base i e scaling for the time base in the zoom window in seconds per division deter mines the width of the zoom area that is displayed in the zoom window 10 divisions scaling per division Tz Zoom Time i e the offset of the trigger point to the reference point Os in the zoom window deter mines the position of the zoom area Sample rate for zoom window Pressing the horizontal SCALE rotary knob moves the focus between the Y t window Time Control the zoom area Zoom Control and the zoom window The currently selected screen area is highlighted and displayed in the information bar of the zoom window Depending on the selection the functions of the SCALE and POSITION rotary knobs may change User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 67 R amp S RTM20xx Display EE eee Zoom TB 100ns_T 44ns Auto CH1 641 7 mY A AC 5 GSais Realtime Complete zc rro mg Fig 4 2 Zoom area wi
429. nal parameters are changed the envelope is reset AL Average The average of several spectrums is calculated The number of spec trums used for the averaging is defined using the knob or the No of Averages softkey This mode is useful for noise rejection d Remote command CALCulate MATH m ARIThmetics on page 349 No of Averages Defines the number of spectrums used for averaging This function is only available if Average mode is selected Remote command CALCulate MATH m FFT AVERage COUNt on page 350 Window Window functions are multiplied with the input values and thus can improve the FFT display If discontinuities occur atthe borders of the measurement interval the algorithm interprets such discontinuities as a sudden edge which can distort the result For bell shaped func tions the border values are multiplied with smaller values and thus have less influence on the result Hanning The Hanning window is bell shaped Unlike the Hamming window its value is zero at the borders of the measuring interval Thus the noise level within the spectrum is reduced and the width of the spectral lines enlarges Use this window to measure amplitudes of a periodical signal precisely LEE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 117 R amp S RTM20xx FFT Reference for FFT key Hamming The Hamming window is bell shaped Its value is not zero at the borders of the measuring interval Thus the noise level inside the
430. namiento Con esto queda garantizada la seguridad del producto Bater as y acumuladores o celdas Si no se siguen o se siguen de modo insuficiente las indicaciones en cuanto a las bater as y acumuladores o celdas pueden producirse explosiones incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte El manejo de bater as y acumuladores con electrolitos alcalinos p ej celdas de litio debe seguir el est ndar EN 62133 1 2 No deben desmontarse abrirse ni triturarse las celdas Las celdas o bater as no deben someterse a calor ni fuego Debe evitarse el almacenamiento a la luz directa del sol Las celdas y bater as deben mantenerse limpias y secas Limpiar las conexiones sucias con un pa o seco y limpio Las celdas o bater as no deben cortocircuitarse Es peligroso almacenar las celdas o bater as en estuches o cajones en cuyo interior puedan cortocircuitarse por contacto rec proco o por contacto con otros materiales conductores No deben extraerse las celdas o bater as de sus embalajes originales hasta el momento en que vayan a utilizarse Las celdas o bater as no deben someterse a impactos mec nicos fuertes indebidos En caso de falta de estanqueidad de una celda el l quido vertido no debe entrar en contacto con la piel ni los ojos Si se produce contacto lavar con agua abundante la zona afectada y avisar a un m dico En caso de cambio o recarga inadecuados las celdas o bater as que contienen electrolitos
431. nana nacen restent sen Ch SCHRENGER E BEE SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate FIRSt SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate NEXT SGvGTem COMMunicate PhlNier GE ect EN IR BR SYS Tem e EE 453 SYSTeMmERROMINEXD Pc id 453 Ch RN EE 451 SA EE 452 SYSTEM HE 451 Blaue zr BUCE enii AEAN DIEAS TlMebase ZOOMIPOSIION cocoa isis TIMebase ZOOM SCALe TIM base ZOOMEC S A Te eege eeReteE rna tee ther ned En Ye e e e EP RR Re de k o tati TIMeEDASE3ZOO MIM zc TRIGger Ac CAN CAC TEE BR lee RE TRIG ger REI Rel SIT jo TRIGgerA CAN DATA mE TRIGger A ee Ch Rer ele Me DE 409 TRIGgerA CAN DLG mp 409 TRIGger A CAN e ET 410 RBS ele pne HIbig ee e E E AEEA a e ra iea EEA EAE Ea ADE EE Ear eA 408 TRIGger A CAN ICONGition ren aaa rnt e ene oai d nee ita EEE Eaa NEEESE ENEA 409 IUe we Hz 409 TRIGJerA CAN ITYP O iii di a A a 408 TRIGgerA CAN TYPE maite DA 407 TRIGger A EDGE COU PING DEE 305 TRIGger A EDGE FIETer LPASS rto ttr tnt rino trt ea nhe t nore n a EE ep re ei ne eR ek Ede ER Rd D 305 TRIGger A EDGE FIETerANREJGcL iie opere ottenere Seba eund E ke dba o FEY dE Re era ER RM rhe eR Ro EE 305 TRIGger A EDGE SLOPe Uexudbi TRIGger A HOLDoff M
432. nce BUS lt b gt CAN BITRE p BUSsb CAN DATA SOURTCA ia BUS lt b gt CAN FCOunt BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt ACKState 0 0 ceccecceceeneeeeseeeeeeceeeseceeeaeeeeeaeeaeeeaecaeeeaecaeseeesaesenesaeseeeeaeeereeaeeateess 413 BUS b CAN FRAMe n ACKValue esses nennen tnnt rennen eren rre 414 BUS b CAN FRAMe n BCOunt esee nennen nnne nnns niaii ideana inana i ibda aaiae 416 BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt BSEPOSItiON crionn iaito iaiaaeaia ariiraa pie nennen 416 BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt 0 gt STATEC cccescescseceesesereeeecereeseeatecaecreeaecaesenesaeseeesaesieeseesneeeaeentesaeeateees 417 BUS bs CAN FRAMe nz BvVTE zos MAL ue 417 BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt sn gt COSS Tate ENEE 414 BUS b CAN FRAMe n CSValue esses nennt nenne nee nnne nn nn nana nn rn n near anna an cananea 414 BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMesn gt DATA Paniiniondci dd dia 413 BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt DLCState 0 0 ccecceceereeneeereeeeeseeseeereeaeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeaeeaeeeaesaeeeaeeeesaeseeeereeeeereeeeead 414 BUS hs CAN FRAMe nz DL CValued E 415 BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt IDS Tate nenne nee e enhn nnne 415 BUS b CAN FRAMesn IDTYp6 2 nti agente ett eed peo Ed pede ide tae Dn e eee nhe Pte edidi 415 BUS b CAN FRAMe n IDValue sess eene nre t nre nne nennen erret 416 BUS b CAN FRAMesn STARE iie ee
433. nce Level menu The measurement result is displayed as tf in the result table o Std Dev Wave Measures the standard deviation of the complete waveform 1 Neal ox CAN a 3 6G Xu Y Eval j 4 Xmean Mean Value X i Value of the measured waveform sample Neva Number of waveform samples o Std Dev Cycle Measures the standard deviation of one cycle usually of the first left most signal period IESSE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 90 R amp S RTM20xx Measurements El Automatic Measurements Delay Measures the time difference on the middle reference level between two slopes of the same or different waveforms The measurement value is displayed as Delay in the result table Select the sources and slopes in the Delay Setup menu Set the middle reference level in the Reference Level menu Phase Phase difference between two waveforms time difference period 360 on the middle reference level The measurement value is displayed as Phase in the result table Select the waveforms in the Phase Setup menu Set the middle reference level in the Reference Level menu Burst Width Duration of one burst measured from the first edge to the last edge that cross the middle reference level The measurement value is displayed as Bst in the result table Set the middle reference level in the Reference Level menu Count positive pulses Count JL Counts positive pulses within the displayed section of the
434. nce for Search Menu eese eene nenne nennen 135 Main Search Men 135 Edge SOUP es sex t i 137 Width SOtup se 138 Peak Set p 139 Rise Fall Time Getup eee 139 Kl ul ie EE 141 Data2Clock Gearch tere eee tees eee eaeeee seen naaeeeeeeeeniceeeeeeeeeeiaeeeeeeeeeaas 142 Pattern Le E 144 Calo E TE 146 E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 5 R amp S9RTM20xx Contents 10 3 10 11 11 1 11 1 1 11 1 2 11 1 3 11 1 4 11 1 5 11 2 11 2 1 11 22 11 2 3 11 2 4 11 3 11 3 1 11 3 2 11 3 3 11 3 4 11 3 5 11 4 11 4 1 11 4 2 11 4 3 11 4 4 11 5 11 5 1 11 5 2 11 5 3 11 5 4 11 5 5 11 6 11 6 1 11 6 2 Events Mentee dota tancia daa da di 147 Protocol E p I a 148 Basics of Protocol Analysis irem eo aia 148 Configuring Common Protocol Gettngs 148 Protocol Common Settings eee 149 Display SeN cL E 150 Label Lists serisinin anina asiain i a aaa aiai Eaa E 151 Frame Table Decode HResuhts nennen 154 SPI SSPI Bus Option R amp S RTM K1 cccccesseeeeeeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeees 155 Belus 155 SPI SSPI Bus Config ration 2c rete trr ett educ duet a narum dur rtp ua ERU 156 Ric 159 SPI SSBI Decode Results iia iii eii 162 FC Option R amp S RTM E 165 The E lte e EE 165 ale EE E
435. nd CURSor lt m gt FUNCtion on page 328 Source Defines the source of the cursor measurement as one of the active channel math or reference waveforms E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 83 R amp S RTM20xx Measurements El Cursor Measurements If MSO option R amp S RTM B1 is installed also digital channels DO to D15 are available for time ratio X count duty ratio and burst width measurements and the pods DO D7 and D8 D15 are available for V marker measurements Available sources depend on the selected measurement type The source setting is not available for cursor measurements on FFT analysis and in XY mode Remote command CURSor lt m gt SOURce on page 327 Track Scaling If enabled Track Scaling adjusts the cursor lines if the vertical or horizontal scales are changed The cursor lines keep their relative position to the waveform If disabled the cursor lines remain on their position on the display if the scaling is changed Remote command CURSor lt m gt TRACking SCALe STATe on page 331 Coupling If enabled the cursors of a can be coupled and moved together Press the NAVIGATION key to select both corsors or one cursor to be moved If disabled the NAVIGATION key toggles the single cursor lines Remote command CURSor lt m gt XCOupling on page 330 CURSor lt m gt YCOupling on page 330 Set to Wave Autoset for cursor lines sets the cursor lines to typical points of the waveform depending
436. nd DISPlay PALette on page 314 INVerse IFColor EN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 59 R amp S RTM20xx Display General Display Settings Temper Colors un Temperature Colors Converts the brightness level of the displayed signals into a color range i e the color changes gradually in a wide color spectrum with increasing cumula tive occurance By default rare values are displayed in blue while more frequent values are red and very frequent values are displayed in yellow or white with various colors inbetween This results in a higher contrast which provides a better perception of details in the waveforms Note The colors change if you invert the brightness display Remote command DISPlay PALette on page 314 NORMal FColor Aux Cursors Provides functions to display auxiliary cursors Highlighted functions are active play Trigger Event Aux Cursors Show or hides the point of the trigger A small rhombus markes the intersection of the trigger level and the trigger offset T The offset is related to the reference point and is displayed in the header of the display If you change the trigger level or the trigger position a line appears temporarily to highlight the changed value If the B trigger is activated the trigger is the result of an A event followed by an B event The trigger point has the color of the B trigger source Channel Cursors Aux Cursors Activates or deactivates
437. nd Grid Settings DIS PIES TY Le cinei ER 319 RIIT e d EE 319 DISPlay STYLe lt Style gt Defines how the waveform data is displayed Parameters lt Style gt VECTors DOTS VECTors Individual data points are connected by a line DOTS Only the data points are displayed RST VECT DISPlay GRID STYLe lt Style gt Defines how the grid is displayed Parameters lt Style gt LINes RETicle NONE LINes Displays the grid as horizontal and vertical lines RETicle Displays crosshairs instead of a grid NONE No grid is displayed RST LIN Virtual Screen DISPlaeVSGREGI EE 319 DISPlay VSCReen POSMOM rirci rr deett daa 320 DISPlay VSCReen ENABle Enable Enables or disables the virtual screen If enabled the virtual screen has 20 divisions 8 of them are displayed User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 319 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BREET Command Reference Parameters lt Enable gt ON OFF RST OFF DISPlay VSCReen POSition Position Selects the divisions to be displayed on the virtual screen The virtual screen has 20 divisions 8 of them are displayed Parameters lt Position gt Indicated the position of the middle visible division Range 6 to 6 At 6 the lower 8 divisons are visible 0 indi cates the center of the virtual screen and the divions 4 to 4 are visible 15 2 6 2 Zoom TiMebase ZOOMISTATE c2 dccccsccecesenacderecsstcauasesaeschsqaneesuancseessiseunebouesnesseccs
438. nd systems permit certain mnemonics to be inserted into the header or omitted These mnemonics are marked by square brackets in the description The instru ment must recognize the long command to comply with the SCPI standard Some com mands are considerably shortened by these optional mnemonics Example Definition HardCOPy IMMediate Command HCOP IMM is equivalent to HCOP D Optional mnemonics with numeric suffixes Do not omit an optional mnemonic if it includes a numeric suffix that is relevant for the effect of the command Example Definition DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt MAXimize Boolean Command DISP MAX ON refers to window 1 In order to refer to a window other than 1 you must include the optional WINDow param eter with the suffix for the required window DISP WIND2 MAX ONrefers to window 2 Parameters Parameters must be separated from the header by a white space If several parameters are specified in a command they are separated by a comma For a description of the parameter types refer to SCPI Parameters on page 254 Example Definition HardCOPy DEVice CMAP COLor RGB lt red gt lt green gt lt blue gt Command HCOP DEV CMAP COL RGB 3 32 44 LEE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 253 R amp S9RTM20xx Remote Control Basics Special characters Parameters A vertical stroke in parameter definitions indicates alternative possibilities in the sense of or The effect
439. nes The oscilloscope triggers on the beginning of all video signal lines if Trigger on is Line Remote command TRIGger A TV FIELd on page 307 e M M 1 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 47 R amp S RTM20xx Triggers Reference for Triggers Frame The oscilloscope triggers on the beginning of the video signal fields if the other trigger conditions are fulfilled The setting is available for video signals using interlaced scanning All Triggers on all fields Odd Triggers only on odd fields Even Triggers only on even fields Remote command TRIGger A TV FIELd on page 307 3 3 2 6 Pattern The Pattern trigger is is a logic trigger It provides any logical combination of the input channels and supports you in verifying the operation of digital logic Thus you can also trigger on bus patterns of parallel buses The channel pattern is configured in the Source menu Additionally you can set a time limitation to the pattern in the Setup menu Pattern Pattern Setup Source Threshold Combination Trigger On Pattern Channel 1 NINE EE 48 e UE 49 Nk Lee EG 49 Channel N Select the state for each channel The states are H High the signal voltage is higher than the trigger level L Low the signal voltage is lower than the trigger level User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 48
440. nes ennt 340 MEASurement m SOUR UCO x ctp E ir c php edid ceases erg ue ves eda te tausend t pd Unde fae ata Dee eaten MEASurement lt m gt STATistics RES Ot eene en nennen nnns nenn rra nennt nre n rnt nenat MEASurement lt m gt STATistics VALue ALL MEAGurement mz GTATlsticeVAl uecnz nennen eene nennen nent rinn nsn rrnnr tentent seen 345 MEAGurementmz GTATlsticewWEIGht AAA 342 MEAGurement zmz GTATlsttcel ENABlel A 342 MEASurermient m ENABIS 5 1 geed aa a atero a Ao 336 MMEMory CA Talog LENGI esee A ub ree ehe MEE e Ere FRE ERES 447 MMEMory CATalog MMEMory CDIRGCIONY coordina id ici MMEMOLy COP ee Lbs sso Hb Mp c eege eegend gies MMEMory DCATalog ENG O cc ooooonio cationes odo Ee kdo Resa charte ceo den eda Pep E a 446 MMEMOry DCATald97 citet en i e por enter ere ker ji 446 LEE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 469 R amp S RTM20xx List of Commands ll eler EE 444 MMEMoary ET 441 MMEMory RDIRE CHOY M E 445 MMEMON STORE STAT trit tnn rr ltda 449 dee Ee RIIS For 300 PROBesm IB PARTnutIb6r inr ad IE eek de 300 PROB sim gt ID PRD ate c 301 PROBesm ID SRNUMbDer cuido rre reir redd eri iae sea dada dardo ra 301 SITAS NO AN 301 PhROBe mz GE TupATTenuatton MANual rca ncnnnnnnnannn rn crnnnn nn naar rca sentent nnn 297 PROBesm gt SETup AT Tenuation UNIT cocoa ae 297 PhRObBe mz GE TupATTenuattont AUTO
441. nes the behaviour of the instrument if no trigger occurs The current setting is shown in the infor mation bar R amp S9RTM20xx Triggers 3 3 2 Reference for Triggers Auto The instrument triggers repeatedly after a time interval if the trigger conditions are not fulfilled If a real trigger occurs it takes precedence This mode helps to see the waveform even before the trigger is set The waveform on the screen is not synchronized and successive wave forms are not triggered at the same point of the waveform Normal The instrument acquires a waveform only if a trigger occurs that is if all trigger conditions are fulfilled If no trigger occurs no waveform is acquired and the last acquired waveform is displayed If no waveform was captured before nothing is displayed Remote command TRIGger A MODE on page 302 LEVEL The rotary knob changes the trigger treshold voltage for all trigger types that require one trigger level Some trigger types require two trigger levels for example the rise time fall time trigger These levels can be set in the trigger setup menu Turn clockwise to move the trigger level up Press the knob to set the level to 50 of the signal amplitude If a B trigger is enabled the knob can set the level for both the A and B trigger To assign the level to the A or B trigger use Trigger Level in the Trigger menu Remote command TRIGger A LEVel n VALue on page 302 TRIGger A FINDleve
442. ng acquisition series the instrument analyzes the displayed data The search on a stopped acquisition analyzes the contents of the memory All Running acquisition all waveform samples that are displayed on the screen Stopped acquisition all data samples that are stored in the memory Display Search is restricted to the time range of the display User Search is restricted to the time range defined by Start and Stop val ues Remote command SEARch GATE MODE on page 361 T User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 146 R amp S9RTM20xx Search 10 3 10 Reference for Search Menu Start Sets the start time of the search area in relation to the trigger point Remote command SEARCh GATE ABSolute START on page 361 Stop Sets the end time of the search area in relation to the trigger point Remote command SEARCh GATE ABSolute STOP on page 361 Events Menu Access SEARCH MENU gt Events Events are the search results which are marked in the waveform diagram and listed in the event table See also chapter 10 1 1 Search Results on page 132 EE Mark events Track event mc Clear all event marks N View event table Shows or hides the table of search results Remote command SEARch RESDiagram SHOW on page 372 Mark events Sets markers to the first search results Up to 20 markers can be set at once Clear all event marks Removes all markers from search results
443. nored e Values with a special character comma newline or double quote must be enclosed in double quotes e Textin double quotes must be escaped by double quote characters Additionally numeric values may be decimal integer default or hexadecimal integer with prefix Ox Start of PTT file GFILE VERSION 1 0 PROTOCOL NAME i2c Following two lines are equal 7 0x01 Temperature 7 0x01 Temperature A comma must be enclosed in double quotes 7 0x01 Temperature Pressure and Volume A double quote must also be enclosed in double quotes 7 0x7F Highspeed Master 01 Following lines yield the same result 7 0x11 Pressure Ox7 0x11 Pressure 0x7 17 Pressure E S p User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 152 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis EENEG Basics of Protocol Analysis 1 17 Pressure Label lists are protocol specific Their contents are described in the corresponding pro tocol chapters e chapter 11 3 4 I C Label List on page 172 e chapter 11 5 3 CAN Label List on page 191 e chapter 11 6 4 LIN Label List on page 202 11 1 4 2 Label List Menu Access PROTOCOL gt Bus Type I2C CAN LIN gt Label List Label list Apply Shows the labels from the label list in the display of decode results instead of the ID or address Load Opens a
444. ns and Equation Gets sse 99 Saving and Loading Equation Ges 100 p lt lt User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 4 R amp S9RTM20xx Contents 7 2 8 1 8 2 8 2 1 8 22 8 2 3 8 3 9 1 9 1 1 9 1 2 9 1 3 9 2 9 2 1 9 2 2 9 2 3 9 3 10 10 1 10 1 1 10 2 10 3 10 3 1 10 3 2 10 3 3 10 3 4 10 3 5 10 3 6 10 3 7 10 3 8 10 3 9 Reference for Mathematics cccccsssssenceeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeseceeseeeeeeseceeseeeeeeseceesaeeeeesseeaes 101 jJ eR P 110 FFT DISplay an 110 Configuring and Using FFT Calculations eene 111 setting Up the FFT Analysls a coincida iaa eiii aca E ce 111 Configuring the Diagrams EE 112 Measuring ON FF m 115 Reference for FET Key comia 115 MS ii 122 About MasKSs iiiter REESEN Se 122 MERDCcmee EU 122 MEETS E inane nelle 122 File Formats for Masks edere a 123 Working with ET 1er ceteri cree Dani uia nares ASAA ATAA Aaaa 124 Creating New Masks n e ede pede stb acd dob adde ea e Mei ae ER Me d SR 125 NertnMutlcrteem RUM 127 Performing a Mask Test t teet diete dieere Mes 127 Reference for MASKS Key eet teeth Rene ERI FREE esa ea SERE ENEE 128 e S 132 Search Conditions and Results eese enne nnn 132 ee RI 132 Configuring and Performing Searches scccccccesesseenceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenees 134 Refere
445. ns and Equation Sets To each math waveform an equation is assigned The mathematical operation is defined by the operator and is performed on the operands Operands are one or two of the active channel or math waveforms or a constant value All five math waveforms together build an equation set that can be stored and loaded Equation Set Editor Equation Set 1 B CH1 CH2LV C O O MA2 SHZEY MA3 CH2 V MA4 CH2 V MAS CH1 CH2 V To configure an equation 1 Press MATH gt Edit Equations to display the Equation Set Editor with the current equation set configuration Press Equation and select the equation to be configured Press Operator to select the operator of the equation See also Operator on page 103 Press Operand1 See also Operand 1 on page 107 If the equation requires a second operand press Operand2 and define the second operand If one of the operands is defined as a constant define its value a Press Operand1 or Operand2 to select the constant for the corresponding operand b Press Edit Constant to define its value c Press Constant and select either a pre defined constant or one of 10 available user defined constants ERA e e A L LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLULLZLL 9 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 99 R amp S RTM20xx Mathematics Ss Configuring and Using Math Waveforms d If you selected a user defined constant
446. nt ene ene nn rennen need riens nnne n neis 280 CALCulate MATH m DATA XORIgin eese eene enne nennen ennt nnne nennen tnnt 279 CALCulate MATH lt m gt DATA YINCrement 280 CAL CulateMATHcms DATA vOhRloin nennen inneren rennen teretes 280 CAL Culate MATH lt m gt DATA YRESolUtiONP nnne nneen rne rennes enne nnns 281 CALCulate MATE m DATA iria tree cete eie Eee enean d e oue supe diat node kee 347 CAL Culate MATH lt m gt FFT AVERage COUN nennen riens eterne rra 350 CAL CulateMATHcms PET BANDwidt RE Solution AD Justed 351 CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT BANDwidth RESolution AUTO 951 CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT BANDwidth RESolution RATio 351 CALCulate MATH m FFT BANDwidth RESolution VALue eene 352 CAL CulateMATHcmz FETGFhReouencn netten enn ren sent ncnnnnnn rn n anne sein tnts sts rnt sss tnn rsen nn 352 CALCul te MATH m FFT FULLSp n 5 rper rcnitcn tentent ttp ds 352 CALCulate MATH m FFT MAGNitude SCALe essent nennen rennen rsen eter e nnns 350 CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT SPAN 352 CAL Culate MATH lt m gt FFTISRAT OP nennen nn one renacer 354 CALCulate MATH Sms D HE 353 CAL Culate MATH lt m gt FFT O Kl 353 CAL CulateMATH mz FEIT TIME PO mon ee cecececeeeeceeeeeeseeeeneteeeaeeseeeaerseeeaesseeeaessaeeaeeaeeaeseaeeatenaeeaeesas 354 CAL CulateMATHm PET TIMERANGe cee eee cece een eceeeeeeeceaeeseeeseaeseeeseaeesaeeseaeeseaeeeaeesseeesse
447. nte alterna AC av Conexi n a conductor de protecci n Corriente continua Corriente alterna DC AC Conexi n a tierra lal El aparato est protegido en su totalidad por un aislamiento doble reforzado Conexi n a masa Distintivo de la UE para bater as y acumuladores M s informaci n en la secci n Eliminaci n protecci n del medio ambiente punto 1 1171 0000 42 07 Page 8 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Simbolo Significado Simbolo Significado Aviso Cuidado en el manejo de dispositivos Distintivo de la UE para la eliminaci n por sensibles a la electrost tica ESD separado de dispositivos el ctricos y electr nicos M s informaci n en la secci n Eliminaci n protecci n del medio ambiente punto 2 Advertencia rayo l ser M s informaci n en la secci n Funcionamiento punto 7 Palabras de se al y su significado En la documentaci n del producto se utilizan las siguientes palabras de se al con el fin de advertir contra riesgos y peligros A RO Indica una situaci n de peligro que si no se evita causa lesiones PELIG graves o incluso la muerte Indica una situaci n de peligro que si no se evita puede causar lesiones graves o incluso la muerte lesiones leves o moderadas Indica informaci n que se considera importante pero no en relaci n con situaciones de peligro p ej avisos sobre posibles dafios materiales En la documentaci n del pr
448. ntries in one row Next selects the next entry To select the next setting in the dialog press Down to select the previous setting press Up Up Parameter Interface Selects the previous setting in the dialog Down Parameter Interface Selects the next setting in the dialog Default Parameter Interface Restores the default interface settings Save Parameter Interface Saves the changes to the instrument and closes the dialog Device Information Displays insformation on the instrument such as its serial number the installed software version and hardware information This information is required in case of a support request Update Provides functions to update the help files or firmware of the instrument or interfaces Firmware Update Allows you to update the instrument firmware The currently installed firmware version is displayed as well as all available update versions if a USB flash drive containing an update is identified The instrument is only updated when you press Execute Note You should update the instrument firmware in regular intervals to take advantage of new functions and solve possible problems The online help is not included in the firmware update package Update the online help separately to get the latest information Execute Firmware Update The instrument firmware is updated A VYV
449. nu Remote command CHANnel m THReshold FINDlevel on page 379 11 3 3 FC Trigger ires STING ONT IPG NEUE 168 e Fo mogor SSCS EE 169 11 3 3 1 Triggering on PC Prerequisites The PC interface is configured After configuration the trigger type Pro tocol I2C is available See chapter 11 3 2 1 Configuring C on page 167 E Triggers are only available if Decode is enabled 1 Press the SETUP key in the trigger area of the front panel Select the Trigger Type Protocol I2C Press Setup Boo bh Press the softkey of the required trigger condition Start begin of the message Stop end of the message Restart repeated start condition Acknowledge transfer of a data byte is not acknowledged Read Write complex trigger condition containing read or write access of the master slave address or and a bit pattern in the message 5 If Read Write is selected press the softkey again and define the condition a Press Master and select read or write access of the master b Configure the Address of the slave e Select the Address Length 7 bit or 10 bit e Press Slave Address and turn the navigation knob to set the address If the address is not relevant for your trigger condition set it to OxX any address EN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 168 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis EENEG PC Option R amp S RTM K1 c Press Data Setup to specify data bytes of the message
450. o SCALE on page 23 To configure the original Y t diagram on page 69 and figure 8 2 Remote command TIMebase SCALe on page 283 Trigger Offset Y t Setup Defines the horizontal position of the trigger point in relation to the reference point to the zero point of the grid The value is indicated by T in the information bar above the window The reference point is set with SETUP gt Time Reference Note If a zoom or FFT window is displayed and Time Control is selected the trigger offset can be adjusted using the horizontal POSITION rotary knob See also e POSITION on page 23 e Time Reference on page 235 e To configure the original Y t diagram on page 69 Remote command TIMebase POSition on page 284 Show Channels Y t Setup Displays all active channels in the Y t window By default only the selected channel is visible the channel used for FFT calculation FFT Off Closes the FFT display and returns to the previous display User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 121 R amp S RTM20xx Masks About Masks 9 Masks Masks are used to determine whether the amplitude of a signal remains within specified limits e g to detect errors or test compliance of digital signals 9 1 About Masks 9 1 1 Masks A mask is specified by an upper and a lower limit line The signal must run inside these limit lines otherwise a mask violation occurs A new mask is created from an existing signal Mask limits
451. o signal fields or on the beginning of video signal lines User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 307 R amp S9RTM20xx Remote Control 15 2 5 5 Parameters Field Command Reference EVEN ODD ALL LINE ALINe EVEN ODD Triggers only on the field start of even or odd fields Only available for interlaced scanning ALL All fields triggers on the frame start progressive scanning or any field start interlaced scanning LINE Triggers on the beginning of a specified line in any field The line number is set with TRIGger A TV LINE ALINe Triggers on the beginning of all video signal lines RST ALL TRIGger A TV LINE Line Sets an exact line number if TRIGger A TV FIELd is set to LINE Parameters Line Pattern Trigger Pattern Range 1 to 525 NTSC PAL M 625 PAL SECAM SDTV 1 576 750 HDTV P720 1125 HDTV 11080 HDTV P1080 Increment 1 RST 1 TRIGger A PATTern SOURce lt SourceString gt Parameters lt SourceString gt Example string containing 0 1 or X for each channel 1 high the signal voltage is higher than the trigger level 0 low the signal voltage is lower than the trigger level X Don t care the channel does not affect the trigger Without MSO option the pattern has 4 or 2 bits depending on the number of channels lt ch1 gt lt ch2 gt lt ch3 gt lt ch4 gt With MSO option the pattern has 18 or 20 bits lt ch1 gt lt ch2 gt lt ch3 gt l
452. o the pods of digital channels as references Remote command REFCurve lt m gt SOURce on page 322 REFCurve lt m gt SOURce CATalog on page 323 Update Stores the waveform defined as the Source to the selected reference waveform The reference waveform is kept until you update or load another waveform to the reference See also chapter 5 1 1 Displaying a Reference Waveform on page 74 Remote command REFCurve lt m gt UPDate on page 323 Visible Displays or hides the selected reference waveform Remote command REFCurve lt m gt STATe on page 322 Save Opens the Save menu with basic functions to save the equation set See Save Menu on page 220 Remote command REFCurve lt m gt SAVE on page 323 Load Provides functions to load reference data Reference Load Selects one of the four possible internal reference storages See also chapter 5 1 Using References on page 74 Load Load Opens the Load menu and a file explorer to select the reference waveform file for load ing See Load Menu on page 221 Remote command REFCurve lt m gt LOAD on page 324 Load Settings Loads the device settings that were used to obtain the stored reference waveform The settings are only available if the file was stored to the internal storage INT REFERENCE and never written to an external storage USB stick Remote command REFCurve lt m gt LOAD STATe on page 324
453. oad Menu on page 221 EE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 109 R amp S RTM20xx FFT FFT Display 8 FFT In addition to signal vs time and signal vs signal displays the frequencies of a signal as determined by FFT analysis can be displayed FFT analysis is configured and activated using the FFT key Analysis is always performed on the signal channel that was most recently activated however you can change the channel source Various parameters concerning the time base scaling and the waveform arithmetic can be configured for the FFT display You can configure FFT either numerically using the softkeys or graphically using the rotary knobs On the FFT display you can perform frequency and level measurements by means of a cursor measurement Automatic measurements are not available 8 1 FFT Display When you activate FFT display two windows are displayed the signal vs time at the top the result of the FFT analysis at the bottom Auto CHL clippingtV 4 DC Refresh Complete Span 6 MHz Center 1 99 MHz 8 MSa Refresh CH1 20mv paaa Y mm A ee eee v EE Z Mode Window Y Y Ser FFT Setup Y t Setup FFT Off Hanning j Gam rm 4 4 4 The display can be restricted to the results for a certain time base extract and to a speci fied frequency range The time range is indicated by white lines in the Y t diagram see also figure 8 1 UMM User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 110 R amp S RTM20xx FFT Configur
454. ode trigger sequence A event has source channel 1 edge trigger on rising edge with DC coupling and HF reject trigger level 1 71 mV B event has source channel 2 edge trigger on rising edge and trigger level 0 V instrument trig gers on the second B event 3 2 Setting Up the Trigger This chapter provides step by step procedures for the important stages of trigger setup The settings mentioned here are described in detail in chapter 3 3 Reference for Trig gers on page 39 3 2 1 Configuring the Trigger Event Prerequisites e Horizontal and vertical settings are set appropriately to the signals e The acquisition is running the RUN CONT key lights green 1 Press the SETUP key in the TRIGGER functional block The Trigger menu opens Press the Source softkey and select the trigger source Press Setup to return to the Trigger menu Press the Type softkey repeatedly until the required trigger type is selected Select Setup oa F o bh Configure the settings for the selected trigger type For details see chapter 3 3 2 3 Edge on page 43 chapter 3 3 2 4 Width on page 45 chapter 3 3 2 5 Video on page 46 chapter 3 3 2 6 Pattern on page 48 chapter 3 3 2 7 Rise Time Fall Time on page 50 chapter 3 3 2 8 Protocol on page 52 E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 37 R amp S9RTM20xx Triggers T Setting Up the Trigger Set the Normal trigger mode Press the AUTO NORMAL key on
455. oding samples and screen output are distin guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quotation marks User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 10 R amp S RTM20xx Acquisition and Waveform Setup Basics 2 Acquisition and Waveform Setup The chapter describes the horizontal and vertical basic settings including the acquisition and probe settings 2 1 Basics This chapter provides background information on the essential settings in the vertical and horizontal systems on acquisition setup and probing 2 1 4 Vertical System The controls and parameters of the vertical system are used to scale and position the waveform vertically 2 1 1 1 Input coupling The input coupling influences the signal path between input connector and the following internal signal stage The coupling can be set to DC AC or ground e DC coupling shows all of an input signal DC coupling is available with 1 MO input impedance to connect standard passive probes DC coupling is the default for 50 O input impedance e AC coupling is useful if the DC component of a signal is of no interest AC coupling blocks the DC component of the signal so that the waveform is centered around zero volts 2 1 1 2 Vertical scale and position Vertical scale and vertical position
456. oducto se emplea de forma sin nima el t rmino CUIDADO A ATENCI N Indica una situaci n de peligro que si no se evita puede causar Las palabras de se al corresponden a la definici n habitual para aplicaciones civiles en el rea econ mica europea Pueden existir definiciones diferentes a esta definici n en otras reas econ micas o en aplicaciones militares Por eso se deber tener en cuenta que las palabras de se al aqu descritas sean utilizadas siempre solamente en combinaci n con la correspondiente documentaci n del producto y solamente en combinaci n con el producto correspondiente La utilizaci n de las palabras de sefial en combinaci n con productos o documentaciones que no les correspondan puede llevar a interpretaciones equivocadas y tener por consecuencia dafios en personas u objetos Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento El producto solamente debe ser utilizado seg n lo indicado por el fabricante respecto a los estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento sin que se obstruya la ventilaci n Si no se siguen las indicaciones del fabricante pueden producirse choques el ctricos incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte En todos los trabajos deber n ser tenidas en cuenta las normas nacionales y locales de seguridad del trabajo y de prevenci n de accidentes 1171 0000 42 07 Page 9 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Si no se convino de otra manera es para los pro
457. ol Analysis SPI SSPI Bus Option R amp S RTM K1 The data bits of a message are grouped by following criteria e Aword contains a number of successive bits The word length is defined in the pro tocol configuration e Aframe contains a number of successive words at least one word For SPI buses the R amp S RTM provides the following trigger possibilities e On frame start or frame end e Onaspecified bit in the message e Ona serial pattern 11 2 2 SPI SSPI Bus Configuration e Comiquiina SPW BUSES vi xir Ree n Rer ea en eer Een aeree rens 156 e SPISSPI Configuration Settings eccessi inaaianei ER 157 11 2 2 1 Configuring SPI Buses You define the input channels for the lines and some bit information on the message 1 Press the PROTOCOL LOGIC key on the front panel If the Logic menu is displayed press Protocol Press the Bus Type softkey and select SPI or SSPI Press Configuration Press Source and select Clk Press Clock and select the input channel of the clock Select the Slope Press Source and select MOSI o N mF V N Press MOSI and select the input channel With Active select the active state of the data high or low 9 If required repeat steps 6 and 7 for the optional MISO line 10 For SPI press Source and select CS Enter the input channel with Chip Select and set the Active state 11 For SSPI press Source and select Time Enter the Idle Time 12 Set
458. ommand CHANnel lt m gt ARIThmetics on page 287 Nx Single Sets the number of waveforms acquired with RUN Nx SINGLE Remote command ACQuire NSINgle COUNt on page 282 No of Averages Defines the number of waveforms used to calculate the average waveform with Wfm Arithmetics Average Only numbers from the 2 progression are available The higher the number the better the noise is reduced Remote command ACQuire AVERage COUNt on page 285 Limit Freq Sets the limit frequency for Wfm Arithmetics Filter The low pass filter has 3 dB attenuation at the given limit frequency Remote command ACQuire FILTer FREQuency on page 287 Waveform Rate Defines the mode to set the sample rate samples per second saved in the memory and the waveform acquisition rate waveforms per second Max Wfm The instrument combines sample rate and memory depth to acquire at Rate maximum waveform acquisition rate In connection with persistence the mode can display rare signal anomalies Note Due to less memory depth aliasing effects may occur Max Sa The instrument acquires the signal at maximum sample rate and uses Rate the full memory depth The result is a waveform with maximum number of waveform samples high degree of accuracy and low risk of aliasing However the waveform acquisition rate is low User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 25 R amp S RTM20xx Acquisition and Waveform Setup EENEG Reference for Waveform Se
459. on the selected measurement type For example for voltage measurement the cursor lines are set to the upper and lower peaks of the waveform For time measurement the cursor lines are set to the edges of two consecutive positive or two consecutive negative pulses Remote command CURSor lt m gt SWAVe on page 331 Set To Screen Resets the cursors to their initial positions This is helpful if the cursors have disappeared from the display or need to be moved for a larger distance Remote command CURSor lt m gt SSCReen on page 331 Prev peak For FFT analysis only sets the selected cursor to the previous left level peak To select the cursor press the NAVIGATION knob Remote command CURSor lt m gt SPPeak on page 331 EE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 84 R amp S RTM20xx Measurements 6 2 Quick Measurements Next peak For FFT analysis only sets the selected cursor to the next right level peak To select the cursor press the NAVIGATION knob Remote command CURSor lt m gt SNPeak on page 331 NAVIGATION Select cursor Press the NAVIGATION rotary knob to select a cursor line If a menu is open it is closed Press the knob repeatedly to select the required cursor line or if Coupling is enabled a pair of coupled cursor lines Move selected cursor Turn the rotary knob to change the position of the selected cursor line Remote command URSor lt m gt X1Position on page 330 URSor m X2Position on
460. onal MISO line Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines lt n gt E Selects the frame 1 n lt o gt si Selects the word number 1 m Return values lt Data gt Decimal value of the data word Usage Query only E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 385 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control es eee ee eg Command Reference 15 2 13 3 SSPI STE Eer Beie ee EE 386 BUS Ke Be e ue e 386 BUS Sb Ser DATA EE 386 BUS b SSPEDATAIPOLatily 2 elation a ERa t a 387 BUsspSSPEBITIN EE 387 BUSSBSISSPEBORDOE edit dente Een iti NEE redd a e OR re rh ee 387 BUSES PESA abad 388 CHANnelzmmzTHbesboldElNDlevel nennen nennen nnne th nns sa sese ni s 388 BUS lt b gt SSPI CLOCk SOURce Source Selects the input channel of the clock line Suffix b 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Parameters Source CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 DO D15 CH3 and CH4 are only available with 4 channel R amp S RTM oscil loscopes RST CH1 BUS lt b gt SSPI CLOCk POLarity lt Polarity gt Selects if data is stored with the rising or falling slope of the clock The slope marks the begin of a new bit Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative POSitive rising slope NEGative falling slope RST POSitive BUS lt b gt SSPI DATA SOURc
461. onization Error type Triggers if synchronization caused an error Remote command TRIGger A LIN SYERror On page 424 Identifier Sets the trigger to a specific identifier or an identifier range Only the 6 bit identifier without parity bits is considered not the protected identifier The first key press enables the Identifier trigger type the second opens the Identi fier menu User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 200 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis m A A A A A n LIN Option R amp S RTM K3 After setting the Compare condition you can enter the value bit by bit by setting the state high low or don t care for each single bit Alternatively you can enter a hexadecimal value for each byte If a label list with node names was loaded and applied in the bus configuration you can select simply the Symbolic ID from the list instead of entering the numeric identifier O Symbolic ID Compare Bit State a es ec Ja Nx Remote command TRIGger A LIN TYPE on page 423 ID IDDT TRIGger A LIN ICONdition on page 425 TRIGger A LIN IDENtifier on page 425 Symbolic ID Identifier If a label list with node names was loaded and applied in the bus configuration you can select simply the node name from the list instead of entering the numeric identifier The instrument trriggers on the identifier of the selected node Compare Identifier Sets the comparison cond
462. ontrol SEE E E S a A A Command Reference Return values lt FrameType gt DATA REMote ERR OVLD Data remote error or overload frame Usage Query only BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt STATus Returns the overall state of the specified frame Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus n Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt FrameStatus gt OK BTST CRCD ACKD CRC EOFD NOACK INSufficient OK frame is valid BTST bit stuffing error occured CRCD wrong CRC delimiter occured ACKD Wrong ACK delimiter occured CRC cyclic redundancy check failed EOFD wrong end of frame NOACK acknowlegde is missing INSufficient frame is not completely contained in the acquisition The acquired part of the frame is valid Usage Query only BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt STARt Returns the start time of the specified frame Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt StartTime gt Range depends on sample rate record length and time base Increment depends on the time base Default unit s Usage Query only EN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 412 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control aT iIia lM Command Reference BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt STOP Returns the end time of the specified frame Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n Return values
463. onventions used in Remote Command Description Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions e Command usage If not specified otherwise commands can be used both for setting and for querying parameters If a command can be used for setting or querying only or if it initiates an event the usage is stated explicitely e Parameter usage If not specified otherwise a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the result of a query Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values e Conformity AAA User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 273 R amp S9RTM20xx Remote Control 15 2 2 Command Reference Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R amp S RTM follow the SCPI syntax rules e Asynchronous commands A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next command starts executing overlapping command is indicated as an Asynchronous com mand e Reset values RST Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument RST command are indicated as RST values if available Common Commands Common commands are described in the IEEE 488 2 IEC 625 2 standard These com mands have the same effect and
464. or to the previous left level peak Usage Event Firmware Software FW 03 700 CURSor lt m gt SNPeak For FFT analysis only sets the selected cursor to the next right level peak Usage Event Firmware Software FW 03 700 CURSor lt m gt TRACking SCALe STATe State Enables the adjustment of cursor lines if the vertical or horizontal scales are changed Suffix lt m gt 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant _ _L__L_____ E_SS SSS User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 331 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BREET Command Reference Parameters lt State gt ON OFF ON Cursor lines keep their relative position to the waveform OFF Cursor lines remain on their position on the display if the scaling is changed RST OFF CURSor lt m gt RESult Returns the measurement result for count mean RMS rise and fall time peak meas urements and burst width Make sure to set CURSor lt m gt FUNCt ion correctly Suffix lt m gt 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Return values lt Value gt Measurement result Usage Query only CURSor lt m gt XDELta INVerse Returns the inverse time difference between the two cursors 1 At Suffix lt m gt 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Return values lt Deltalnverse gt Range 1 00E 026 to 1 00E 026 Increment 0 1 RST 0 Default unit 1 s Usage Query only CURSor lt m gt XDELta VALue Returns the time difference between the two cursors At
465. ore you can start the search you have to con figure the bus correctly and acquire decoded data To search on decoded data use the search type Protocol The source is automatically set to the configured protocol See also chapter 10 Search on page 132 11 5 5 1 CAN Search Setup Protocol L IST A Event Identifier Id amp Error Setup 4 Event Sets the event or combination of events to be searched for Depending on the selected event the appropriate settings in the softkey menu are activated Remote command SEARch PROTocol CAN CONDition on page 418 Frame Setup Selects the frame type to be searched for e User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 194 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis El CAN Option R amp S RTM K3 If you search for remote or data frames the search consideres also the ID type the length of the identifier The setting is only available if Event Frame is selected Remote command SEARch PROToco1 CAN FRAMe on page 418 Error Setup Selects the error type to be searched for You can select one or more error types as search condition The error types are the same as in the CAN trigger setup see Error lt type gt on page 188 The setting is only available if Event Error or ID amp Error is selected Remote command SEARch PROTocol CAN ACKerror on pa
466. osses zero the result would be a range of x to In this case instead of OV the calculation function uses the value that the Least Significant Bit LSB of the operand represents For an 8 bit value for example 1 256 You can limit the zero crossings of the operand by using the Maxi mum operator This limitation results in a smaller result range and a finer resolution Inverts all voltage values of the operand i e all values are mirrored at the ground level Thus a positive voltage offset becomes negative If the amplitude of the operand is clipped the result is the inverted limi tation A log Op1 Calculates the logarithm to the basis 10 of the operand Note that the logarithm of a negative number is undefined and the result is clipped nur In Op1 Calculates the logarithm to the basis e Euler number of the operand Note that the logarithm of a negative number is undefined and the result is clipped DuTTt User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 106 R amp S RTM20xx Mathematics m Reference for Mathematics Derivative f Op1 The derivative corresponds to the rise of the tangent through a function point and indicates the dimension of the change in quantity of the oper and in time The larger the quantity change of the operand per time becomes the larger the result of the derivative is The calculation is approximated using the secant b
467. ot will be printed on the connected printer whenever you press the PRINT key See also chapter 13 2 2 Quick Access with PRINT key on page 223 1 Configure the PRINT key a Press FILE gt Print Key b Press amp Print Screenshots 2 Make sure that the printer is configured correctly See chapter 13 1 1 1 Configuring the Printer Output on page 215 3 Press the PRINT key Printer Settings Access SETUP key gt More switch to page 2 3 gt Printer etup pai AN prem Format Command Set ame NN n nmn Paper Format Defines the paper format and the orientation portrait or landscape for printing Remote command HCOPy PAGE SIZE On page 442 HCOPy PAGE ORIentation on page 442 Color Mode Defines the color mode for output on printer Grayscale Black and white output Color Color output p User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 216 R amp S RTM20xx Data and File Management Saving and Loading Inverted Inverts the colors of the output i e a dark waveform is printed on a white background Remote command HCOPy COLor SCHeme on page 442 Command Set Sets the printer language that is supported by the printer When you connect a printer the supported command set is shown in the Device Information window 13 2 Saving and
468. otocol specific events 4 Press Setup and configure the selected search type Details chapter 10 3 2 Edge Setup on page 137 chapter 10 3 3 Width Setup on page 138 chapter 10 3 4 Peak Setup on page 139 chapter 10 3 5 Rise Fall Time Setup on page 139 chapter 10 3 6 Runt Setup on page 141 chapter 10 3 7 Data2Clock Search on page 142 chapter 10 3 8 Pattern Search on page 144 chapter 11 5 5 1 CAN Search Setup on page 194 requires option R amp S RTM K3 e chapter 11 6 6 1 LIN Search Setup on page 205 requires option R amp S RTM K3 5 To restrict the time base range of the source waveform to be searched press Gate and define the search area 6 Start continuous acquisition with RUN CONT The online search is performed on the displayed data Search results are updated permanently and indicated at the top of the diagram Stop the acquisition to search the memory data of the latest acquisition To analyze search results 1 Stop the running continuous acquisition or acquire one waveform with RUN Nx SIN GLE 2 Press Events 3 Press View event table in the Events menu The first five search results are listed in a table 4 To select a search result turn the NAVIGATION knob N User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 134 R amp S RTM20xx Search i EE Ss MMM Reference for Search Menu The selected result is highlighted in the table and indicated in the diagram with a magnifier
469. oupling softkey repeatedly to select the correct coupling 6 Select the Bandwidth limit 7 If you use a passive probe adjust the probe settings a Select the Termination input impedance b Select More to switch the menu page ERA lt A gt User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 20 R amp S RTM20xx Acquisition and Waveform Setup Setting up the Waveform c Press the Probe softkey and select the attenuation 8 Use the SCALE rotary knob in the VERTICAL area of the front panel to adjust the vertical scale of the waveform Press the knob to toggle between fine and rough adjustment 9 Use the POSITION rotary knob to adjust the vertical position of the waveform Vertical position is defined by the position of the waveform s zero line and the offset between the zero line and the waveform axis Pressing the knob toggles between these parameters By default offset is disabled Press the Offset softkey in the Channel menu to enable the offset Use the NAVIGATION knob or the POSITION OFFSET knob to adjust Turn clockwise to move the waveform down 10 Proceed with chapter 2 2 3 Setting the Acquisition on page 21 2 2 3 Setting the Acquisition Prerequisites e Probes are connected e Vertical and horizontal settings are adjusted For details on acquisition settings see chapter 2 3 2 Acquisition Menu on page 23 1 Press the ACQUISITION key in the HORIZONTAL area of the front panel 2 Select the Sample
470. pe Protocol LIN Setup Identifier Enor SEY csi pc io ut id e RM eaa dra bb Eau Eee chai ues 200 A ENE E 200 L E 200 EE 200 OC URGE EE 200 E 0 do Rm 201 ENEE 201 EE 201 e X 201 Pete coasted te TP T 201 o EE 201 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 199 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis LIN Option R amp S RTM K3 Identifier aid CANA E 201 nia SUR EE 202 Le Dita ll ii iia 202 L NO of NO cinc 202 Start of Frame Triggers on the stop bit of the sync field Remote command TRIGger A LIN TYPE on page 423 SYNC Wake Up Triggers after a wakeup frame Remote command TRIGger A LIN TYPE on page 423 WKFRame Error lt type gt Identifies various errors in the frame You can select one or more error types as trigger condition The first key press enables the Error trigger type the second opens the Error menu Remote command TRIGger A LIN TYPE on page 423 ERRCondition Checksum lt Error type Triggers on a checksum error The checksum verifies the correct data transmission It is the last byte of the frame response The checksum includes not only the data but also the protected identifier PID Remote command TRIGger A LIN CHKSerror on page 424 Parity Error lt type gt Triggers on a parity error Parity bits are the bits 6 and 7 of the identifier They verify the correct transmission of the identifier Remote command TRIGger A LIN IPERror on page 424 Synchr
471. pendent of the channel waveform settings Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the reference waveform the internal reference storage Parameters lt Scale gt RST 1 00E 004 Default unit s div REFCurve lt m gt HORizontal POSition Position Changes the horizontal position of the reference waveform independent of the channel waveform settings Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the reference waveform the internal reference storage Parameters lt Position gt RST 0 Default unit s L User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 324 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control Command Reference REFCurve lt m gt VERTical SCALe lt Scale gt Changes the vertical scale of the reference waveform Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the reference waveform the internal reference storage Parameters lt Scale gt RST 1 Default unit V div REFCurve lt m gt VERTical POSition lt Position gt Changes the vertical position of the reference waveform Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the reference waveform the internal reference storage Parameters lt Position gt RST 0 Default unit div REFCurve lt m gt DATA Returns the data of the reference waveform for transmission from the instrument to the controlling computer The waveforms data can be used in MATLAB for example To set the export format use FORMat DATA on page 278 Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the reference waveform the internal reference storage Return v
472. pends on the instrument Return values lt Termination gt 500Hm 1MOHm UNKNown Usage Query only E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 298 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BEES Command Reference PROBe lt m gt SETup MODE lt Mode gt Select the action that is started with the probe button Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters lt Mode gt RCONtinuous RSINgle AUToset NOACtion RCONtinuous Run continuous The acquisition is running as long as the probe button is pressed RSINgle Run single starts one acquisition AUTOSET Starts the autoset procedure NOACtion Nothing is started on pressing the micro button RST RCONtinuous PROBe lt m gt SETup NAME Queries the name of the probe Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Return values lt Name gt string Usage Query only PROBe lt m gt SETup OFFSwitch lt DCOffsetOnOff gt Switches the integrated voltmeter of an R amp S active probe on or off The command is only available if an R amp S active probe with R amp S ProbeMeter is used Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters lt DCOffsetOnOff gt ON OFF RST OFF PROBe lt m gt SETup TYPE Queries the type of the probe ERA SSS User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 299 R amp S RTM20xx Re
473. play and save a Frame Table containing decoded data frame number start time of the frame data and state of the frame See also chapter 11 1 5 Frame Table Decode Results on page 154 LEE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 183 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis UART RS 232 Interface Option R amp S RTM K2 TB 1ms T Os Auto CH1 115mV DC 1MSais Real Time Complete SEL EN M 1 389 ms 2 847 ms 0x00 Frames 6 10 23 Protocol Bus Type Display Fig 11 10 Decoded UART signal C1 Data source blue results completely decoded words grey brackets start and end of complete frames green results correct parity bits red results Errors or incomplete word that is not completely contained in the acquisition Change the hor izontal scale or move the Time Reference to get a longer acquisition Example The figure above shows five frames of a UART signal with one source line Table 11 3 Content of the UART frame table Column Description Start time Time of the frame start in relation to the trigger point Data Hexadecimal values of the data words State Overall state of the frame Remote commands on page 0 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 184 R amp S9RTM20xx Protocol Analysis 11 5 11 5 1 CAN Option R amp S RTM K3 US lt b gt UART RX FRAMe lt n gt WCOunt on page 404 US lt b gt UART RX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt o gt STATe on page 0 US lt b gt UART
474. pling gt Couples the frequency span to the RBW Suffix lt m gt 1 4 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Parameters lt SpanRBWCoupling gt ON OFF CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT BANDwidth RESolution RATio lt SpanRBWRatio gt Defines the ratio of span Hz resolution bandwidth Hz The span RBW ratio is half the number of points used for FFT which is defined with manual operation in the menu Suffix lt m gt 1 4 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Parameters lt SpanRBWRatio gt Range The value is changed in 2 n steps from 2 10 to 2415 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 LEE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 351 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BESSERES Command Reference Example CALC MATH FFT BAND RAT 32768 Sets the number of points to 65536 CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT BANDwidth RESolution VALue lt ResolutionBW gt Defines the resolution bandwidth the minimum frequency step at which the individual components of a spectrum can be distinguished Suffix lt m gt 1 4 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Parameters lt ResolutionBW gt Range Depends on various other settings Default unit Hz CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT CFRequency lt CenterFreq gt Defines the position of the displayed frequency domain which is Center Span 2 to Center Span 2 The width of the domain is defined using the CALCulate MATH m FFT SPAN command Suffix m 1 4 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Pa
475. ponsabilidad de conducir el veh culo de manera segura y adecuada El fabricante no asumir ninguna responsabilidad por accidentes o colisiones No utilice nunca el producto dentro de un veh culo en movimiento si esto pudiera distraer al conductor Asegure el producto dentro del veh culo debidamente para evitar en caso de un accidente lesiones u otra clase de dafos Eliminaci n protecci n del medio ambiente 1 Los dispositivos marcados contienen una bater a o un acumulador que no se debe desechar con los residuos dom sticos sin clasificar sino que debe ser recogido por separado La eliminaci n se debe efectuar exclusivamente a trav s de un punto de recogida apropiado o del servicio de atenci n al cliente de Rohde amp Schwarz Los dispositivos el ctricos usados no se deben desechar con los residuos dom sticos sin clasificar sino que deben ser recogidos por separado Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG ha elaborado un concepto de eliminaci n de residuos y asume plenamente los deberes de recogida y eliminaci n para los fabricantes dentro de la UE Para desechar el producto de manera respetuosa con el medio ambiente dir jase a su servicio de atenci n al cliente de Rohde amp Schwarz Si se trabaja de manera mec nica y o t rmica cualquier producto o componente m s all del funcionamiento previsto pueden liberarse sustancias peligrosas polvos con contenido de metales pesados como p ej plomo berilio o n quel Por eso e
476. positive duty cycle The duty cycle is the ratio between the duration of a positve pulse high active and the period of a rectangular waveform The measurement requires at least one complete period of a triggered signal The result is the measured value as a percentage of the signal period and is displayed as Dty in the result table Duty Cycle Measures the positive duty cycle The duty cycle is the ratio between the duration of a negative pulse low active and the period of a rectangular waveform The measurement requires at least one complete period of a triggered signal The result is the measured value as a percentage of the signal period and is displayed as Dty in the result table Rise Time Measures the rise time of the left most rising edge within the displayed section of the waveform The rise time is determined as the time it takes the signal to rise from the lower reference level to the upper reference level which are set with Upper Level and Lower Level in the Reference Level menu The measurement result is displayed as tr in the result table See also Reference Level Upper Middle Lower Levels on page 97 Fall Time Measures the falling time of the left most falling edge within the displayed section of the waveform The fall time is determined as the time it takes the signal to fall from the upper reference level to the lower reference level which are set with Upper Level and Lower Level in the Refere
477. priately to the service request SSES User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 270 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BEES Basics Serial Poll In a serial poll just as with command STB the status byte of an instrument is queried However the query is realized via interface messages and is thus clearly faster The serial poll method is defined in IEEE 488 1 and used to be the only standard possi bility for different instruments to poll the status byte The method also works for instru ments which do not adhere to SCPI or IEEE 488 2 The serial poll is mainly used to obtain a fast overview of the state of several instruments connected to the controller Query of an instrument status Each part of any status register can be read using queries There are two types of com mands e The common commands ESR IDN IST STB query the higher level reg isters e The commands of the STATus system query the SCPI registers STATus QUEStionable The returned value is always a decimal number that represents the bit pattern of the queried register This number is evaluated by the controller program Queries are usually used after an SRQ in order to obtain more detailed information on the cause of the SRQ Decimal representation of a bit pattern The STB and ESR registers contain 8 bits the SCPI registers 16 bits The contents of a status register are specified and transferred as a single decimal number To make this possible
478. queries in one message The response to a query combined in a program message with commands that affect the queried value is not predictable The following commands always return the specified result FREQ STAR 1GHZ SPAN 100 FREQ STAR Result 1000000000 1 GHz Whereas the result for the following commands is not specified by SCPI FREQ STAR 1GHz STAR SPAN 1000000 The result could be the value of STARt before the command was sent since the instru ment might defer executing the individual commands until a program message terminator is received The result could also be 1 GHz if the instrument executes commands as they are received o As a general rule send commands and queries in different program messages ERECTAE N User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 259 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control Basics Example Overlapping command with OPC The instrument implements SINGle as an overlapped asynchronous command Assuming that SING1e takes longer to execute than OPC sending the following com mand sequence results in initiating a sweep and after some time setting the OPC bit in the ESR SINGle OPC Sending the following commands still initiates a sweep SINGle OPC CLS However since the operation is still pending when the instrument executes CLS forcing it into the Operation Complete Command Idle State OCIS OPCc is effectively skipped The OPC bit is not set until the instrument executes anothe
479. r OPC command 15 1 5 1 Preventing Overlapping Execution To prevent an overlapping execution of commands one of the commands OPC OPC or WAI can be used All three commands cause a certain action only to be carried out after the hardware has been set By suitable programming the controller can be forced to wait for the corresponding action to occur Table 15 2 Synchronization using OPC OPC and WAI Com Action Programming the controller mand OPC Sets the Operation Complete bit in the ESR e Setting bit 0 in the ESE after all previous commands have been execu e Setting bit 5 in the SRE ted e Waiting for service request SRQ OPC Stops command processing until 1 is returned Sending OPC directly after the command This is only the case after the Operation Com whose processing should be terminated before plete bit has been set in the ESR This bit indi other commands can be executed cates that the previous setting has been com pleted WAI Stops further command processing until all Sending WAI directly after the command commands sent before WAI have been exe whose processing should be terminated before cuted other commands are executed Command synchronization using WAI or OPC appended to an overlapped command is a good choice if the overlapped command takes only little time to process The two synchronization techniques simply block overlapped execution of the command For time consu
480. r 6 3 1 Measurement Types and Results on page 87 Remote command MEASurement lt m gt MAIN on page 336 MEASurement m RESult ACTual on page 340 LEE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 95 R amp S RTM20xx Measurements AI sE Automatic Measurements Source Selects one of the active signal reference or math waveforms as the source of the selected measurement Available sources depend on the selected measurement type If MSO option R amp S RTM B1 is installed active digital channels are available as mea surement sources for time and count measurements Remote command MEASurement lt m gt SOURce on page 338 Statistic Opens a submenu to enable and configure up to four statistics Statistic wc N 7a Ny Meas Place Statistic No of Averages Reset Clear All eee Meas Place lt Statistic Selects the measurement for which statistical evaluation is configured Statistic Statistic Activates or deactivates the statistical evaluation for the selected measurement 1 4 Remote command MEASurement lt m gt STATistics ENABle on page 342 No of Averages lt Statistic Sets the number of measured waveforms used for calculation of average and standard deviation The maximum number is 1000 Remote command MEASurement m STATistics WEIGht on page 342 Reset Reset All Statistic Deletes the statistical results for the current measurement or all measurements respec tivley and
481. r EN NEE 391 TWRIGGemAIZC EE 391 TRIGAL POB FSE E 392 ERA SSSR SSS User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 389 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control aaa CBZ 2 A Command Reference TRIGger A I2C MODE Mode Specifies the trigger mode for PC Parameters Mode STARt RESTart STOP MACKnowledge PATTern STARt Start of the message The start condition is a falling slope on SDA while SCL is high RESTart Restarted message The restart is a repeated start condition STOP End of the message The stop condition is a rising slope on SDA while SCL is high MACKnowledge Missing acknowledge If the transfer failed at the moment of the acknowledge bit the SCL and the SDA lines are both on high level PATTern Triggers on a set of trigger conditions read or write access of the master to an address or and to a bit pattern in the message For a complete configuration of the pattern mode you have to set TRIGger A 12C ACCess read write access and TRIGger A I2C AMODe and TRIGger A I2C ADDRess address and or TRIGger A I2C POFFset and TRIGger A I2C PLENgth and TRIGger A I2C PATTern pattern RST STARt TRIGger A I2C ACCess Access Toggles the trigger condition between Read and Write access of the master Parameters lt Access gt READ WRITe RST READ TRIGger A I2C AMODe lt AdrMode gt Sets the lenght of the slave address Parameters lt AdrMode gt NORMal EXTended NORMal 7 bit address EXTended 10 bit addres
482. r defined value Access CH N gt More gt Probe e User Unit x100 Back x1 x10 x100 x1000 attenuation factor The keys select a default attenuation factor of the connected probe The vertical scaling and measured values are multiplied by this factor so that the displayed values are equal to the undivided measured signal values To set an arbitrary attenuation factor press the User softkey User user defined attenuation factor You can enter an arbitrary attenuation factor in the range between x0 001 and x1000 The vertical scaling and measured values are multiplied by this factor so that the dis played values are equal to the undivided measured signal values Remote command PROBe m SETup ATTenuation MANual on page 297 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 32 R amp S9RTM20xx Acquisition and Waveform Setup 2 3 3 4 Reference for Waveform Setup Unit Selects the unit that the probe can measure e V for voltage measurements e A for current measurements Remote command PROBe m SETup ATTenuation UNIT on page 297 Probe Menu Active Probe In the probe menu for active probes you can also adjust the offset value for the selected channel Termination and attenuation are read out from the probe and do not need any adjustment Access CH N gt More gt Probe f M EI H Offset ProbeMeter MicroButton Info Keess 9 Offset See OFFSET on page 28 ProbeMeter
483. r on page 433 SEARch PROTocol LIN SYERror on page 433 Symbolic ID If a label list with node names was loaded and applied in the bus configuration you can select simply the node name from the list instead of entering the numeric identifier The instrument trriggers on the identifier of the selected node Identifier Setup Opens the menu to set the identifier pattern if Event Identifier or ID amp Data or ID amp Error is selected The settings are the same as for the setup of the identifier trigger see Identifier on page 200 Remote command SEARch PROTocol LIN ICONdition on page 433 SEARch PROTocol LIN IDENtifier on page 433 Data Setup Opens the menu to set the data pattern to be searched if Event ID amp Data is selected After setting the No of Bytes and the Comparison condition you can enter the value bit by bit by setting the state high low or don t care for each single bit Alternatively you can enter a hexadecimal value for each byte The settings are the same as for the setup of the data trigger see Data Setup on page 202 Remote command SEARch PROTocol LIN DLENgth on page 434 SEARch PROTocol LIN DCONdition on page 434 SEARch PROTocol LIN DATA on page 434 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 206 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis m LIN Option R amp S RTM K3 Search results events are marked on the waveform and li
484. ra t nnns intense rennen nennen 341 REFLeveliREEative MIDDI6 2 ri copo er ea Eee PP ope EFE EYE YE EES dE AA EEPE EENE 342 REEL evel REEative MODE eid Ra 341 REFkeve liRELative UPPoet cunas t beet nr ble udo e ec dag der ek 341 RUNGontimols 3 5 21 a ea ep re i thun ere Ce e eri rene 282 QI 282 SEARGCH GON DitiOni C Q 359 SEARch GATE ABSolute START 361 LUU User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 470 R amp S RTM20xx List of Commands SEARch GATE ABSolute STOP uerge eeeegdeee geet 361 SEARCh GATE MOBDE coda Dr Eo ED ER identi UE ER ERI este dre dike ia 361 SGEAbRch MEAGureLEVelPEAK MACGhmtude enne rrenneen rennen nerset rennes 364 SEARch MEASUre PEAK POLa rily ise piece pretenden ede ee pu a ae edet dae ded 364 SEARCh PROTOCOL CAN ACKSON enne neret e aE ETETEA ANRE 419 SEARch PROTOCOI CAN BITSterrors cssicestesccsecscsassicseciecestecocsaercnsesscecsousccssteonsesoanatsotecocsassisderseseasessesteras edad 419 SEARCH PRO Tocoli CAN COND IO Miss s indue ntt ont erkennen ELE ae adi 418 SEARcH PROTOCONCANICRCEGITOM ccccccecssscseersccnccscasstensettecctasteeesstedsocessteedieonscnevteevadendscnssstteosecnsctedveerorsedd 419 SEARch PRO Toco CAN DATA eegen eegen Eugen ERAN EES EE seee Aia 421 SEARCH PRO Tocol CAN DCGONdton A 421 Ee ER dente He ERAN Te UD 421 SGEAbRch PRO Tocol CAN FObRMerror AAA 420 SE
485. rame WAKeup Wakeup frame RST SOF E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 432 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control Command Reference SEARch PROTocol LIN IPERror lt ldParityError gt Searches for parity errors The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol LIN CONDition is set to ERRor or IDERror Parameters dParityError ON OFF RST OFF SEARch PROTocol LIN CHKSerror ChecksumError Searches for checksum errors The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol LIN CONDition is set to ERRor or IDERror Parameters lt ChecksumError gt ON OFF RST OFF SEARch PROTocol LIN SYERror lt SyncError gt Searches for synchronization errors The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol LIN CONDition is set to ERRor or IDERror Parameters lt SyncError gt ON OFF RST OFF SEARch PROTocol LIN ICONdition lt IdCondition gt Sets the comparison condition for the identifier If the pattern contains at least one X don t care you can trigger on values equal or not equal to the specified value If the pattern contains only 0 and 1 you can also trigger on a range greater than or lower than the specified value The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol LIN CONDition is set to IDENtifier IDData Or IDERror Parameters lt ldCondition gt EQUAal NEQual GTHan LTHan RST EQU SEARch PROTocol LIN IDENtifier Identifier Defines the identifier pattern
486. rameters lt CenterFreq gt Range Limited by the first data point minimum and last data point maximum of the FFT curve Increment Depends on the span and the number of data points span RBW ratio Default unit Hz CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT FULLspan Performs FFT calculation for the full frequency span Suffix lt m gt 1 4 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Usage Event CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT SPAN lt FreqSpan gt The span is specified in Hertz and defines the width of the displayed frequency range which is Center Span 2 to Center Span 2 The position of the span is defined using the CALCulate MATH m FFT CFRequency command EE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 352 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BEES Command Reference Suffix lt m gt 1 4 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Parameters lt FreqSpan gt Range Depends on various other settings mainly on time base and span RBW ratio Increment Only 1 2 5 in first digit Default unit Hz CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT STARt lt StartFreq gt Defines the start frequency of the displayed frequency domain at the left display edge Center Span 2 You can set start and stop frequency instead of defining a center frequency and span Suffix lt m gt 1 4 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Parameters lt StartFreq gt Range Depends on various other settings mainly on time base span RBW ratio and center frequency Default unit Hz
487. rator to obtain a valid IP address Configuring LAN parameters manually no DHCP 1 2 3 4 Disconnect the R amp S RTM from the LAN Restart the instrument Press the SETUP key and then the Interface softkey Wait about two minutes until the LAN menu is available Press the LAN softkey Note By default the instrument is set to use DHCP If the instrument cannot find a DHCP server it takes some time until the LAN settings can be accessed Press the Parameter softkey The LAN settings dialog box is displayed User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 244 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control Basics TB 100us T 0s Auto CHT 0V 4 DC 10 MSais Real Time ATEO EA AA Y Ethernet Settings 00 50 ce2 465 11 7c HTTP Port B Transfer Auto 100 Mbps Full Duplex Some data is displayed for information only and cannot be edited This includes the MAC physical address of the connector and the Link status information 6 If the LAN does not support DHCP or the instrument is directly connected with a computer disable DHCP Press the DHCP softkey so that it is not highlighted off 7 Define the IP address of the instrument by entering each of the four blocks individu ally a Define the first block number using the Navigation knob b Press Next to move to the next block and define the number c When the IP address is complete press Down to continue with the next setting 8 Define the Subnetm
488. record length and time base Increment depends on the time base Default unit s Query only BUS lt b gt SPI FRAME lt n gt DATA MOSI Returns the data words of the specified frame of the MOSI line Suffix lt b gt lt n gt Return values lt DataMosi gt Example Usage 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Selects the frame List of decimal values of data bytes BUS SPI FRAM3 DATA MOSI gt 94 177 171 60 242 219 100 0 Query only BUS lt b gt SPI FRAME lt n gt DATA MISO Returns the data words of the specified frame of the MISO line Suffix lt b gt lt n gt Return values lt DataMiso gt Example Usage 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Selects the frame List of decimal values of data bytes BUS SPI FRAM3 DATA MISO gt 94 177 171 60 242 219 100 0 Query only BUS lt b gt SPI FRAME lt n gt WCOunt Returns the number of words in the specified frame User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 383 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control Suffix lt b gt lt n gt Return values lt WordCount gt Usage Command Reference 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Selects the frame Number of words Query only BUS lt b gt SPI FRAME lt n gt WORD lt o gt STARt Returns the start time of the specified data word
489. rence waveform and also on the resulting waveform of an FFT analysis and on XY waveforms If MSO option R amp S RTM B1 is installed active digital channels are available as mea surement sources for time and count cursor measurements and the bit values of the pods can be determined 6 1 1 Cursor Measurements Types and Results Cursor measurements are based on automatic measurements The cursor measurement is limited to the cursor positions or the part of the waveform between the cursors while automatic measurements considers the complete display of the waveform Thus you can focus the measurement to the interesting part of the waveform by using cursors The results are displayed in the right part of the result table User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 78 R amp S RTM20xx Measurements ee Cursor Measurements TB 50ns T 0s Auto CH1 646 6 mV A AC 5 GSals Realtime Complete For cursor measurements on channel math and reference waveforms various mea surement types are available for example Peak RMS Mean und Count Cursor mea surement is also possible on the results of an FFT analysis It measures the frequencies and levels at the cursor positions and their differences If MSO option R amp S RTM B1 is installed time and count measurements can be performed on active digital channels and the bit values of the pods can be determined Available cursor measurements are oco TE 79 NU EE 80 Voltage A EEEE EEEE E E AES 80 o IPP
490. res ADC samples over a number of subsequent repetitions at different points in time and creates one waveform with higher sample rate from this data At lower time base settings the required sample rate is lower than the ADC sample rate To reduce the sample rate decimation methods are used sample and peak detect As digital waveform data is stored in the memory and the memory can save many wave form records further waveform arithmetic processing is possible average and enve lope waveforms are resulting waveforms created from a composite of sample points taken from multiple acquisitions Another function called smoothing calculates a mean p 9 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 14 R amp S9RTM20xx Acquisition and Waveform Setup 2 1 2 3 Basics value of several adjacent sample points of the same waveform and displays it The result is a moving average that uses the full data and can be used for non periodic signals Acquisition Control You can run the R amp S RTM in two ways e Continuous the instrument acquires data until you stop it manually e NxSingle the instrument samples and processes a specified number of acquisitions The determining point of an acquisition is the trigger The instrument acquires continu ously and keeps the sample points to fill the pre trigger part of the waveform record When th
491. ress the CURSOR key Press the Cursor softkey The Cursor softkey is no longer highlighted no more measurements are performed the cursor lines disappear and the results are removed from the result table Cursor Menu The CURSOR key opens the Cursor menu to configure manual measurements See also chapter 6 1 2 Performing Cursor Measurements on page 81 E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 82 R amp S RTM20xx Measurements Cursor Measurements Voltage Voltage amp Time Ratio Y Count Peak Values RMS Mean y Burst Width Timo H Source HOME SO ME CEN 83 E Ke 83 So decades gege ege ee 83 ee e DEE 84 COMP DEE 84 e EE 84 Set MO ee EE 84 n 84 D Uqnr H ODER 85 NAVIGATION DEDERIS 85 Cursor Activates or deactivates the selected cursor measurement Remote command CURSor lt m gt STATe on page 327 Meas Type Selects the cursor measurement type Depending on the type different results are dis played in the result table For a list of all cursor measurement types and their description see chapter 6 3 1 1 Measurement Types on page 87 Depending on the measurement type two or three cursors are provided which can be set to the required position using the Navigation rotary knob See also To change the position of the cursors on page 82 The measurement type setting is not available for cursor measurments on FFT analysis Remote comma
492. result table Peak Measures the minimum value within the displayed section of the waveform The mea sured value is displayed as Vp in the result table Frequency Measures the frequency of the signal The result is based on the length of the left most signal period within the displayed section of the waveform The measurement value is displayed as f in the result table LEE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 88 R amp S RTM20xx Measurements i a AA A Automatic Measurements Period Measures the length of the left most signal period within the displayed section of the waveform The measurement value is displayed as T in the result table Amplitude Measures the amplitude of a square wave To do so the potential difference between high and low level Vbase and Vtop is calculated The measurement requires at least one complete period of a triggered signal The measured value is displayed as VAmp in the result table Crest factor The crest factor is also known as peak to average ratio It is calculated from the maximum value divided by the RMS value of the waveform The measurement value is displayed as Crest in the result table Crest Ve RMS Top Level Measures the mean value of the high level of a square wave To do so the mean value of the tilt is calculated without the overshoot The measurement and requires at least one complete period of a triggered signal The measured value is displayed as Vtop in
493. rface Activates the LAN interface which allows you to connect the instrument to various other devices Access to the instrument is controlled via its IP address By default the instrument is set to use DHCP If the instrument cannot find a DHCP server it takes about two minutes until the LAN menu is available The interface is configured using the Parameter softkey See also chapter 15 1 2 Set ting Up a LAN Connection on page 243 ees IEEE488 Interface Activates the IEEE488 interface also known as a General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB Using this interface up to 15 devices can be connected to the instrument Each device is identified by a unique number which is defined within the device The interface is configured using the Parameter softkey For details see chapter 15 1 2 Setting Up a LAN Connection on page 243 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 236 R amp S RTM20xx General Instrument Setup a Om e Reference for Setup Parameter Interface Provides a settings dialog to configure the active additional interface Changes are only adopted by the instrument after you press Save DHCP Parameter Interface Activates or deactivates usage of the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP If the network supports dynamic TCP IP configuration using DHCP all address information can be assigned automatically Next Parameter Interface For settings that require several e
494. risk of electric shock Prior to cleaning the product disconnect it completely from the power supply e g AC supply network or battery Use a soft non linting cloth to clean the product Never use chemical cleaning agents such as alcohol acetone or diluents for cellulose lacquers Operation 1 Operating the products requires special training and intense concentration Make sure that persons who use the products are physically mentally and emotionally fit enough to do so otherwise injuries or material damage may occur It is the responsibility of the employer operator to select suitable personnel for operating the products 1171 0000 42 07 Page 4 Basic Safety Instructions 2 Before you move or transport the product read and observe the section titled Transport 3 As with all industrially manufactured goods the use of substances that induce an allergic reaction allergens such as nickel cannot be generally excluded If you develop an allergic reaction such as a skin rash frequent sneezing red eyes or respiratory difficulties when using a Rohde amp Schwarz product consult a physician immediately to determine the cause and to prevent health problems or stress 4 Before you start processing the product mechanically and or thermally or before you take it apart be sure to read and pay special attention to the section titled Waste disposal Environmental protection item 1 5 Depending on the function certain produ
495. rjulp E a ieii 238 Source Automatic measurements sss 96 Cursor softkey Mele rere tre terete erate ee rr 42 SOURCE tJe EE 40 482 R amp S9RTM20xx Index Threshold SPE ya exacts 250 Special characters GE EEN jii Seege ici Configuration st Configuration settings esee 157 Eng rere rte 159 SPI SSPI protocols Trigger settirigs retenti nnt 160 SPI protocol DASICS 155 E ln 264 SRE service request enable register 265 SRQ service request esses 265 270 SSPI protocol lote O PE RE T 155 Statistic SOHINOS cuina 96 Statistical measurements Isemote control 5 rire renis 342 Status I ion deeg 271 Status byte Ile 274 276 Status registers iia 264 CONDition 262 262 262 262 262 A H 262 PTRansition 262 STATus OPERation oooocococccocccconcconcncnnonccancconnnanonanns 267 Status reporting system Common Commandes cococooccccccnconcccnnnnccnnananananinanannnos 274 Status TOeDOFts coute ec eee eds 261 application re ee rei etre tote 270 STB 264 Stop 130 Storage eet UE 218 VICO iii iia 218 directory 218 file name 218 og 217 A satiiria idnianis 217 Rear USB fee ST Ll cl EE 222 Storing Waveforms
496. rn gt Binary pattern with max 32 bit Characters 0 1 and X are allowed RST 1 00000001 TRIGger A UART PLENgth lt PatternLength gt Defines how many symbols build up the serial pattern Parameters lt PatternLength gt Number of symbols Range 1 to 3 Increment 1 RST 1 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 403 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BREET Command Reference TRIGger A UART POFFset lt PatternByteOffset gt Sets the number of symbols before the first symbol of the pattern Parameters lt PatternByteOffset gt Number of ignored symbols Range 0 to 4095 Increment 1 RST 0 UART Decode Results BUS lt 6 gt UART RX FOOU add bacaduusen ess dadeau edades 404 BUS lt b gt UARTRAFRAMe lt n gt WICOQUI icccc cccenscadecaccntctasedesdeneesdadanedudadaecdavarneaddadceaaand 404 BUSsSD UART RX CFRAM snzWORDSo STATe iii eerte e rei KS EEN NEE kx nnn 404 BUS sb x UJART RX FRAMesn WORD o START ceci ita teen iienaa 405 BUS lt b gt UART RX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt 0 gt STOP cccceceececeeeeeeteeceteseeeeseteuaeseteueeseteeees 405 BUS lt b gt UART RX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt 0 gt VALUC cccececeeesteeeeceteteeeeseteeeeseteneeeutanseaee 405 BUS lt b gt UART RX FCOunt Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Return values lt FrameCount gt Usage Query only BUS lt b gt UART RX FRAMe lt n gt WCOunt Suffix lt b gt 1 4 lt n gt lt o gt Return values lt
497. rogressive scanning i for interlaced scanning Remote command TRIGger A TV STANdard on page 307 Signal Selects the polarity of the signal Note that the sync pulse has the opposite polarity If the video modulation is positve the sync pulses are negative If the modulation is negative sync pulses are positive The edges of the sync pulses are used for triggering therefore incorrect polarity setting causes a sporadic triggering by the video information T T v i v Fig 3 3 Positive video signal with negative bi level sync pulse SDTV left and negative signal with positive tri level sync pulse HDTV right Remote command TRIGger A TV POLarity on page 307 Trigger On Toggles between triggering on line starts or frame starts Line aloows to trigger on All Lines or on one specified Line Frame has different effect depending on the selected signal standard e For standards using progressive scanning HDTV 720 1080i the instrument triggers on the frame start e Al other available standards use interlaced scanning and the instrument triggers on the field start You can select the field type to be triggered on using Frame Remote command TRIGger A TV FIELd on page 307 Line Sets an exact line number if Trigger on is Line If the other trigger conditions are also met the oscilloscope triggers exactly on the beginning of the selected line in any field Remote command TRIGger A TV LINE on page 308 All Li
498. rror of the probe to optimize measurement results at small signal levels When you connect an R amp S RT ZSxx active probe to a channel input of the R amp S RTM the oscilloscope recognizes the probe reads the identification and calibration data from the probe box and shows the result in the Setup and Probe Attributes tabs This data together with the deskew time for a given channel is stored and processed by the R amp S RTM If you connect the probe the next time to the same channel the information is fetched and used Differential active probes Differential active probes are designed to measure signals that are referenced against each other and voltages that are not references to ground for example twisted pair signal lines The R amp S RT ZD probes are differential probes with high input impedance they can be used to measure voltages between any two test points Compared with two channel measurement setup with single ended probes the mea surement with differential probes is symmetric due to the same amplification and cable ERA e 1 1 1 1 1 1L LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL LL LL x User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 18 R amp S RTM20xx Acquisition and Waveform Setup El Basics length on both paths It is also immune to interference and noise and occupies only one input channel A differential probe has three sockets the positive signal socket the negative signal socket and the ground socket Di
499. rted e No special characters are allowed e Use slash instead of backslash MIMEMORGD IMCS rm 444 0 AS EE E 444 MMEMO Elke occitano 445 IS Ee e e cui ia dabas idad 445 ll ee ere TEE 445 TEE DCAT E 446 MMEMbry DOATalog LENGI 1 2 ettet pere ad 446 TEE ME KEE 447 MMEMon CATalogl ENG REENEN 447 MMEMBRV COPY TEE 448 MMEMot EE 448 RIM ER KI 448 iu AS E NEE 449 MMEMbDESTORSISTT6 iecit A dn ee eee 449 EE Reng VE 449 MMEMory DRIVes Returns the storage devices available on the R amp S RTM Return values lt Drive gt List of strings for example INT USB_FRONT USB REAR INT internal storage USB FRONT USB connector on the front panel USB REAR USB connector on the rear panel Usage Query only MMEMory MSIS lt MassStoragelS gt Changes the storage device drive Parameters lt MassStoragelS gt One of the available drives INT USB FRONT or USB_REAR User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 444 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control llm M Ma lM Command Reference Example MMEM MSIS USB_FRONT Sets the USB flash drive connected to the front panel as storage device to be used MMEMory CDIRectory lt DirectoryName gt Specifies the current directory for file access Setting parameters lt DirectoryName gt String parameter to specify the directory including the storage device Example MMEM CDIR USB FRONT DATA Example chapter 15 3 3 2 Saving Copying and Loading
500. rtical divisions of the diagram Use the command alternativly instead of CHANne1 lt m gt SCALe Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The maximum channel number is instrument dependent E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 289 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BEES Command Reference Parameters lt Range gt Voltage range value Range 8 00E 003 to 80 without probe attenuation RST 4 00E 002 Default unit V CHANnel lt m gt POSition Position Sets the vertical position of the indicated channel and its horizontal axis in the window Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters lt Position gt Position value given in divisions Range 5 to 5 RST 0 Default unit div CHANnel lt m gt OFFSet lt Offset gt The offset voltage is subtracted to correct an offset affected signal Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters lt Offset gt Offset value Range Values depend on vertical scale and probe attenua tion Increment Value depends on vertical scale and probe attenua tion Default unit V CHANnel lt m gt BANDwidth lt BandwidthLimit gt Selects the bandwidth limit for the indicated channel Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 290 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BEE
501. s RST NORMal User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 390 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BEES Command Reference TRIGger A I2C ADDRess lt AddressString gt Sets the address of the slave device The address can have 7 bits or 10 bits Parameters lt AddressString gt String with max 7 or 10 characters depending on the address length Characters 0 1 and X are allowed but X cannot be assigned to a specified bit If at least one X occurs in the address the complete address is set to X Example TRIG A I2C AMOD NORM TRIG A I2C ADDR 1011 TRIG A I2C ADDR Return value 7bit address 0001011 Example TRIG A I2C AMOD EXT TRIG A I2C ADDR 10X1 TRIG A I2C ADDR Return value 10bit address XXXXXXXXXX TRIGger A I2C PATTern lt DataPattern gt Defines the bit pattern as trigger condition Make sure that the correct pattern length has been defined before with TRIGger A 12C PLENgth Parameters lt DataPattern gt String with max 24 characters 3 byte 8 bit Characters 0 1 and X are allowed X can be assigned to a specified bit If you define a pattern shorter than the pattern length the missing LSB are filled with X If you define a pattern longer than the pattern length the pattern string is not valid Example TRIG A I2C PLEN 2 TRIG A I2C PATT 10X10000XXXX1111 TRIG A I2C PATT Return value 2 bytes 10X10000XXXX1111 Example TRIG A I2C PLEN 1 TRIG A I2C PATT 110 TRIG A I2C PATT
502. s lt StopTime gt Range depends on sample rate record length and time base Increment depends on the time base Default unit s Usage Query only BUS lt b gt LIN FRAMe lt n gt CSSTate Returns the checksum state of the specified frame Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus n Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt ChecksumState gt OK ERR UNDF ERR error UNDF undefined Usage Query only BUS lt b gt LIN FRAMe lt n gt CSValue Returns the checksum value Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n Return values ChecksumValue Decimal value Usage Query only BUS lt b gt LIN FRAMe lt n gt IDPValue Returns the parity value Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus L User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 428 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control EELENMNLUGCCMMRAMGN gasnn Command Reference n Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt IdentifierParityValue gt Decimal value Usage Query only BUS lt b gt LIN FRAMe lt n gt IDSTate Returns the identifier state of the selected frame Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus n E Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt IdentifierState gt OK PRERror UVAL INSufficient PRERror parity error UV
503. s 0 No error Usage Query only SCPI confirmed SYSTem ERRor ALL Queries the error event queue for all unread items and removes them from the queue The response is a comma separated list of error number and a short description of the error in FIFO order Positive error numbers are instrument dependent Negative error numbers are reserved by the SCPI standard Return values Error List of Error event_number Error event_description gt Device dependent info If the queue is empty the response is 0 No error Usage Query only SCPI confirmed SYST PRESet Resets the instrument to the default state has the same effect as RST Usage Event Status Reporting STATus OPERation Register The commands of the STATus OPERation subsystem control the status reporting structures of the STATus OPERation register See also chapter 15 1 6 1 Structure of a SCPI Status Register on page 262 e STATus OPERation Register on page 267 EMN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 453 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control ee CeC 0RBBZZ we Command Reference The following commands are available STATUSOPRERAUONIGCONDINGA EE 454 STATUS OPERAUOD ENA Ble 2 21 er deed ASA 454 STATUSOPERAtiION NTRANS EE 454 STATUS OPERation PT RENSHION E 454 STATUSOP BR ation RT KE 454 STATus OPERation CONDition Returns the of the CONDition part of the operational status register Return values lt Condition gt Condition b
504. s M sean e EA dE EE AER 223 RE 223 OE O Eeer See 223 Source Opens the Load menu and a file explorer to select the source file of the import export operation See Load Menu on page 221 Destination Opens the Storage menu and a file explorer to select the destination of the import export operation See Storage Directory Menu on page 221 Import Export Copies the selected source file to the specified file in the selected destination directory Note If a file with the same file name already exists in the destination directory it will be overwritten without notification Remote command MMEMo r y COPY on page 448 13 2 2 Quick Access with PRINT key The PRINT key is a shortcut key that initiates the associated action With this key it is easy to save for example a series of waveform data or screenshots You can assign one of the following actions to the PRINT key e Save device settings e Save a waveform e Save a screenshot e Save a screenshot and the device settings e Print a screenshot Saving data You also can save data without changing the behavior of the PRINT key by pressing Save for the selected data type in the FILE menu User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 223 R amp S9RTM20xx Data and File Management 13 2 2 1 13 2 2 2 Saving and Loading Configuring the PRINT Key Behavior The PRINT key can either be used to print screenshots to a connected printer or to save data to a specifie
505. s above the selected limit are removed to 200MHz reduce noise at different levels These bandwidth limits are indicated 20MHz by the icon BL in the waveform label The 400 MHz filter is not available for 350 MHz instruments R amp S RTM203x Remote command CHANnel lt m gt BANDwidth on page 290 Offset See OFFSET on page 28 Invert Turns the inversion of the signal amplitude on or off To invert means to reflect the voltage values of all signal components against the ground level Inversion affects only the display of the signal but not the trigger For example if the oscilloscope triggers on the rising edge the trigger is not changed by inversion but the actually rising edge is displayed as falling edge Inversion is indicated by a line above the channel name in the waveform label Remote command CHANnel lt m gt POLarity on page 291 Y Scale See SCALE Y Scale on page 29 Probe Opens the Probe menu The menu is different for active and passive probes chapter 2 3 3 3 Probe Menu Passive Probe on page 32 chapter 2 3 3 4 Probe Menu Active Probe on page 33 Deskew Deskew compensates delay differences between channels caused by the different length of cables probes and other sources Correct deskew values are important for accurate triggering Signals which are routed over lines with different lengths have a different propagation delay If high speed signals are measured this delay may lead to a no
506. s are identical to the write access address The third byte repeats the address bits of the first byte and sets the read bit SLAVE ADDRESS SLAVE ADDRESS SLAVE ADDRESS IA m 1st 7 BITS 2nd BYTE 1st 7 BITS 11110XX repeated 11110 XxX reserved MSB its LSB Start reserved MSB SR Fig 11 6 10 bit address read access Trigger The R amp S RTM can trigger on various parts of PC messages The data and clock lines must be connected to the input channels triggering on math and reference waveforms is not possible You can trigger on e Start or stop condition e Repeated start condition e Transfer direction read or write User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 166 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis 11 3 2 11 3 2 1 11 3 2 2 PC Option R amp S RTM K1 e Bytes with missing acknowledge bit e Specific slave address e Specific data pattern in the message lC Configuration Configuring PC The configuration of the DC is simple only assign the two lines to input channels 1 Press the PROTOCOL LOGIC key on the front panel If the Logic menu is displayed press Protocol Press the Bus Type softkey and select I2C Press Configuration Press Clock SCL and select the channel connected to the clock line Press Data SDA and select the channel connected to the data line N Oo a F o N Press Find level or set the threshold manually for each channel See To set the logic threshold for analog channels on page
507. s er anpa naan aaa AE Aa Sna A Ea AA AATA a AS AAAS aEEs 208 Digital C hanne lS ssstiiarisna irritar 209 Digital Channels Configuration Gettmgs cnc cnn 209 A E 211 Analyzing Parallel Buses 4 iile eeedis rare dae 211 Parallel Clocked BUS eiii riada Mod ture e AEN 212 Parallel Bus Unclocked tite reete ae bec deba Ree Ehe dee 213 Data and File Management eeeeeeeeeee nn 215 ib 215 us E EE 215 Printer Settings E 216 Saving and W ET Ta e EE 217 Storage Locations 217 Quick Access with PRINT key 223 Breuer 225 Ee 227 SS CROC E 230 References Masks and Equation Sets Import EXpot cccccscecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 232 General Instrument Set iii 233 Firmware and Option E 233 Updating FIWO ea a E a 233 Activating Ee e EE 234 Reference for Set cional RE earn 234 Remote CON a tet ete tata a dades 241 BASICS oi iccsscceccectsciecidicscanceiscceasanecsdinesnceetcnesacaesctevecuesctecesacdecnetvecdsed ssusnauedustsusautetiiedeaaes 241 Remote Control Interfaces 2 dete ees onde dns HARE Maas dee 241 Setting Up a LAN Cornectlon 2 croceo d cre ec aea oce e NEE 243 EE 5 _ e _ EEK User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 7 R amp S9RTM20xx Contents 15 1 3 15 1 4 15 1 5 15 1 6 15 1 7 15 2 15 2 1 15 22 15 2 3 15 2 4 15 2 5 1
508. s occur notifi cation by a sound stop of acquisition printout or saving a screenshot saving the wave form data EE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 122 R amp S9RTM20xx Masks About Masks Remote commands for mask test results e MASK COUNt on page 357 e MASK VCOunt on page 357 e MASK RESet COUNter on page 357 File Formats for Masks Data of masks is always saved as a succession of pairs of values lower and upper limit and the pairs are written as two consecutive single values Depending on the file format only amplitude values are stored or the amplitude values are stored together with their sample index Amplitude values are not saved as voltage values but as division values The minimum value for evaluation is 5 12 DIV the maximum is 5 12 DIV The internal vertical range of the instrument exceeds the visible vertical range of 4 DIV With export you can convert the MSK file to CSV TXT or BIN formats Import is possible for MSK and CSV files MSK Format MSK is the specific binary format for masks of the R amp S RTM It contains pairs of amplitude values in divisions their sample indexes and current instrument settings Thus the amplitude values are not related to time and voltage The data can be loaded back to the instrument for further use The format is not intended for analysis outside the R amp S RTM CSV Format In a Comma Separated Values text file the waveform is stored in a two colu
509. s width and in addition a clock line and a chip select line are defined Access PROTOCOL LOGIC gt if Logic menu is displayed Protocol gt Bus Type Parallel Clocked Configuration Bus width Chip Select Active Clock Slope Back TC HI CE NA gt Bus width Sets the number of lines to be analyzed The maximum number is 14 bits if all digital channels are used DO and D1 are reserved for chip select and clock Remote command BUS lt b gt CPARallel WIDTh on page 438 Chip Select The chip select must be connected to DO Active Selects wether the chip select signal is high active high 1 or low active low 1 Remote command BUS lt b gt CPARallel CS POLarity on page 438 Clock The clock must be connected to D1 E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 212 R amp S9RTM20xx Mixed Signal Option MSO R amp S RTM B1 m NOO S M M M M M M M Mc r r ee Parallel Buses Slope Selects if the data is sampled on the rising or falling slope of the clock or on both edges of a double data rate clock The clock slope marks the begin of a new bit Remote command BUS b CPARallel CLOCK SLOPe on page 438 12 3 2 2 Parallel Clocked Bus Decode Results You can enable the decoding in the Protocol main menu Decode shows the decoded values below the waveforms in the format selected with
510. se width the nominal value for comparisons Parameters Width Range Depends on various settings mainly time base and sample rate RST 200e 6 Default unit s Firmware Software FW 03 700 SEARch TRIGger RUNT DELTa lt DeltaWidth gt Sets a range At to the reference pulse width set with SEARch TRIGger RUNT WIDTh if SEARch TRIGger RUNT RANGe on page 367 is set to WI THin or OUTSide Parameters lt DeltaWidth gt Range Depends on various settings mainly time base and sample rate RST 50e 6 Default unit s Firmware Software FW 03 700 Data2Clock Search Configuration SEARch TRIGger DATatoclockCSOUree 122 4 1 AER ER SEENEN dE 368 SEARch TRIGger DATatoclocke OEEVSl 1r eco ein 369 SEARcl TRIGger DATatoclackiDEEVE ictor SEENEN 369 SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock CLEVel DEL Ta 369 SEARCH RiGgenDATateclock DUE Vel DELTQ gege cote poe naiiai aa 369 SEARch TRIGger DATatoclockkCEDGOS eet EAR SEENEN 369 GEARch TRilGoerDATatochockHTlMe eene nennen nennen nnne rr nennen 369 SEARchETRIGger DATatoclocksS FIM acci once egeta utbs odio t ne prenne ke uen AEN 370 SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock CSOurce lt ClockSource gt Selects the input channel of the clock signal Parameters lt ClockSource gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MA1 MA2 MA3 MA4 MAS RE1 RE2 RE3 RE4 RST CH1 Firmware Software FW 03 800 EN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 368 R amp
511. setting the event number TRTGger B MODE must be set to EVENts Parameters lt EventCnt gt Number of B events Range 1 to 65535 Increment 1 RST 1 EM User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 313 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control m o CO A e Command Reference TRIGger B HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt Sets a hysteresis range around the trigger level of the B trigger event If the signal jitters inside this range and crosses the trigger level thereby no trigger event occurs Parameters lt Hysteresis gt AUTO SMALI MEDium LARGE RST AUTO 15 2 6 Display 15 2 6 1 Basic Display Settings This chapter describes commands that configure the screen display General Display Settings DISPlay MODE EE 314 DISPlay PALEO iia aE EET A AE A EEEE ANAE EEEE 314 DISPlay MODE lt Mode gt Sets the diagram mode Parameters lt Mode gt YT XY YT Default time diagram with a time axis in x direction and the signal amplitudes displayed in y direction XY XY diagram combines the voltage levels of two waveforms in one diagram RST YT DISPlay PALette Palette Sets the color and brightness of the displayed waveform samples depending on their cumulative occurance User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 314 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control oe ee A nn Command Reference Para
512. sis requires additional options For protocol setup and trigger settings see chapter 11 Protocol Analysis on page 148 To trigger on parallel buses use the pattern trigger See chapter 3 3 2 6 Pattern on page 48 3 3 2 9 B Setup The B trigger is a second edge trigger event that can be combined with a preceeding edge trigger event The conditions of this second event are considered when the condi tions of the main event sees are met B Setup mmm B Source Level gt On Time Hysteresis B x a Back N B Source Selects one of the input channels as B trigger source Press the softkey repeatedly until the required source is selected Remote command TRIGger B SOURce on page 312 Slope Sets the edge for the B trigger event Positive Selects the rising edge that is a positive voltage change Negative Selects the falling edge that is a negative voltage change Both Selets the rising as well as the falling edge Remote command TRIGger B EDGE SLOPe on page 312 Level Sets the trigger level for the B trigger event Remote command TRIGger B LEVel on page 312 EN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 52 R amp S RTM20xx Triggers m SS SS Reference for Triggers Trigger On Sets an additional delay condition for the B event time delay or event delay According to this selection set also Time or Events to define the condition co
513. st one X don t care you can trigger on values equal or not equal to the specified value If the pattern contains only 0 and 1 you can also trigger on a range greater than or lower than the specified value The command is relevant if TRIGger A LIN TYPE is set to ID or IDDT Parameters lt IdentifierCondition gt EQUal NEQual GTHan LTHan RST EQ TRIGger A LIN IDENtifier Identifier Defines the identifier pattern The command is relevant if TRIGger A LIN TYPE is set to ID or IDDT Parameters Identifier String containing binary pattern Characters 0 1 and X are allowed Enter the 6 bit identifier without parity bits not the pro tected identifier TRIGger A LIN DATA Data Defines the data pattern The number of bytes in the data pattern is defined with TRIGger A LIN DLENgth The command is relevant if TRIGger A LIN TYPE is set to IDDT Parameters lt Data gt String containing binary pattern with max 64 bit Characters 0 1 and X are allowed Make sure to enter complete bytes TRIGger A LIN DCONdition lt DataCondition gt Sets the comparison condition for data If the pattern contains at least one X don t care you can trigger on values equal or not equal to the specified value If the pattern contains only 0 and 1 you can also trigger on a range greater than or lower than the specified value The command is relevant if TRIGger A LIN TYPE is set to IDDT N User Manual 13
514. state corresponds to a logic 1 and the start bit to a logic 0 Alternative command for BUS lt b gt UART DATA POLarit y Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Parameters lt IdleState gt IDLLow IDLHigh IDLLow idle low low 1 IDLHigh idle high high 1 RST IDLH BUS lt b gt UART DATA POLarity lt Polarity gt Defines if the transmitted data on the bus is high high 1 or low low 1 active Alternative command for BUS lt b gt UART POLarity Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative POSitive high active NEGative low active RST POS BUS lt b gt UART SSIZe lt SymbolSize gt Sets the number of data bits in a message Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines EN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 400 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control Parameters lt SymbolSize gt Command Reference Range 5 to 9 Increment 1 RST 8 Default unit Bit BUS lt b gt UART PARity lt Parity gt Defines the optional parity bit that is used for error detection Suffix lt b gt Parameters lt Parity gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines ODD EVEN NONE See Parity on page 178 RST NONE BUS lt b gt UART SBIT lt StopBitNumb
515. sted in the event table as usual Instead of the event table you can display the frame table where the search results are also marked The event flags are not saved in the csv file of the frame table TB 2ms T 79 88ms Auto CH1 4 44 V DC 500kSa s Real Time Complete Start time 46 701 ms O Eu pe Ligh 72 910 ms 17 abl 94 560 ms aster Requ Frames 7 11 15 Protocol Event Symbolic ID Identifier Id amp Error Ignition_Info Setup Fig 11 17 Search for data frames with 11 bit identifier search results are marked in frame table and on the decoded data User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 207 R amp S9RTM20xx Mixed Signal Option MSO R amp S RTM B1 About MSO 12 Mixed Signal Option MSO R amp S RTM B1 The Mixed Signal Option R amp S RTM B1 adds logic analyzer functions to the classical oscilloscope functions Using the MSO option you can analyze and debug embedded systems with mixed signal designs that use analog signals and correlated digital signals simultaneously 12 1 About MSO The Mixed Signal Option provides 16 digital channels grouped in two logic probes pods with 8 channels each The instrument ensures that analog and digital waveforms are timealigned and synchronized so that critical timing interactions between analog and digital signals can be displayed and tested The automatic alignment compensates the skew between the probe connectors of the analog channels and the probe boxes of the digital ch
516. sults You can enable the decoding in the Protocol main menu Decode shows the decoded values below the waveforms in the format selected with Display Additionally you can display the binary signal with Bits See also chapter 11 1 2 Protocol Common Settings on page 149 Additionally you can display and save a Frame Table containing decoded data frame number start time of the frame frame type identifier data length code data checksum and state of the frame See also chapter 11 1 5 Frame Table Decode Results on page 154 L User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 192 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis CAN Option R amp S RTM K3 TB 200ys T 16 3ms J Auto CH1 3 42V DC 5MSais Real Time Complete Data 4 1846 51B1 g 4 4E15 55 ms Data DA2 Ignition In 4 7061 C3CB 0999 CRC 75 ms Err Frame 19 ms Data Fig 11 12 Decoded CAN signal with frame table and applied label list violet identifier gray DLC data length code blue data words red error occured error frame Table 11 4 Content of the CAN frame table Column Description Start time Time of frame start in relation to the trigger point Type Frame type Data Remote Error or Overload ID Identifier value hexadecimal value Label Symbolic label available if a label list was loaded and applied DLC Data length code number of data bytes Data Hexadecimal values of the data bytes CRC Hexadecimal value of the C
517. t RAMe lt n gt RAMe lt n gt RAMe lt n gt RAMe lt n gt RAMe lt n gt AACCess on page 394 RAMe lt n gt RAMe lt n gt ADBStart on page 395 ADDRess on page 395 RAMe lt n gt AMO RAMe lt n gt RAMe lt n gt RAMe lt n gt RAMe lt n gt RAMe lt n gt RAMe lt n gt RAMe lt n gt DATA on page 392 RAMe lt n gt STATus on page 393 STARt on page 393 STOP on page 394 ACCess on page 394 ACOMplete on page 395 ADEVice on page 396 De on page 396 ASTart on page 396 BCO BYT BYT BYT unt on page 397 E lt o gt ACCess on page 397 E lt o gt ACKStart on page 397 E lt o gt COMPlete on page 398 BYT BYT E lt o gt STARt on page 398 E lt o gt VALue on page 398 11 4 UART RS 232 Interface Option R amp S RTM K2 11 4 1 The UART RS232 Interface The Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter UART converts a word of data into serial data and vice versa It is the base of many serial protocols like of RS 232 The UART uses only one line or two lines for transmitter and receiver Data transfer The data is transmitted in symbols also referred to as words or characters Each symbol consists of a start bit several data bits an optional parity bit and one or more stop bits Several symbols can form a frame or package The end of a frame is marked by a pause between two symbols Fig 11 9 Bit order in a UART word symbol e The start
518. t OK ERRor INSufficient Usage Query only BUS lt b gt PARallel FRAMe lt n gt STARt BUS lt b gt CPARallel FRAMe lt n gt STARt Returns the start time of the specified frame Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines lt n gt Selects the frame Return values lt StartTime gt Default unit s Usage Query only BUS lt b gt PARallel FRAMe lt n gt STOP BUS lt b gt CPARallel FRAMe lt n gt STOP Returns the end time of the specified frame Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines n Selects the frame Return values lt StopTime gt Default unit s Usage Query only IESSE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 440 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BEES Command Reference 15 2 15 Data and File Management This chapter describes commands on how to print and save screenshots and how to manage measurement settings and data EE e EE 441 e Saving and Loading Data MMEMory Commandes AAA 443 15 2 15 1 Screenshots This chapter describes remote commands used to print and save screenshots FAC OP yD ES WELT E 441 IMEEM fay EEN 441 lee EE 442 lee e 442 lee EE 442 HCOPy PAGE OR entation EE 442 HCOPY ele 442 Gv Tem CGOMMunicate Ph lNter SEL ect 443 SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate FIRSt cceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeeeaeaeees 443 SYSTem COMMunicate PRINt
519. t window Remote command TIMebase ZOOM SCALe on page 320 Trigger Offset Defines the horizontal position of the trigger point in relation to the reference point to the zero point of the grid The value is indicated by T in the information bar above the window The reference point is set with SETUP gt Time Reference Note If a zoom or FFT window is displayed and Time Control is selected the trigger offset can be adjusted using the horizontal POSITION rotary knob See also e POSITION on page 23 e Time Reference on page 235 e To configure the original Y t diagram on page 69 Remote command TIMebase POSition on page 284 Zoom Time Defines the offset of the trigger point to the reference point Os in the zoom window The offset determines the position of the zoom area that is displayed in the zoom window Remote command TIMebase ZOOM TIME on page 320 ERA e e LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLULLLLX User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 70 R amp S RTM20xx Display BRENNEN Markers Zoom Off Closes the zoom window and returns to the previous display Remote command TIMebase ZOOM STATe on page 320 4 4 Markers Markers allow you to mark certain positions on the screen e g a rising or falling edge or an unexpected signal value or a search result You can then use the markers to identify areas of interest you want to zoom into and quickly move through the data Two marker types ar
520. t ReferencePoint gt Sets the reference point of the time scale Time Reference in of the display The reference point defines which part of the waveform is shown If the trigger position is zero the trigger point matches the reference point See also TIMebase POSition on page 284 Parameters lt ReferencePoint gt Range 10 to 90 Increment 10 RST 50 Default unit Acquisition NEE 284 ACQUIS t 285 ACQuire INTerpolate ANEREN ENEE EEN 285 ACQUIRGIAV ERAGE COUN EE 285 ACQUTSWRATE EE 286 CHANG Sit d coc c i iret eeepc dado 286 Cl eler ET MET oat censeo ded i cosas dec dana EENS danda opm EES 287 Tillebase e EE 287 ACUS PIL Ger e 287 ACQUITS POINTS ARATO aorin eani iaaa e iE Aaa a EE Eaa deaa iaaiaee eadi aa 288 ACQUE ORATE ET 288 AUToscale Performs an autoset process analyzes the enabled channel signals and obtains appro priate horizontal vertical and trigger settings to display stable waveforms Usage Event Asynchronous command S User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 284 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control m O X m Command Reference ACQuire MODE lt AcquisitionMode gt Selects the method of adding waveform points to the samples of the ADC in order to fill the record length Parameters AcquisitionMode RTIMe ETIMe RTIMe Real Time Mode At slow time base settings the sampled points of the input signal are used to build the
521. t ch4 gt lt d0 gt lt d1 gt lt d2 gt lt d15 gt Without MSO option R amp S RTM B1 TRIG A PATT SOUR 1X10 CH1 CH3 and NOT CH4 are logically combined with TRIGger A PATTern FUNCtion CH2 does not matter don t care N User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 308 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control Command Reference Example With MSO option R amp S RTM B1 TRIG A PATT SOUR XXXX111101010011XXXX Analog channels CH1 to CH4 do not matter don t care Digital channels DO to D15 are logically combined with TRIGger A PATTern FUNCtion TRIGger A PATTern FUNCtion Function Sets the logical combination of the trigger states of the channels Parameters Function AND OR AND The required states of all channels must appear in the input signal at the same time OR At least one of the channels must have the required state RST AND TRIGger A PATTern CONDition lt ConditionString gt Sets the trigger point depending on the result of the logical combination of the channel states Parameters lt ConditionString gt TRUE FALSE RST TRUE Time Limitation TRIGger A PATTern MODE lt PatternMode gt Disables the time limitation or sets the time comparison mode Parameters lt PatternMode gt OFF TIMeout WIDTh OFF Disables the time limitation TiMeout Defines how long at least the result of the state pattern condition must be true or false WIDTh Defines a time range for keeping up the true r
522. t has a bandwidth of 5 to 10 times the highest frequency being measured This will preserve the harmonics and thus the waveform integrity Active voltage probes general Active probes require operating power from the instrument and have a proprietary inter face to the instrument Their main qualities are e Low loading on signal source e The probe is automatically recognized by the instrument no adjustment is required e Adjustable DC offset at probe tip allows for high resolution on small AC signals which are superimposed on DC levels e Connections should be as short as possible to keep the usable bandwidth high e The operating voltage range has to be observed e The probe impedance depends on the signal frequency RT ZS single ended active probes and RT ZD differential active probes provide special features for easier use and precise measurements These special featuers are not avail able on RT ZSxxE probes e The micro button on the probe head remotely controls important functions on the instrument like running and stopping the acquisition autoset auto zero and setting the offset to mean value e The R amp S ProbeMeter measures DC voltages between the probe tip and the ground connection with very high precision The result is displayed on the instrument s screen So you can check DC voltages with different levels without having to adjust the measurement range of the oscilloscope The R amp S ProbeMeter also measures the zero e
523. t ice ente peut exuere DE VE VEL HR Be de EE FEE e ERE EE ELDER HE e 412 BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt STATUS cnn rnn nn idies arrancan nan c nr en rra naar nito can cann nin 412 EE CR E ECH e 413 BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMesn gt TYPE nennen mnes rennen rre ten inen enne 411 BUS Dz CAN SGAMblepoint enne nennen nenne tnetretreen rennen inneren enne 406 LEE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 463 R amp S RTM20xx List of Commands BUS lt b gt CAN TYPE EE 406 BUS lt b gt CPARalleli CLOCK SL e 438 BUS lt b gt CPARallel GS POL Any EE 438 BUS lt b gt CPARalle FCO iii dE deed e dee de rct dd tido a 439 BUS b CPARallel FRAMe n DATAQ eeessssssseeseeeeeee nennen tnter annie rar 439 BUS b CPARallel FRAMe n STARt essssssseseessseseeeeenenenninenenn nente sitne tese tn ains ttes etre sensns 440 BUS b CPARallel FRAMe n STATe essentiae tenete carac rana nn nan racer 440 BUS b CPARallel FRAMesn S TOP edicit tede edente tbid eene died ddr 440 BUSsb CPARalleWIDTh rettet titt ee treno ta ta etae iae terga EEN BUS lt b gt DSIGNAIS HM SE RE BUSSO FOR Mat EE deeg BUS lt b I2C CLOCKESOUR CO vuitton li road BUS lt b gt I2C DATA SOURCe BUSsb I2G E GOUDEU ieri cemere tere ee de b or ere eet eee cite rt dette pL ELI CRF NE RN esed eee erste eee 392 BUS b I2C FRAMesn AACCOSS iicet idet tet rr toas
524. t in several ways e Selecta predefined string from the Library e Enter a user defined text using Edit Label Library Label Selects a label text from a list of frequently used terms Edit Label Label Opens the on screen keyboard to enter any label text The maximum name length is 8 characters and only ASCII characters provided on the on screen keyboard can be used Label List Opens the Label list menu to load sort and display a name for each bus node instead of the address or ID on the decoded results display So it is easy to identify the messages of the different bus nodes See chapter 11 1 4 Label List on page 151 11 1 4 Label List For all protocols using ID or address identification it is possible to create label lists con taining addresses or IDs a symbolic name for each node symbolic label and some protocol specific information You can load label lists and activate its usage for decoding As a result an additional Label column appears in the Frame Table containing the symbolic label The frame captions of the decoded signal show the symbolic label instead of the ID or address values so it is easy to identify the messages of the different bus nodes e Content nd Format of the ETT Ee coin ds 151 e Label USMENU kis tects cide ces rece See ld 153 11 1 4 1 Content and Format of the PTT File Label lists are stored as PTT protocol translation table files The PTT file format is an ext
525. t no time values Amplitude values are separated by commas Pairs of values are listed as two subsequent single values without any identification There is no comma at the end of the file Example TXT file 4 00 4 20 4 05 4 25 4 08 4 28 y 74 05 4 25 4 00 4 20 BIN Format BIN files contain binary amplitude values only but no time values Each value has a word size of 8 or 16 or 32 bit the word size is the same throughout the file Words are given in Big Endian order beginning with the MSB Most Significant Byte and ending with the LSB Least Significant Byte Pairs of values are listed as two sub sequent single values without any identification Working with Masks Masks define a frame with which you can compare the signal values You can load pre configured masks or define your own masks based on existing waveforms When you perform a test you can define which actions are to be taken upon violation of the mask limits Masks are displayed in the color used for reference waveforms User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 124 R amp S RTM20xx Masks Working with Masks 9 2 1 Creating New Masks You create a new mask based on a channel waveform then optimize it by changing its position and proportions and save it 1 Select and adjust the channel waveform that will be used as basis for the mask and run continuous acquisition N Press TOOLS 3 Press Masks Tests The selected waveform is displayed wi
526. t tis Dti e eH Re o C cena Seege 394 SE EE 394 BUS lt b gt I2C FRAMe lt n gt ACOMplete cicoronarisi ii ida 395 BUS b I2G FRAMe n ADBStart enitn eec eee rae te tegi de i EE He see aie tenera etudes 395 BUS lt b gt I2C FRAMe lt n gt ADDRess 395 LK EE 396 BUSsb I2C FRAMesn AMQODSO iere ter erit reet ai eria nean densa te de ree patente 396 BUS lt b gt 2C FRAM6sn gt AS Tant scsi css 396 BUSsb I2G FRAMesn BOQuUht rrr te en 397 BUS lt gt l2C FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt 0 gt ACCESS nnne nnnm 397 BUS lt b gt 12C FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt o gt ACKStart BUS lt b gt 12C FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt o gt COMPlete BUS b I2C FRAMe n BYTE o STAR U eese eene nn nnne enne rre nnn inneren 398 BUG b I2CFRAMe cn BT MAL ue 398 e ER E NEE 392 BUS lt b gt E e EE RE 393 BUS lt b gt I2C FRAMe lt n gt STATus BUS lt b gt Ries Ie d 394 BUS lt b gt LIN BI RAG m 423 BUSsb LINIDATACSOURUCG rire t et demittere esae 422 BUS lt bD gt LIN eru 426 SE ln RO TE 430 BUS lt b gt LIN FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt o gt STATe BUSG bh UINERAMe cn ByT zosc MAL ue 431 B Ssbs EIN ERAMesns ENK 428 BUS lt b gt LIN FRAMG lt n gt CSV lueden oa 428 LS EE lr Ree TR E NEE 426 BUSsb EIN FRAMesn IDPVal g iioi teret rect a deeg e rete 428 BUS lt b gt LIN FRAMe lt n gt IDSTate BUSsb EIN ERAMesn IDValUe ioi ote
527. t2 Set the lower and upper time limits defining the time range if Inside or Outside is set for comparison Time t and Variation are adjusted accordingly Find level Sets the trigger level automatically to 0 5 MaxPeak MinPeak 3 3 2 5 Video The video or TV trigger is used to analyze analog baseband video signals You can trigger on baseband video signals from standard definition and high definition standards The trigger level is determined and set automatically by the instrument First select the standard and the signal polarity then decide to trigger on lines or fields and enter the specific settings Standard Signal Trigger On Frame Back msc Sal Ea rene Oe S y N Most video signals have an output impedance of 75 Q The channel inputs of the R amp S RTM have an input impedance of 50 Q or 1 MQ Make sure to provide the adequate matching to ensure amplitude fidelity A simple 75 Q feed through termination combined with 1 MQ oscilloscope inputs is suitable for most applications Ener EE 46 eur EE 47 TAG GS E 47 WEE EEN 47 PAW Biet 47 AEE ee EEN 48 Standard Selects the color television standard _L_______SS lt A User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 46 R amp S RTM20xx Triggers EENEG Reference for Triggers You can trigger on various SDTV signals like PAL PAL M SECAM NTSC and SDTV 576i PAL and SECAM HDTV standards are indicated by the number of active lines and the scanning system p for p
528. tal ocoooconncccccccnnccocccconanacccnncnnnanccnnnnnnno Scale vertical vitrinas Copy Channel Coria eroe rot Cursor Trigger SOURCE uenire enti rero terere Y 44 Create directory lem E 445 Lol Cy 222 E le e 78 87 Crosshairs GISPIAVING E 55 e 123 227 Cursor Activating EE 83 COMMGUNMG WEE 81 FFT a measurements ceneeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeteeeaaee 78 measurements on FFT sse 115 measurement type D POSMIONING vir naaa E iad NEn AENT POSION TE remote Gs ET Remote control i ire eere Set TO ciere REM Set to Wave SQUICO cece AEE T Track Scaling itte itt tens Cursor measurements GT ue EE 82 D Data2Clock SL le EE 142 Data SDA I C E Dater AE 236 DCE RT 250 Decimal Point Cc 108 Decimation rr 14 Decimation Mode ve A Re Decoding format core te ore ea aa ee DER me 255 Defaults Gursor display scene xe rtt rere rte 61 Default values Jue m 276 Delay measurement coccccccnnccccccnccnononancnannnnnncncnncnannnnns 87 97 TEE ones nates tate totes 31 Destination EN 223 Device settings IMPO E en 218 Device Settings er tenete Roper EE 225 Menu m Cre caida desir nutes neatesb M 225 Saving and loading esee 225 softkey Ss Device specific commands sse 249
529. tatus of one or several devices in a measuring system To do this and react appropriately the controller must receive and evaluate the information of all devices The following standard methods are used e Service request SRQ initiated by the instrument e Serial poll of all devices in the bus system initiated by the controller in order to find out who sent a SRQ and why e Parallel poll of all devices e Query of a specific instrument status by means of commands e Query of the error queue Service Request Under certain circumstances the instrument can send a service request SRQ to the controller Usually this service request initiates an interrupt at the controller to which the control program can react appropriately As evident from figure 15 2 an SRQ is always initiated if one or several of bits 2 3 4 5 or 7 of the status byte are set and enabled in the SRE Each of these bits combines the information of a further register the error queue or the output buffer The ENAB1e parts of the status registers can be set such that arbitrary bits in an arbitrary status register initiate an SRQ In order to make use of the possibilities of the service request effectively all bits should be set to 1 in enable registers SRE and ESE The SRQ is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own Each controller program should cause the instrument to initiate a service request if errors occur The program should react appro
530. te Control eee AAA A A Command Reference 15 2 12 2 Edge Search Configuration SEARE TRIGO EDGE SLOPE uoo ias 362 Ee RER ME 362 SEARGch TRiGgern EDGE LEVE DEL KT 362 SEARch TRIGger EDGE SLOPe Slope Sets the slope to be found Parameters Slope POSitive NEGative EITHer RST POS Firmware Software FW 03 400 SEARch TRIGger EDGE LEVel Level Sets the voltage level for the edge search Parameters Level RST 0 6V Firmware Software FW 03 400 SEARch TRIGger EDGE LEVel DELTa lt DeltaLevel gt Sets a hysteresis range above and below the search level to avoid unwanted search results caused by noise oscillation around the level Parameters DeltaLevel Range Lower limit depends on vertical scale and other set tings no upper limit RST 0 2V Firmware Software FW 03 400 15 2 12 3 Width Search Configuration SBARsh TRIGSger WIDTISPOLarily 22 ere eec e atra p redeo Renta td ace ROSE ba toc Rae rta cdd adn s 362 SEARch TEIGgerWIDThIIbEV6l ooo reri ote ce etre reno Does eene eoe iret Dore Pe ec 363 SEARscl TRIGSgerMIDTBIEEVeL DELTa 2 5 iod ora aaa aa aaa Eaa 363 SGEARch TRilGoer WID ThRANGe eene enne en nnns nsns rn nn nn 363 SEARCH TRIGGER WIDTRIWID e DEE 364 SEARCH TRIGG Tee DELTA EE 364 SEARch TRIGger WIDTh POLarity lt Polarity gt Indicates the polarity of the pulse to be searched for User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 362 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control m
531. ten in the entry line and you can modify it The maximum name length is 8 characters and only ASCII characters provided on the on screen keyboard can be used Remote command CHANnel m LABel on page 292 R amp S RTM20xx Triggers Basics of Triggering 3 Triggers 3 1 Basics of Triggering Triggering means to capture the interesting part of the relevant waveforms Choosing the right trigger type and configuring all trigger settings correctly allows you to detect various incidents in analog digital and logic signals Trigger A trigger occurs if the complete set of trigger conditions is satisfied simultaneously It establishes the time zero point in the waveform record The instrument acquires contin uously and keeps the sample points to fill the pretrigger part of the waveform record When the trigger occurs the instrument continues acquisition until the posttrigger part of the waveform record is filled Then it stops acquiring and displays the waveform When a trigger is recognized the the instrument will not accept another trigger until the acqui sition is complete Trigger conditions A simple set of trigger conditions includes e Source of the trigger signal e Trigger type and and its setup e Horizontal position of the trigger trigger position and reference point e Trigger mode The R amp S RTM provides various trigger types for troubleshooting and signal analysis for example edge trigger width trigger pa
532. teps from 2048 211 to 65536 219 Remote command CALCulate MATH m FFT BANDwidth RESolution RATio on page 351 Y t Setup Defines the settings for the signal vs time window E Ies puse erm uuum C Y Scale Scale Y Position Position Main Time Base a Offset Show Channels RA Y Scale Y t Setup Changes the vertical scaling of the Y t window channel scaling Note If the Y t window is selected indicated by a white border the Y Scale can be adjusted using the vertical SCALE rotary knob See SCALE Y Scale on page 29 Remote command CHANnel lt m gt SCALe on page 289 Y Position Y t Setup Defines the vertical position of the time axis in the Y t window in divisions Note If the Y t window is selected indicated by a white border the Y Position can be adjusted using the vertical POSITION rotary knob Remote command CHANnel lt m gt POSition on page 290 Main Time Base Y t Setup Defines the scaling for the time base in the original Y t window in seconds per division The scaling is indicated by TB in the information bar above the window p e User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 120 R amp S RTM20xx FFT Reference for FFT key Note If Time Control is selected the main time base can be adjusted using the hori zontal SCALE rotary knob See als
533. ter The way of data conversion is described in chapter 15 3 1 2 Reading Waveform Data in Unsigned Integer Format on page 458 32 bit data is relevant for average waveforms if averaging 512 or 1024 waveforms The resulting data is 17 bits long 512 wave forms or 18 bit 1024 waveforms RST ASC User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 278 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control Command Reference lt Accuracy gt 0 8 16 32 Length of a data value in bit 0 for ASC only 32 for REAL 8 16 32 for UINT RST 0 Example Set the ASCII data format FORM ASC Example Query for data format FORM gt ASC 0 Example Set the unsigned integer format 16 bit data length FORM UINT 16 FORMat BORDer lt ByteOrder gt Defines the byte order for binary data export if FORMat DATA is set to REAL or UINT 16 32 Parameters lt ByteOrder gt MSBFirst LSBFirst MSBFirst Big endian most significant byte first LSBFirst Little endian least significant byte first RST MSBF Example See chapter 15 3 1 1 Reading Waveform Data from Memory on page 458 ByteOrder 8 bit 16 bit 32 bit MSBF Oxab OxAB CD OxAB CD 00 00 LSBF not relevant OxCD AB 0x00 00 CD AB CHANnel lt m gt DATA XORigin CHANnel lt m gt DATA ENVelope XORigin CALCulate MATH lt m gt DATA XORigin REFCurve lt m gt DATA XORigin Return the time of the first sample of the indicated waveform The commands are relevant for data
534. ter the State of this bit 0 1 or X don t care Repeat these settings until all bit states of all symbols are defined Offset 1st Symbol Symbol 2 7 Symb Trigger Trigger Idle Time Source RX CH1 1 4 V Active High TX CH2 1 4 V Active High Bit rate 9 6kBit s Idle Time 104 16 us Trigger On Pattern 11011110 11111010 0x7B Ox5F 11 4 3 2 UART Trigger Settings The complete UART trigger is configured in the Source and Setup menus Trigger Type Setup Source Protocol UART 4 4 K keen ec o Triggers are only available if Decode is enabled e UART Trigger SOUECQ uieicee cese ree rre tallada rune ERR 181 e UART THgger Sel p uuoseniiiant eerie ERER avv EENEG 181 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 180 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis UART RS 232 Interface Option R amp S RTM K2 UART Trigger Source Access TRIGGER SETUP gt Trigger Type Protocol UART gt Source Source RX TX Select one of the lines as trigger source Remote command TRIGger A SOURce UART on page 402 UART Trigger Setup Access TRIGGER SETUP gt Trigger Type Protocol UART gt Setup A EET 181 Frame DAM dd cid 182 EES EE 182 ue 182 PRAT y DEEN 182 o A 182 EE 182 L Selget E 182 A 182 EE 183 Edge 183 PAINE ETO m T 183 Fame ENO EEN 183 EREE E ia idad 183 Start Bit Triggers on a start bit The start bit is the first logic
535. tering the numeric identifier User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 170 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis DC Option R amp S RTM K1 Read Write Master orae ID ss Length Slave Address Remote command TRIGger A I2C PATTern on page 391 PATTern Master Read Write Toggles the trigger condition between Read and Write access of the master The R W bit is 8th bit of the first address byte of a frame The selected condition is displayed in the 12C Settings Trigger On Remote command TRIGger A I2C ACCess on page 390 Symbolic ID Read Write If a label list with node names was loaded and applied in the bus configuration you can select simply the node name from the list instead of entering the numeric identifier The instrument trriggers on the identifier of the selected node Address Length Read Write Toggles the lenght of the slave address 7 bit or 10 bit Remote command TRIGger A I2C AMODe on page 390 Slave Address Read Write Sets the address of the slave device in hex You can set a precise address or trigger on any address with OxXX 7Bit address or OxXXX 10Bit address X cannot be assigned to a specified bit Remote command TRIGger A I2C ADDRess on page 391 Data Setup Read Write Opens a submenu to set the trigger on specified data bytes of the message and or to a serial pattern Re Data Setup Offset Remote command TRIGger A 12C PATTern on page 391 ET User Manua
536. tern trigger TRIGger EXTern COUPling lt ExternCoupling gt Sets the coupling for the external trigger input The command is relevant if TRIGger B SOURce is set to EXTernanalog Parameters lt ExternCoupling gt AC DC RST AC TRIGger A TYPE Type Sets the trigger type for the A trigger Parameters Type EDGE WIDTh TV BUS LOGic EDGE edge trigger WIDTh width trigger TV video trigger BUS only available if at least one option R amp S RTM K1 or R amp S RTM K2 is installed LOGic pattern trigger logic trigger See chapter 11 Protocol Analysis on page 148 E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 303 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control gee ew AAA A A Command Reference TRIGger A HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt Sets a hysteresis range around the trigger level of the A trigger event If the signal jitters inside this range and crosses the trigger level thereby no trigger event occurs Hysteresis is available for edge and width trigger Parameters lt Hysteresis gt AUTO SMALI MEDium LARGE RST AUTO TRIGger A HOLDoff MODE lt HoldOffMode gt Enables or disables the holdoff time Parameters lt HoldOffMode gt TIME OFF RST Off TRIGger A HOLDoff TIME lt HoldOffTime gt Defines the holdoff time The next trigger occurs only after the holdoff time has passed Parameters lt HoldOffTime gt Default unit s 15 2 5 2 Edge Trigger TRIGSer EDGE AE 304 TRIGGER ALE DGS COUP ii
537. teueuteucateueeseueseeueseeeegeteeetenautenens 412 BUSSbB CAN FRAMe S gt S TOP EE 413 BUS D CAN FRAM MDATA EE 413 BUS bhsCANERAMe nz ACk tate nest stesetssa senses isse sensa aad 413 BUS sb oOANIFRAMesmsACKWValti 9 EE 414 BUSSBCANIERAMesneOSSTated ace a ita 414 BUS b CAN FRAMesn GSValue acca cannnccncuacd ecards nnccwedcdeaderadadcddcnaseacsdeucddanadcoadcacdecans 414 BUSsb CANIERAMesmtDEGStat 2 coii ieesesec eese en etas eset exu aete duse cia ha dara and 414 BUSsb CANIFRAMesmns DEbCGVAluB iiie teilte dena co Rie a aa A Db dene eR PR aaah 415 SUE E EE 415 DUlS cbsCANFRAMe nz ID Tvpe eee ee teeeeee eee ee saad nena naar nsns en erret nn nd 415 BUSsb CANIFRAMesnm IDVallle ncetdicensscdiecesndasdaccananedecacandeadiceeaastdgancastandacdennaa 416 BUSspPSsCANTERAMeSDSIBSEPOSITUODT EE 416 Ee E E EE Ce e TE 416 BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt BYTESO gt STATO O ese nssensssa sisse sides sss a ad 417 BUS lt b gt CANIFRAMe lt n gt BY TEso VALUG 2 ntn cite erano adco denn sa nau d deis 417 BUS lt b gt CAN FCOunt Returns the number of received frames Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Return values lt FrameCount gt Total number of decoded frames Usage Query only BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt TYPE Returns the type of the specified frame Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus n Selects the frame 1 n R amp S RTM20xx Remote C
538. th its envelope other waveforms are switched off in masks mode 4 Press New Mask 5 Press Copy Channel to create the new mask The mask is created from the envelope and displayed in the color used for reference waveforms TB 20ns_ T 0s Auto CH1 1 88 A DC Envelope ll EEN wis ER Nate el ar TS Passed 0 oe SC Y Position Stretch Y Width Y Width X 3 8800 C Ces H an am 6 To change the width of the waveform in vertical direction press Width Y and turn the Navigation rotary knob User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 125 R amp S9RTM20xx TB 20ns T 0s Masks Working with Masks The specified factor in divisions is added to the y values of the upper mask limit and subtracted from the y values of the lower mask limit Thus the upper half ofthe mask is pulled upwards the lower half is pulled down Similarly to change the width of the waveform in horizontal direction press Width X and turn the Navigation rotary knob The left half of the mask is pulled to the left the right half is pulled to the right Auto CH1 1 88 V 4 DC CEET Envelope Run 8 10 Total 0 0 Lj Width Y To move the mask vertically on the screen press Y Position and turn the Naviga tion rotary knob to change the y position The current position is indicated as an offset from the center in divisions a positive value indicates the waveform was
539. the byte number Return values lt ByteValue gt Decimal value Range 0 to 255 Increment 1 Example BUS 12C FRAM2 BYTE2 VAL gt 158 Usage Query only 15 2 13 5 UART The Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter UART converts a word of data into serial data and vice versa The UART protocol requires two bus lines bus 1 and 2 or bus 3 and 4 so the number of buses suffix lt b gt is reduced Bus 2 and or bus 4 is not available E Ee Oe E E 399 e VART EN EE 402 e UART Decode Results coin 404 UART Configuration BUS lt gt UART DATA SOURGO ete narru ara a ka axe dali 399 BUS Ee Ei 400 BUS lt gt UART DATA POLAM EE 400 BUS SDS UAR T SS Ennai i i ai id AR a SEENEN AE 400 BUS lt b gt VART PARV e erdina a dad 401 BUS DAVAR TR EEN 401 BUS lt b gt VART BAUDA orian ad EE ee 401 BUS gt CR NEE 402 CHANnel ms THReshold FINDlevel 21 natat nnana aa aaa 402 BUS lt b gt UART DATA SOURce lt Source gt Selects the input channel of the data line Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Note SPI SSPI and UART protocols occupy two bus lines User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 399 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control es ee HHspnn Command Reference Parameters lt Source gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CHA DO D15 CH3 and CH4 are only available with 4 channel R amp S RTM oscil loscopes RST CH1 BUS lt b gt UART POLarity lt IdleState gt Defines the logic levels of the bus The idle
540. the channel cursor of the active channel A channel cursor is a line that marks the ground level of a channel This line is displayed temporarily if the y scaling is modified and fades out automatically If a DC offset is defined a second auxiliary line is displayed The distance between those two lines is the DC offset User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 60 R amp S RTM20xx Display XY Diagram Trigger Hyst Aux Cursors Shows or hides the hysteresis range around the trigger level when the trigger level or the hysteresis are changed Hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level See also Hysteresis A B on page 44 Defaults Aux Cursors Restores the default cursor settings i e both auxiliary cursors are displayed Grid Defines how the grid is displayed Lines Displays the grid as horizontal and vertical lines Reticle Displays crosshairs instead of a grid Off Removes the grid from the display Remote command DISPlay GRID STYLe on page 319 VirtualScreen Enables or disables the virtual screen If enabled the virtual screen has 20 divisions 8 of them are displayed To select the divisions to be displayed press and turn the Intensity Virtual screen knob at the left of the screen If disabled only 8 divisions are available and all divisions are displayed Remote command DISPlay VSCReen ENABle on page 319 DISPlay VSCReen POSition on p
541. the cursors to obtain the required results See also To change the position of the cursors on page 82 The cursor measurement is performed and the results are displayed in the result table To change the position of the cursors The cursor measurement displays the results depending on the current position of the cursors Move the cursors to obtain the results for a specific time range or at specific signal points 1 Press the NAVIGATION rotary knob to select the first cursor If a selection menu is open it is closed Tip If the cursors have disappeared from the screen or must be moved extensively within the screen press Set To Screen in the Cursor menu to reset the cursors to their default positions Turn the NAVIGATION knob to change the position of the selected cursor line Press the knob again to select the next cursor line and turn to adjust position To simplify the cursor positioning the following functions are helpful e Track Scaling to adjust the cursor position when the vertical or horizontal scaling are changed e Coupling to keep the distance between two cursor lines constant while one of the cursors is moved e Set to Wave to set the cursor lines to typical points of the waveform based on automatic measurements in the background See also chapter 6 1 3 Cursor Menu on page 82 The results of the cursor measurement in the result table are updated To deactivate cursor measurements 1 2 P
542. the frame 1 n Return values ChecksumValue Decimal value Usage Query only BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt DLCState Returns the state of the data length code LEE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 414 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control EELENMNLUGCCMMRAMGN gasnn Command Reference Suffix b 1 4 Selects the bus lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt DLCState gt OK UNDF UNDF Undefined Usage Query only BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt DLCValue Returns the number of data bytes in the specified frame Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus n x Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt DLCValue gt non negative integer Usage Query only BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt IDSTate Returns the state of the identifier Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt IdentifierState gt OK UNDF UNDF Undefined Usage Query only BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt IDTYpe Returns the length of the identifier 11 bit for CAN base frames or 29 bits for CAN exten ded frames Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus T User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 415 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control EELENMNLUGCCMMRAMGN
543. the front panel until Norm is shown in the information bar 3 2 2 Positioning the Trigger By positioning the trigger you define which part of the waveform is displayed mainly the pretrigger part or the posttrigger part or the part around the trigger point Therefore you set the time reference also known as reference point and the trigger position in relation to the time reference To set the time reference point a Press the SETUP key on the left of the display b Select Time Reference c Turn the navigation knob to move the reference point To set the trigger position turn the POSITION rotary knob in the HORIZONTAL func tional block 3 2 3 Setting Up a Trigger Sequence An A B trigger sequence consists of two edge triggers connected by a time delay or event count 1 Press the SETUP key in the TRIGGER functional block 2 Press the Trigger Type softkey and select Edge trigger 3 Select Setup configure the A trigger and select Back 4 Press the B Trigger softkey to enable the B trigger The LEVEL knob and SLOPE key on the front panel are automatically assigned to the B trigger You can change the assignment with the Trigger Level softkey in the Trigger menu 5 Press the B Setup softkey 6 Configure the B trigger Select B Source and Slope and turn the LEVEL rotary knob to adjust the B trigger level 7T Define the connection between the A and B triggers by doing one of the following
544. the operation is ongoing 4 Resettimeout to former value 5 Clear the error queue with SyStem ERRor to remove the 410 Query interrupted entries Using several threads in the controller application As an alternative provided the programming environment of the controller application supports threads separate threads can be used for the application GUI and for controlling the instrument s via SCPI A thread waiting for a OPC thus will not block the GUI or the communication with other instruments Status Reporting System The status reporting system stores all information on the current operating state of the instrument and on errors which have occurred This information is stored in the status registers and in the error queue Both can be queried via GPIB bus or LAN interface STATus commands p E _ User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 261 R amp S9RTM20xx Remote Control 15 1 6 1 Basics Structure of a SCPI Status Register Each standard SCPI register consists of 5 parts Each part has a width of 16 bits and has different functions The individual bits are independent of each other i e each hardware status is assigned a bit number which is valid for all five parts Bit 15 the most significant bit is set to zero for all parts Thus the contents of the register parts can be processed by the controller as positive integers States events or summary bits of other registers
545. the same time Or At least one of the channels must have the required state NAND Not and operator at least one of the channels does not have the required state NOR Not or operator none of the channels has the required state Remote command SEARch TRIGger PATTern FUNCtion on page 370 I User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 145 R amp S RTM20xx Search BREET Reference for Search Menu Comparison Sets the condition how the duration of a steady pattern is compared with the given limit s The three settings Width Variation and Comparison define the time range for keeping up the true result of the state pattern The same conditions as with width search are used see Comparison on page 138 Remote command SEARch TRIGger PATTern WIDTh RANGe on page 371 Width Sets the limit time of a steady pattern the nominal value for comparisons Remote command SEARch TRIGger PATTern WIDTh WIDTh on page 372 Variation Sets a range At to the reference Width if comparison is set to Equal or Not equal The instrument finds true results of the state pattern inside or outside the range width At Remote command SEARch TRIGger PATTern WIDTh DELTa on page 372 10 3 9 Gate Menu Access SEARCH MENU gt Gate The gate restricts the time base of the source waveform to be searched Display User ea Ss 400 ps 400 us Gate Defines the search area If the search is performed on a runni
546. the waveform you want to see around the trigger before or after the trigger E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 15 R amp S RTM20xx Acquisition and Waveform Setup Basics iT Resolution First waveform sample in record Trigger point y Horizontal acquisition window Trigger offset Time reference div 2 1 4 Probes A probe connects the signal source DUT to the oscilloscope and delivers the signal to be measured It is the essential first link in the measurement chain An ideal probe fulfills the following requirements e Safe and reliable contacts e Infinite bandwidth e The probe should not load the signal source and thus impact the circuit operation e The connection should not introduce or suppress signal components hum noise filter and thus degrade or distort the transferred signal In reality the probe can never be an ideal one it always affects the signal transmission and the signal source and thus the measured signal It depends on the frequency to be measured and on the signal source to determine the acceptable loading and to determine which kind of probe delivers good results The solution depends on the quantity to be measured with respect to e Signal type voltage current power pressure optical etc e Signal amplitude The oscilloscope itself can only display voltages in a limited range Most probes can adjust the dynamic range to amplitudes from a few mV to 10
547. ther the screen is refreshed continuously Parameters lt State gt ON OFF ON The waveform persists for the time defined using DISPlay PERSistence TIME OFF The waveform does not persist on the screen Only the currently measured values are displayed at any time RST OFF DISPlay PERSistence TIME lt Time gt Persistence time if persistence is active see DISPlay PERSistence STATe on page 318 Each new data point in the diagram area remains on the screen for the duration defined here To set infinite persistence use DISPlay PERSistence INFinite Parameters Time Range 5 00E 002 to Infinite Increment minimum 50E 3 s increasing increment with increas ing persistence time RST 5 00E 002 Default unit s DISPlay PERSistence INFinite lt InfPersistence gt Sets the persistence time to infinite if DISPlay PERSistence STATe is ON each new data point remains on the screen infinitely until this setting is changed or the persistence is cleared Parameters lt InfPersistence gt ON OFF RST OFF DISPlay PERSistence TIME AUTO lt Auto gt The optimal persistence time is determined automatically by the instrument Parameters lt Auto gt ON OFF RST OFF EE User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 318 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control Command Reference DISPlay PERSistence CLEar Removes the displayed persistent waveform from the screen Usage Event Waveform Auxilary Cursors a
548. til the XY mode is selected User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 62 R amp S9RTM20xx Display XY Diagram To configure an XY diagram Prerequisite The Display Mode is set to XY 1 Select DISPLAY XYZ Setup Source X to define the signal to be used as the x axis source Press Source X repeatedly until the required channel is highlighted Select DISPLAY gt XYZ Setup gt Source Y1 to define the signal to be used as the first y axis source Press Source Y1 repeatedly until the required channel is high lighted Optionally select DISPLAY XYZ Setup Source Y2 to define the signal to be used as a second y axis source Press Source Y2 repeatedly until the required channel is highlighted The XY diagram is displayed in the main window and additional windows are opened to display the X Y1 Y2 and Z time diagrams if the source is defined 4 2 1 2 Configuring the Intensity of an XY Waveform You can define the intensity of the XY diagram as a constant value or according to the amplitude of a further signal source Z Constant intensity To configure the intensity of an XY waveform at a defined level The waveform intensity is modulated dynamically according to the signal source Z The higher the signal level Z is the stronger the waveform is displayed To configure the intensity of an XY waveform modulated by a signal amplitude The waveform intensity is defined by a threshold value If the Z signa
549. tinados al uso en entornos industriales Estos aparatos pueden causar perturbaciones radioel ctricas en entornos residenciales debido a posibles perturbaciones guiadas o radiadas En este caso se le podr solicitar al operador que tome las medidas adecuadas para eliminar estas perturbaciones A Aparato de clase B Aparato adecuado para su uso en entornos residenciales as como en aquellos conectados directamente a una red de distribuci n de baja tensi n que suministra corriente a edificios residenciales 1171 0000 42 07 Page 12 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Reparacion y mantenimiento 1 El producto solamente debe ser abierto por personal especializado con autorizaci n para ello Antes de manipular el producto o abrirlo es obligatorio desconectarlo de la tensi n de alimentaci n para evitar toda posibilidad de choque el ctrico El ajuste el cambio de partes el mantenimiento y la reparaci n deber n ser efectuadas solamente por electricistas autorizados por Rohde amp Schwarz Si se reponen partes con importancia para los aspectos de seguridad p ej el enchufe los transformadores o los fusibles solamente podr n ser sustituidos por partes originales Despu s de cada cambio de partes relevantes para la seguridad deber realizarse un control de seguridad control a primera vista control del conductor de protecci n medici n de resistencia de aislamiento medici n de la corriente de fuga control de funcio
550. tion knob to scroll through the directories To change the directory scroll to the name of the directory and press the knob or press Change dir 4 Press Create dir to create a new subdirectory under the selected directory Enter a name for the subdirectory as described in To define a new file or directory name on page 218 5 Press Remove dir to remove a directory that you no longer need 6 Press Accept to confirm the selected storage directory To define a new file or directory name When you create a new directory or press File name to define the name of the storage file a text editor is displayed in which you can enter the new name 1 Use the Navigate knob to select a character 2 Press Character Set if available to display additional characters 3 Press Backspace to delete the character to the left of the cursor 4 Press the Cursor gt and Cursor softkeys to scroll through the characters of the name a Press Default name to restore the default name 6 Press Accept to save the defined name Importing and Exporting Data To copy data from one storage device to another the Import Export functions are used The procedures is the same for all data types SS UU AAA 2 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 218 R amp S9RTM20xx Data and File Management Saving and Loading The name ofthe target file can be changed so you can copy and rename in one operation For references and masks you
551. tions must be observed Also observe the relevant safety instructions in the product documentation The improper disposal of hazardous substances or fuels can cause health problems and lead to environmental damage For additional information about environmental protection visit the Rohde amp Schwarz website Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Es imprescindible leer y cumplir las siguientes instrucciones e informaciones de seguridad El principio del grupo de empresas Rohde amp Schwarz consiste en tener nuestros productos siempre al d a con los est ndares de seguridad y de ofrecer a nuestros clientes el m ximo grado de seguridad Nuestros productos y todos los equipos adicionales son siempre fabricados y examinados seg n las normas de seguridad vigentes Nuestro sistema de garant a de calidad controla constantemente que sean cumplidas estas normas El presente producto ha sido fabricado y examinado seg n el certificado de conformidad de la UE y ha salido de nuestra planta en estado impecable seg n los est ndares t cnicos de seguridad Para poder preservar este estado y garantizar un funcionamiento libre de peligros el usuario deber atenerse a todas las indicaciones informaciones de seguridad y notas de alerta El grupo de empresas Rohde amp Schwarz est siempre a su disposici n en caso de que tengan preguntas referentes a estas informaciones de seguridad Adem s queda en la responsabilidad del usuario utilizar el producto
552. toggle the setting 2 Press the RUN CONT key to start acquisition The acquisition starts if a trigger occurs 3 To stop press the RUN CONT key again The acquisition stops immediately To acquire a limited number of acquisitions 1 Press the ACQUISITION key in the HORIZONTAL area of the front panel 2 Select Nx Single and enter the number of acquisitions 3 Press the RUN Nx SINGLE key on the front panel You can stop the acquisition before it is finished by pressing the key again 2 3 Reference for Waveform Setup 2 3 1 HORIZONTAL Controls Time base settings adjust the display in horizontal direction Use the rotary knobs in the HORIZONTAL functional block for setting HORIZONTAL POSITION A User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 22 R amp S RTM20xx Acquisition and Waveform Setup Reference for Waveform Setup POSITION The rotary knob changes the trigger offset This is the horizontal position of the trigger point in relation to the reference point the zero point of the grid Thus you can set the trigger point even outside the diagram and analyze the signal some time before or after the trigger The reference point is set with SETUP gt Time Reference Turn clockwise to move the trigger point to the right At zero crossing the knob shortly snaps in and the setting is kept constant to simplify the zero setting The current trigger position is shown in the top information bar denoted by T Press the knob to reset
553. tor Each equation for a math waveform is configured and displayed individually and you can save and load the con figuration of all five math waveforms as an Equation Set 7 1 1 Displaying Mathematical Waveforms For each of the math waveforms MA1 MA4 you can define whether it is displayed or not and which equation is performed in each one MAS is always invisible 1 Press MATH to display the Mathematics menu 2 Press Equation and select the mathematical waveform that contains the equation you want to display To check which equation is configured for which channel a Press Edit Equations The Equation Set Editor is displayed where you can see the configuration for each math waveform Currently displayed waveforms are indicated by the zx symbol b Press Back to exit the editor 3 Press Visible until On is highlighted The selected equation is calculated and the results are displayed as an additional mathematical waveform on the screen If necessary change the vertical scaling of the math waveform to improve the display using the vertical SCALE rotary knob IECH User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 98 R amp S9RTM20xx Mathematics Configuring and Using Math Waveforms If the required equation is not included edit the current equation set or load an appro priate equation set that was saved before See also To configure an equation on page 99 and To load an equation set on page 101 Editing Equatio
554. ts Alternatively you can print screenshots to a printer See also chapter 13 1 Printing on page 215 If you want to save many screenshots together with the instrument or the image only you can assign the function to the PRINT key Infrequent save operations can be started from the File menu See also chapter 13 2 2 Quick Access with PRINT key on page 223 Saving a Screenshot Before you can save the screenshot you have to configure the storage location and file format 1 Press FILE Screenshots E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 230 R amp S9RTM20xx Data and File Management 13 2 5 2 Saving and Loading 2 Configure the storage location as described in To select the storage directory on page 218 3 Enter the file name as described in To define a new file or directory name on page 218 4 Select the Format and the Color mode For details see chapter 13 2 5 2 Screenshot Storage Settings on page 231 5 Press Save See also chapter 13 2 2 Quick Access with PRINT key on page 223 Screenshot Storage Settings With FILE gt Screenshots you open a menu to save or print screenshots of the current display FileName Name coe Format a oo Color Mode Mode ER MEA For a description ofthe common save functions Storage File Name and Save see chapter 13 2 1 3 General Storage Settings on page 220 Specific settings for saving screenshots are described below
555. ts the register to zero Return values lt Contents gt Range 0 to 255 Usage Query only IDN IDeNtification returns the instrument identification Return values ID Rohde amp Schwarz device type gt lt serial number gt lt firmware ver sion Example Rohde amp Schwarz RTO 1316 1000k14 200153 1 30 0 25 Usage Query only OPC OPeration Complete Sets bit 0 in the event status register when all preceding commands have been executed This bit can be used to initiate a service request The query form writes a 1 into the output buffer as soon as all preceding commands have been executed This is used for command synchronization OPT OPTion identification query Queries the options included in the instrument For a list of all available options and their description refer to the CD ROM Return values Options The query returns a list of options The options are returned at fixed positions in a comma separated string A zero is returned for options that are not installed I User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 275 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BEES Command Reference Usage Query only PSC lt Action gt Power on Status Clear Determines whether the contents of the ENAB1e registers are preserved or reset when the instrument is switched on Thus a service request can be triggered when the instru ment is switched on if the status registers ESE and SRE are suitably configured The query rea
556. ts product documentation and within its performance limits see data sheet documentation the following safety instructions Using the product requires technical skills and in some cases a basic knowledge of English It is therefore essential that only skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with the required skills be allowed to use the product If personal safety gear is required for using Rohde amp Schwarz products this will be indicated at the appropriate place in the product documentation Keep the basic safety instructions and the product documentation in a safe place and pass them on to the subsequent users Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by dangerous situations Therefore carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions before and when using the product It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety instructions on personal safety for example that appear in relevant parts of the product documentation In these safety instructions the word product refers to all merchandise sold and distributed by the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies including instruments systems and all accessories For product specific information see the data sheet and the product documentation Safety labels on products The following safety labels are used on products to warn against risks and dangers Symbol Meaning Symbol
557. ttern trigger and specific triggers like video and bus triggers More complex trigger conditions are also available you can setup a trigger sequence to join two edge triggers with an optional delay time or event count Similar setups are also known as multi step trigger or A B trigger Furthermore hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise Trigger event In particular for the A B trigger sequence it is important to distinguish between the trigger and the event An event is the fulfillment of the event conditions but an event may not be the trigger The trigger occurs only if the conditions of all events the A event and the B event in a trigger sequence and all further trigger conditions are all fulfilled Trigger information Information on the most important trigger settings are shown in the information bar The label shows e Trigger source and level e Trigger coupling and filters EN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 36 R amp S RTM20xx Triggers m A A Setting Up the Trigger e Trigger slope or other conditions specific for the selected trigger type TB 100 us T 261us Norm CH1 ti lt tL TL 1 71mV Fig 3 1 Trigger information Normal trigger mode trigger source is channel 1 width trigger to find negative pulses shorter than a given pulse width trigger level 1 71 mV TB 100us T 261us Norm A CH11 71mV 4 DCHFR B CH20V 4 2Ev Fig 3 2 Trigger information Normal trigger m
558. tup Automatic Default mode To display the best waveform the instrument selects the optimum combination of waveform acquisition rate and sample rate using the full memory depth maximum record length Set Rec The instrument acquires the signals at a sample rate that fills up an Length user defined record length which is defined using Record Length Remote command ACQuire WRATe on page 286 Record Length Sets the record length the number of recorded waveform points that build the waveform across the acquisition time The value is used if Waveform Rate is set to Set Rec Length Remote command ACQuire POINts VALue Roll Enables the roll mode The roll mode moves the captured input data on the display from the right to the left The instrument shows the waveform immediately without waiting for the complete acquisition of the waveform record The roll mode displays the untriggered signal Use the roll mode for slow non repetitive signals with 200 kHz or slower Remote command TIMebase ROLL ENABle on page 287 Sample Mode Defines how the waveform is created from the sample points which are acquired by the ADC Real Time At slow time base settings the oscilloscope can acquire enough points to create an accurate waveform so the sampled points of the input sig nal are used directly to build the waveform With fast time base settings the sample rate is higher than the ADC sample rate Waveform samples are a
559. turns the date in a string Usage Query only PROBe lt m gt ID SRNumber Queries the serial number of the probe Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Return values lt SerialNumber gt string Usage Query only PROBe lt m gt ID SWVersion Queries the version of the probe firmware Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Return values lt SoftwareVersion gt string Returns the version number in a string Usage Query only 15 2 5 Trigger e General A Trigger Setfirigs 2 oie cernere aee aed 302 e e NRI ML M 304 EMILE AP 305 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 301 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control 15 2 5 1 Command Reference Video TV TGS EE 307 e Patern Mig EE 308 e Rise time Fall Time Tpeergeg E 310 LE Mute Le EE 312 General A Trigger Settings TRAIGIS le EE 302 TRlGoer AL SAA tete eeesrsrstre ntn tttnrtrsrsnsnnentterororernsnnnneneteeorene 302 TRIGE O 302 RR See 303 TRIG Ger EX Tem ie Tei DEE 303 Uie bg C 303 TRIGA HYS TOOS ioci i e eve ie ee Moe a rr n re caen ee eat 304 TRIGSgerASJODDGIEMODE E 304 WRG ie ASO nnm Rm 304 TRIGger A MODE lt TriggerMode gt Sets the trigger mode The trigger mode determines the behaviour of the instrument if no trigger occurs
560. type to be searched for if SEARch PROToco1 CAN CONDition is set to IDENtifier Parameters lt FrameType gt DATA REMote ANY SEARch PROTocol CAN ITYPe Selects the length of the identifier 11 bit for CAN base frames or 29 bits for CAN exten ded frames The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol CAN CONDition is set to IDENtifier IDData or IDERror Parameters lt IdType gt B11 B29 RST B11 SEARch PROTocol CAN ICONdition lt IdCondition gt Sets the comparison condition for the identifier If the pattern contains at least one X don t care you can trigger on values equal or not equal to the specified value If the pattern contains only 0 and 1 you can also trigger on a range greater than or lower than the specified value The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol CAN CONDition is set to IDENtifier IDData or IDERror Parameters lt ldCondition gt EQUaI NEQual GTHan LTHan RST EQU SEARch PROTocol CAN IDENtifier Identifier Defines the identifier pattern The pattern length is defined with SEARch PROTocol CAN ITYPe N User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 420 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BREET Command Reference The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol CAN CONDition is set to IDENtifier IDData or IDERror Parameters lt Identifier gt String containing binary pattern with max 29 bit Characters 0 1 and X are allowed SEARch PROTocol C
561. ueried with the SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate NEXT command Return values lt PrinterName gt String parameter If no printer is configured an empty string is returned Usage Query only SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate NEXT Queries the name of the next printer installed The SySTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate FIRSt command should be sent previously to return to the beginning of the printer list and query the name of the first printer Return values lt PrinterName gt String parameter After all available printer names have been returned an empty string enclosed by quotation marks is returned for the next query Further queries are answered by a query error Usage Query only Saving and Loading Data MMEMory Commands The Mass MEMomory subsystem provides commands to access the storage media and to save and reload instrument settings and data EN User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 443 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BESSERES Command Reference The R amp S RTM has three storage devices indicated as drives e INT internal storage with default directories for each data type e USB_FRONT USB connector on the front panel e USB_REAR USB connector on the rear panel Common computer and network drives like C D server share are not available Name conventions The names of files and directories have to meet the following rules e Only the 8 3 format with ASCI characters is suppo
562. umeric values The texts listed below are interpreted as special numeric values In the case of a query the numeric value is provided e MIN MAX MINimum and MAXimum denote the minimum and maximum value Example Setting command SENSe LIST FREQ MAXimum Query SENS LIST FREQ Response 3 5E9 _ _L_L__L SS SSS User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 255 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control Basics Queries for special numeric values The numeric values associated to MAXimum MINimum can be queried by adding the corresponding mnemonics to the command They must be entered following the quota tion mark Example SENSe LIST FREQ MAXimum Returns the maximum numeric value as a result Boolean Parameters Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represented by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 The numeric values are provided as the response for a query Example Setting command HCOPy DEV COL ON Query HCOPy DEV COL Response 1 Text parameters Text parameters observe the syntactic rules for mnemonics i e they can be entered using a shortor long form Like any parameter they have to be separated from the header by a white space In the case of a query the short form of the text is provided Example Setting command HardCOPy PAGE ORIentation LANDscape Query HCOP P
563. upplies residential buildings Note Class A equipment is intended for use in an industrial environment This equipment may cause radio disturbances in residential environments due to possible conducted as well as radiated disturbances In this case the operator may be required to take appropriate measures to eliminate these disturbances Class B equipment Equipment suitable for use in residential environments and environments that are directly connected to a low voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings Repair and service 1 The product may be opened only by authorized specially trained personnel Before any work is performed on the product or before the product is opened it must be disconnected from the AC supply network Otherwise personnel will be exposed to the risk of an electric shock 1171 0000 42 07 Page 5 Basic Safety Instructions Adjustments replacement of parts maintenance and repair may be performed only by electrical experts authorized by Rohde amp Schwarz Only original parts may be used for replacing parts relevant to safety e g power switches power transformers fuses A safety test must always be performed after parts relevant to safety have been replaced visual inspection protective conductor test insulation resistance measurement leakage current measurement functional test This helps ensure the continued safety of the product Batteries and rechargeable batteries cells If the in
564. ured with FILE gt Screenshots See also chapter 13 2 5 2 Screenshot Storage Settings on page 231 AAA A User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 224 R amp S9RTM20xx Data and File Management 13 2 3 13 2 3 1 Saving and Loading Screen amp Setup If selected the device settings and a screenshot of the current display are stored when you press the PRINT key Storage settings are configured with FILE Screenshots and FILE gt Device Settings See also chapter 13 2 5 2 Screenshot Storage Settings on page 231 Print Screenshots If selected a screenshot of the current display is sent to the USB printer when you press the PRINT key Printer settings are configured with SETUP gt Printer See also chapter 13 1 Printing on page 215 Device Settings In order to repeat measurements at different times or perform similar measurements with different test data it is useful to save the used instrument settings and load them again later Furthermore it can be helpful to refer to the instrument settings of a particular measurement when analyzing the results Therefore functions are provided so you can easily save the instrument settings of a measurement with or without the corresponding screenshot The instrument settings can be saved to and loaded from any storage device internal memory or external USB flash device It is also possible to copy the stored settings to another storage device with Export Import
565. uridad elementales Waste disposal Environmental protection 1 Specially marked equipment has a battery or accumulator that must not be disposed of with unsorted municipal waste but must be collected separately It may only be disposed of at a suitable collection point or via a Rohde amp Schwarz customer service center 2 Waste electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed of with unsorted municipal waste but must be collected separately Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG has developed a disposal concept and takes full responsibility for take back obligations and disposal obligations for manufacturers within the EU Contact your Rohde amp Schwarz customer service center for environmentally responsible disposal of the product 3 If products or their components are mechanically and or thermally processed in a manner that goes beyond their intended use hazardous substances heavy metal dust such as lead beryllium nickel may be released For this reason the product may only be disassembled by specially trained personnel Improper disassembly may be hazardous to your health National waste disposal regulations must be observed 4 If handling the product releases hazardous substances or fuels that must be disposed of in a special way e g coolants or engine oils that must be replenished regularly the safety instructions of the manufacturer of the hazardous substances or fuels and the applicable regional waste disposal regula
566. us 4 is not available User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 421 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control i Ee ee A A Command Reference e LIN E on PE 422 e LIN TUQUel EA dEr 423 e LIN DECOdS Results re tenete eren ek cutee tue in dear 426 WINS SCAG MEER 431 LIN Configuration BUSP LIN DATA SOURCES EE 422 BUS E UN POLII EE 422 BUS lt gt LINES TANGGIG WEE 422 Bs SEKR 423 GHANnelsms THReshokbFEINENeVel 2 ratae ro era ia 423 BUS lt b gt LIN DATA SOURce Source Sets the source of the data line All channel waveforms can be used Suffix b 1 4 Selects the bus Parameters lt Source gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CHA DO D15 RST CH1 BUS lt b gt LIN POLarity lt Polarity gt Defines the idle state of the bus The idle state is the rezessive state and corresponds to a logic 1 Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus Parameters lt Polarity gt IDLHigh IDLLow IDLHigh Low active negative polarity IDLLow High active positive polarity RST IDLL BUS lt b gt LIN STANdard lt Standard gt Selects the version of the LIN standard that is used in the DUT The setting mainly defines the checksum version used during decoding The most common version is LIN 2 x For mixed networks or if the standard is unknown set the LIN standard to AUTO Suffix lt b gt 1 4 Selects the bus RERUM RU ER T A TE lt lt 5 User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 422 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control RRE
567. values according to the format settings the voltages of the envelope points The list contains two values for each sample interval Usage Query only CHANnel lt m gt DATA ENVelope HEADer Returns information on the envelope waveform Use this command only for envelope waveforms for all other channel waveforms use CHANnel m DATA HEADer User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 294 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control BEES Command Reference Table 15 13 Header data Position Meaning Example 1 XStart in s 9 477E 008 94 77 ns 2 XStop in s 9 477E 008 94 77 ns 3 Number of samples 200000 4 Number of values per sample interval For envelope 2 waveforms the value is 2 Suffix m Return values lt DataHeader gt Comma separated value list Example 9 477E 008 9 477E 008 200000 2 Usage Query only CHANnel lt m gt DATA POINts Points As a setting the command selects a range of samples that will be returned with CHANnel m DATA and CHANnel lt m gt DATA ENVelope As a query it returns the number of returned samples for the selected range If ACQuire WRATe is set to MSAMples maximum sample rate the memory usually contains more data samples than the screen can display In this case you can decide which data will be saved samples stored in the memory or only the displayed samples Note The sample range can be change only in STOP mode If the acquisition is running DE
568. veral spectrums is calculated The number of spectrums used for the averaging is defined using the command This mode is useful for noise rejection RST OFF CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT AVERage COUNt Defines the number of spectrums used for averaging if CALCulate MATH lt m gt ARIThmetics is set to AVERage Suffix lt m gt Parameters lt AverageCount gt 1 4 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Integer value Range 2 to 512 Increment 2 n RST 2 CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT MAGNitude SCALe Defines the scaling unit of the y axis To set the scale value use CALCulate MATH lt m gt SCALe Suffix lt m gt 1 4 The numeric suffix is irrelevant User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 350 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control RES Command Reference Parameters Magnitude Scale LINear DBM DBV LiNear linear scaling displays the RMS value of the voltage DBM logarithmic scaling related to 1 mW DBV logarithmic scaling related to 1 Veff RST DBM Example CALC MATH FFT MAGN SCAL DBM CALC MATH SCAL 20 Set the Y scale of the FFT window to 20 dBm CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT BANDwidth RESolution ADJusted Queries the effective resolution bandwidth Suffix lt m gt 1 4 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Return values lt AdjResBW gt Range Depends on various other settings Default unit Hz Usage Query only CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT BANDwidth RESolution AUTO lt SpanRBWCou
569. with REFLevel RELative LOWer REFLevel RELative MIDDle and REFLevel RELative UPPer RST TEN Example REFL REL MODE TWENty MEAS2 MAIN RTIM Sets the reference levels for all measurement places and meas ures the rise time between these levels for measurement place 2 lower reference level 20 of high signal level upper reference level 80 of high signal level REFLevel RELative LOWer lt LowerLevel gt REFLevel RELative UPPer lt UpperLevel gt Set the lower and upper reference levels for rise and fall time mesurements cursor and automatic mesurements if REFLevel RELative MODE is set to USER The levels are defined as percentages of the high signal level They are valid for all measurement pla ces Parameters lt LowerLevel gt RST 10 Default unit lt UpperLevel gt RST 90 Default unit Firmware Software 03 400 L User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 341 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control 15 2 8 5 Command Reference REFLevel RELative MIDDle lt MiddleLevel gt Set the middle reference level used for phase and delay measurements if REFLevel RELative MODE is set to USER The level is defined as percentages of the high signal level The setting is valid for all measurement places Parameters lt MiddleLevel gt RST 50 Default unit Firmware Software 03 400 Automatic Measurements Statistic MEAGurement mz STATsttceE
570. with max 64 bit Characters 0 1 and X are allowed Make sure to enter complete bytes 15 2 14 Mixed Signal Option MSO R amp S RTM B1 e Digital Channels a degen UR n Ui ERR Eege aia 435 e Parallel BUSES eros ioc reo a bea prse dedo dai 437 E B m User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 434 R amp S RTM20xx Remote Control 15 2 14 1 Command Reference Digital Channels DICHA EMS SPN AY ER c taa 435 DiGitalemi eelere 24 ciere e e aee cria see arri ee haee exe e Ree bna lae tone 435 o ene ER el p o o EC 435 DiGitalem THOOUpling 21i rcu zc coc co enero ere SEENEN RESEARCH 436 ele E E EE 436 ellen STE TEE 436 DIC MAIS e WOR ET 436 DiGitak LA BSS TA EE 437 nn dc cR 437 DIGital lt m gt DISPlay State Enables and displays the indicated digital channel or disables it Suffix lt m gt 0 15 Number of the digital channel Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF DIGital lt m gt TECHnology Selects the threshold voltage for various types of integrated circuits and applies it to the channel group to which the indicated digital channel belongs Suffix lt m gt 0 15 Number of the digital channel Channel groups 0 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 Parameters lt ThresholdMode gt TTL ECL CMOS MANual TTL 1 4 V ECL 1 3 V CMOS 2 5 V MANual Set a user defined threshold valu
571. with the housing floor facing down IP protection 2X use only indoors max operating altitude 2000 m above sea level max transport altitude 4500 m above sea level A tolerance of 10 shall apply to the nominal voltage and 5 to the nominal frequency overvoltage category 2 pollution severity 2 2 Do not place the product on surfaces vehicles cabinets or tables that for reasons of weight or stability are unsuitable for this purpose Always follow the manufacturer s installation instructions when installing the product and fastening it to objects or structures e g walls and shelves An installation that is not carried out as described in the product documentation could result in personal injury or even death 3 Do not place the product on heat generating devices such as radiators or fan heaters The ambient temperature must not exceed the maximum temperature specified in the product documentation or in the data sheet Product overheating can cause electric shock fire and or serious personal injury or even death Electrical safety If the information on electrical safety is not observed either at all or to the extent necessary electric shock fire and or serious personal injury or death may occur 1 Prior to switching on the product always ensure that the nominal voltage setting on the product matches the nominal voltage of the AC supply network If a different voltage is to be set the power fuse of the product may have to be chang
572. wo or three symbols at a defined position in the data stream Parity Error Frame Errror e Break 7 If Any Symbol is selected press the softkey again and define the symbol pattern either as binary input or as hexadecimal input N User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 179 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis s T 9 A UART RS 232 Interface Option R amp S RTM K2 e For hex entry select Value and turn the navigation knob to change the bits e For binary input press Select Bit and enter the data bit number to be set Enter the State of this bit O 1 or X don t care Repeat these settings until all bit states are defined 8 If Pattern is selected press the softkey again and define the pattern a Setthe Symbol Offset the number of symbols to be ignored before the pattern starts b Setthe Number of Symbols contained in the pattern c Enter the pattern either as binary input or as hexadecimal input e Forhexadecimal input press Select Symbol repeatedly to select the symbol to be set The selected symbol is highlighted in the hex pattern line Then press Value and turn the navigation knob to change the bits Repeat these settings until all symbols are defined e For binary input press Select Symbol until the required symbol is marked in the pattern hex line Then press Select Bit and enter the data bit number to be set En
573. y direction for comparison Remote command DISPlay MODE on page 314 XYZ Setup See chapter 4 2 2 XYZ Setup Menu on page 64 Intensities Provides functions to define the intensity of various display elements Intensities EE 2 e n n e n 7 m Waveform Backlight Grid Persistence Persist Time Clear Persist gt Waveform Intensities Waveform intensity determines the strength of the waveform lines in the diagram Enter a percentage between 0 barely visible and 100 very strong or press and turn the INTENSITY knob on the left side of the screen to adjust the waveform intensity directly The default value is 50 Remote command DISPlay INTensity WAVeform on page 317 Display Backlight Intensities Defines the intensity of the background lighting of the display in percent Enter a per centage between 10 and 100 The default value is 50 Remote command DISPlay INTensity BACKlight on page 317 ERA lt lt ALLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLULLU LLLIS SI User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 58 R amp S RTM20xx Display General Display Settings Grid lt Intensities Defines the intensity of the grid on the screen in percent Enter a percentage between O and 100 The default value is 34 Remote command DISPlay INTensity GRID on page 317 Persistence Intensities Defines the persistence of the waveform on the screen Off Deactivates persistence Automatic
574. yclic Redundance Check checksum State Overall state of the frame User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 193 R amp S RTM20xx Protocol Analysis CAN Option R amp S RTM K3 Remote commands e BUS lt b gt CAN FCOunt on page 411 BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt DATA on page 413 BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt STATus on page 412 BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt STARt on page 412 BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt STOP on page 413 BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt TYPE on page 411 BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt ACKState on page 413 BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt ACKValue on page 414 BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt CSSTate on page 414 BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt CSValue on page 414 BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt DLCState on page 414 BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt DLCValue on page 415 BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt IDSTate on page 415 BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt IDTYpe on page 415 BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt IDValue on page 416 BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt BSEPosition on page 416 BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt BCOunt on page 416 BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt o gt STATe on page 417 BUS lt b gt CAN FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt o gt VALue on page 417 11 5 5 Search on Decoded CAN Data Using the search functionality you can find various events in the decoded data the same events which you also can trigger on Bef
575. yzed One of the active channel math and reference waveforms can be searched Parameters lt SearchSource gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MA1 MA2 MA3 MA4 RE1 RE2 RE3 RE4 RST CH1 Example chapter 15 3 2 1 Searching for a Pulse of Specified Width on page 460 Firmware Software FW 03 400 SEARch GATE MODE Defines the search area If the search is performed on a running acquisition series the instrument analyzes the displayed data The search on a stopped acquisition analyzes the contents of the memory Parameters lt GateMode gt OFF DISPlay ABSolute OFF Running acquisition all waveform samples that are displayed on the screen Stopped acquisition all data samples that are stored in the mem ory DISPlay Search is restricted to the time range of the display ABSolute Search is restricted to the time range defined by SEARch GATE ABSolute START and SEARch GATE ABSolute STOP SEARch GATE ABSolute START lt StartTime gt Sets the start time of the search area in relation to the trigger point if SEARch GATE MODE on page 361 is set to ABSolute Parameters lt StartTime gt Default unit s SEARch GATE ABSolute STOP lt StopTime gt Sets the end time of the search area in relation to the trigger point if SEARch GATE MODE on page 361 is set to ABSolute Parameters lt StopTime gt Default unit s E User Manual 1317 4726 02 01 361 R amp S RTM20xx Remo

R&S RTM2 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S RTM2 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S RTM2 User Manual